SAVEETHA UNIVERSITY

(Established under section 3 of the UGC Act 1956 vide Notification No. F.9-3/2002-U.3 dated 18-03-2005 of the Government of India)

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY Curriculum and Syllabi FOR BE / BTech Degree Programme

REGULATIONS 2008 2009 162, Poonamalle High Road Chennai 600 077
Phone: 91-44-26801580 85 Fax: 91-44-26800892 Email: saveetha@vsnl.com website: www.saveetha.com

SAVEETHA UNIVERSITY
(Established under section 3 of the UGC Act 1956 vide Notification No. F.9-3/2002-U.3 dated 18-03-2005 of the Government of India)

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY

Curriculum and Syllabi

FOR

BE / BTech Degree Programme

Regulations 2008 - 2009

162, Poonamalle High Road Chennai 600 077

PHONE : 91-44-26801580 85 FAX : 91-44-26800892 Email : saveetha@vsnl.com website : www.saveetha.com

CONTENTS

Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.

Page

Notification 3 Short Title and Commencement 3 Preliminary Definition and Nomenclature 3 Branches of Study 3 Eligibility for Admission 4 Eligibility Certificate 5 Registration 5 Structure of the Programme 5 Duration of the Programme 6 Faculty Adviser 7 Class Committee 7 Course Committee on Common Subjects 9 Scheme of Examination 9 Procedure for Awarding Marks for Internal Assessment 10 Requirements for Completion of Semester / Year 12 Requirement for Appearing for Semester / Annual Examination 13 Passing Requirements 13 Issue of Mark Sheets 13 Eligibility for the Award of the Degree 14 Classification for the Award of the Degree 14 Temporary Break of Study from a Programme 15 Personality and Character Development 15 Discipline 16 Revision of Regulation and Curriculum 16 Annexure A

1. Notification In exercise of the powers conferred by the section 3 of the University Grants Commission Act, 1956 (3 of 1956), the Government of India, on the advice of the University Grants Commission, hereby declares the Saveetha Institute of Medical and Technical Sciences (SIMATS), Chennai as Deemed to be University with effect from 18th March 2005 subject to the condition that the institute will adhere to the guidelines / instructions issued by the UGC and other concerned statutory bodies from time to time as applicable to the Deemed Universities. In pursuance of the Notification of UGC, the nomenclature of SIMATS has been changed to Saveetha University. 2. Short Title and Commencement These Regulations shall be called The Regulations 2008 -2009 for the BE / B Tech Degree of Saveetha University The Regulations and Syllabi framed are subject to modifications from time to time by the Board of Management and the Academic Council. 3. Preliminary Definitions and Nomenclature In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires: i. ii. iii. iv. v. Programme means Degree Programme, that is B.E./B.Tech. Degree Programme. Branch means specialization or discipline of B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme like Computer Science and Engineering etc. Course means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, like Mathematics, Physics, etc. College means College of Engineering and Technology University means Saveetha University

4. Branches of Study A candidate may be offered one of the following branches of study B.E. Degree i. ii. iii. B.E. Computer Science and Engineering B.E. Electronics and Communication Engineering B.E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering

B.Tech. Degree i. B.Tech. Information Technology

5. Eligibility for Admission 5.1 Candidates seeking admission to the first year of the four year (one year and six semester) B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme: Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of (10 +2) Curriculum (Academic Stream) prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of study under Part-III or any examination of any other University or authority accepted by the Academic Council and the Board of Management of the University as equivalent thereto. OR Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational stream (Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu or any authority accepted by the Academic Council and the Board of Management. OR Should possess the Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by the State Board of Technical Education, Tamil Nadu or any other authority accepted by the Academic Council and the Board of Management of the University as equivalent thereto. 5.2 The candidates who possess the Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, are eligible for admission to the third semester (second year) of the B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programme through lateral entry system. 5.3 Notwithstanding the qualifying examination the candidate might have passed, the candidate shall also write an entrance examination designed to test the proficiency of the candidate in Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry with standards prescribed for plus two academic stream of the Tamil Nadu Board of Higher Secondary Education.

5.4 The eligibility criteria such as marks, number of attempts and physical fitness and the mode of admission shall be as prescribed by the Academic Council and the Board of Management of the University from time to time. 5.5 The candidate shall not have completed 21 years of age as on first of July of the year of application. For candidates belonging to SC/ST, the age limit is relaxable upwards by 3 years. 5.6 The candidate for the lateral entry in the second year shall not have completed 22 years of age as on first of July of the year of application. For candidates belonging to SC/ST, the age limit is relaxable upwards by 3 years. 5.7 The Board of Management reserves the right to relax the upper age limit for deserving candidates. 6. Eligibility Certificate Candidates who are not covered by 10 + 2 pattern of Examination shall obtain an Eligibility Certificate from this University 7. Registration A candidate admitted into BE / BTech Degree programme in the Saveetha University shall register with the University by remitting the prescribed fee along with the application form for registration duly filled in 8. Structure of Prgramme 8.1 Every Programme shall have a curriculum comprising of both theory and theory cum practical courses with well defined syllabi. The courses shall cover a. General (5 10 %) It is desirable to include subjects like Language and Communication skills Humanities and Social Sciences Economics and Principles of management b. Basic Sciences (15 25 %) It is desirable to include subjects like

Computer Literacy with Numerical Analysis Mathematics Physics Chemistry

c. Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts (15 25 %) It is desirable to include subjects like Engineering Graphics Workshop Practice Engineering Mechanics Electrical Sciences Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer

d. Relevant Professional subjects (55 65 %) The blend of different subjects shall be so designed that the student, at the end of the programme, would have been trained not only in his / her relevant professional field but also would have developed as a socially conscious human being. Further, every student shall be made to involve in any one of the character development programme such as NSS / NSO. 8.2 The curriculum of each semester shall normally be a blend of different subjects not exceeding 6 (8 if the curriculum is for the year). Tutorials and / or Practicals shall form part of each subject. 8.3 The medium of instruction, examination and project report shall be in English, except for courses on language other than English. 9. Duration of the Programme A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. / B.Tech. Programme in four academic years (one year and 6 semesters) but in any case not more than 7 years for HSC candidates and not more than 6 years for Lateral Entry Diploma Candidates. Each semester shall normally consist of 90 working days or 450 hours or 540 periods spread over a period of not less than 15 weeks. If the curriculum is for the whole year, the syllabus shall consist of 180 days or 900 hours or 1080 periods spread over a period of not less than 30 weeks. The Principal shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as per the number of periods specified in the

syllabus and that the teacher teaches the full content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught. 10. Faculty Adviser 10.1 To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the academic programme, the Head of the Department will attach a certain number of students to a teacher in the Department who shall function as Faculty Adviser for those students throughout their period of study. 10.2 The Faculty Adviser shall advise the students and monitor the courses undergone by the students, check the attendance and progress of the students attached to him/her and counsel them periodically. If necessary, the Faculty Adviser may also discuss with or inform the parents about the progress of the students. 10.3 The Faculty Adviser shall arrange Industrial visits for the students to give them the exposure to the industrial practices in the relevant field of their study. 11. Class Committee 11.1. Every class shall have a class committee consisting of teachers of the concerned class, student representatives and a chairperson who is not teaching the class. It is like the Quality Circle (more commonly used in industries) with the overall goal of improving the teaching-learning process. The functions of the class committee include Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the laboratories Clarifying the regulations of the degree programme and the details of rules therein Informing the student representatives the academic schedule including the dates of assessments and the syllabus coverage for each assessment Informing the student representatives the details of Regulations regarding weightage used for each assessment. In the case of practical courses (laboratory / drawing / project work / seminar etc.) the breakup of marks for each experiment / exercise / module of work, should be clearly discussed in the class committee meeting and informed to the students. Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each test and finding the ways and means of solving problems, if any

 Identifying the weak students, if any, and requesting the teachers concerned to provide some additional help or guidance or coaching to such weak students. 11.2 The class committee for a class under a particular branch is normally constituted by the head of the department. However, if the students of different branches are mixed in a class (like the first semester which is generally common to all branches), the class committee is to be constituted by the Principal. 11.3 The class committee shall be constituted on the first working day of any semester / year or earlier. 11.4 At least 4 student representatives (usually 2 boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the class committee. 11.5 The chairperson of the class committee may invite the Faculty adviser(s) and the Head of the department to the meeting of the class committee. 11.6 The Principal may participate in any class committee of the institution. 11.7 The chairperson is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting, submit the same to Principal within two days of the meeting and arrange to circulate among the concerned students and teachers. If there are some points in the minutes requiring action by the management, the same shall be brought to the notice of the management by the Principal. 11.8 The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within one month from the date of commencement of the academic session, in order to inform the students about the nature and weightage of assessments within the framework of the Regulations. Two or three subsequent meetings may be held in a semester (four or five in a year) at suitable intervals. During these meetings the student members representing the entire class, shall meaningfully interact and express the opinions and suggestions of the other students of the class to improve the effectiveness of the teaching learning process.

12. Course Committee for Common Subjects Each common theory course offered to more than one discipline or group, shall have a Course Committee comprising all the teachers teaching the common course with one of them nominated as Course Coordinator. The nomination of the course Coordinator shall be made by the Head of the Department / Principal depending upon whether all the teachers teaching the common course belong to a single department or to several departments. The Course committee shall meet as often as possible and ensure uniform evaluation of the tests and arrive at a common scheme of evaluation for the tests. Where it is feasible, the Course Committee may also prepare a common question paper for the test(s). 13. Scheme of Examination 13.1 Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) continuous internal assessment through the semester or the year as the case may be and (ii) an University examination at the end of the semester or the year. 13.2 Each theory subject (not having the laboratory sessions) shall be evaluated for a maximum of 150 marks. Each subject having theory and laboratory sessions shall be evaluated for a maximum of 200 marks. The project work shall be evaluated for a maximum of 400 marks. 13.2.1 For all the theory subjects, the continuous internal assessment will carry 30 marks while the University examination will carry 20 marks for oral and 100 marks for the theory. 13.2.2 For all the subjects which have theory and practical (laboratory) sessions, continuous internal assessment will carry 30 marks while the University examination will carry 20 marks for oral, 50 marks for the practical and 100 marks for the theory. 13.2.3 For Engineering Practices subject in the first year, which consists of workshop practices, continuous internal assessment will carry 30 marks while the University examination will carry 20 marks for oral and 100 marks for the practical. 13.2.4 For the project work in the final semester, the continuous internal assessment will carry 50 marks while the University examination will carry 100 marks for oral and 250 marks for project presentation.

13.3 The University examination of 3 hours duration for theory shall ordinarily be conducted between November and December during the odd semesters and between May and June during the even semesters. The University examination of 3 hours duration shall ordinarily be conducted between May and June where the syllabus is for the whole year. 13.4 The University examination for the practical and oral shall be conducted by External and Internal Examiners duly appointed by the University. 13.5 The University examination for project work shall comprise of evaluation of the project report submitted by the project group (of not exceeding 3 students) by the External examiner followed by a viva-voce (oral) examination conducted separately for each student by the External and Internal Examiners duly appointed by the University. 13.5.1 The project presentation shall be evaluated for a maximum 250 marks (same mark awarded to every student of the project group) while the vivavoce examination shall carry 100 marks (awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual performance in the viva-voce examination). 13.6 The University shall appoint the Internal and External Examiners for the University Examinations - theory and practical. Annexure A gives the details of i. Scheme of Examinations ii. Teaching Hours and iii. University Examination Question Paper Pattern. 14. Procedure for Awarding Marks for Internal Assessment For all theory and practical, the continuous internal assessment shall be for a maximum of 30 marks and for the project work the continuous internal assessment shall be for a maximum of 50 marks. 14.1 Test / Experiment / Project Assessment i. Theory courses Academic performance through Tests Punctuality in Tests and assignments Behaviour in the class & Discipline Attendance Total

- 15 marks - 5 marks - 5 marks - 5 marks - 30 marks

ii. Courses with Theory and Laboratory Work Academic performance through Tests Punctuality in Tests and Experiments Behaviour in the class & Discipline Attendance Total iii. Project Work: The Principal shall constitute a review committee for each branch of study. There shall be three assessments (each 100 Marks) during the semester by the review committee. The student shall make presentation on the progress made by him / her before the committee. Internal mark based on these assessments shall be reduced to 40 marks. The remaining 10 marks shall be for the attendance. 14.2. Attendance 5 marks for attendance for each subject, with and without laboratory work, shall be awarded as below. - 15 marks - 5 marks - 5 marks - 5 marks - 30 marks

81 % to 85 % of attendance 86 % to 90 % of attendance 91 % to 95 % of attendance 96 % to 100 % of attendance

2 marks 3 marks 4 marks 5 marks

10 marks for attendance for the Project work shall be awarded as below. 81 % to 85 % of attendance 86 % to 90 % of attendance 91 % to 95 % of attendance 96 % to 100 % of attendance 14.3 4 marks 6 marks 8 marks 10 marks

Every teacher is required to maintain an 'ATTENDANCE AND ASSESSMENT RECORD' which consists of attendance marked in each lecture or practical or project work class, the test marks and the record of class work (topic covered), separately for each course. This should be

submitted to the Head of the department periodically (at least three times in a semester or five times in a year) for checking the syllabus coverage and the records of test marks and attendance. The Head of the department will put his signature and date after due verification. At the end of the semester / year, the record should be verified by the Principal who will keep this document in safe custody(for five years). The University or any inspection team appointed by the University may inspect the records of attendance and assessment of both current and previous semesters / year. 15. Requirements for Completion of a Semester / Year A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have satisfied the requirements for completion of a semester. 15.1 Ideally every student is expected to attend all classes and secure 100% attendance. However, in order to allow for certain unavoidable reasons such as Medical / participation in sports / personal, the student is expected to attend at least 80% of the classes. 15.1.1 Therefore, he / she shall secure not less than 80 % of overall attendance in that semester / year taking into account the total number of periods in all subjects put together attended by the student as against the total number of periods in all the subjects offered during that semester / year. 15.2 Candidates who do not complete the semester (as per clause 15.1), will not be permitted to write the University examination at the end of the semester or the year and not permitted to go to next semester. They are required to repeat the incomplete semester / year in the next academic year. 16. Requirements for Appearing for Semester / Annual Examination A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for the University examination of the current semester / year if he / she has satisfied the semester / year completion requirements (Subject to Clause 15.1 & 15.2) and has registered for examination in all the subjects of that semester. Registration is automatic for current semester / yearly examinations as well as arrears examination

17. Passing Requirements 17.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50% of total marks and not less than 40% marks in the University Examinations separately in theory and practical prescribed for the subjects shall be declared to have passed the Examination. 17.2 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular subject he / she will be automatically registered to reappear for the examination in that subject during the next semester / year when the examination is conducted in that subject; he / she will continue to be registered to reappear for the examination till he / she secures a pass. However, the continuous internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first attempt shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent attempts. 17.3 If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the University / internal examinations, he / she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the University from time to time 18. Issue of Mark Sheets Individual mark sheet for each semester / year will be issued, containing the following information through the Principal concerned, after the publication of the results. a. The College / Department Name. b. The marks obtained in each course in continuous internal assessment, oral and or practical and theory in the University Examination and the total marks obtained for each course. c. Whether the candidate has passed or failed in the courses concerned.

19. Eligibility for the Award of Degree A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the B.E. / B.Tech. Degree provided the student has i. Successfully completed the course requirements and has passed all the prescribed examinations in the first year and subsequent 6 semesters (6 semesters for lateral entry) within a maximum period of 7 years (6 years for lateral entry) reckoned from the commencement of the academic programme to which the candidate was admitted.

ii. The award of Degree must have been approved by the Board of Management of the University. 20. Classification of the Award of the Degree 20.1 A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 19) having passed the examination in all the subjects in the first year and subsequent six semesters (six semesters for lateral entry) in his / her first appearance within four consecutive years (three years for lateral entry) from the commencement of the study in the first year / semester and securing an aggregate of not less than 75% of total marks (internal assessment plus University examination marks) in all the subjects in the final six semesters shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class with Distinction. The authorized break of study (vide clause 21.3) will not be counted for the purpose of classification. 20.2 A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 19) having passed the examination in all the courses in the final six semesters (all the six semesters for lateral entry) within a maximum period of four consecutive years reckoned from the commencement of study in the third semester securing an aggregate of not less than 60% of total marks (continuous internal assessment plus University examination marks) in all the subjects in the final six semesters shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class. For this purpose the authorized break of study (vide clause 21.3) will not be counted for the purpose of classification. 20.3 All other candidates (not covered in clauses 20.1 and 20.2) who qualify for the award of the degree (vide Clause 19) shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second Class. 20.4 A candidate who is absent for the University examination in a course / project work after having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared for that examination for the purpose of classification. 21. Temporary Break of Study from a Programme 21.1 A candidate is not normally permitted to temporarily break the study. However, if a candidate intends to temporarily discontinue the programme in the middle for valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and to rejoin the programme, he / she shall apply in advance to the Registrar of the University, through the Head of the

Department and Principal stating the reasons there for, in any case, not later than the last date for registering for the semester examinations of the semester in question. 21.2 The candidate permitted to rejoin the programme after the break, shall be governed by the rules and regulations in force at the time of rejoining. The University shall take appropriate steps to enable the student joining after the break of study to continue his / her study in the regulations in force at the time of rejoining. 21.3 The duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification vide Clause 20.1 and 20.2 shall be increased by the period of such break of study permitted. 21.4 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement of the first semester / year to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified in clause 9 irrespective of the period of break of study in order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the degree (vide clause 19). 21.5 If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and good conduct, the period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted Break of Study and Clause 21.3 is not applicable for this case.

22. Personality and Character Development All students shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character development programme (NSS / NSO) and undergo training for about 80 hours and attend a camp of about ten days. The training shall include classes on hygiene and health awareness and also training in first-aid. National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the College / Institution. National Sports Organization (NSO) will have sports, Games, Drills and Physical exercises. While the training activities will normally be during week ends, the camp will normally be during vacation period.

23. Discipline Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behaviour both inside and outside the college and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the prestige of the University / College. The Principal shall constitute a disciplinary committee consisting of Principal, Two Heads of Department of which one should be from the faculty of the student, to enquire into acts of indiscipline and notify the University about the disciplinary action recommended for approval. 24. Revision of Regulations and Curriculum The University may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations, scheme of examinations and syllabi if found necessary.

ANNEXURE A 1. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

B.E- COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

First Year
Sl Sub No Code Subject Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240 Oral 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160 Marks Prac tical 50 50 50 50 100 50 50 450 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 Total 200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 1550

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SH 5101 MA 5101 SH 5102 SH 5103 CS 5101 ME 5101 EC 5101 ME 5102

Advanced English Communication skills Principles of applied mathematics Advanced applied engineering physics Energy & material Chemistry Programming languages Computer graphics & drafting Principles of semiconductors Industrial computational mechanics Total

Semester III
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA 5302 Applications of Mathematics 2 3 4 CS 5303 CS 5304 EE 5305 Data Structures System Software Electrical Engineering and Control Systems 5 6 EC 5304 EC 5305 Digital Principles and System Design Signals and Systems Total 30 30 180 20 20 120 50 50 250 100 100 600 200 200 1150 30 30 30 20 20 20 50 50 50 100 100 100 200 200 200 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100

Cont. Assess 30

Total 150

Semester IV
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA 5403 Standard Distribution and Queuing Theory 2 EC 5406 Analog and Digital Communication 3 EC 5407 Microprocessors and Micro Controllers 4 CS 5406 Operating Systems 5 6 CS 5407 Visual Programming Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

EC 5408 Digital Signal Processing Total

Semester V
Sl No Sub Code 1 MA 5507 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100

Subject Mathematical foundations for computer science Advanced Java Software Engineering Compiler Design Database Management Systems Data Warehousing and Mining Total

Cont. Assess 30

Total 150

2 3 4 5 6

CS 5508 CS 5509 CS 5510 CS 5511 CS 5513

30 30 30 30 30 180

20 20 20 20 20 120

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 100 600

200 200 200 200 150 1100

Semester VI
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 CS 5614 CS 5615 CS 5616 CS 5617 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 -

Subject Computer Networks Object Oriented Analysis and Design Artificial Intelligence Information Security Elective I

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 in and 30

Total 200 200 200 150 150 150

ACS 5622 Comprehension communication Career Skills PCS 5623 Mini Project Total

50 260

50 190

100 350

500

200 1300

Semester VII
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 CS 5724 Internet Programming 2 3 4 5 6 CS 5725 Software Testing CS 5726 Graphics and Multimedia CS 5727 Cryptography and Network Security Elective-II Elective-III Total Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 150 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 200 200 200 150 150 150 1050

Semester VIII
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 PCS 5848 CS 5837 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 100 160 250 250 100 100 300

Subject Total Quality Management Elective-IV Elective-V Project Work Total

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 50 190

Total 150 150 150 400 850

B.E-Electronics and Communication Engineering

First Year Sl N o 1 2 3 4 5 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Sub Code SH 4101 MA4101 SH 4102 SH 4103 CS4102

Subject Advanced English communication skills Principles of applied mathematics Advanced applied engineering physics Energy and material Chemistry Computational Systems and Programming languages Computer Graphics and Drafting Electro mechanics Introduction to Electrical circuits Total

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30

Total 200 150 200 200 200

6 7 8

ME4101 ME4105 EE4102

30 30 30 240

20 20 20 160

100 50 50 400

100 100 700

150 200 200 1500

Semester III
Sl N o 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 100 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 200 100 100 100 100 600

Sub Code Subject EC 4302 Semiconductor Devices MA 4302 Application of mathematics EC4303 Electro magnetic fields EE4303 Electrical Machines CS 4305 Data Structures EC 4310 Switching theory and logic design Total

Total 200 150 150 200 200 200 1100

Semester IV
Sl Sub No Code 1 MA4405 2 3 4 5 6 EC 4411 EC 4412 EC 4413 EE4406 EC 4414 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Subject Stochastic Processes Signals and Systems Microprocessors and Micro controller Analog Electronic Circuits I Measurements and Instrumentation Analog and digital ICs Total

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

Semester V
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 EC 4515 EC4516 EC 4517 CS 4512 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 50 50 100 100 100

Subject Analog Communication Antennas and Wave Propagation Digital Signal Processing Computer Architecture & Organization Analog Electronic Circuits-II Control Systems Total

Total 200 200 200 150

5 6

EC 4518 EE4504

30 30 180

20 20 120

50 50 300

100 100 600

200 200 1150

Semester VI
Sl N o 1 Sub Code EC 4619 Cont. Assess 30 Marks Prac Theory tical 50 100

Subject Microwave electronics and radar engineering Elective-I Electronic systems design Digital Communication Comprehension in Electronics and career skills Application specific integrated circuits Design Mini Project Total

Oral 20

Total 200

2 3 4 5 EC 4620 EC 4621 AEC462 2 EC 4623

30 30 30 30

20 20 20 20

50 50 100

100 100 100 -

150 200 200 150

30

20

50

100

200

PEC462 4

30 210

20 140

100 350

500

150 1250

Semester VII
Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 6 EC 4725 Sub Code Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 Marks Pract Theory ical 100 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100

Subject Elective-II Elective-III

Oral 20 20 20 20 20 20

Total 150 150 200 200 200 200

Advanced Digital Signal Processing CS 4728 Advanced Networking EC 4726 Optical Communication EC 4727 Very large scale integrated circuits design Total

180

120

200

600

1100

Semester VIII
Sl No 1 2 3 4 Sub Code EC4828 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 50 140 Marks Prac Theory tical 100 250 250 100 100 300

Subject Total Quality Management Elective IV Elective V

Oral 20 20 20 100 160

Total 150 150 150 400 850

PEC4829 Project Work Total

B.E-Electrical and Electronics Engineering First Year

Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SH3101 MA3101 SH3102 SH3103 CS3102 ME3101 ME3105 EE3101
Cont. Assess Marks Pract ical Theo ry

Subject Advanced English Communication Skills Principles of Applied Mathematics Advanced Applied Engineering Physics Energy and Material Chemistry Computational Systems and Programming Languages Computer Graphics and Drafting Electrical Mechanics Principle of Electrical Technology Total

Oral

Total

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160

50 50 50 50 100 50 50 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700

200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 1500

SEMESTER III Sl.No Sub Code 1 2 3 CS3305 Subject Cont. Assess 30 30 30 Marks Oral Practical Theory Total 20 20 20 50 50 100 100 100 200 150 200

Data Structures

4 5 6

MA3302 Application of Mathematics ME3306 Solid Mechanics&Fluid Machinery EE3308 Electric Circuit Analysis EC3335 Solid State Electronics EE3309 Electrical Machines I

30 30 30 180

20 20 20 120

50 50 50 250

100 100 100 600

200 200 200 1150

TOTAL

SEMESTER IV
Sl.No

Sub Code EC3436 EE3410

Subject
Cont. Asses s Oral

MARKS Pract ical Theo ry Total

1 2 3

Electronics Circuits Electrical Machines II

30 30 30

20 20 20 -

50 50

100 100 100

200 200 150

5 6

MA3406 Introduction To Numerical Methods EE3411 Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments ME3407 Modern Thermodynamics EC3437 Electromagnetic Theory

30

20

50

100

200

30 30 180

20 20 120

50 200

100 100 600

200 150 1100

TOTAL

SEMESTER V
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject
CONT. ASSESS ORAL

MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2

EE3512 Control Systems EE3513 Industrial & Power Electronics EE3514 Power System I EC3538 Digital Electronics CS3512 Computer Architecture and Organisation EE3515 Switch Gear and Protection TOTAL

30 30

20 20

50 50

100 100

200 200

3 4 5

30 30 30

20 20 20

50 50 -

100 100 100

200 200 150

30 180

20 120

200

100 600

150 1100

SEMESTER VI
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject
CONT. ASSESS ORAL

MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 EC3639

Elective - I Microprocessors And Microcontroller Power System II

30 30

20 20

50

100 100

150 200

3 4 5

EE3616 EC3640

30 30 30

20 20 20

50 100

100 100 -

150 200 150

6 7 TOTAL

Electronic Instrumentation AEE3617 Comprehension In Electrical And Career Skills EC3641 Digital Signal Processing PEE3618 Mini Project

30 30 210

20 20 140

50 100 350

100 500

200 150 1200

SEMESTER VII
SL.NO SUB CODE SUBJECT CONT. ASSESS ORAL MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 3 EE3719 EE3720

Elective-II High Voltage Engineering Electrical Machine Design Elective-III Advanced Networking Solid State Drives

30 30 30

20 20 20

100 100 100

150 150 150

4 5 6 CS3728 EE3721

30 30 30 180

20 20 20 120

50 50

100 100 100 600

150 150 200 950

TOTAL

SEMESTER VIII
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject
CONT. ASSESS ORAL

MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 3 4 EE3822

Elective-IV Elective-V Total Quality Management PEE3823 Project Total

30 30 30 50 140

20 20 20 100 160

250 250

100 100 100 300

150 150 150 400 850

B.Tech Information Technology First Year

Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sub Code SH 6101 Subject Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240 Marks Pra Oral ctic Theory al 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160 50 50 50 100 50 50 450 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 Total 200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 1550

Advanced English Communication Skills MA 6101 Principles of applied mathematics SH 6102 Advanced applied engineering physics SH 6103 Energy & material Chemistry CS 6101 Programming languages ME 6101 Computer graphics & drafting EC 6101 Principles of semiconductor devices ME 6102 Information mechanics Total

Semester III
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA6302 Applications of Mathematics 2 3 4 5 IT 6302 System Software IT 6303 Data Structures EE6305 Electrical Engineering & Control Systems EC 6304 Digital Principles and System Design 6 EC 6305 Signals and Systems Total 30 180 20 120 50 250 100 600 200 1150 30 30 30 30 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100

Cont. Assess 30

Total 150

Semester IV
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA 6404 Mathematical Statistics 2 3 4 5 6 EC 6408 EC 6409 IT 6404 IT 6405 Digital Signal Processing Principles Communication Computer Networks Software Engineering of Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

IT 6406 Data Base Management System Total

Semester V
Sl Sub No Code 1 IT 6507 2 3 4 5 6 IT 6508 IT 6509 IT 6510 IT 6511 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 200 100 100 100 100 100 600

Subject Operating Systems Advanced java Component Based Technology Internet Programming Web Technology

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 200 200 150 200 200 150 1100

IT 6512 Data ware housing and mining Total

Semester VI
Sl No Sub Code 1 IT 6613 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100

Subject Graphics and Multimedia

Cont. Assess 30

Total 200

2 3 4 5 6

IT 6614 IT 6615 IT 6616

Visual Programming Object Oriented Analysis and Design Information Security Elective I

30 30 30 30 30

20 20 20 20 20

50 50 100

100 100 100 100 -

200 200 150 150 150

ACS 6621 Comprehension in information and career skills PIT 6622 Mini Project Total

50 260

50 190

100 350

500

200 1300

Semester VII
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 IT 6723 Distributed Computing 2 3 4 5 6 IT 6724 Artificial intelligence IT 6725 Neural Networks IT 6726 Software Testing Elective-II Elective-III Total Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 200 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 200 200 150 200 150 150 1050

Semester VIII
Sl Sub No Code 1 IT 6835 2 3 4 PIT 6846 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 100 20 20 100 160 250 200 100 100 300

Subject Total Management Elective-IV Elective -V Project Work Total

Cont. Assess Quality 30 30 30 50 190

Total 150 150 150 400 850

I. UNIVERSITY EXAMINATION Question Paper Pattern 1. Theory Papers Max. Marks Time Part A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each Part B consists of 5 questions with either or choice Total Practical Max. Marks Time Record submission Experimental procedure Experimental results Total = = = = = = 50 3 10 15 25 50 = 100 = 3 hrs = 20 marks = 80 marks = 100 marks

2.

hrs marks marks marks marks

There shall be one Internal Examiner and one External Examiner appointed by the University to conduct the Practical Examination 3. Engineering Graphics Max. Marks Time Drawing manually Computer drawing Total 4. Comprehension Max. Marks Time Aptitude (100) 2 marks (25) Total 5. Mini project Max. Marks Viva voce Internal assessment Evaluation of project work Total = 200 = 50 = 50 = 100 = 200 = = = = = 100 3 50 50 100 = = = = = 100 6 hrs 50 marks 50 marks 100 marks

hrs marks marks marks

marks marks marks marks

6.

Oral Examination

The Oral Examination shall be conducted in every subject for 20 marks. There shall be one Internal Examiner and one External Examiner appointed by the University to conduct the Oral Examination. For the subjects with Experimental work, the same Internal and External Examiners appointed for the Practical Examination shall conduct the Oral Examination. 7. Project Work

The examination for the Project work shall consist of two parts. i. ii. Evaluation of the work done by the team. Evaluation of the individual student.

The Project work done by the team of the students shall be evaluated for 250 marks and each student will be awarded the same marks for this part. Every student shall have viva voce examination and shall be examined for 100 marks for the knowledge he / she has acquired in doing the project work and shall be awarded individual mark based on the individual performance. There shall be one Internal Examiner and one External Examiner appointed by the University to conduct the examination on the Project Work.

II.SYLLABUS
1. B.E-Computer Science and Engineering 2. B.E-Electronics and Communication Engineering 3. B.E-Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4. B.Tech-Information Technology

B.E- COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

First Year
Sl Sub No Code Subject L T P Total Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240 Oral 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160 Marks Prac tical 50 50 50 50 100 50 50 450 Theory 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 Total 200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 1550

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SH 5101 MA 5101 SH 5102 SH 5103 CS 5101 ME 5101 EC 5101 ME 5102

Advanced English Communication skills Principles of applied mathematics Advanced applied engineering physics Energy & material Chemistry Programming languages Computer graphics & drafting Principles of semiconductors Industrial computational mechanics Total

2 3 2 2 2 2 2 15

1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 14

4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 30

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester III
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA 5302 Applications of Mathematics 2 3 4 5 6 CS 5303 CS 5304 EE 5305 EC 5304 EC 5305 Data Structures System Software Electrical Engineering and Control Systems Digital Principles and System Design Signals and Systems Total L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 P 2 2 2 2 2 10 Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

(L - Lecture; T - Tutorial; P - Practical)

Semester IV
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA 5403 Standard Distribution and Queuing Theory 2 EC 5406 Analog and Digital Communication 3 EC 5407 Microprocessors and Micro Controllers 4 CS 5406 Operating Systems 5 CS 5407 Visual Programming 6 EC 5408 Digital Signal Processing Total L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 P 2 2 2 2 2 10 Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

(L - Lecture; T - Tutorial; P - Practical)

Semester V
Sl No Sub Code 1 MA 5507 L 3 T 2 P Total 5 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100

Subject Mathematical foundations for computer science Advanced Java Software Engineering Compiler Design Database Management Systems Data Warehousing and Mining Total

Cont. Assess 30

Total 150

2 3 4 5 6

CS 5508 CS 5509 CS 5510 CS 5511 CS 5513

3 3 3 3 3 18

2 4

2 2 2 2 8

5 5 5 5 5 30

30 30 30 30 30 180

20 20 20 20 20 120

50 50 50 50 200

100 100 100 100 100 600

200 200 200 200 150 1100

(L - Lecture; T - Tutorial; P - Practical)

Semester VI
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 CS 5614 CS 5615 L 3 3 3 3 3 T 2 2 P 2 2 2 4 Total 5 5 5 5 5 4 Marks Prac Oral tical 20 50 20 50 20 20 20 20 50 100

Subject

Computer Networks Object Oriented Analysis and Design CS 5616 Artificial Intelligence CS 5617 Information Security Elective I ACS 5622 Comprehension in communication and Career Skills PCS 5623 Mini Project Total

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30

The ory 100 100 100 100 100 -

Total 200 200 200 150 150 150

15

2 12

2 31

50 260

50 190

100 350

500

200 1300

(L - Lecture; T - Tutorial; P - Practical)

Semester VII
Sl Sub No Code 1 CS 5724 2 CS 5725 3 CS 5726 4 CS 5727 5 6 L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 2 6 P 2 2 2 6 Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Marks Prac Oral tical 20 50 20 50 20 50 20 20 20 120 150

Subject Internet Programming Software Testing Graphics and Multimedia Cryptography and Network Security Elective-II Elective-III Total

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

The ory 100 100 100 100 100 100 600

Total 200 200 200 150 150 150 1050

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester VIII
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 CS 5837 L 3 3 3 9 T 2 2 2 6 P 30 30 Total 5 5 5 30 45 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 100 160 250 250 100 100 300

Subject Total Quality Management Elective-IV Elective-V Project Work Total

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 50 190

Total 150 150 150 400 850

PCS 5848

(L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

List of Electives for CSE

Electives I (VI SEM) Sl No 1 2 3 4 5

Sub code EIT 5618 EIT 5619 ECS 5620 ECS 5621 MA 5606

Subject Embedded System Information System Design Advanced Computer Architecture Advanced Databases Introduction to Numerical Analysis

Electives II (VII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4

Sub code EIT 5729 EIT 5730 ECS 5731 ECS 5732

Subject Enterprise Resource Planning Mobile Computing Real Time Operating System C # and .Net Framework

Electives III (VII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4

Sub code ECS 5733 ECS 5734 ECS 5735 ECS 5736

Subject Grid Computing Wireless Application protocol Software metrics TCP/IP Design and Implementation Electives IV (VIII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 5

Sub code EIT 5838 EIT 5839 EIT 5840 EIT 5841 EIT 5842

Subject Satellite Communication Software Project Management Bio Informatics Resource Management Techniques Parallel Computing

Electives V (VIII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 Sub code ECS 5843 ECS 5844 ECS 5845 ECS 5846 ECS 5847

Subject Wireless communication Electronic Commerce Software Quality Management Telecommunication system Soft Computing

SH5101

ADVANCED ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life and career related situations. OBJECTIVE 1. To improve the language proficiency of the students in English with emphasis on LSRW skills 2. To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their success. 3. To enable students to express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and professional contexts. 4. To develop the ability of students to guess the meanings of the words from the context and grasp the over all message of the text, draw inferences etc. 5. To develop an awareness in the students about writing as an exact and formal skill. UNIT I - LANGUAGE FOCUS (24)

Parts of speech - Tenses - Articles - Word formation with prefixes and suffixes - Voices Degrees of Comparison - Synonyms and Antonyms - Infinitives and Gerunds - If conditions Modal verbs - cause and effect - Purpose and function - Editing - Punctuation - sentence formation and transformation - Concord - Error correction - Imperatives (Should-form) UNIT II - LISTENING (16)

Listening comprehension - Listening for specific information - Note-making - Use of charts and diagrams - Listening to various sounds in English. UNIT III - SPEAKING (18)

Defining - Describing Objects - Describing uses - functions - Comparing - offering and giving advise - Analysing problems and providing solutions - Greetings - Suggesting - Introducing Warning - Seeking permission - Persuading - Praising and complimenting - Expressing sympathy - complaining and apologising - phoning - Symposium(Paper-presentation) - Mock Interview with HR - Mock GD - Technical conversations in the working environment. UNIT IV - READING (10)

Skimming the text for the gist - Scanning - Predicting the content - Interpreting charts and tables - Identifying stylistic features in text evaluating text - Understand discourse coherence -Note making - Guessing meaning from the context - Reading comprehension - Identifying the Slang in Journal.

UNIT V - WRITING

(22)

Sentence definition - Use of appropriate vocabulary - Paragraph writing - Essay writing Coherence - Cohesiveness - Narration and description - Precise writing - Formal and informal letters-Seeking Quotation - Ordering - Replying - Report - Writing - Technical Report writing Check-Lists - Instructions - Recommendations - E-mail writing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Dr.J.R.Nirmala, Technical English-Pearl Publishers, Chennai 2004 2. Mrs.Uma Maheswari, English for Engineers, Danam Publications, Chennai 2006. 3. Dr.S.Gunasekaran, Technical English Work Book, United Global Publishers, Chennai 2008. 4. Prof.M.Kandaswamy, Technical English Text book, Third Edition, BR Publications, Chennai 2008. REFERENCES 1. Authors: Humanities and social science department, English for Engineers and Technologists, Volume I. Anna University, published by orient Longman Lts., 1990. 2. Narayanasami, V.R, Strengthen your writing Orient Longman Ltd., Chennai 1996(Revised Edition) 3. Swan, Michael, Basic English Usage, Oxford University Press, 1984. 4. Robert.J.Dixson, Everyday dialogues in English, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,2006 5. K.R.Lakshmi Narayanan, English for Technical Communication, Vol I&2 SciTech publication, Chennai 2008. 6. Francis Soundararaj, Speaking and writing for effective Business Communication, McMillan, India Ltd., 2007.

COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB FOR BUDDING ENGINEERS AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life. 3. To eradicate their stage fear, while communicating others with high-confident. OBJECTIVE 1. To develop their vocabulary. 2. To enhance their communication skills in Listening and Speaking. PART-I (LANGUAGE LAB) 1. (40)

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

Listening Practice Listening for general content Listening to fill up the information Intensive listening Listening for specific information Fill in the gaps Word play/games Riddles/Puzzles Conversation practice Telephonic conversation Vocabulary building exercises a. Synonyms b. Antonyms c. Odd word d. Jumbled letters e. One word f. Homophones Error correction Pronunciation Practice-word stress-sentence stress- discussion-interpretation of visuals. Brain teasers. a. b. c. d. (20)

PART-II (CAREER LAB) 1. Mock Group-Discussion 2. Oral Presentation skills 3. Mock-Interview 4. Debate 5. Conversational Practice

MA5101 AIM

PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

L T P Total 310 150

To develop the basic Mathematical skills of engineering students as well as it helps them to understand the engineering subjects effectively. The topics introduced will serve as basic tools for specialized studies in many Engineering fields. OBJECTIVES 1. Be capable of mathematically formulating certain practical problems in terms of partial differential equations, solve them and practically interpret the results. 2. To understand double and triple integration and enable them to handle integrals of higher orders. 3. To know the basics of vector calculus comprising of gradient, divergence & curl and line, surface & volume integrals along with the classical theorems involving them. 4. To understand analytic functions and their interesting properties. 5. Make them to acquire a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. UNIT I -PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (18)

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-linear first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. UNIT II MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (18)

Double integration - Cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - Area as a double integral - Change of variables between Cartesian and polar co-ordinates Triple integration Volume as a triple integral- Beta and Gamma functions. UNIT III - VECTOR CALCULUS (18)

Scalar point functions - Vector point functions Gradient Divergence and Curl - Directional derivative Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields Line and surface integrals Gauss divergence theorem, Stokes and Greens theorems (with out proof) - Simple applications. UNIT IV - COMPLEX VARIABLES (18)

Function of a complex variable Analytic function Necessary conditions Cauchy Riemann equations Sufficient conditions (excluding proof) Properties of analytic

function Harmonic conjugate Construction of Analytic functions - Conformal mapping w =

z + a , w = az , w =

1 z 2 , w = e , w = z and Bilinear transformation. z

Statement and application of Cauchys integral theorem and integral formula Taylor and Laurent expansions Isolated singularities Residues - Cauchys residue theorem. Contour integration over unit circle and semicircular contours. UNIT V PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (18)

Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability Bayes theorem - Measures of central tendency Measures of dispersion Moments Correlation Rank correlation Line of Regression Test based on Normal distribution Students t-Distribution chi-squares test for goodness of fit.

THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS

90 30 TOTAL 120

1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi, 2004. 2. Venkatraman . M. K., Engineering Mathematics volume 1, Fourth Edition,National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics Eighth Edition, John Wiley Sons (Asia) Ltd, Singapore, 2001. and

2. S.P.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics. S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi.

SH 5102

ADVANCED APPLIED ENGINEERING PHYSICS (COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. The syllabus covers the basic laws and principles of Physics and its applications. The course contents are so chosen that it should be more relevant to the modern development of science to meet the challenge posed by fast-changing technology. 2. To enable the students to correlate the theoretical principles with application oriented studies. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course the students would be exposed to 1. understand scientific concepts and to explain them logically 2. explain scientifically the new developments and technology 3. relate industrial developments to the developments in physical phenomena

UNIT 1- ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS

(18)

ACOUSTICS Introduction to Sound -Characteristics & Classification of Sound-Loudness-Weber-Fechner lawDecibel-Absorption co-efficient- Sabines law - Reverberation- Reverberation Time- Factors affecting the acoustics of building and their remedies. ULTRASONICS Introduction-Production of Ultrasonic waves-Magnetostriction method-Piezo electric methodDetection of Ultrasonic waves - Properties of Ultrasonic waves - Application to science industry and medicine - SONAR. UNIT II- LASER AND FIBER OPTICS COMMUNICATION (20)

LASER Introduction - Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission-Characteristics of Laser- Three and four level laser system He Ne laser - Nd-YAG laser- Semiconductor Laser- Application of Lasers in medicine and communication Basic principles of holography Construction and reconstruction of image on hologram Applications of holography FIBER OPTICS COMMUNICATION Principle and Propagation of light in optical fibers-Numerical Aperture and Acceptance angleTypes of optical fibers (Material, Refractive, Mode)-Application of fiber optics in communication and sensors. UNIT III- ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS NONLINEAR MATERIALS Principle - passive and active materials properties of nonlinear materials applications (17)

NANO MATERIALS Introduction properties of nano particles carbon nano tubes semiconductor quantum dots application of nano particles. SUPER CONDUCTORS Introduction properties types - applications

UNIT IV - PROPERTIES OF MATTER

(18)

ELASTICITY Stress-Strain relationship- Hookes Law- Elastic behavior of a material- Uses of Stress Strain diagram-Factors affecting Elasticity-Youngs modulus-Bulk modulus- Modulus of RigidityPoissons ratio- Torsional Pendulum-Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire. BENDING OF BEAMS Bending moment of a beam - Experiment to find Youngs Modulus using Microscope-NonUniform bending-Expression for depression-Experiment to determine Youngs Modulus using pin and microscope method cantilever loaded at the free end. UNIT V- DIELECTRICS & THERMAL PROPERTIES (17)

DIELECTRICS Introduction Dielectric constant Electronic ionic and orientational polarizations internal fields in solids clausius mossotti equation dielectrics in alternating fields frequency dependences of the polarization ferro and piezo electricity THERMAL PROPERTIES Introduction - Specific Heat of Solids Einstein Model Debye Model Lattice Vibrations Phonons Thermal Conductivity. TEXT BOOKS 1. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta, Engineering physics Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1987. 2. William Thomas Silfvast, Laser Fundamentals, Cambridge University Press, 2004. 3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology- a gentle introduction to next big idea Ratner Pearson Education, 2002. 4. A. K. Bandyopadhyay, Nanomaterials New Age International Publishers, 1997. 5. C. Kittel, Introduction to solid state physics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., seventh edition, 1996. 6. S. O. Pillai, Solid state physics, New age international (p) Ltd., publishers, revised Sixth edition, 2005 REFERENCES 1. Dr. Arumugam, Engineering physics, Anuradha Agencies, Third revised edition 2. G. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Physics, VRB Publishers

3. William callister, Materials Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 1997. 4. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Volume 2, John Wiley & Sons, fourth edition, 1992.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total

90 60 150

EXPERIMENTAL WORK

1. Torsional Pendulum -Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire & Moment of inertia of a Disc. 2. Viscosity Poisuilles flow Determination of Coefficient of Viscosity of a liquid. 3. Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus 4. Lees Disc Determination of Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor 5. Air Wedge -Determination of Thickness of a wire 6. Spectrometer Determination of Wavelengths of a Spectral lines using Grating 7. Spectrometer -Determination of Dispersive power of a Prism 8. Laser Determination of Particle Size & Wavelength 9. Band Gap Determination of Semiconducting material 10. Ultrasonic Interferometer -Determination of Velocity of ultrasonic waves in different liquids 11. Potentiometer E.M.F of a thermocouple 12. Non- Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus

SH 5103 AIM

ENERGY AND MATERIAL CHEMISTRY

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

The main theme of the new syllabus is knowing the concepts and methods already exist and creating the awareness to meet the present and future needs through technology and simultaneously to motivating them to involve in the research area utilizing the current trend such as nano technology. OBJECTIVES 1. It consist of the various energy resources to which the world is always facing numerous problems and in a position to invent new resources. 2. Material chemistry is included for the engineering student in order to know what chemistry materials are behind the technology. Also it deals with how the materials are protected from corrosion by technically. 3. Zeolites are nowadays used in various emerging catalytic field mainly in petro chemical cracking, water treatment, solar energy storing devices etc,. Also it contribute to a cleaner, safer environment in a great number of ways. 4. Nano materials are nowadays a current research area which the technology students should know about it for their future needs.

UNIT I - BASIS OF ELECTRO CHEMISTRY

(16)

Electrode potential single and standard electrode potential - Nernst Equation Reference electrode - hydrogen, calomel pH electrode - glass electrode - Electro chemical series and its applications Electrochemical cells Daniel cell Reversible and Irreversible cells concentration cell Conductometric titrations for acid-base reactions Potentiometric titration for estimation of Iron(Fe2+). . Fuel cells - H2-O2 fuel cells- Methanol- Oxygen fuel cells. UNIT II - ENERGY SOURCES & ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES Fuels Classification - Analysis of coal - Carbonyzation of metallurgical coke. Liquid fuels Petroleum - Cracking - Synthetic Petrol - Octane number - Knocking Antiknocking - Diesel oil - Cetane number. Gaseous fuels - Natural gas - CNG, LPG, Producer gas, Water gas, Coal gas, Biogas. Nuclear energy Types of nuclear reactions chain reaction Nuclear reactor. Batteries Classification - Laclanches cells - Alkaline batteries. Secondary batteries Ni - Cd battery - Lead acid storage battery - Solid polymer membrane fuel cell - Lithium-Sulphur battery Lithium battery - Solar Energy - Solar cells. (20)

UNIT III - ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

Abrasives Classification Hard Silico- soft and artificial silicon carbide- applications of abrasives. Refractories Classification - Properties of refractories - Refractoriness RUL porosity thermal spalling - thermal conductivity dimensional stability Alloys - Classification of alloys - Ferrous alloys - Micromesh and Stainless alloys- Non-ferrous alloys Copper alloys Heat treatment of alloys. Powder metallurgy Introduction definition applications of powder metallurgy manufacture of metal powders Atomisation reduction of oxides electrolytic deposition powder metallurgy processes secondary operations. Zeolites- Types- structure- properties- utilization of natural zeolites for solar energy storagesapplications. UNIT IV - CORROSION CONTROL AND METALLIC COATINGS (20)

Corrosion Control- Proper designing- using pure metals- using metal alloys- Cathodic Protection- use of Inhibitors- Application of Protective Coatings. Electro deposition - Anodic Coating - Cathodic coating - Methods of applications of Metal coatings - hot dipping - Metal Cladding- Electroplating - Displacement Plating- Metal Spraying Cementation - Electroless Plating - Chemical conversion coatings- Phosphate coating Chromate coating - Chemical Oxide coating -Anodised coating. UNIT V - POLYMERIC AND NANOMATERIALS POLYMERIC MATERIALS Engineering plastics types thermo and thermo setting plastics bakelite polyamides ABS copolymer Polyesters PVC Teflon Poly carbonates Polyurethane. Speciality Polymers - Electrical properties of polymers - Ionic polymers - Liquid crystal polymers - Polymers in electrical and electronic industries - Polymer blends and alloys- Super conductors - Organic insulators - Conducting Polymers - LED sensors. NANO MATERIALS Properties of CNT Potential applications of SWNT and MWNT - Electrochemical storage of hydrogen THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total 90 60 150 (19)

TEXT BOOKS 1. Jain & Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai publishing Company(P) Ltd., 2002. 2. Picket, Electrochemical Engineering, Prentice Hall Inc., 1977. 3. J.S.Newman, Electrochemical systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 1973. 4. C. Mantell, Electrochemical Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1972. 5. S.K. Hajra Choudhury, Materials Science and Processes, Indian Book distributing Co., 1983. REFERENCES 1. XU Ruren etc, Structure and Synthesis of Zeolites Molecular Sieve, Published by Jilin University 1987, 8. 2. WU Xianggan, etc., Rural Energy Source, Published by Agriculture Publishing House 1988, 6. 3. M.Burak(ed.) and U.K. Stevenge, Electrochemical Power Sources Primary and Secondary Batteries

EXPERIMENTAL WORK OBJECTIVES In Engineering Chemistry laboratory, the experiments are based on new syllabus which includes 1. Application of electrodes and cells in the chemistry. 2. Estimating the metals such as Iron, copper and Nickel present in the sample of material by volumetric and spectrophotometric methods. 3. Hardness giving minerals and dissolved oxygen which are mainly responsible for corrosion of metals are understand by estimation of hardness of water and dissolved oxygen. 4. Properties of polymer such as viscosity can be learn from Ostwalds viscometer. PART A 1. Potentiometric estimation of FAS using standard K2Cr2O7 solution. 2. Conductometric estimation of an Acid (HCl) using standard NaOH solution. 3. Conductometric estimation of mixture of Acids (HCl) using standard NaOH. 4. Determination of strength of HCl and NaOH by pH titration. 5. Determination of molecular weigth of a polymer using Ostwalds viscometer. PART B 1. Determination of Total, temporary and permanent Hardness of a sample of water using disodium salt of EDTA. 2. Estimation of Nickel in steel by EDTA method. 3. Determination of percentage of Copper in brass using standard sodium thiosulphate solution. 4. Determination of Iron in the given sample of solution using potassium dichromate crystals by internal indicator method. 5. Determination of Dissolved Oxygen in the given water sample by Winklers method. 6. Determination of Chloride content of water sample by Mohrs method. 7. Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of the given industrial waste water sample. Note: Minimum of 10 Experiment should be conducted. Reference 1. Vogels, Text book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, revised by J.Bassett, R.C. Denny, G.H. Jeffery, 4th Ed.

CS 5101

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (Common to CSE & IT)

L T P 2 0 2

TOTAL 200

AIM To provide an awareness about programming languages OBJECTIVES 1. To enable the student to learn the major components of a Computer system 2. To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems 3. To learn to program in C and C++ UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (15)

Introduction-Characteristics of Computers- Components of a computer system-Computer Hardware-Software-Classification of computers-Installing and Troubleshooting SoftwareIntroduction to Internet Services Computer Arithmetic- Binary Arithmetic-Basic arithmetic Operations-Basic Computer Organization: Functional Units, basic I/O devices and storage devices; Representation of integers, real (fixed and floating point), characters (ASCII and Unicode) UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO C (16)

Introduction to Language Overview of C Constants, Variables and data types Operators and expressions- Input and Output functions Simple computational problems Decision making and branching decision making and Looping . Arrays defining and processing arrays passing arrays to functions Multi-dimensional arrays- Handling of character strings-enumerated data types programs using simple sorting, searching and merging arrays Structures User defined data types Union- Nested structure, passing structures to functions Self referential structure UNIT III - POINTERS, FUNCTIONS AND FILE HANDLING (20) Pointer concept- declaration- Initialization of pointer variable-Accessing variable through pointer Pointers and functions pointers and arrays pointers and structures example programscommand line arguments Dynamic memory allocation Operation on pointers. Prototypes and functions Declaring, defining and accessing functions Parameter passing methods Recursion Storage classes Library functions- User defined functions file pointer high level. File operations opening and closing of file creating, Processing and Updation on files Simple file handling programs Introduction to data structures singly linked list creation, Insertion, deletion of elements Stack Queue implementation using linked list.

UNIT IV - PROGRAMMING IN C++

(19)

Object oriented paradigm, elements of object oriented to programming Merits and Demerits of OO methodology C++ fundamentals data types, operators and expressions, control flow, arrays, pointers and functions- Classes and objects Constructors and destructors, Operator overloading.

UNIT V - INHERITANCE, POLYMORPHISM AND FILE HANDLING

(20)

Inheritance, Virtual functions and polymorphism- C++ streams console streams console stream classes formatted and unformatted I/O operations, manipulators File streams classes file pointers and manipulations file I/O Exception handling

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Pradeep K. Sinha and Priti Sinha ,Computer Fundamentals : Concepts, Systems and applications, BPB Publications , 2003 2. E.Balaguruswamy. Programming in ANSI C, TMH, New Delhi, 2002. 3. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, II edition, (Indian Adapted Edition), TMH publications, 2006. 4 . K.R.Venugopal, Rajkumar Buyya, T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, TMH, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Allen B.Tucker et Al, Fundamentals Of Computing , TMH New Delhi , 1998. 2. V. Rajaraman, Fundamentals Of Computers ,Preintice Hall Of India, 2002 3. Brian W.Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie, The C programming Language, Pearson Edition Inc.(2005) 4. Ira Pohl, Object oriented programming using C++, Pearson Education Asia, 2003 5. Bjarne Stroustrup, "The C++ programming language" Addison Wesley, 2000 6. John R.Hubbard, "Programming with C++", Schaums outline series, TMH, 2003 7. E.Balagurusamy Object Oriented Programming with C++, TMH 2/e .

PROGRAMMING LAB C Programming Basics 1. Operators & Expressions To write a simple menu driven calculator program using switch statement 2. Arrays To write a program to perform Matrix multiplication. 3. String Manipulation To write a program to perform string manipulation function like string concatenations, comparison, find the length and string copy without using library functions. 4. Functions To write a C program to perform sequential and binary search using functions. 5. Recursion To write a program to print the Fibonacci series and to calculate the factorial of the given number using functions. 6. Structures To print the mark sheet of n students using structures. 7. Pointers To write a program using pointers to access the elements of an array and count the number of occurrences of the given number in the array. 8. Files To write a program for inventory management using files C++ Programming 1. Programs Using Functions Implementation of Call by Value, Call by Address and Call by Reference 2. Simple Classes for understanding objects, member functions and Constructors - Classes with primitive data members - Classes with arrays as data members - Classes with pointers as data members String Class - Classes with constant data members - Classes with static member functions 3. Compile time Polymorphism Operator Overloading including Unary and Binary Operators. Function Overloading 4. Runtime Polymorphism Inheritance Virtual functions Virtual Base Classes Templates

ME 5101

COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND DRAFTING (FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION ONLY)

L T P total 0 0 2 150

AIM To draw and prepare the Engineering Drawings and CAD drawings as per B.I.S standards. OBJECTIVE To develop graphic skills for communicating concepts, ideas and designs of engineering products and to give exposure to national standards relating to technical drawings. UNIT-I INTRODUCTION, PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND SURFACES (25) Construction of curves and special curves, projection of points, straight lines, determination of true length and true inclination projection of surfaces polygon and circular lamina. UNIT- II PROJECTION OF SOLIDS, SECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES. (25) Projection of simple solids prism, pyramid, cylinder and cone drawing views when the axis of the solids is inclined to one reference plane. Sectioning of simple solids, obtaining sectional views and true shape, when the axis of solid is vertical and cutting plane inclined to one reference plane. Development of lateral surfaces of truncated simple solids. UNIT III PICTORIAL PROJECTION (25)

Isometric projection isometric scale isometric views of simple solids truncated prism, pyramids, cylinders and cones. UNIT- IV COMPUTER AIDED DRAWING (20)

Introduction to Auto-CAD organizing a drawing area editing commands- drawing curves using BSplines and cubic splines. creation of 2 D models of simple geometric models. UNIT-V COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELLING (25)

Creation of 3D models of simple geometric models and obtaining 2 D multi view drawings from 3 D modeling. Computer Aided Drafting and Dimensioning using appropriate software.Drawing of title block with necessary text and projection symbol, dimensioning.Drawing plan of residential building (2bed room, kitchen, hall etc.,)Drawing of simple steel truss.Drawing of sectional views of simple solids.

TOTAL

120

TEXT BOOKS 1. Natarajan K.V, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Private Publisher, 17th Edition, 2003. 2. Venugopal K., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002 REFERENCES 1. Bertoline and Wiebe, Fundamentals Graphics Communication, Third edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2002 2. Warren J. Luzaddernd, Jon. D. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition, 2001 3. Gopalakrishnana K. R., Engineering Drawing (Vol I & II), Subhas Publications, 1998 STANDARDS 1. IS 10711 2001 Technical Product Documentation Sizes of Drawing Sheets 2. IS 9609 1983 Lettering on Technical Drawings 3. IS 10714 1983 General Principles of Presentation of Technical Drawings 4. IS 11669 - 1986 General Principles of Dimensioning of Technical Drawings

EC 5101

PRINCIPLES OF SEMICONDUCTORS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation- capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively. OBJECTIVES On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field 2. Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors 3. Diode operation and switching characteristics 4. Operation of BJT- FET- and MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices. UNIT I -ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (18)

Passive Components - Resistors -- Types- Rating- Colour Code- Tolerance- Fixed ValueVariable (Potentiometer)- Thermistor- Negative & Positive temperature Coefficient- Basic Construction of Various types of Resistors. Capacitors- - Types (air- paper- ceramic- micaelectrolyte)- Fixed Value & Variable- Rating- Basic Construction. Inductors- - Types- Inductors of high frequency application. Active Components- - Voltage & Current Source; Ideal and Practical Voltage Source & Current Source- equivalent circuit- Conversion of Voltage Source into current source and vice-versa. UNIT II - P-N JUNCTION& SPECIAL PURPOSE DIODES (18)

Insulator- Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors- Energy bar diagrams- Doping- Conduction in Semiconductors- P-N junction- Forward and Reversed biased p-n junction- V-I characteristics of p-n junction diode.Zener diodes- Tunnel diodes- Varactor diodes- Schottky diodes- Light emitting diode (LEDs)- Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)- Diodes for High Frequency applications. UNIT III -DIODE APPLICATIONS (18)

Rectifiers (half wave and full wave) calculation of transformer utilization factor and diode ratings- filter (LC-filter)- calculation of ripple factor and load regulation -clipping circuitsclamping circuits- voltage multipliers. UNIT IV -TRANSISTORS (18)

Base- Common Emitter and Common Collector (CB- CE- & CC) Configuration- Biasing of transistors- methods of Transistor Biasing- Base Resistor Method- Biasing with flb resistorsVoltage divider bias method- Transistor action & Characteristics- Comparison of CB-CC & CE configuration- Application of CB- CE- & CC configuration.Construction- Operation & characteristic of FET- FET as a switch- typical application of FET- MOSFET-Working Principle of MOSFET.

UNIT V -THYRISTORS AND THE UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR

(18)

The Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)- The Triac- Triggering Devices- Typical Diac-Triac Phase-Control Circuit- The Unijunction Transistor (UJT). THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOK 1. Jacob Millman & Christos C.Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. REFERENCES 1. David.a.bell- "electronic devices & circuits "-PHI-1998. 2. Robert boylestad- "electronic devices & circuit theory"-sixth edition-PHI-1998. 3. Bogart- "electronic devices & circuits"-universal book stall- new delhi-1994.

PRINCIPLES OF SEMICONDUCTORS LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Semi conducting devices and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Familiarization with electronic components- devices and equipments. 2. Study of Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes 3. Characteristics of semiconductor diodes Germanium diodes- silicon diode and Zener diode 4. Characteristics of BJT in CE configuration drawing maximum power dissipation curve and fixing the operating point in the linear region of operation. 5. Static characteristics of the BJT in CB configuration 6. Characteristics of FET and drawing equivalent circuit. 7. Rectifiers and filters- Study of waveform with and without capacitor filters calculation of % regulation- ripples factor and transformer utilisation factor. 8. FET amplifier- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gain and current gain. 9. BJT CE amplifier- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gaincurrent gain and distortion. Determination of h parameters. 10. BJT emitter follower- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gain and current gain. 11. Clipping- clamping and slicing circuits using diodes.

ME 5102

INDUSTRIAL COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS LABORATORY

L T P Total 0 0 2 50

AIM To verify the basic principles of mechanics experimentally and be able to conduct experiment to analyse the given mechanics problems.

OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the application of theory in practice, by performing experiments and verifying results. 2. To develop the effective skill to observe experimental data and to analyse the results. 3. To build the confidence in performing the utilization of principle of mechanics in engineering works.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of polygon law & triangular law of forces. 2. Determination of elongation of wire under external load. 3. Determination of reaction at the support of beam & bending moment of a simply supported beam. 4. Study of equilibrium of a particle, under the action of forces in a plane. 5. Determination co-efficient of friction on inclined plane. 6. Determination of youngs modulus of elasticity of wire. 7. To determine the effort required to lift a load, and efficiency of lifting by some simple machines. 8. Determination of moment of inertia of flywheel. 9. To undergo a human experience of the principle of conservation of Angular momentum. 10. To understand the implications of simultaneous conservation momentum and energy in a multiple elastic impacts. 11. To determine the co-efficient of restitution of a given body. 12. To study the principle and action of Gyroscope.

MA5302 AIM

APPLICATION OF MATHEMATICS

LTP 32 0

Total 150

The course aims to develop the skills of the students in the areas of transformation techniques. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of engineering subjects like communication systems, electro-optics and electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and specialized studies and research. OBJECTIVES 1. Have gained a well found knowledge of Fourier series, their different possible forms and the frequently needed practical harmonic analysis that an engineer may have to make from discrete data. 2. Have grasped the concept of expression of a function, under certain conditions, as a double integral leading to identification of transform pair, and specialization on Fourier transform pair, their properties, the possible special cases with attention to their applications. 3. To have a sound knowledge of Laplace transform and its properties. To solve certain linear differential equations using the Laplace transform technique which have applications in other subjects of the current and higher semesters. 4. Have learnt the basics of Z transform in its applicability to discretely varying functions, gained the skill to formulate certain problems in terms of difference equations and solve them using the Z transform technique bringing out the elegance of the procedure involved. UNIT I - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (9)

Series solution Bessels equation Bessel function Legendres equation Legendre polynomial Rodrigues formula recurrence relation Generating Functions and orthogonal property for Bessel function of the first kind Legendre polynomial. UNIT II - FOURIER SERIES (9)

Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range sine series Half range cosine series Complex form of Fourier Series Parsevals identify Harmonic Analysis. UNIT III - FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Fourier integral theorem (without proof) Fourier transform pair Sine and Cosine transforms Properties Transforms of simple functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.

UNIT IV - LAPLACE TRANSFORM

(9)

Definition - Laplace transformssufficient conditions Basic properties Derivatives and integrals of transforms - Transforms of derivatives and integrals Initial and final value theorems Transforms of unit step function and impulse function - Transforms of periodic fractions - Inverse Laplace transform Convolution theorem Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients and first order simultaneous equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation. UNIT V - Z TRANSFORM (9)

Z-transform - Elementary properties Inverse Z transform Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations Solution of difference equations using Z transform. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S. , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi, 2004. 2. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics Volume III, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. REFERENCES 1. Wylie C. Ray and Barrett Louis, C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1995. 2. Narayanan, S., Manicavachagom Pillay, T.K. and Ramaniah, G., Advanced Mathematics for Engineering Students, Volumes II and III, S. Viswanathan (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002. 45 15 TOTAL 60

CS 5303

DATA STRUCTURES

L T 3 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To provide an in-depth knowledge in problem solving techniques and advanced representations in Data structures and algorithms OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the systematic way of solving problems 2. To learn the linear and Non linear data structures 3. To learn the representations and notations used in data structures 4. To learn the various analysis of algorithms UNIT I - PROBLEM SOLVING (8) Problem solving Top-down Design Implementation Verification Efficiency Analysis Sample algorithms. UNIT II -INTRODUCTION (9) Abstract Data Types - Time and Space Analysis of Algorithms - Big Oh and Theta Notations Average, best and worst case analysis - Simple recurrence relations and use in algorithms. UNIT III - LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (9)

Arrays, Lists, Stacks, Queues Array and Linked Structure Implementation of Lists, Stacks and Queues - Applications - Array of Nodes and Dynamic Pointer Implementation of Linked Structures - Sets, Applications of linear data structures UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (10) Trees - Binary trees - Search trees - Balanced trees - Advanced tree structures - B trees - AVL trees, 2 - 3 trees, Splay trees - applications of trees - Graphs - Directed - Shortest path Undirected graph - Minimal spanning tree - Tree traversals - Articulation points and biconnected components - Advanced Data Structures - Priority Queues - Hashing - Applications of Graphs UNIT V - ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF ALGORITHM (9)

Algorithms Analysis - Sorting - Searching - Design Techniques - Greedy Methods - Dynamic Programming - Divide and Conquer - Back Tracking - Applications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. R. G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. 2. Alfred. V. Aho, John. E. Hopcroft, Jeffrey. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Addison - Wesley Publications., 1985 3. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, Pearson Education Asia, 2004 2. Jean - Paul Tremblay, Paul. G. Sorenson, "An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications", Tata Mc Graw Hill second edition, 1991 3. Thomas. H. Cormen, Charles. E. Leiserson, Ronald. L. Rivest, "Introduction to Algorithms", PHI 1998 4. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Songuthevan Rajasekaran, "Fundamentals of Computer algorithms", Galgotial Publications Pvt. Ltd., 1999

DATA STRUCTURES LAB AIM To teach the principles of good programming practice and to give a practical training in writing efficient programs in C OBJECTIVES 1. To teach the students to write programs in C 2. To implement the various data structures as Abstract Data Types 3. To write programs to solve problems using the ADTs Implement the following exercises using C: 1. Array implementation of List Abstract Data Type (ADT) 2. Linked list implementation of List ADT 3. Array implementations of Stack ADT 4. Linked list implementations of Stack ADT 5. Array implementation of Queue ADT 6. Linked list implementation of Queue ADT 7. Balanced Parenthesis 8. Evaluating Postfix Expressions 9. Search Tree ADT - Binary Search Tree 10. Heap Sort 11. Quick Sort

CS 5304

SYSTEM SOFTWARE

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To introduce the very powerful system software programming and to have an understanding of foundations of design of assemblers, loaders, linkers, and macro processors. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the relationship between system software and machine architecture. 2. To write assembly language programs. 3. To know the design and implementation of assemblers, linkers and loaders. 4. To have an understanding of macro processors. 5. To Gain knowledge about various editors, debuggers and system software tools. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

System software and machine architecture The Simplified Instructional Computer (SIC) Machine architecture - Data and instruction formats - addressing modes - instruction sets - I/O and programming. UNIT II - ASSEMBLERS (10)

Basic assembler functions - A simple SIC assembler Assembler algorithm and data structures Machine dependent assembler features - Instruction formats and addressing modes Program relocation - Machine independent assembler features - Literals Symbol-defining statements Expressions - One pass assemblers and Multi pass assemblers - Implementation example MASM assembler. UNIT III - LOADERS AND LINKERS (9)

Basic loader functions - Design of an Absolute Loader A Simple Bootstrap Loader - Machine dependent loader features - Relocation Program Linking Algorithm and Data Structures for Linking Loader - Machine-independent loader features - Automatic Library Search Loader Options - Loader design options - Linkage Editors Dynamic Linking Bootstrap Loaders Implementation example - MSDOS linker. UNIT IV - MACRO PROCESSORS & ITS UTILITIES (9)

Basic macro processor functions - Macro Definition and Expansion Macro Processor Algorithm and data structures - Machine-independent macro processor features - Concatenation of Macro Parameters Generation of Unique Labels Conditional Macro Expansion Recursive Macro Expansions Keyword Macro Parameters Macro within Macro Macro processor design options Implementation example MASM Macro Processor ANSI C Macro language Text Editors Interactive debugging systems.

UNIT V - COMPILERS AND UTILITIES

(9)

Introduction to Compilers - Different phases of a compiler - Basic Functions - Machine dependent compiler features - Machine independent compiler features - Compiler design options - implementation examples Interpreters THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Leland L. Beck, System Software An Introduction to Systems Programming, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2000. REFERENCES 1. D. M. Dhamdhere, Systems Programming and Operating Systems, Second Revised Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999. 2. John J. Donovan, Systems Programming, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 1972.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE LAB (Using C or C++) 1. Implement a symbol table with functions to create, insert, modify, search, and display. 2. Implement pass one of a two pass assembler. 3. Implement pass two of a two pass assembler. 4. Implement a single pass assembler. 5. Implement a macro processor. 6. Implement an absolute loader. 7. Implement a relocating loader. 8. Implement pass one of a direct-linking loader. 9. Implement pass two of a direct-linking loader. 10. Implement a simple text editor with features like insertion / deletion of a character, word, and sentence. (For loader exercises, output the snap shot of the main memory as it would be, after the loading has taken place)

CS 5406

OPERATING SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To have a thorough knowledge of processes, scheduling concepts, memory management, I/O and file systems in an operating system and distributed operating system. OBJECTIVES 1. To have an overview of different types of operating systems 2. To know the components of an operating system. 3. To have a thorough knowledge of process management 4. To have a thorough knowledge of storage management 5. To know the concepts of I/O and file systems. UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS (7)

Main frame Systems Desktop Systems Multiprocessor Systems Distributed Systems Clustered Systems Real Time Systems Hand held Systems Operating Systems structures: System Components Operating System Services System Calls System Programs System Design and Implementation CPU scheduling Basic Concepts Scheduling Algorithms. UNIT II - PROCESS MANAGEMENT (11)

Process Concepts Process Scheduling Operation on Process Co operating process Inter Process Communication Threads Multithreading Models Process Synchronization The Critical Section Problem Synchronization Hardware Semaphores Classical problem of Synchronization Monitors Deadlock Deadlock Characterization Methods for handling Deadlocks Deadlock Prevention Deadlock Avoidance Deadlock Detection Recovery from Deadlock. UNIT III - MEMORY MANAGEMENT (9)

Background Swapping Contiguous Memory Allocation Paging Segmentation Segmentation with Paging Virtual Memory Demand Paging Page Replacement Thrashing. UNIT IV - FILE SYSTEMS (9)

File Concepts Access methods Directory Structure File Protection File System Implementation File System Structure and Implementation Directory Implementation Allocation methods Free Space Management Recovery Disk Structure Disk Scheduling UNIT V - DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEM (9)

Design Issues in Distributed Operating System Distributed File Systems Naming and Transparency Remote File Access Stateful versus Stateless service Distributed Coordination Event OrderingMutual Exclusion Atomicity Concurrency Control Deadlock Handling Election Algorithms

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, Operating System Concepts, Sixth Edition, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, 2003-2. 2. Pradeep K. Sinha, Distributed OS concepts and Design, IEEE computer Society Press, PHI, 1998. REFERENCES 1. Harvey M. Deitel, Operating Systems, Second Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, 2002. 2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 2003. 3. William Stallings, Operating System, Prentice Hall of India, 4th Edition, 2003. 4. Charles Crowley, Operating Systems A Design Oriented Approach, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.

OPERATING SYSTEM LAB (Implement the following on LINUX platform. Use C for high level language implementation) 1. Shell programming - command syntax - write simple functions - basic tests 2. Shell programming - loops - patterns - expansions - substitutions 3. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system: fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir 4. Write programs using the I/O system calls of UNIX operating system (open, read, write, etc) 5. Write C programs to simulate UNIX commands like ls, grep, etc. 6. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for FCFS and SJF. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 7. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for Priority and Round robin. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 8. Implement the Producer Consumer problem using semaphores. 9. Implement some memory management schemes I 10. Implement some memory management schemes II

Example for expt. 9 & 10 : Free space is maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the starting byte address and the ending byte address of a free block. Each memory request consists of the process-id and the amount of storage space required in bytes. Allocated memory space is again maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the process-id, starting byte address and the ending byte address of the allocated space. When a process finishes (taken as input) the appropriate node from the allocated list should be deleted and this free disk space should be added to the free space list. [Care should be taken to merge contiguous free blocks into one single block. This results in deleting more than one node from the free space list and changing the start and end address in the appropriate node]. For allocation use first fit, worst fit and best fit.

EC5304

DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of digital systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce number systems and codes. 2. To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions. 3. To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions. 4. To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits. 5. To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices. UNIT I - BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES AND GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION

(9)

Basic definitions- Axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra- basic theorems and properties of Boolean algebra- Boolean functions- Canonical and standard forms- Other logic operationsDigital logic gates- Integrated circuits- The map method- Four-variable map- Five variable mapProduct of sums simplification- Dont-care conditions- AND and NOR implementation- Other two-level implementations- Exclusive-OR function- Hardware description language (HDL) UNIT II - COMBINATIONAL LOGIC (9)

Combinational circuits- Analysis procedure- Design procedure- binary adder-subtractorDecimal adder- Binary multiplier- magnitude comparator- Decoders- Encoders- MultiplexersHDL for combinational circuits. UNIT III - SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC- REGISTERS AND COUNTERS (9) Sequential circuits- Latches- Flip-flops- Analysis of clocked sequential Circuits- HDL for sequential circuits- State reduction and assignment-Design procedure- Registers- Shift registersRipple counters- SynchronousCounters- Other counters- HDL for registers and counters. UNIT IV- MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC AND REGISTER TRANSFER LEVEL (9) Introduction- Random-access memory- Memory decoding-Error detection and correction- Readonly memory- programmable logic array- Programmable array logic- sequential Programmable devices- Register transfer level (RTL) notation- Register transfer level in HDL- Algorithmic state machines (ASM)- Design example- HDL description of design example- Binary multiplierControl logic- HDL description of binary multiplier- Design with multiplexers.

UNIT V - DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND VHDLL

(9)

Introduction- Special characteristics- Bipolar-transistor characteristics- RTL and DTL circuitsTransistor-transistor logic (TTL)- Emitter-coupled logic (ECL)- Metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)- Complementary MOS (CMOS)-CMOS transmission gate circuits- Switch-level modeling with HDL-Introduction to VHDL. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. M. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Prentice-Hall of India, Private Limited, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Switching and finite automate theory by Zvi Kohavi- Tata McGraw Hill- 2nd editionSwitching and logic design CVS Rao- Pearson- 2005. Switching Theory and Logic Design R.P. Jain- TMH Edition- 2003. An Engineering Approach to Digital Design Fletcher- PHI.

EC 5304

DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM DESIGN LAB

AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Digital and logic designing and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates. 2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates (i) BCD to excess-3 code and voice versa (ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa 3. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ subtractor and BCD adder using IC 7483 4. Design and implementation of2Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates 8 Bit Magnitude Comparator using IC 7485 5. Design and implementation of 16 bit odd/even parity checker generator using IC74180. 6. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic gates and study of IC74150 and IC 74154 7. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates and study of IC7445 and IC74147 8. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 / Mod-12 Ripple counters 9. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter. 10. Implementationof SISO- SIPO- PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip- flops

EE5305 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING & CONTROL SYSTEMS AIM

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines and transmission and distribution of electrical power. OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on 1. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of D.C. machines. 2. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of transformers. 3. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of induction motors. 4. Constructional details and principle of operation of alternators and special machines. 5. To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems UNIT 1- DC CIRCUITS & D.C MACHINES (9)

Electrical quantities Ohms Law Kirchoffs Laws resistors inductors capacitors series and parallel circuits simple problems Construction and principle of operation of DC machines generator/motor characteristics and applications UNIT II - AC CIRCUITS& AC MACHINES (9)

Sinusoidal functions- RMS Effective values - form and peak factors RLC circuits, power and power factor simple problems. Construction and principle of operation of AC machines, alternators three phase and single phase induction motors. UNIT III - SYSTEMS & THEIR REPRESENTATION (9)

Open loop and closed loop control systems- Transfer function- poles and zeros block diagram representation block diagram reduction signal flow graph Masons gain formulacharacteristics equations concept of stability Rouths stability criterion. UNIT IV - FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9)

Frequency domain analysis- Introduction Bode plot polar plot Log magnitude Vs Phase plot closed loop frequency response Frequency domain specifications gain margin phase margin. UNIT V - CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (9)

Control system components- Electrical systems DC motor DC servomotor AC servo motorBasic principle of operation and transfer function of gyroscope stepper motor.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. T. Thyagarajan, K.P. Sendur Chelvi and T.R. Rangaswamy, Engineering basicsNew Age international publishers, 2001. 2. Paranjothi S. R , Electric Circuit analysis, New Age International Ltd,Delhi ,2nd Edition, 2000. 3. Nagrath I.J and Kothari D.P., Electric Machines ,T.H.H Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1990. 4. V.K. Mehta, Principles of Electronics, S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2000. 5. Kastuhiko Ogata, Modern control engineering, second edition Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1991. 6. Nagarath I.J and Gopal M, Control System, Engineering, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi, 1992. REFERENCES 1. T. Thyagarajan, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, SciTech publications (Ind.) Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, October 2000. 2. Sudhakar A. and Shyam Mohan S.P, Circuits and Network Analysis and 3. Synthesis, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994. 4. Theraja B. L and Theraja A. K, Electrical Technology, Nirja Construction & Development company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Volume II,22nd Edition,1997. 5. Say M. G, Alternating Current Machines, ELBS and Pitman, London, 5th Edition,1992. 6. Kuo B.C.- Automatic control systems, Prentice Hall of Delhi Sixth edition, 1991.

EE 5305 AIM

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING & CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB

To expose the students to the basic operations of electrical machines and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verification of Kirchoffs laws Verification of superposition theorem Verification of Thevenins theorem in d.c. circuits. Verification of generalised Reciprocity theorem in a d.c. circuit. RLC series parallel circuit Measurement of current in various branches and verification by calculation drawing Phasor diagram. 6. Study of voltage current relationship of series circuit with given RLC elements and condition for series resonance. 7. Single phase power measurement using a wattmeter determination of thermal efficiency of a kettle. 8. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by a) three voltmeter method b) verification using wattmeter. 9. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by a) three ammeter method b) verification using wattmeter. 10. Measurement of power in three-phase circuits.

EC 5305 AIM

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To study and analyze characteristics of continuous- discrete signals and systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the properties and representation of discrete and continuous signals. 2. To study the sampling process and analysis of discrete systems using z-transforms. 3. To study the analysis and synthesis of discrete time systems. UNIT I - REPRESENTATION OF SIGNALS (9)

Continuous and discrete time signals: Classification of Signals Periodic aperiodic even odd energy and power signals Deterministic and random signals complex exponential and sinusoidal signals periodicity properties of discrete time complex exponential unit impulse unit step impulse functions Transformation in independent variable of signals: time scalingtime shifting.Determination of Fourier series representation of continuous time and discrete time periodic signals Explanation of properties of continuous time and discrete time Fourier series. UNIT II - ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS (9)

Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform analysis with examples properties of the Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform basic properties- Parsevals relation- and convolution in time and frequency domains.Basic properties of continuous time systems: Linearity- Causality- time invariance- stability- magnitude and Phase representations of frequency response of LTI systems -Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform: Computation of impulse response and transfer function using Laplace transform. UNIT III - SAMPLING THEOREM AND Z-TRANSFORMS (9)

Representation of continuous time signals by its sample - Sampling theorem Reconstruction of a Signal from its samples- aliasing discrete time processing of continuous time signalssampling of band pass signals Basic principles of z-transform - z-transform definition region of convergence properties of ROC Properties of z-transform Poles and Zeros inverse ztransform using Contour integration - Residue Theorem- Power Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion- Relationship between z-transform and Fourier transform. UNIT IV - DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS (9)

Computation of Impulse & response & Transfer function using Z Transform. DTFT Properties and examples LTI-DT systems -Characterization using difference equation Block diagram representation Properties of convolution and the interconnection of LTI Systems Causality and stability of LTI Systems.

UNIT V -SYSTEMS WITH FINITE AND INFINITE DURATION IMPULSE RESPONSE

(9)

Systems with finite duration and infinite duration impulse response recursive and non-recursive discrete time system realization structures direct form I- direct form II- Transposecascade and parallel forms. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. AlanV.Oppenheim- Alan S.Willsky with S.Hamid Nawab- Signals & Systems- 2nd edn.Pearson Education- 1997. REFERENCES 1. John G.Proakis and Dimitris G.Manolakis- Digital Signal Processing- PrinciplesAlgorithms and Applications- 3rd edn.- PHI- 2000. 2. M.J.Roberts- Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform method and MATLABTMH 2003. 3. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen- Signals and Systems- John Wiley- 1999 4. K.Lindner- Signals and Systems- McGraw Hill International- 1999. Moman .H. Hays- Digital Signal Processing - Schaums outlines- Tata McGraw-Hill Co. Ltd.- 2004. 5. Ashok Amhardar- Analog and Digital Signal Processing- 2nd Edition Thomson

EC 5305

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LAB

AIM To introduce the student to various Signals techniques using MATLAB. A LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB/SCILAB/OCTAVE/WAB 1. Verification of sampling theorem. 2. Impulse response of a given system 3. Linear convolution of two given sequences. 4. Circular convolution of two given sequences 5. Autocorrelation of a given sequence and verification of its properties. 6. Cross correlation of given sequences and verification of its properties. 7. Solving a given difference equation. 8. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum. 9. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT. 10. Linear convolution of two sequences using IDFT.

MA5403

STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS AND QUEUEING THEORY

L T P Total 32 0 150

AIM The probabilistic models are employed in countless applications in all areas of science and engineering. Queuing theory provides models for a number of situations that arise in real life. The course aims at providing necessary mathematical support and confidence to solve real life problems. OBJECTIVES 1 Have a well established knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena. 2 Acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of random variables. 3 Understand and characterize phenomena which evolve with respect to time in a probabilistic manner. 4 Be exposed to basic characteristic features of a queuing system and acquire skills in analyzing queuing models. (9)

UNIT I - RANDOM VARIABLES

Random variable - Probability mass function - Probability density function - Properties Moments - Moment generating functions and their properties. Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions Transformation of random variables - Central limit theorem. UNIT II - STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9)

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Negative Binomial, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their properties - Functions of a random variable. UNIT III - RANDOM PROCESSES AND MARKOV CHAINS (9)

Classification - Stationary process - Markov process - Poisson process - Birth and death process Markov chains - Transition probabilities - Limiting distributions. UNIT IV - QUEUEING THEORY (9)

Markovian models M/M/1, M/M/C , finite and infinite capacity - M/M/ queues - Finite source model - M/G/1 queue (steady state solutions only) Pollaczek Khintchine formula.

UNIT V - RELIABILITY

(9)

Concepts of Reliability Hazard functions Series and Parallel Systems Reliability and Availability of Markovian systems Maintainability Preventive maintainance.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXT BOOKS

45 15 60

1. Peebles Jr. P.Z., Probability Random Variables and Random Signal Principles, Tata Mcgraw Hill publishers, Fourth Edition, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Ross, S., A first course in probability, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Medhi J., Stochastic Processes, New Age Publishers, New Delhi, 1994. Veerarajan., T., Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2003. Allen., A.O., Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory, Academic press, New Delhi, 1981. Gross, D. and Harris, C.M., Fundamentals of Queuing theory, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, New York, 1985.

EC 5406

ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To study the various communication fundamentals viz.- Amplitude modulation and demodulation- angle modulation and demodulation. Noise performance of various receivers and information theory with source coding theorem are also dealt. OBJECTIVES 1. To provide various Amplitude modulation and demodulation systems. 2. To provide various Angle modulation and demodulation systems. 3. To provide some depth analysis in noise performance of various receiver. 4. To study some basic information theory with some channel coding theorem. UNIT I - AMPLITUDE MODULATION -TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION (9) Principles of amplitude modulation - AM envelope- frequency spectrum and bandwidthmodulation index and percent modulation- AM power distribution- AM modulator circuits low level AM modulator- medium power AM modulator- AM transmitters Low level transmittershigh level transmitters- receiver parameters- AM reception AM receivers TRF- super heterodyne receiver- double conversion AM receivers. UNIT II - ANGLE MODULATION-TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION (9)

Angle modulation - FM and PM waveforms- phase deviation and modulation index- frequency deviation- phase and frequency modulators and demodulators- frequency spectrum of Angle modulated waves. Bandwidth requirements for Angle-modulated waves- commercial Broadcast band FM- Average power of an angle-modulated wave- frequency and phase modulators- A direct FM transmitters- Indirect transmitters- Angle modulation Vs amplitude modulation- FM receivers: FM demodulators- PLL FM demodulators- FM noise suppression- frequency verses phase modulation. UNIT III - DIGITAL TRANSMISSION AND DATA COMMUNICATION (9)

Introduction- pulse modulation- PCM PCM sampling- sampling rate- signal to quantization noise rate- companding analog and digital percentage error- delta modulation- adaptive delta modulation- differential pulse code modulation- pulse transmission ISI- eyepattern- Data communication history- standards- data communication circuits- data communication codesError control- Hardware- serial and parallel interfaces- data modems- - Asynchronous modemSynchronous modem- low-speed modem- medium and high speed modem- modem control. UNIT IV - DIGITAL COMMUNICATION (9)

Introduction- Shannon limit for information capacity- digital amplitude modulation- frequency shift keying- FSK bit rate and baud- FSK transmitter- BW consideration of FSK- FSK receiver-

phase shift keying binary phase shift keying QPSK- Quadrature Amplitude modulationbandwidth efficiency- carrier recovery squaring loop- Costas loop- DPSK. UNIT V - SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES (9)

Introduction- Pseudo-noise sequence- DS spread spectrum with coherent binary PSK- processing gain- FH spread spectrum- multiple access techniques wireless communication- TDMA and FDMA- wireless communication systems- source coding of speech for wireless communications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Wayne Tomasi- Electronic Communication Systems: Fundamentals Through Advanced- Pearson Education- 2001 2. Simon Haykin- Communication Systems- 4th Edition- John Wiley & Sons.- 2001. REFERENCES 1. Blake- Electronic Communication Systems- Thomson Delmar Publications- 2002. 2. Martin S.Roden- Analog and Digital Communication System- 3rd Edition- PHI- 2002.

ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operations of analog & digital communication and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Characteristics of AM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity) 2. Characteristics of FM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity) 3. Sampling & time division multiplexing 4. Pulse modulation- PAM / PWM /PPM 5. Pulse code modulation 6. Line coding & Decoding 7. Delta modulation / Differential pulse code modulation 8. Digital modulation ASK 9. Digital modulation PSK 10. Digital modulation QPSK 11. Digital modulation FSK

EC 5407 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the architecture programming and interfacing of microprocessors and microcontrollers. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8085 microprocessor. 2. To introduce the interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor. 3. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8086 microprocessor. 4. To introduce the architecture, programming and interfacing of 8051 microcontroller. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION OF 8085 (9)

Organization of 8085 microprocessor-Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assemblylanguage programming-machine cycles-Read,Write-Interrupt acknowledge-Buscycles-states-Wait stateHALT and HOLD state-State transition sequence of 8085. UNIT II - 8086 CPU (9)

Organisation of 8086 microprocessor-memory segmentation-Addressing bytes and wordsAddress formation-Addressing modes in 8086-Assembly language programming-minimum mode and maximum mode-Bus arbitration in minimum mode and maximum mode multiprocessing. UNIT III- PERIPHERALS INTERFACING (9)

Input/Output Interface - Printer interface using 8259 - CRT interface -Keyboard/Display interfacing - A/D and D/A interface - Data acquisition systems - Interfacing high power devices Methods ofparallel data transfer - Programmable parallel ports - 8255 PPI - Serial Communication - Asynchronous - Synchronous - 8251A Programmable communication interface - DMA - 8237 - Programmable DMA Controller UNIT IV - 8051 MICROCONTROLLER (9)

Organisation of 8051 microcontroller-I/Oports-External memory-Counter and Timers-Serial data input and output-Interrupts -Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assembly language programming. UNIT V- APPLICATIONS OF 8085 AND 8086 (9)

Microprocessor development system- applications - Temperature controller - Stepper motor controller. Data transfer schemes-Programmed data transfer-Synchronous transferAsynchronous transfer-Interrupt driven I/O-types of interrupts-8085 and 8086-direct memory access data transfer-DMA transfer in a 8085 based system- DMA protocols in 8086 in minimum and maximum mode-types of DMA.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ramesh.S.Gaonkar "Microprocessor architecture,programming & applications with 8085/8080A" -Penram International - 1997. 2. Yu.Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, "Microcomputer system, 8086/8088 family"-2nd Edition - PHI-1986. REFERENCES 1. Douglas V.Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing: Programming and Hardware, TMH, Third edition 2. Yu-cheng Liu, Glenn A.Gibson, Microcomputer systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family architecture, Programming and Design, PHI 2003 3. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, The 8051 microcontroller and embedded systems, Pearson education, 2004.

MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of microprocessors and help them to develop experimental skills.

(Write programs using assemblers for 8085, 8086 and 8051) List of Experiments1. 8085 Assembly Language program 2. Multibyte Addition and Subtraction Multibyte decimal addition and subtraction. 3. Multiplication and division - repetitive addition and use of a register shifting operation Signed and unsigned numbers. 4. 8086 Assembly Language Program5. Search and Sort, Programs involving string instructions. 6. Simple program using 8051 Assembly Language. 7. Study of programmable I/O ports of 8051 microcontroller. 8. Study of interrupt structure of 8085, 8086 and 8051. 9. D/A converter and waveform generation. 10. Stepper motor controller interface. 11. DC motor speed controller interface. 12. 8279 Keyboard/display controller - Keyboard scan - blinking and rolling display.

CS 5406

OPERATING SYSTEMS

LT 3 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To have a thorough knowledge of processes, scheduling concepts, memory management, I/O and file systems in an operating system and distributed operating system. OBJECTIVES 1. To have an overview of different types of operating systems 2. To know the components of an operating system. 3. To have a thorough knowledge of process management 4. To have a thorough knowledge of storage management 5. To know the concepts of I/O and file systems. UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS (7)

Main frame Systems Desktop Systems Multiprocessor Systems Distributed Systems Clustered Systems Real Time Systems Hand held Systems Operating Systems structures:System Components Operating System Services System Calls System Programs SystemDesign and Implementation CPU scheduling Basic Concepts Scheduling Algorithms. UNIT II - PROCESS MANAGEMENT (11)

Process Concepts Process Scheduling Operation on Process Co operating process Inter Process Communication Threads Multithreading Models Process Synchronization The Critical Section Problem Synchronization Hardware Semaphores Classical problem of Synchronization Monitors Deadlock Deadlock Characterization Methods for handling Deadlocks Deadlock Prevention Deadlock Avoidance Deadlock Detection Recovery from Deadlock. UNIT III - MEMORY MANAGEMENT (9)

Background Swapping Contiguous Memory Allocation Paging Segmentation Segmentation with Paging Virtual Memory Demand Paging Page Replacement Thrashing. UNIT IV - FILE SYSTEMS (9)

File Concepts Access methods Directory Structure File Protection File System Implementation File System Structure and Implementation Directory Implementation Allocation methods Free Space Management Recovery Disk Structure Disk Scheduling.

UNIT V - DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEM

(9)

Design Issues in Distributed Operating System Distributed File Systems Naming and Transparency Remote File Access Stateful versus Stateless service Distributed Coordination Event OrderingMutual Exclusion Atomicity Concurrency Control Deadlock Handling Election Algorithms THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, Operating System Concepts, Sixth Edition, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, 2003.. 2. Pradeep K. Sinha, Distributed OS concepts and Design, IEEE computer Society Press, PHI,1998. REFERENCES 1. Harvey M. Deitel, Operating Systems, Second Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, 2002. 2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 2003. 3. William Stallings, Operating System, Prentice Hall of India, 4th Edition, 2003. 4. Charles Crowley, Operating Systems A Design Oriented Approach, Tata McGraw Hill,1999.

OPERATING SYSTEM LAB (Implement the following on LINUX platform. Use C for high level language implementation) 1. Shell programming - command syntax - write simple functions - basic tests 2. Shell programming - loops - patterns - expansions - substitutions 3. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system: fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir 4. Write programs using the I/O system calls of UNIX operating system (open, read, write, etc) 5. Write C programs to simulate UNIX commands like ls, grep, etc. 6. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for FCFS and SJF. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 7. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for Priority and Round robin. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 8. Implement the Producer Consumer problem using semaphores. 9. Implement some memory management schemes I 10. Implement some memory management schemes II Example for expt 9 & 10 : Free space is maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the starting byte address and the ending byte address of a free block. Each memory request consists of the process-id and the amount of storage space required in bytes. Allocated memory space is again maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the process-id, starting byte address and the ending byte address of the allocated space. When a process finishes (taken as input) the appropriate node from the allocated list should be deleted and this free disk space should be added to the free space list. [Care should be taken to merge contiguous free blocks into one single block. This results in deleting more than one node from the free space list and changing the start and end address in the appropriate node]. For allocation use first fit, worst fit and best fit.

CS 5407

VISUAL PROGRAMMING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide a strong foundation in Visual Programming concepts. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the concepts of windows programming 2. To introduce GUI programming using Microsoft Foundation Classes 3. Visual C++ and Visual JAVA Programming 4. Java Applets and Networking concepts UNIT I - WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (8)

Windows environment a simple windows program windows and messages creating the window displaying the window message loop the window procedure message processing text output painting and repainting introduction to GDI device context basic drawing child window controls UNIT II - VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION (8)

Application Framework MFC library Visual C++ Components Event Handling Mapping modes colors fonts modal and modeless dialog windows common controls bitmaps UNIT III -THE DOCUMENT VIEW ARCHITECTURE AND ACTIVEX CONTROL (10) Menus Keyboard accelerators rich edit control toolbars status bars reusable frame window base class reading and writing SDI and MDI documents creating DLLs dialog based applications - ActiveX controls Vs. Ordinary Windows Controls create ActiveX control at runtime Component Object Model (COM) containment and aggregation Vs. inheritance OLE drag and drop sample applications UNIT IV - ADVANCED CONCEPTS (9)

Database Management with Microsoft ODBC Structured Query Language MFC ODBC classes sample database applications filter and sort strings DAO concepts displaying database records in scrolling view Threading VC++ Networking issues Winsock WinInet building a web client Internet Information Server ISAPI server extension chat application playing and multimedia (sound and video) files UNIT V VISUAL JAVA (10)

Java basics - Java classes - Object references - Inheritance - Exception handling - File I/O - Java tools - Developing Java applications - Visual J++ Applet wizard - Handling events Multithreading .

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Charles Petzold, Windows Programming, Microsoft press, 1996 2. David J.Kruglinski, George Shepherd and Scot Wingo, Programming Visual C++, Microsoft press, 1999 3. Kate Gregory "Using Visual C++", Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 1999 4. H. M. Deitel and P. J. Deitel, "Java how to program with an Introduction to Visual J++", Prentice Hall, 1998

REFERENCES 1. Steve Holtzner, Visual C++ 6 Programming, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., 2003. 2. C. H. Pappas, W. H. Murray, III "Visual C++: The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 1999 3. Stephen R.Davis, "Lean Java Now", Microsoft Press, 1996

VISUAL PROGRAMMING LAB Windows SDK / Visual C++ 1. 2. 3. Writing code for keyboard and mouse events. Dialog Based applications Creating MDI applications

Visual C++ 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Threads Document view Architecture, Serialization Dynamic controls Menu, Accelerator, Tool tip, Tool bar Creating DLLs and using them Data access through ODBC Creating ActiveX control and using it

EC5408 AIM

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To study the signal processing methods and processors. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To Study DFT and Its Computation To Study the Design Techniques for Digital Filters To Study the Finite Word Length Effects In Signal Processing To Study the Non-Parametric Methods of Power Spectrum Estimations To Study the Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processors. (9)

UNIT I - APPLICATIONS OF Z TRANSFORMS

System functions H(Z) of Digital Systems, Stability Analysis, Structure and Realization of Digital Filters, Finite Word Length Effects. UNIT II - DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT) (9)

Properties of The DFS, DFS Representation of Periodic sequences, Properties of DFT, Convolution of Sequences. UNIT III - FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMS (FFT) Radix 2 Decimation in Time (DIT) and Decimation In Frequency (DIF), FFT Algorithms, Inverse FFT. UNIT IV - IIR DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN TECHNIQUES (9) (9)

Design of IIR Filters from Analog Filters, Analog Filters Approximations (Butterworth and Chebyshev Approximation). Frequency transformations, General Considerations in Digital Filter Design, Bilinear Transformation Method, step and Impulse invariance Technique. UNIT V - DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS: (9)

Fourier series Method, Window Function Techniques, Comparison of IIR and FIR Filters. Applications of FFT in Spectrum Analysis and Filtering, Application of DSP in Speech Processing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. John G Proakis and Dimtris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application, PHI/Pearson Education, 2000, 3rd Edition.

REFERENCES 1. Sanjit K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing A Computer Based Approach, Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Raddar and Rabiner, Application of Digital Signal Processing. 3. S.P.Eugene Xavier, Signals, Systems and Signal Processing.S.Chand and Co. Ltd. 4. Antonio, Analysis and Design of Digital Filters, Tata McGraw Hill.

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB AIM To introduce the student to various digital Signal Processing techniques using TMS 320c5x family processors and MATLAB. 1. Verification of sampling theorem. 2. Impulse response of a given system 3. Linear convolution of two given sequences. 4. Circular convolution of two given sequences 5. Autocorrelation of a given sequence and verification of its properties. 6. Cross correlation of given sequences and verification of its properties. 7. Solving a given difference equation. 8. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase Spectrum. 9. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT. 10. Linear convolution of two sequences using IDFT.

MA5507 AIM

MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATION FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

To extend the students mathematical aptitude and ability to deal with abstraction and to introduce most of the basic terminologies used in computer science courses and applying the solutions for the day-to-day practical problems. OBJECTIVES 1 To have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the logic of a program. 2 To gain knowledge this has application in expert system, in data base management and a basic for the prolog language. 3 To have an understanding in identifying patterns on many levels. 4 Be aware of a class of functions which transform a finite set into another finite set which relates to input output functions in computer science. UNIT I - SET THEORY (9) Basic concepts Notations Subset Algebra of sets The power set Ordered pairs and Cartesian product Relations on sets Types of relations and their properties Relational matrix and the graph of a relation Partitions Equivalence relations Partial ordering Poset Hasse diagram Lattices and their properties Sublattices Boolean algebra Homomorphism. UNIT II - FUNCTIONS (9)

Definitions of functions Classification of functions Type of functions - Examples Composition of functions Inverse functions Binary and n-ary operations Characteristic function of a set Hashing functions Recursive functions Permutation functions. UNIT III MATHEMATICAL LOGIC (9)

Propositions and logical operators Truth table Propositions generated by a set, equivalence and implication Basic laws Some more connectives Functionally complete set of connectives Normal forms Proofs in Propositional calculus predicate calculus. UNIT IV - FORMAL LANGUAGES (9)

Languages and grammars phrase structure grammars classification of grammars pumping lemma for regular languages context free languages. UNIT V - AUTOMATA THEORY (9)

Finite state automata Deterministic Finite state automata (DFA) Non Deterministic Finite state automata (NFA) Equivalence of DFA and NFA - Equivalence of NFA regular languages.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3.

45 15 60

Trembly J.P and Manohar R, Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer Science, Tata McGrawHill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. Hoperoft and Ullman, Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and computations , Narosa Publication House, Delhi, 2002. A. Tamilarasi & A.M. Natarajan, Discrete mathematics and its application, Khanna Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Ralph. P. Grimaldi, Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, Delhi, 2002. Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Busby, Sharan Cutler Ross, Discrete Mathematical Structures, Fourth Indian reprint, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. Kenneth H.Rosen, Discrete Mathematics and its Applications, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. Richard Johnsonbaugh, Discrete Mathematics, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002.

CS 5508

ADVANCED JAVA

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide the in depth knowledge of Advanced java language and programming OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the fundamentals of java 2. To gain knowledge on Java Data structure 3. To learn the Java Networking and Beans UNIT I - JAVA FUNDAMENTALS (8)

Java fundamentals - IO Streaming- Threading concepts - Networking features - Byte code interpretation - Media Techniques. UNIT II - JAVA DATA STRUCTURES Lists - Linear Structures - Ordered Structures - Sorting Trees UNIT III - ADVANCED NETWORKING AND BEANS (9) (10)

Client - Sever computing - Sockets - Content and Protocols handlers - Developing distributed applications - RMI - Remote objects - Object serialization - Bean Concepts - Events in Bean Box - Bean customization and persistence. UNIT IV - JAVA DATABASE PROGRAMMING (9)

Connecting to Databases - JDBC principles - Databases access - Interacting - Database search Accessing Multimedia databases - Database support in Web applications. UNIT V - RELATED JAVA TECHNIQUES (9)

3D graphics - JAR file format and creation - Internationalization - Swing Programming Advanced Java Scripting Techniques. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Jame Jaworski, "Java Unleashed", SAMS Techmedia Publications, 1999 2. Herbert Schildt, "the Java 2 : Complete Reference", Fourth edition, TMH, 2002 REFERENCES 1. Campione, Walrath and Huml, "The Java Tutorial", Addison Wesley, 1999

2. Duane A. Bailey, "Java Structures", McGraw - Hill Publications, 1999 3. Jeff Frentzen and Sobotka, "Java Script", Tata McGraw - Hill, 1999

JAVA LABORARTORY JAVA BASICS I 1. Programs illustrating class, objects and methods 2. Programs illustrating Overloading in Java 3. Programs illustrating the implementation of Various forms of Inheritance( Single, Hierarchical, Multilevel ) 4. Programs illustrating Overriding methods in Java 5. Programs illustrating Exception Handling JAVA BASICS II 6. Programs illustrating Interfaces in Java 7. Programs to create Packages in Java 8. Programs illustrating Threads in Java JAVA APPLETS 9. Programs to write applets to draw the various shapes 10. Programs to manipulate labels, lists, text fields and panels 11. Programs to handle mouse events 12. Programs using layout mangers

CS 5509 AIM

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To provide an in-depth understanding of the Software Engineering principles and methodologies OBJECTIVES To be aware of 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Planning and Estimation of Software projects Different life cycle models Software Requirements Specification, Software Design Concepts Implementation issues, Validation and Verification Procedures and testing strategies Maintenance of Software and methodologies Use of CASE tools (9)

UNIT I - SOFTWARE PROCESS

Introduction A Generic View of Processes Process Maturity Process Models Agile Process and Models Software project planning: Importance of software - Introduction Defining the problem - Developing a solution strategy - Planning and development process Other planning activities. Software Cost Estimation Introduction - Software cost factors - cost estimation techniques - Staffing level estimation - Estimating software maintenance costs- Risk Analysis S/W Engineering Paradigm system engineering system engineering hierarchy computer based system verification validation life cycle process development process . UNIT II - SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (9)

Introduction requirement engineering process feasibility studies requirements elicitation validation and management software prototyping prototyping in the software process rapid prototyping techniques user interface prototyping -The software requirement specifications S/W document. Analysis and modeling data, functional and behavioral models structured analysis and data dictionary. UNIT III - DESIGN CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES (9)

Design process and concepts modular design design model and document. Architectural design software architecture data design architectural design transform and transaction mapping user interface design user interface design principles. Real time systems - Real time software design system design real time executives data acquisition system - monitoring and control system. SCM Need for SCM Version control Introduction to SCM process Software configuration items.

UNIT IV TESTING AND IMPLEMENTATION

(9)

Software Testing Issues Test Strategies for Conventional and Object Oriented Software Validation and System Testing Testing Tactics White Box Testing Basis Path Testing Control Structure Testing Black Box Testing Object Oriented Testing Testing GUI Testing Client/Server Test Documentation. Implementation Issues: Introduction - Structured coding techniques - Coding style - Standards and guidelines - Documentation guidelines.Modern Programming Languages Features: The translation process - PL characteristics - PL fundamentals: Type checking - Separate compilation - User defined data types - Data abstraction - Scoping rules - Excepting handling - Concurrency mechanisms UNIT V VERIFICATION, VALIDATION AND MANAGEMENT (9)

Introduction - Quality assurance - Walk through and inspections - Static analysis - Symbolic execution - Unit testing and debugging - System testing - Formal verification. Software Maintenance: Introduction - Enhancing maintainability during development - Source code metrics - Other maintenance tools and techniques. Measures and measurements S/W complexity and science measure size measure data and logic structure measure information flow measure. Scheduling Earned Value Analysis Error Tracking - Software changes program evolution dynamics. Taxonomy of CASE tools. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Roger S. Pressman, Software engineering- A practitioners Approach, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th edition, 2001. REFERENCES 1. Ian Sommerville, Software engineering, Pearson education Asia, 6th edition, 2000. 2. Pankaj Jalote- An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Springer Verlag, 1997. 3. James F Peters and Witold Pedryez, Software Engineering An Engineering Approach, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2000. 4. Ali Behforooz and Frederick J Hudson, Software Engineering Fundamentals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 1996.

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING LAB Develop two or three of the following applications using the software engineering methodologies given below using C/C++ as front end and MS-ACCESS as Backend. Requirements Analysis Design Concepts Function Point Analysis Implementation Software Testing Techniques Error Tracking Suggested List of Applications: Library Management System Bank Management System Inventory System Software for a Game Text Editor Natural Language Based Grammar Checker Airline Reservation System Online Survey Financial Accounting System Graphics Toolkit

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

CS 5510

COMPILER DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM At the end of the course the student will be able to design and implement a simple compiler. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand, design and implement a lexical analyzer. 2. To understand, design and implement a parser. 3. To understand, design code generation schemes. 4. To understand optimization of codes and runtime environment. UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS (9)

Basic Concepts Compilers Analysis of the source program Grammar Language Cousins of the Compiler Parts of a Compiler Grouping of Phases Compiler Construction ToolsLexical Analysis Role of Lexical Analyzer Input Buffering Specification of Tokens. UNIT II - LEXICAL ANALYZER (8)

Role of a Lexical Analyzer Operator Precedent Parsing LR Parsers SLR Parser Canonical LR Parser LALR Parser- Input Buffering Specification and Recognition of Tokens Finite Automata Regular Expression to Finite Automation Optimization of DFA based Pattern Matchers Use of a Tool for Generating Lexical Analyzer. UNIT III - SYNTAX ANALYZER (8)

Role of a Parser Context Free Grammars Writing Grammars Top Down parsing Recursive Descent Parsing Predictive Parsing Bottom-up parsing Use of a Tool to Generate Parsers. UNIT IV - INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION (8)

Intermediate Languages Declaration Assignment Statements Boolean Expressions Case Statements - Flow Control Statements Back Patching Procedure calls. UNIT V - CODE GENERATION AND OPTIMISATION (12)

Issues in the design of code generator The target machine Runtime Storage management Basic Blocks and Flow Graphs Next-use Information A simple Code generator DAG representation of Basic Blocks Peephole Optimization. Introduction Principal Sources of Optimization Optimization of basic Blocks Introduction to Global Data Flow Analysis Runtime Environments Source Language issues Storage Organization Storage Allocation strategies Access to non-local names Parameter Passing

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. A.V. Aho, Ravi Sethi, J.D. Ullman, Compilers, Principles, Techniques and Tools, Addison Wesley, 1988. REFERENCES 1. Fischer Leblanc, Benjamin Cummings, Crafting Compiler , Menlo Park, 1988. 2. Kennath C.Louden, Compiler Construction Principles and Practice, Vikas publishing House, 2003. 3. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

9.

10.

COMPILER DESIGN LAB Implement a lexical analyzer in C. Use LEX tool to implement a lexical analyzer. Implement a recursive descent parser for an expression grammar that generates arithmetic expressions with digits, + and *. Use YACC and LEX to implement a parser for the same grammar as given in problem Implement the LR and SLR parser using YACC and LEX. Write semantic rules to the LEX program in problem above and implement a calculator that takes an expression with digits, + and * and computes and prints its value. Write semantic rules to the YACC program in problem above and implement a calculator that takes an expression with digits, + and * and computes and prints its value. Implement the front end of a compiler that generates the three address code for a simple language with: one data type integer, arithmetic operators, relational operators, variable declaration statement, one conditional construct, one iterative construct and assignment statement. Implement the back end of the compiler which takes the three address code generated in problems used above, and produces the 8086 assembly language instructions that can be assembled and run using a 8086 assembler. The target assembly instructions can be simple move, add, sub, jump. Also simple addressing modes are used. Implement a Syntax analyzer in C.

CS 5511

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide a strong foundation in database technology and an introduction to the current trends in this field. OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the fundamentals of data models and to conceptualize and depict a database system using ER diagram. 2. To make a study of SQL and relational database design. 3. To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing techniques which will help in physical DB design. 4. To know the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency control techniques and recovery procedure. 5. To have an introductory knowledge about the emerging trends in the area of distributed DB- OO DB- Data mining and Data Warehousing and XML. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION AND CONCEPTUAL MODELING (8)

Introduction to File and Database systems- Database system structure Software architecture of a typical DBMS-Data Models, Schemas and Instances- ER and EER diagrams and Data Flow Diagrams Data Models Introduction to Network and Hierarchical Models ER model. UNIT II - RELATIONAL MODEL (9)

Introduction to Relational Model Relational Algebra and Calculus. SQL Data definitionQueries in SQL- Updates- Views Integrity and Security Relational Database design Functional dependences and Normalization for Relational Databases (up to BCNF). UNIT III- DATA STORAGE AND QUERY PROCESSING (9)

Record storage and Primary file organization- Secondary storage Devices- Operations on FilesHeap File- Sorted Files- Hashing Techniques Index Structure for files Different types of Indexes- B-Tree - B+Tree Query Processing. UNIT IV -TRANSACTION MANAGEMENT (9)

Transaction Processing Introduction- Need for Concurrency control- Desirable properties of Transaction- Schedule and Recoverability- Serializability and Schedules Concurrency Control Types of Locks- Two Phases locking- Deadlock- Time stamp based concurrency control Recovery Techniques Concepts- Immediate Update- Deferred Update - Shadow Paging.

UNIT V PARALLEL DATABASE AND CURRENT TRENDS

(10)

Parallel databases - Parallel Architectures, performance measures, shared nothing/ shared disk/ shared memory based architectures. Object Oriented Databases Need for Complex Data types- OO data Model- Nested relationsComplex Types- Inheritance Reference Types - Distributed databases- Homogenous and Heterogenous- Distributed data Storage Data Mining and Data Warehousing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan- Database System Concepts, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Ramez Elmasri and Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamental Database Systems, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Database Management System, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2003. 3. Hector GarciaMolina, Jeffrey D.Ullman and Jennifer Widom- Database System Implementation- Pearson Education- 2000. 4. Peter Rob and Corlos Coronel- Database System, Design, Implementation and Management, Thompson Learning Course Technology- Fifth edition, 2003.

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LAB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Data Definition Language (DDL) commands in RDBMS. Data Manipulation Language (DML) and Data Control Language (DCL) commands in RDBMS. High-level language extension with Cursors. High level language extension with Triggers Procedures and Functions. Embedded SQL. Database design using E-R model and Normalization. Design and implementation of Payroll Processing System. Design and implementation of Banking System. Design and implementation of Library Information System.

CS 5513

DATA WAREHOUSING AND MINING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To understand the concepts of data ware housing and Data Mining and its applications. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data mining techniques and algorithm 2. To know in depth about data mining environments and applications. 3. To familiarize the concepts of OLTP and data ware housing. UNIT I - INTRODUTION (9)

Relation to Statistics Databases Data Mining Functionalities Steps in Data Mining Process Architecture of a Typical Data Mining Systems Classification of Data Mining Systems Overview of Data Mining Techniques UNIT II - DATA PREPROCESSING AND ASSOCIATION RULES (9)

Data Preprocessing Data Cleaning Integration Transformation Reduction Discretization Concept Hierarchies Concept Description Data Generalization and Summarization based Characterization Mining Association Rules in Large Databases. UNIT III - PREDICTIVE MODELING (9)

Classification and Prediction Issues Regarding Classification and PredictionClassification by Decision Tree Induction Bayesian Classification Other Classification Methods Prediction Clusters Analysis Types of Data in Cluster Analysis Categorization of Major Clustering Methods Partitioning Methods Hierarchical Methods UNIT IV - DATA WAREHOUSING (9)

Data Warehousing Components Multi Dimensional Data Model Data Warehouse Architecture Data Warehouse Implementation Mapping the Data Warehouse to Multiprocessor Architecture OLAP Need Categorization of OLAP Tools UNIT V - APPLICATIONS (9)

Applications of Data Mining Social Impacts of Data Mining Tools An Introduction to DB Miner Case Studies Mining WWW Mining Text Database Mining Spatial Databases

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. Alex Berson and Stephen J. Smith, Data Warehousing- Data Mining & OLAP, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2004. 2. Usama M.Fayyad, Gregory Piatetsky, Shapiro, Padhrai Smyth and Ramasamy Uthurusamy, Advances in Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining, The M.I.T Press, 1996. 3. Ralph Kimball, The Data Warehouse Life Cycle Toolkit, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1998. 4. Sean Kelly, Data Warehousing In Action, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1997.

CS 5614

COMPUTER NETWORKS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To introduce the concepts, terminologies and technologies used in data communication and computer networking. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data communications. 2. To study the functions of different layers. 3. To introduce IEEE standards employed in computer networking. 4. To make the students to get familiarized with different protocols and network components. UNIT I - DATA COMMUNICATIONS (8)

Introduction to Networks and Communication Media: Uses- Network Hardware- Network Software- Components and Categories types of Connections Topologies Protocols and Standards ISO / OSI mode - Reference Models. Basis for data communication- Transmission Media- Wireless Transmission- Telephone Systems- Satellite Communication RS232 Interfacing sequences UNIT II - DATA LINK LAYER (10)

Error detection and correction Parity LRC CRC Hamming code low Control and Error control - stop and wait go back-N ARQ selective repeat ARQ- sliding window HDLC. - LAN - Reliable Transmission Token Rings Wireless Network Adapters - Ethernet IEEE 802.3 - IEEE 802.4 - IEEE 802.5 - IEEE 802.11 FDDI - SONET Bridges. UNIT III - NETWORK LAYER (10)

Internetworks Packet Switching and Datagram approach IP addressing methods Subnetting Routing Distance Vector Routing Link State Routing Routers. UNIT IV - TRANSPORT LAYER (9) Duties of transport layer Multiplexing Demultiplexing Sockets User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion Control Quality of services (QOS) Integrated Services. UNIT V - APPLICATION LAYER (8) Domain Name Space (DNS) SMTP FTP HTTP - Electronic Mail - WWW Network Security Cryptography. The Application layer: Application layer design issues - MultimediaOther applications- - DES- RSA. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communication and Networking, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. REFERENCES 1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Larry L.Peterson and Peter S. Davie, Computer Networks, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition. 3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2003. 4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.

NETWORK LAB (All the programs are to be written using C) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Simulation of ARP / RARP. Write a socket Program for Echo/Ping/ Talk commands. Write a program that takes a binary file as input and performs bit stuffing and CRC Computation. Simulation of Sliding-Window protocol. Simulation of BGP / OSPF routing protocol. Develop a Client Server application for chat. Develop a Client that contacts a given DNS Server to resolve a given host name. Write a Client to download a file from a HTTP Server. Create a socket (TCP) between two computers and enable file transfer between them. Write a program to implement Remote Command Execution( Two M/Cs may be used) Write a program for TCP module Implementation.(TCP Services) Write a program for File Transfer in client- server architecture using following methods. USING RS232C, TCP/IP

CS 5615

OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To understand the concepts of object oriented analysis and design. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the object oriented life cycle and to know about Object Oriented Design process. 2. To Gain enough competence in object - oriented analysis and design (OOAD) to tackle a complete object oriented project 3. Using UML, a common language for talking about requirements, designs, and component interfaces 4. To know how to identify objects, relationships, services and attributes through UML. 5. To Develop Testing strategies to ensure Software Quality and usability. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

An Overview of Object Oriented Systems Development - Classes And Objects - Complexity Of Software Classification Notation Process Pragmatics Binary And Entity Relationship Object Types Object State Object Basics Object Oriented Systems Development Life Cycle. UNIT II - OBJECT ORIENTED METHODOLOGIES AND UML (12)

Rumbaugh Methodology - Booch Methodology - Jacobson Methodology-Patterns Frameworks Unified Approach Unified Modeling Language Use case - class diagram - Interactive Diagram - Package Diagram - Collaboration Diagram - State Diagram - Activity Diagram Dynamic modeling. UNIT III - OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS (9)

Identifying use cases - Noun Phrase approach - Responsibilities - Collaborators - Object Analysis - Classification Identifying Object relationships - Attributes and Methods - case study. UNIT IV - OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN (8) Design Process - OO Design Axioms, Class Design, Object Storage and Object Interoperability refining Attributes - Methods - Access Layer OODBMS - Table - Class Mapping View Layercase study.

UNIT V - SOFTWARE QUALITY AND USABILITY

(8)

Testing Strategies - Test cases - Quality Assurance testing - inheritance & testing - Test plan Continuous testing - usability testing debugging principles - Designing Interface Objects Software Quality Assurance System Usability - Measuring User Satisfaction - case study. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ali Bahrami, Object Oriented Systems Development, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999. 2. Martin Fowler, UML Distilled, Second Edition, PHI/Pearson Education, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Stephen R. Schach, Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, Grady Booch The Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual, Addison Wesley, 1999. 3. Hans-Erik Eriksson, Magnus Penker, Brain Lyons, David Fado, UML Toolkit, OMG Press Wiley Publishing Inc., 2004.

CASE TOOLS LAB

Prepare the following documents for two or three of the experiments listed below and develop the software engineering methodology. Program Analysis and Project Planning. Thorough study of the problem Identify project scope, Objectives, Infrastructure. Software requirement Analysis Describe the individual Phases / Modules of the project, Identify deliverables.

Data Modeling Use work products Data dictionary, Use diagrams and activity diagrams, build and test lass diagrams, Sequence diagrams and add interface to class diagrams. Software Development and Debugging Software Testing Prepare test plan, perform validation testing, Coverage analysis, memory leaks, develop test case hierarchy, Site check and Site monitor. Suggested List of Applications: 1. Student Marks Analyzing System 2. Quiz System 3. Online Ticket Reservation System 4. Payroll System 5. Course Registration System 6. Expert Systems 7. ATM Systems 8. Stock Maintenance 9. Real-Time Scheduler 10. Remote Procedure Call Implementation

CS 5616

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

AIM Artificial Intelligence aims at developing computer applications, which encompasses perception, reasoning and learning and to provide an in-depth understanding of major techniques used to simulate intelligence. OBJECTIVE 1. To provide a strong foundation of fundamental concepts in Artificial Intelligence 2. To provide a basic exposition to the goals and methods of Artificial Intelligence 3. To enable the student to apply these techniques in applications which involve perception, reasoning and learning. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction to AI - History of AI- Intelligent Agents- Agents and Environment- RationalityNature of Environments- Structure of Agents and its Functions- Problem Solving: Problem solving Agents- Search Strategies- Iterative deepening- Bi-directional- Informed Search Methods-A*-AO*- Adversial search- Alpha- Beta pruning UNIT II - KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION (9)

Knowledge- Based Agent- Logic- Prepositional logic- First order logic (FOL) Inference in FOL- Representation revisited- Syntax and semantics of FOL- Using FOL- knowledge engineering in FOL- Prepositional versus first order inference- unification and listing- Forward Chaining and Backward Chaining- Resolutions-knowledge representation- onthological engineering- categories and object- actions- simulation and events- mental events and mental objects UNIT III - PLANNING (9)

Simple Planning agent- from problem solving to planning- Basic Representation for planningPractical Planner- Hierarchical Decomposition- Resource Constraint- Uncertainty- Probabilistic Reasoning System UNIT IV - LEARNING (9)

General Model of Learning Agents- Inductive Learning- Computational Learning- Theory Learning in Neural and Belief networks- Reinforcement Learning- Types of Communicating Agents- Robotics: Tasks, Parts, Configuration Spaces- Navigations and Motion Planning

UNIT V - APPLICATIONS

(9)

Communication- Communication as action- Formal Grammar for a fragment of EnglishSyntactic analysis- Argumented Grammar- Semantic interpretation- Ambiguity and Discourse understanding- Grammar Induction- Probabilistic language processing- Probabilistic language models- Information retrieval- Information Extraction- Machine Translation THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig ,Artificial Intelligence- A Modern Approach, 2nd edition, Pearson Education/Prentice Hall of India, 2004 REFERENCES 1. Nils J.Nilsson, Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Pvt.LTD. 2000 2. Elaine Rich and Kevin Knigh, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2003 3. George F.Luger, Artificial Intelligence- Structures and Strategies For Complex Problem Solving, Pearson Education/PHI, 2002 4. Dan W.Patterson, Introduction to artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems Prentice Hall of India

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LAB

1. Implementation of searching algorithm using BFS 2. Implementation of searching algorithm using DFS 3. Implementation of searching algorithm using A* Algorithm 4. Implementation of searching algorithm using Water jug Problem using BFS 5. Implementation of searching algorithm using Water jug Problem using DFS 6. Implementation of game tree using Single player game 1. N-Queen Problem 2.8-puzzle Problem 7. Implementation of game tree using two player game 1. Tic-tac-toe 2. Chess 8. Representation of knowledge for simple game using predicate logic 9. Implementation of the resolution algorithm 10. Implementation of unification algorithm

CS 5617

INFORMATION SECURITY

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM 1. To study the critical need for ensuring Information Security in Organizations OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the basics of Information Security 2. To know the legal, ethical and professional issues in Information Security 3. To know the aspects of risk management 4. To know the technological aspects of Information Security UNIT 1- INTRODUCTION (9)

History of information Security- Critical Characteristics of Information - NSTISSC Security Model - Components of an Information System - Securing the Components - Balancing Security and Access - The SDLC - The Security SDLC UNIT II -SECURITY INVESTIGATION (9)

Need for Security - Business Needs Threats Attacks- legal- Ethical and Professional Issues UNIT III - SECURITY ANALYSIS (9)

Risk Management: Identifying and Assessing Risk - Assessing and Controlling Risk UNIT IV - LOGICAL DESIGN (9)

Blueprint for Security - Information Security Policy - Standards and Practices - ISO 17799/BS 7799 - NIST Models - VISA International Security Model - Design of Security Architecture Planning for Continuity UNIT V - PHYSICAL DESIGN (9)

Security Technology IDS - Scanning and Analysis Tools Cryptography - Access Control Devices - Physical Security - Security and Personnel THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, Principles of Information Security, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003

REFERENCES 1. Micki Krause, Harold F. Tipton, Handbook of Information Security Management, Vol 1-3 CRC Press LLC, 2004. 2. Stuart Mc Clure, Joel Scrambray, George Kurtz, Hacking Exposed, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003 3. Matt Bishop, Computer Security Art and Science, Pearson/PHI, 2002.

ACS5622

COMPREHENSION IN COMMUNICATION AND CAREER SKILLS L T P TOTAL 0 0 4 150

AIM 1. To improve the communication skills of learners and to become successful in their career. 2. To face the challenges in the existing global scenario which is highly competitive. 3. To enhance their leadership quality. OBJECTIVE 1. To encourage learners to look at the functional usage of the language. 2. To enforce the most important skills that are required to be used while attending interviews and taking part in GDs. 3. To enrich ones vocabulary in the language for better communication. UNIT I DATA STRUCTURES (14)

Data Structures - C - C++ - Java - Computer Architecture - Operative Systems - Software Engineering - Data Base Management System - Computer Networks - Visual Programming Compiler Design. UNIT II SYSTEM SOFTWARE (12)

System Software - Embedded System - Electron Devices - Object Oriented System Design Digital Electronics - Control Systems. UNIT III APTITUDE (12)

Verbal Aptitude - Synonyms-Antonyms - Analogy - Substitution - Sentence Completion Odd word out - Reading Comprehension - Error Correction - Preposition - Articles - Tenses Concord - Idiom and phrases - Statement and Conclusion - Alphabetical Series. Arithmetic Ability - Numbers - Average - Percentage - Ratio and Proportion - Time and Work - Time and Distance - Problems on Trains - Permutations and Combinations Probability. UNIT IV - INTERVIEW SKILLS (12)

Introduction to Group Discussion - Structure and types of GD - Led and other GDs Strategies of GD- Moderators - Team Work - Body Language - Mock Interviews Conversational Etiquette - Common Errors in Spoken Language - Telephonic Conversation Oral Practice related to Professional Skills - Role Play Activities - Speech On Common Topics -Kinds of Interviews - Required Key Skills - Corporate Culture - Resume Preparation - Video Samples.

UNIT V - ORAL PRESENTATION SKILLS

(10)

Elements of effective presentations - Structure and tools of Presentation - Voice Modulation Body Language - Audience analysis Psychometrics - Stress Management Poise Assertiveness - Innovation and Creativeness - Video Samples TOTAL REFERENCES 1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma, Technical communication- Principles and Practice, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2004) 2. Barker .A, Improve Your communication skills, Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2006) 3. Adrian Doff and Christopher Jones- Language in Use (Upper-Intermediate), Cambridge University Press, First South Asian Ed. (2004) 4. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to writing and speaking, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 5. Barrons GRE, Latest Edition. 6. R.S.Agarwals, Verbal Nonverbal Reasoning, Latest Edition. 120

CS 5724

INTERNET PROGRAMMING

L 3

T 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To provide Internet Programming concepts and related programming and scripting languages. OBJECTIVES 1. To describe basic Internet Protocols. 2. Explain JAVA and HTML tools for Internet programming. 3. Describe scripting languages Java Script. 4. To learn dynamic HTML & XML programming. 5. Explain Server Side Programming tools. UNIT I - BASIC NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS (8)

Internet standards TCP and UDP protocols URLs MIME CGI Introduction to SGML. UNIT II -JAVA PROGRAMMING (9)

Java basics I/O streaming files Looking up Internet Address - Socket programming client/server programs E-mail client SMTP - POP3 programs web page retrieval protocol handlers content handlers - applets image handling - Remote Method Invocation. UNIT III - SCRIPTING LANGUAGES (9)

HTML forms frames tables web page design - JavaScript introduction control structures functions arrays objects simple web applications UNIT IV -DYNAMIC HTML & XML (10)

Dynamic HTML introduction cascading style sheets object model and collections event model filters and transition data binding data control ActiveX control handling of multimedia data XML - Introduction - Structuring Data - XML Namespaces - XML vocabularies - Web server. UNIT V - SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING (9)

Servlets deployment of simple servlets web server (Java web server / Tomcat / Web logic) HTTP GET and POST requests session tracking cookies JDBC simple web applications multi-tier applications.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Deitel, Deitel and Nieto, Internet and World Wide Web How to program, Pearson Education Publishers, 2000. 2. Elliotte Rusty Harold, Java Network Programming, OReilly Publishers, 2002 REFERENCES 1. R. Krishnamoorthy & S. Prabhu, Internet and Java Programming, New Age International Publishers, 2004. 2. Thomno A. Powell, The Complete Reference HTML and XHTML, fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 3. Naughton, The Complete Reference Java2, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd edition, 1999.

INTERNET PROGRAMMING LABORATORY 1. Write programs in Java to demonstrate the use of following components Text fields, buttons, Scrollbar, Choice, List and Check box 2. Write Java programs to demonstrate the use of various Layouts like Flow Layout, Border Layout, Grid layout, Grid bag layout and card layout 3. Write programs in Java to create applets incorporating the following features: Create a color palette with matrix of buttons Set background and foreground of the control text area by selecting a color from color palette. In order to select Foreground or background use check box control as radio buttons To set background images 4. Write programs in Java to do the following. Set the URL of another server. Download the homepage of the server. Display the contents of home page with date, content type, and Expiration date. Last modified and length of the home page. 5. Write programs in Java using sockets to implement the following: HTTP request FTP SMTP and POP3 6. Write a program in Java for creating simple chat application with datagram sockets and datagram packets. 7. Write programs in Java using Servlets: To invoke servlets from HTML forms To invoke servlets from Applets 8. Write programs in Java to create three-tier applications using servlets for on-line examination and displaying student mark list. Assume that conducting student information is available in a database which has been stored in a database server. 9. Create a web page with the following using HTML To embed a map in a web page To fix the hot spots in that map and Show all the related information 10. Create a web page with the following. Cascading style sheets. Embedded style sheets. Inline style sheets. Use our college information for the web pages.

CS 5725

SOFTWARE TESTING

L 3

T 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM
To make students understand the principles of software testing OBJECTIVES 1. To explain the basics of software testing 2. To highlight the strategies for software testing 3. To stress the need and conduct of testing levels 4. To bring out the ways and means of controlling and monitoring testing activity UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

Testing as an Engineering Activity, Role of Process in Software Quality, Testing as a Process, Basic Definitions, Software Testing Principles, The Testers Role in a Software Development Organization, Origins of Defects, Defect Classes, The Defect Repository and Test Design, Defect Examples, Developer/Tester Support for Developing a Defect Repository\ UNIT II -TEST CASE DESIGN (10)

Introduction to Testing Design Strategies, The Smarter Tester, Test Case Design Strategies, Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design, Random Testing, Equivalence Class Partitioning, Boundary Value Analysis, Other Black-box Test Design Approaches, Black-box testing and COTS, Using White-Box Approach to Test design, Test Adequacy Criteria, Coverage and Control Flow Graphs, Covering Code Logic, Paths: Their Role in White-box Based Test Design, Additional White Box Test Design Approaches, Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria UNIT III - LEVELS OF TESTING (9)

The Need for Levels of Testing, Unit Test, Unit Test Planning, Designing the Unit Tests. The Class as a Testable Unit, The Test Harness, Running the Unit tests and Recording results, Integration tests, Designing Integration Tests, Integration Test Planning, System Test The Different Types, Regression Testing, Alpha, Beta and Acceptance Tests UNIT IV-TEST MANAGEMENT (9)

Introductory Concepts, Testing and Debugging Goals and Policies, Test Planning, Test Plan Components, Test Plan Attachments, Locating Test Items, Reporting Test Results, The role of three groups in Test Planning and Policy Development, Process and the Engineering Disciplines, Introducing the test specialist, Skills needed by a test specialist, Building a Testing Group UNIT V - CONTROLLING AND MONITORING (9)

Defining Terms, Measurements and Milestones for Controlling and Monitoring, Status Meetings, Reports and Control Issues, Criteria for Test Completion, SCM, Types of reviews, developing a review program, Components of Review Plans, Reporting review results

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ilene Burnstein, Practical Software Testing, Springer International Edition, Chennai, 2003. 2. Boris Beizer, Software Testing Techniques, 2nd Edition, Dream tech press, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Edward Kit, Software Testing in the Real World Improving the Process, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 1995 2. Elfriede Dustin, Effective Software Testing, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003 3. Renu Rajani and Pradeep Oak, Software Testing Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003

SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING LABORATORY Develop a simple software testing tool implementing any testing technique of your choice. Take up a software development project of your choice and systematically carryout all the phases of SDLC. Do the necessary documentation at each stage. Use appropriate case tools. The project to be carried out may be in domains such as 1. Online stock trading 2. Airport management 3. Bio-informatics 4. Hospital management 5. Internet-based multi-user online games 6. Programmer's editor with syntaxbased coloring 7. Library of computer security related algorithms 8. Inventory System 9. Software for a Game 10. Financial Accounting System

I. Do the following testing for a chosen software implementation using any commercial or Freeware tools 1. Pathtesting 2. Transactionflow testing 3. Dataflow testing II. Do the following measurements on a chosen software implementation 1. Halsteads Metrics 2. McCabes Metrics III. Simulate a test driver

CS 5726 AIM

GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

To impart the fundamental concepts of Computer Graphics and Multimedia. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the graphics techniques and algorithms. 2. To study the multimedia concepts and various I/O technologies. 3. To enable the students to develop their creativity UNIT I- OUTPUT PRIMITIVES (9)

Introduction - Line - Curve and Ellipse Drawing Algorithms Attributes Two-Dimensional Geometric Transformations Two-Dimensional Clipping and Viewing. UNIT II -THREE-DIMENSIONAL CONCEPTS (9)

Three-Dimensional Object Representations Three-Dimensional Geometric and Modeling Transformations Three-Dimensional Viewing Color models Animation, tools for animation- Raster Scan Graphics: Derivative of a Function, Digital Differential Analyzer, Bresenham's Algorithm, Integer Bresenham's Algorithm, General Bresenham's Algorithm, Circle Generation - Bresenham's Algorithm, Scan Conversion-Generation of the Display, Real-Time Scan Conversion, Run-Length Encoding, Cell Encoding, Frame Buffers, Addressing the Raster, Line Display. UNIT III-MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS DESIGN (9)

An Introduction, Multimedia Terms, Multimedia Hardware, Hardware Peripherals, Basic tools in Multimedia-Multimedia applications Multimedia System Architecture Evolving technologies for Multimedia Defining objects for Multimedia systems Multimedia Data interface standards Multimedia Databases. UNIT IV- MULTIMEDIA FILE HANDLING (9)

Compression & Decompression Data & File Format standards Multimedia I/O technologies Digital voice and audio Video image and animation Full motion video Storage and retrieval Technologies UNIT V -HYPERMEDIA (9)

Multimedia Authoring & User Interface Hypermedia messaging - Mobile Messaging Hypermedia message component Creating Hypermedia message Integrated multimedia message standards Integrated Document management Distributed Multimedia Systems. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, Computer Graphics C Version, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Prabat K Andleigh and Kiran Thakrar, Multimedia Systems and Design, PHI, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Judith Jeffcoate, Multimedia in practice technology and Applications, PHI, 1998. 2. Foley, Vandam, Feiner, Huges, Computer Graphics: Principles & Practice, Pearson Education, second edition 2003.

GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LAB

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

To implement Bresenhams algorithms for line, circle and ellipse drawing To perform 2D Transformations such as translation, rotation, scaling, reflection and sharing. To implement Cohen-Sutherland 2D clipping and window-viewport mapping To perform 3D Transformations such as translation, rotation and scaling. To visualize projections of 3D images. To convert between color models. To implement text compression algorithm To implement image compression algorithm To perform animation using any Animation software (Macromedia) To perform basic operations on image using any image editing software (Adobe)

CS 5727

CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM 1. To understand the principles of encryption algorithms; conventional and public key cryptography. 2. To have a detailed knowledge about authentication, hash functions and application level security mechanisms. OBJECTIVES 1. To know the methods of conventional encryption. 2. To understand the concepts of public key encryption and number theory 3. To understand authentication and Hash functions. 4. To know the network security tools and applications. 5. To understand the system level security used. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

OSI Security Architecture - Classical Encryption techniques Cipher Principles Data Encryption Standard Block Cipher Design Principles and Modes of Operation - Evaluation criteria for AES AES Cipher Triple DES Placement of Encryption Function Traffic Confidentiality UNIT II -PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY (9)

Key Management - Diffie-Hellman key Exchange Elliptic Curve Architecture and Cryptography - Introduction to Number Theory Confidentiality using Symmetric Encryption Public Key Cryptography and RSA. UNIT III-AUTHENTICATION AND HASH FUNCTION (9)

Authentication requirements Authentication functions Message Authentication Codes Hash Functions Security of Hash Functions and MACs MD5 message Digest algorithm - Secure Hash Algorithm RIPEMD HMAC Digital Signatures Authentication Protocols Digital Signature Standard UNIT IV-NETWORK SECURITY (9)

Authentication Applications: Kerberos X.509 Authentication Service Electronic Mail Security PGP S/MIME - IP Security Web Security.

UNIT V- SYSTEM LEVEL SECURITY

(9)

Intrusion detection password management Viruses and related Threats Virus Counter measures Firewall Design Principles Trusted Systems.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. William Stallings, Cryptography And Network Security Principles and Practices, Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2003.

REFERENCES 1. Atul Kahate, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. Bruce Schneier, Applied Cryptography, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2001. 3. Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, Security in Computing, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

CS 5837

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To understand the statistical approach for quality control. OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools available to achieve Total Quality Management. 2. To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9) Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Quality Planning, Quality costs - Analysis Techniques for Quality Costs, Basic concepts of Total Quality Management, Historical Review, Principles of TQM, Leadership Concepts, Role of Senior Management, Quality Council, Quality Statements, Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy, Barriers to TQM Implementation. UNIT II - TQM PRINCIPLES (9) Customer satisfaction Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer Retention, Employee Involvement Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward, Performance Appraisal, Benefits, Continuous Process Improvement Juran Trilogy, PDSA Cycle, 5S, Kaizen, Supplier Partnership Partnering, sourcing, Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating, Relationship Development, Performance Measures Basic Concepts, Strategy, Performance Measure. UNIT III - STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC) (9) The seven tools of quality, Statistical Fundamentals Measures of central Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for variables and attributes, Process capability, Concept of six sigma, New seven Management tools. UNIT IV - TQM TOOLS (9) Benchmarking Reasons to Benchmark, Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) House of Quality, QFD Process, Benefits, Taguchi Quality Loss Function, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Concept, Improvement Needs, FMEA Stages of FMEA. UNIT V - QUALITY SYSTEMS (9) Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems, ISO 9000:2000 Quality System Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, TS 16949, ISO 14000 Concept, Requirements and Benefits.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003. (Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6. REFERENCES 1. James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, (5th Edition), South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5). 2. Feigenbaum.A.V. Total Quality Management, McGraw-Hill, 1991. 3. Oakland.J.S. Total Quality Management Butterworth Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford. 1989. 4. Narayana V. and Sreenivasan, N.S. Quality Management Concepts and Tasks, New Age International 1996. 5. Zeiri. Total Quality Management for Engineers , Wood Head Publishers, 1991.

LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR CSE ELECTIVE I (VI SEMESTER) EIT 5618 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM 1. To give sufficient background for undertaking embedded systems design. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce students to the embedded systems, its hardware and software. 2. To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking. 3. To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++. 4. To explain real time operating systems, inter-task communication and an exemplary case of MUCOS IIRTOS. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (9)

Definition and Classification Overview of Processors and hardware units in an embedded system Software embedded into the system Exemplary Embedded Systems Embedded Systems on a Chip (SoC) and the use of VLSI designed circuits UNIT II -DEVICES AND BUSES FOR DEVICES NETWORK (9)

I/O Devices - Device I/O Types and Examples Synchronous - Iso-synchronous and Asynchronous Communications from Serial Devices - Examples of Internal SerialCommunication Devices - UART and HDLC - Parallel Port Devices - Sophisticated interfacing features in Devices/Ports- Timer and Counting Devices - 12C, USB, CAN and advanced I/O Serial high speed buses- ISA, PCI, PCI-X, cPCI and advanced buses. UNIT III -PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS & EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING IN C,C++ (9) Programming in assembly language (ALP) vs. High Level Language - C Program Elements, Macros and functions -Use of Pointers - NULL Pointers - Use of Function Calls Multiple function calls in a Cyclic Order in the Main Function Pointers Function Queues and Interrupt Service Routines Queues Pointers Concepts of EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING in C++ Objected Oriented Programming Embedded Programming in C++, C Program compilers Cross compiler Optimization of memory codes. UNIT IV-REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS PART - 1 (9)

Definitions of process, tasks and threads Clear cut distinction between functions ISRs and tasks by their characteristics Operating System Services- Goals Structures- Kernel - Process Management Memory Management Device Management File System Organization and Implementation I/O Subsystems Interrupt Routines Handling in RTOS, real time operating systems : RTOS Task scheduling models - Handling of task scheduling and latency and

deadlines as performance metrics Co-operative Round Robin Scheduling Cyclic Scheduling with Time Slicing (Rate Monotonics Co-operative Scheduling) Preemptive Scheduling Model strategy by a Scheduler Critical Section Service by a Preemptive Scheduler Fixed (Static) Real time scheduling of tasks - inter process communication and synchronisation Shared data problem Use of Semaphore(s) Priority Inversion Problem and Deadlock Situations Inter Process Communications using Signals Semaphore Flag or mutex as Resource key Message Queues Mailboxes Pipes Virtual (Logical) Sockets Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs). UNIT V-REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS PART - 2 (9)

Study of Micro C/OS-II or Vx Works or Any other popular RTOS RTOS System Level Functions Task Service Functions Time Delay Functions Memory Allocation Related Functions Semaphore Related Functions Mailbox Related Functions Queue Related Functions Case Studies of Programming with RTOS Understanding Case Definition Multiple Tasks and their functions Creating a list of tasks Functions and IPCs Exemplary Coding Steps. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. Raj kamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw- Hill, First reprint, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition, 2003. 2. David E. Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000. 3. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components; Principles of Embedded Computing System Design Harcourt India , Morgan Kaufman Publishers, First Indian Reprint 2001 4. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Embedded Systems Design A unified Hardware /Software Introduction, John Wiley, 2002.

EIT 5619

INFORMATION SYSTEM DESIGN

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To understand the design, development and management of information systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To know the basics of managing the digital firm. 2. To understand the design, development and maintenance of information systems. 3. To understand basic issues in knowledge management and information systems. 4. To know the ethical and security issues in information systems.

UNIT I - MANAGING THE DIGITAL FIRM

(9)

Why information systems contemporary approaches to information systems new role of information systems- major types of systems in organizations systems from a functional perspective enterprise applications organizations and information systems managers decision making and information systems information systems and business strategy. UNIT II - DESIGNING INFORMATION SYSTEMS (9)

Systems as planned organizational change business process re-engineering and process improvement overview of systems development alternate system Building approaches Understanding the business value of Information Systems - The importance of change management in information system success and failure Managing Implementation. UNIT III - DEVELOPMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS (9) Systems analysis and design System development life cycle Limitation End User Development Managing End Users off-the shelf software packages Outsourcing Comparison of different methodologies. UNIT IV - KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT, ETHICS AND SECURITY (9)

Knowledge Management in the organization Information and Knowledge base systems Decision -support systems Understanding ethical and Social issues packed to systems Ethics in an Information society The moral dimensions of Information Systems System vulnerability and abuse Creating a control environment Ensuring System Quality. UNIT V -INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE (9)

Defining Information Architecture why Information Architecture matters Practicing Information Architecture in the Real world Information Ecologies User needs and Behavior The anatomy of Information Architecture Organizing Systems Search Systems.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Lauaon Kenneth & Landon Jane, "Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital firm", Eighth edition, PHI, 2004. 2. Uma G. Gupta, "Management Information Systems A Management Prespective", Galgotia publications Pvt., Ltd., 1998. 3. Louis Rosenfel and Peter Morville, "Information Architecture for the World wide Web", O'Reilly Associates, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Steven Alter, "Information Systems A Management Perspective", Pearson Education, 2001. 2. Uma Gupta, "Information Systems Success in 21st Century", Prentice Hall of India, 2000. 3. Robert G. Murdick, Joel E. Ross and James R. Claggett, "Information Systems for Modern Management", PHI, 1994.

ECS 5620

ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To provide a strong foundation of the computer organization and its internal architecture and to study in detail the computer design. OBJECTIVES 1. It provides a basic knowledge of various architectures 2. To understand in detail about the concepts of instruction level parallelism with software approach. UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN (9)

Measuring and Reporting Performance Quantitative Principles of Computer Design Classifying Instruction set Architecture Memory Addressing Addressing Modes Type and Size of Operands Operations in the Instruction Set Operands and Operations for Media and Signal Processing Instructions for Control Flow Encoding an Instruction Set Example Architecture MIPS and TM32. UNIT II - INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM (9)

Pipelining and Hazards Concepts of ILP Dynamic Scheduling Dynamic Hardware Prediction Multiple Issues Hardware based Speculation Limitations of ILP Case Studies lP6 Micro Architecture UNIT III - INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACH (9) Compiler Techniques for Exposing ILP Static Branch Prediction Static Multiple Issue. VLIW Advanced Compiler Support Hardware Support for Exposing Parallelism Hardware Vs Software Speculation. Mechanism IA 64 and Itanium Processor. UNIT IV- MEMORY AND I/O (9)

Cache Performance Reducing Cache Miss Penalty and Miss Rate Reducing Hit Time Main Memory and Performance Memory Technology Types of Storage Devices Buses RAID Reliability Availability and Dependability I/O Performance Measures Designing I/O System. UNIT V - MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM (9) Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures Performance Issues Synchronization Models of Memory Consistency Multithreading.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXTBOOK 1.

45 15 60

John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

REFERENCES 1. D. Sima- T. Fountain and P. Kacsuk, Advanced Computer Architectures A Design Space Approach, Addison Wesley, 2000. 2. Kai Hwang, Advanced Computer Architecture Parallelism Scalability Programmability, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2001. 3. Vincent P. Heuring, Harry F. Jordan, Computer System Design and Architecture, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004.

ECS 5621

ADVANCED DATABASES

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM It aims at developing computer application with different kinds of data models. It also deals with transaction management of these different databases. OBJECTIVE 1. To study the needs of different databases. 2. To understand about different data models that can be used for these databases. 3. To make the students to get familiarized with transaction management of the database. 4. To develop in depth knowledge about web and intelligent database.

UNIT I - DISTRIBUTED DATABASE

(9)

Distributed DBMS concepts and design- introduction-functions and architecture of DDBMSdistributed relational database Design- Transparency in DDBMS- distributed Transaction Management - Concurrency Control deadlock Management Database recovery The X/Open Distributed Transaction Processing Model- Replication Servers Distributed Query Optimization- Distribution and Replication in Oracle. UNIT II - OBJECT ORIENTED DATABASES (9)

Object oriented databases Introduction Weakness of RDBMS Object Oriented Concepts Storing Objects in Relational Databases Next Generation database systems- Object Oriented database models OODBMS perspectives persistence Issues in OODBMS OODBMS manifesto advantages and disadvantages of OODBMS object oriented database design OODBMS standards and systems Object management group Object management group object database Standard ODMG object relational DBMS Postgres-Comparison of ORDBMS and OODBMS. UNIT III - WEB DATABASES (9)

Web technology and DBMS Introduction The Web The Web as a Database Application Platform Scripting Languages common Gateway Interface HTTP cookies Extending the Web Server Java Microsoft web Solution Platform Oracle Internet Platform Semi Structured Data and XML XML Related Technologies XML Query Languages. UNIT IV - DATABASE DESIGN ISSUES (9)

ER Model - Normalization - Security - Encryption Digital Signatures Authorization Authenticated RPC- Integrity - Consistency - Database Tuning - Optimization and Research Issues Design of Temporal Databases Spatial Databases.

UNITV - CURRENT TRENDS

(9)

Mobile database Geographic Information System Genome Data Management Multimedia database Parallel database database administration data warehousing and data mining THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Philip M. Lewis, Arthur Bernstein, Michael Kifer, Databases and Transaction Processing An Application Oriented Approach, Addison, Wesley, 2002. REFERENCES 1. R.Elmasri and S.B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004. 2. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharsan, Database System Concepts, 4th Edition., Tata McGraw Hill, 2004. 3. Raghu Ramakrishnan & Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2003.

ELECTIVES II (VII SEMESTER) EIT 5729 AIM To know the strategic importance of Enterprise Resource Planning. OBJECTIVE 1. 2. 3. 4. To know the basics of ERP To understand the key implementation issues of ERP To know the business modules of ERP To appreciate the current and future trends in ERP. (9) ENTERPRISE RESOURSE PLANNING L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

UNIT I -INTRODUCTION

ERP: An Overview, Enterprise An Overview, Benefits of ERP, ERP and Related Technologies, Business Process Reengineering (BPR), Data Warehousing, Data Mining, OLAP, SCM UNIT II - ERP IMPLEMENTATION (9)

ERP Implementation Lifecycle, Implementation Methodology, Hidden Costs, Organizing the Implementation, Vendors, Consultants and Users, Contracts with Vendors, Consultants and Employees, Project Management and Monitoring UNIT III -THE BUSINESS MODULES (9)

Business modules in an ERP Package, Finance, Manufacturing, Human Resources, Plant Maintenance, Materials Management, Quality Management, Sales and Distribution UNIT IV -THE ERP MARKET ERP Market Place, SAP AG, Peoplesoft, Baan, JD Edwards, Oracle, QAD, SSA UNIT V - ERP PRESENT AND FUTURE (9) (9)

Turbo Charge the ERP System, EIA, ERP and e-Commerce, ERP and Internet, Future Directions

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Alexis Leon, ERP Demystified, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000 REFERENCES 1. Joseph A Brady, Ellen F Monk, Bret Wagner, Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning, Thompson Course Technology, USA, 2001. 2. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkatakrishnan N K, Enterprise Resource Planning Concepts and Practice, PHI, New Delhi, 2003

EIT 5730

MOBILE COMPUTING

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To provide basis for various techniques in mobile communication and mobile content services. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To learn the basics of wireless voice and data communication technology To build working knowledge on various telephone and satellite networks To studt the working principal of wireless LAN and its standards. To build knowledge on various Mobile computing algorithms (9)

UNIT I - WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS

Introduction wireless Transmission frequencies for radio transmission- signals- Antennas Signals Propagation- Multiplexing modulations Spread spectrum MAC- SDMA- FDMATDMA CDMA- Cellular Wireless networks, multiple division Techniques, channel Allocation. UNIT II TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS (9)

Telecommunication systems GSM GPRS DECT UMTS IMT 2000-Satellite Networks- Bassics parameters and configurations capacity Allocation FAMA and DAMA Broadcast systems DAB- DVB,Introduction to digital transmission.. UNIT III WIRELESS LAN (9)

Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11- Architecture Services MAC Physical layer IEEE 802.11a 802.11b standards HIPERLAN Blue Tooth. UNIT IV MOBILE NETWORK LAYER (9)

Mobile IP Dyanamic Host Configuration Protocol Routing DSDV DSR Alternative Metrics , Protocols supporting mobility , satellite systems , Network Protocols. UNIT V TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS (9)

Traditional TCP Indirect TCP Snooping TCP Mobile TCP Fast Retransmit/ Fast Recovery Transmission/ Timeout Freezing Selective Retransmission Transaction Oriented TCP. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Jochen Scheiller. Mobile Communication , PHI/Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003. 2. William Stallings, Wireless Communication and Networks, PHI/ Pearson Education, 2002. 3. Dharma P- Agarwal, Qing An Zeng, Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems (second Edition). REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prashanth Krishnamoorthy , Principles of Wireless Networks , PHI/ Pearson Education, 2003. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklsons and Thomas stober, Principles of Mobile computing, Springer, New York, 2003. Hazysatof Wesolowshi, Mobile Communication Systems, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2002.

ECS 5731

REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM This enables us to understand the concepts of Real time systems and its applications OBJECTIVES 1. Basics of Real time systems 2. Real time programming tools and Databases 3. Fault tolerance, Reliability and Synchronization UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Architecture of Real time Systems/ Embedded Systems Pervasive computing- information access drivers - Operating Systems issues - Performance Measures - Estimating Program runtimes UNIT II - TASK ASSIGNMENT AND SCHEDULING (9)

Real time operating system memory management- processes, threads, Interrupts, Events User Interface Uniprocessor scheduling IRIS tasks Tasks Assignment Mode charges Fault tolerant scheduling UNIT III - PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND TOOLS (9)

Desired characteristics based on ADA - Data typing - Control Structures - Packages - Exception Handling - Overloading - Multitasking - Timing specification - Task Scheduling - Just-in-time Compilation - Runtime support UNIT IV - REAL TIME DATABASES (9)

Basic Networking principles - Real time databases - Transaction processing - Concurrency control - Disk scheduling algorithms - Serialization and Consistency UNIT V - FAULT TOLERANCE, RELIABILITY AND SYNCHRONIZATION (9) Fault types - Fault detection and containment - Redundancy - Data diversity - Reversal checks Obtaining parameter values - Reliability models for hardware redundancy - Software error models - Clocks - Fault tolerant synchronization - Synchronization in software

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G.Shin, Real Time Systems, McGraw - Hill, 1997 B.P.Douglass, Real Time UML 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2000. D.E.Simon, Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley , 2000

REFERENCES Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L. Bailey, "An Introduction To Real Time Systems", Prentice Hall International, 1999 2. K.V.K.K.Prasad, "Embedded, Real - Time Systems, concepts, Design and Programming", DreamTeach, 2003 3. Jane S Liu, "Real Time Systems", Pearson Education, 2004
1.

ECS 5732

C # AND . NET FRAMEWORK

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To cover the fundamental concepts of the C# language and the .NET framework. OBJECTIVES 1. The student will gain knowledge in the concepts of the .NET framework as a whole and technologies that constitute the framework. 2. The student will gain programming skills in C# both in basic and advanced levels. 3. By building sample applications, the student will get experience and be ready for largescale projects.

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO C#

(9)

Introducing C#, Understanding .NET, Overview of C#, Literals, Variables, Data Types, Operators, Expressions, Branching, Looping, Methods, Arrays, Strings, Structures, Enumerations. UNIT II - OBJECT ORIENTED ASPECTS OF C# (9)

Classes, Objects, Inheritance, Polymorphism, Interfaces, Operator Overloading, Delegates, Events, Errors and Exceptions. UNIT III - APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ON .NET Building Windows Applications, Accessing Data with ADO.NET. UNIT IV - WEB BASED APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ON .NET Programming Web Applications with Web Forms, Programming Web Services. UNIT V- THE CLR AND THE .NET FRAMEWORK (9) (9) (9)

Assemblies, Versioning, Attributes, Reflection, Viewing Metadata, Type Discovery, Reflecting on a Type, Marshaling, Remoting, Understanding Server Object Types, Specifying a Server with an Interface, Building a Server, Building the Client, Using Single Call, Threads. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in C#, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. 2. J. Liberty, Programming C#, 2nd ed., OReilly, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Herbert Schildt, The Complete Reference: C#, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. Robinson et al, Professional C#, 2nd ed., Wrox Press, 2002. Andrew Troelsen, C# and the .NET Platform, A! Press, 2003. S. Thamarai Selvi, R. Murugesan, A Textbook on C#, Pearson Education, 2003.

ELECTIVES III (VII SEMESTER) ECS 5733 GRID COMPUTING L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM 1.

To understand the technology application and tool kits for grid computing

OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the genesis of grid computing 2. To know the application of grid computing 3. To understanding the technology and tool kits to facilitated the grid computing UNIT I-GRID COMPUTING Introduction - Definition and Scope of grid computing (9)

UNIT II - GRID COMPUTING INITIATIVES (9) Grid Computing Organizations and their roles Grid Computing analog Grid Computing road map. UNIT III-GRID COMPUTING APPLICATIONS Merging the Grid sources Architecture with the Web Devices Architecture. (9)

UNIT IV-TECHNOLOGIES (9) OGSA Sample use cases OGSA platform components OGSI OGSA Basic Services. UNIT V-GRID COMPUTING TOOL KITS (9) Globus GT 3 Toolkit Architecture, Programming model, High level services OGSI .Net middleware Solutions. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. Joshy Joseph & Craig Fellenstein, Grid Computing, Pearson/PHI PTR-2003. REFERENCE 1. Ahmar Abbas, Grid Computing: A Practical Guide to technology and Applications, Charles River media 2003.

ECS 5734

WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To provide an introduction about wireless application protocol OBJECTIVES 1. To understand and provide the indepth knowledge about mobile internet and standards. 2. To know the advanced WAP concepts 3. To understand the technology of wireless telephony application. UNIT I MOBILE INTERNET (9)

Introduction, Mobile Data connectivity Key services for mobile internet Mobile Internet access and application service provides: Content providers and Developer. UNIT II MOBILE INTERNET STANDARD (9)

Current web technologies for wireless applications: origin and overview of WAP components of mwap standard: Network Infrastructure services supporting Wap clients Design Principles Tools and software editors and emulators. UNIT III - IMPLEMENTING WAP SERVICES (9)

WML Basics and Document model; content generation; Binary WML; enhanced WML: WML script: rules of script standard libraries, anays: user interface design guidelines. UNIT IV ADVANCED WAP (9)

Tailoring content to client: Techniques using HTTP 1.1; WAP Push: Push Access Protocol: Push Technology: MIME media types for push messages: Proxy gateway; Data base driven WAP: ASP and WAP, Object model: Activex data objects (ADO): End-to-End WAP services: Security domains: linking WAP and internet. UNITV WIRELESS TELEPHONY APPLICATIONS (9)

WTA architecture: client Framework: Server and security: Design considerations Application creation Toolbox; WTA enhancements; Technology; Bluetooth and voice XML, Telematics inter connectivity.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Sandeep Signal, Writing Applications for mobile internet, Pearson Education, 2001. 2. BulBrook "A beginners Guide, Tata McGraw Hill PCL, 2001.

ECS 5735

SOFTWARE METRICS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To introduce the concepts of measurement in software engineering OBJECTIVE To know the basics of soft ware metrics, fundamental of measurements and management metrics have been included 2. To learn the basic concept of product and quality metrics
1.

UNIT I MEASUREMENTS THEORY

(9)

Fundamentals of measurement - Measurements in Software Engineering - Scope of Software metrics -measurements theory - Goal based framework - Software Measurement validation. UNIT II DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS (9)

Empirical investigation - Planning experiments - Software metrics data Collection - Analysis methods statistical methods. UNIT III PRODUCTS METRICS (9)

Measurement of internet product attributes - size and structure - External product attributes measurement of quality. UNIT IV QUALITY METRICS (9)

Software quality metrics - Product quality - Process quality - metrics for software maintenance Case studies of Metrics program - Motorola - Hp and IBM. UNIT V MANAGEMENT METRICS (9)

Quality management models - Rayleigh Model - Problem Tracking report (PTR) model Reliability growth model - model evaluation - Orthogonal classification THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. John D. Musa, Anthony Iannino and Kazuhira Okumoto, Software Reliability, Measurement, Prediction, Application, Series in Software Engineering and Technology, McGraw Hill, 1987. Norman E, Fenton and Share Lawrence Pfleeger, Software metrics, Second Edition, International Thomson Computer Press ,2002.

2.

REFERENCE 1. Stephen H.Kin, " Metric and models in software quality engineering ", Addison Wesley 1995.

ECS 5736

TCP / IP DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM Having learned about computer networks, this subject helps the students to learn TCP/IP protocol in depth considering design alternatives and implementation techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the internals of the TCP/IP protocols 2. To understand how TCP/IP is actually implemented 3. To understand the interaction among the protocols in a protocol stack. UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9)

Internetworking concepts and architectural model- classful Internet address CIDR-Subnetting and Supernetting ARP- RARP- IP IP Routing ICMP Ipv6 UNIT II - TCP (9)

Services header connection establishment and termination- interactive data flow- bulk data flow- timeout and retransmission persist timer - keepalive timer- futures and performance UNIT III - IP IMPLEMENTATION (9)

IP global software organization routing table- routing algorithms-fragmentation and reassembly- error processing (ICMP) Multicast Processing (IGMP) UNIT IV - TCP IMPLEMENTATION I (9)

Data structure and input processing transmission control blocks- segment format- comparisonfinite state machine implementation-Output processing- mutual exclusion-computing the TCP data length UNIT V - TCP IMPLEMENTATION II (9)

Timers-events and messages- timer process- deleting and inserting timer event- flow control and adaptive retransmission-congestion avoidance and control urgent data processing and push function. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Douglas E.Comer, Internetworking with TCP/IP Principles, Protocols and Architecture, Vol. 1 & 2 fourth edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2003 2. W.Richard Stevens TCP/IP illustrated Volume 1 Pearson Education, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Forouzan , TCP/IP protocol suite , 2nd edition, TMH, 2003 2. W.Richard Stevens, TCP/IP illustrated Volume 2 Pearson Education 2003.

ELECTIVES IV (VIII SEM) EIT 5838 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To enable the student to become familiar with satellites and satellite services. OBJECTIVES 1. Overview of satellite systems in relation to other terrestrial systems. 2. Study of satellite orbits and launching. 3. Study of earth segment and space segment components 4. Study of satellite access by various users. 5. Study of DTH and compression standards. UNIT I-OVERVIEW OF SATELLITE SYSTEMS (9)

Introduction Frequency Allocations for Satellite Services Intelsat U.S.Domsats Polar Orbiting Satellites Problems Keplers First Law Keplers Second Law Keplers Third Law Definitions of Terms for Earth-orbiting Satellites Orbital Elements Apogee and Perigee Heights Orbital Perturbations Effects of a Nonspherical Earth Atmospheric Drag Inclined Orbits Calendars Universal Time Julian Dates Sidereal Time The Orbital Plane The Geocentric-Equatorial Coordinate System Earth Station Referred to the IJK Frame The Topcentric-Horizon Co-ordinate System The Sub-satellite Point Predicting Satellite Position. UNIT II - GEOSTATIONARY ORBIT & SPACE SEGMENT (9)

Introduction Antenna Look Angels The Polar Mount Antenna Limits of Visibility Near Geostationary Orbits Earth Eclipse of Satellite Sun Transit Outage Launching Orbits Problems Power Supply Attitude Control Spinning Satellite Stabilization Momentum Wheel Stabilization Station Keeping - Thermal Control TT&C Subsystem Transponders Wideband Receiver Input Demultiplexer Power Amplifier Antenna Subsystem Morelos Anik-E Advanced Tiros-N Spacecraft UNIT III -EARTH SEGMENT & SPACE LINK (9)

Introduction Receive-Only Home TV Systems Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit for Analog (FM) TV Master Antenna TV System Community Antenna TV System Transmit-Receive Earth Stations Problems Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power Transmission Losses Free-Space Transmission Feeder Losses Antenna Misalignment Losses Fixed Atmospheric and Ionospheric Losses Link Power Budget Equation System Noise Antenna Noise Amplifier Noise Temperature Amplifiers in Cascade Noise Factor Noise Temperature of Absorptive Networks Overall System Noise Temperature Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Uplink Saturation Flux Density Input Back Off The Earth Station HPA Downlink Output Back off

Satellite TWTA Output Effects of Rain Uplink rain-fade margin Downlink rain-fade margin Combined Uplink and Downlink C/N Ratio Intermodulation Noise. UNIT IV- SATELLITE ACCESS (9)

Single Access Preassigned FDMA, Demand-Assigned FDMA - SPADE System. Bandwidthlimited a Power-limited TWT amplifier operation - FDMA downlink analysis.TDMA : Reference Burst - Preamble and Postamble - Carrier recovery - Network synchronization unique word detection - Traffic Date - Frame Efficiency and Channel capacity - preassigned TDMA - Demand assigned TDMA - Speech Interpolation and Prediction - Downlink analysis for Digital transmission.- Companion of uplink Power requirements for FDMA & TDMA. Onboard signal Processing for TDMA / FDMA operation - Satellite switched TDMA. Code-Division Multiple Access Direct-Sequence spread spectrum code signal c(t) autocorrelation function for c(t) Acquisition and trackling Spectrum spreading and dispreading CDMA throughput Problems Network Layers TCP Link Satellite Links and TCP Enhancing TCP Over Satellite Channels Using Standard Mechanisms (RFC-2488) Requests for comments Split TCP connections Asymmetric Channels Proposed Systems. UNIT V -DIRECT BROADCAST SATELLITE SERVICES (9)

Introduction Orbital Spacings Power Rating and Number of Transponders Frequencies and Polarization Transponder Capacity Bit Rates for Digital Television MPEG Compression Standards Forward Error Correction Home Receiver Outdoor Unit (ODU) Home Receiver Indoor Unit (IDU) Downlink Analysis Uplink -Problems - Satellite Mobile Services VSATs Radarsat Global Positioning Satellite System Orbcomm. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw-Hill Publication Third edition 2001 REFERENCES 1. Timothy Pratt Charles Bostian & Jeremy Allmuti, Satellite Communications, John Willy & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd. 2004 2. Wilbur L. Pritchars Henri G.Suyder Hond Robert A.Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems Engineering, Pearson Education Ltd., Second edition 2003. 3. M.Richharia : Satellite Communication Systems - Design Principles, Macmillan Press Ltd. Second Edition 2003.

EIT 5839

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To give maximum exposure to soft ware management process frame work in discipline OBJECTIVE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To understand SDLC models and process models To know the different metrics available for measuring soft ware quality To learn planning and estimation and how they affect quality To understand the various risk involved in the project To know how to keep track of various stages of project (9)

UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS

Conventional Software Management Process-Product- Project-lifecycle Phases- Evolution of Software Economics Improving Software Economics People in software managementPrinciples of Modern Software Project Management -Conventional versus Modern Software Project Management.W5HH Principle-ISO 9001 and SEI CMM UNIT II - SOFTWARE PROCESS AND PROJECT METRICS (9)

Software process assessment managing soft ware organizations - Measures and metrics in process and project domains metrics for software quality - software quality assurancemanaging soft ware quality metrics for small organizations- tailoring the process Process Automation. UNIT III - SOFTWARE PRJECT PLANNING (9)

Iterative Process Planning Project Organisation and Responsibilities Project Plan- Software Configuration management Software scope resources Software Project estimation Soft ware inspections Decomposition techniques-Emperical estimation models- make / buy decision Automated estimated tools. UNIT IV - UMBERLLA ACTIVITES IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT (9)

Reactive versus proactive risk strategies soft ware risks risk identification risk projectionrisk refinement risk mitigation monitoring and management safty risk & hazards rmmm plan modern project profiles. UNIT V - PROJECT SCHEDULING AND TRACKING (9)

Basic concepts relationship between people and effort defining a task set for the soft ware project selecting software engineering tasks refinement of major tasks defining a task networks , scheduling earned valued analysis error tracking project plan.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Walker Royce, Software Project Management - A Unified Framework, Pearson Education, 2004. 2. Humphrey Watts, Managing the software process, Addison Wesley, 1989 REFERENCES 1. Humphrey Watts, Managing the software process, Addison Wesley, 1989. 2. Ramesh Gopalaswamy, Managing Global Projects, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001. 3. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, Software Project Management, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

EIT 5840

BIO INFORMATICS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM The aim of this course is to expose the students to the basics of bioinformatics processing and the computational techniques needed for the process. OBJECTIVES 1. Basic aspects of the biological patterns 2. Biological pattern matching 3. Use the archives and information retrieval strategies 4. Understand the approaches to sequence alignments 5. Understand the issues in proteins and drug discovery UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9)

Life in Space and Time, Dogmas, Data Archives, WWW, Computers, Biological Classification, Use of Sequences, Protein Structure, Clinical Implications UNIT II - GENOME ORGANIZATION (9)

Genomics and Proteomics, Eavesdropping on transmission of genetic information, Genomes of prokaryotes, Genomes of Eukaryotes, Human Genome, SNPs, Genetic Diversity, Evolution of Genomes UNIT III - ARCHIVES AND INFORMATION RETRIEVAL Introduction, The archives, Gateways to Archives UNIT IV - ALIGNMENTS AND PHYLOGENETIC TREES (9) (9)

Introduction to Sequence Alignment, The dotplot, Dotplots and Sequence Alignments, Measures of Sequence similarity, Computing the Al;ignment, The dynamic programming algorithm, Significance of alignments, Multiple sequence alignment, Applications, Phylogeny, Phylogenetic trees UNIT V - PROTEIN STRUCTURE AND DRUG DISCOVERY (9)

Protein Stability and Folding, Applications of Hydrophobicity, Superposition of structures, DALI, Evolution of Protein Structures, Classification of Protein Structures, Protein Structure prediction and modeling, Assignment of protein structures to genomes, Prediction of protein function, Drug discovery and development THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Arthur M Lesk, Introduction to Bioinformatics, Oxford University Press, India, 2004 REFERENCE 1. Attwood T K and Parry-Smith D J, Introduction to Bioinformatics, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2001

EIT 5841

RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To expose the students to the basics of resource management techniques OBJECTIVES 1. Aspects of the linear programming and Integer programming 2. To know in depth about the dual problem and their relationship 3. To understand the basics about the optimization theory UNIT I - LINEAR PROGRAMMING (9)

Principal components of decision problem Modeling phases LP Formulation and graphic solution Resource allocation problems Simplex method Sensitivity analysis. UNIT II - DUALITY AND NETWORKS (9)

Definition of dual problem Primal Dual relation ships Dual simplex methods Post optimality analysis Transportation and assignment model shortest route problem. UNIT III - INTEGER PROGRAMMING (9)

Cutting plan algorithm Branch and bound methods, Multistage (Dynamic) programming. UNIT IV - CLASSICAL OPTIMISATION THEORY (9)

Unconstrained external problems, Newton Ralphson method Equality constraints Jacobean methods Lagrangian method Kuhn Tucker conditions Simple problems. UNIT V - OBJECT SCHEDULING (9)

Network diagram representation Critical path method Time charts and resource leveling PERT.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Anderson, Quantitative Methods for Business, 8th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2002. 2. Winston, Operation Research, Thomson Learning, 2003. 3. H.A.Taha, Operation Research, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. 2. Anand Sarma, Operation Research, Himalaya Publishing House, 2003.

EIT 5842

PARALLEL COMPUTING

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To study the scalability & clustering issues, understand the technologies used for parallel computation, study the different inter connection networks and the different software programming models. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the scalability and clustering issues and the technology necessary for them. 2. To understand the technologies enabling parallel computing. 3. To study the different types of interconnection networks. 4. To study the software support needed for shared memory programming.

UNIT I - SCALABILITY AND CLUSTERING

(9)

Evolution of Computer Architecture Dimensions of Scalability Parallel Computer Models Basic Concepts Of Clustering Scalable Design Principles Parallel Programming Overview Processes, Tasks and Threads Parallelism Issues Interaction / Communication Issues Semantic Issues In Parallel Programs. UNIT II -ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES (9)

System Development Trends Principles of Processor Design Microprocessor Architecture Families Hierarchical Memory Technology Cache Coherence Protocols Shared Memory Consistency Distributed Cache Memory Architecture Latency Tolerance Techniques Multithreaded Latency Hiding. UNIT III -SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS (9)

Basics of Interconnection Networks Network Topologies and Properties Buses, Crossbar and Multistage Switches, Software Multithreading Synchronization Mechanisms. UNIT IV - PARALLEL PROGRAMMING (9)

Paradigms And Programmability Parallel Programming Models Shared Memory Programming. UNIT V - MESSAGE PASSING PROGRAMMING Message Passing Paradigm Message Passing Interface Parallel Virtual Machine. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60 (9)

TEXT BOOK 1. Kai Hwang and Zhi.Wei Xu, Scalable Parallel Computing, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCES 1. David E. Culler & Jaswinder Pal Singh, Parallel Computing Architecture: A Hardware/Software Approach, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 1999. 2. Michael J. Quinn, Parallel Programming in C with MPI & OpenMP, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.

ELECTIVE V (VIII SEM) ECS 5843 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM It provides a basic foundation of wireless and Mobile networks and its applications. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of wireless transmission basics and protocols 2. To know in depth about wireless LAN and ATM UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction wireless transmission radio propogation signals and propogation antennas multiplexing and modulation spectrum operation of cellular systems, planning a cellular system,analog & digital cellular system. UNIT II - WIRELESS MEDIA (9)

Media access control protocol SDMA- FDMA TDMA CDMA- comparison Telecommunication Systems GSM DECT- TETRA UMTS and IMT 2000, satellite systems GEO 139,LEO 139, MEO 140. Routing localization handover broadcast systems overview. Cyclic repletion of data digital audio broadcasting - digital video broadcasting UNIT III - WIRELESS LAN AND ATM (9)

Wireless LAN - IEEE 802.11 standards HIPERLAN Blue tooth technology and protocols.wireless Local loop technologies. Wireless ATM motivation working group services- reference model functions- radio access layer handover- location management addressing mobile Qos issues delays -error and packet loss.error control schemes access point control protocol UNIT IV - MOBILE APPLICATION ARCHITECTURE AND MESSAGING (9) Choosing the right architecture - application architecture smart client messaging types messaging value chain UNIT V - MOBILE AND WIRELESS SECURITY (9)

Security Primer - Creating a Secure environment - Threads - Technologies - Other Security Measures - WAP Security - Smart Client Security - Overview of Smart Client Architecture Mobile Operating Systems THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Jochen Schiller, "Mobile Communications", Addision Wesley, 2000 2. Martyn Mallick, "Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials", Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., 2003. REFERENCES 1. Uyless Black, "Mobile and Wireless Networks", Prentice Hall, 1996 2. William C. Y. Lee, Mobile Communication Design Fundamentals, John Wiley, 1993

ECS 5844

ELECTRONIC COMMERCE

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To understand the E-Commerce. OBJECTIVES 1. To describe E-Commerce Framework. 2. To explain Electronic Systems for Payment. 3. To Learn use of E-Commerce Advertising & Marketing 4. To understand business documents and Digital Library. 5. To understand use of multimedia systems for E-Commerce. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction Electronic Commerce Framework The Anatomy of E-Commerce Applications. The Network Infrastructure for E-Commerce, The Internet as a Network Infrastructure. UNIT II - MOBILE COMMERCE (9)

Electronic Payment Systems, Interorganizational Commerce and EDI, EDI Implementation, MIME and Value added Networks. UNIT III - ENCRYPTION (9)

Advertising and Marketing on the Internet, Computer Based Education and Training, Technological Components of Education on-Demand, Digital Copy rights and Electronic Commerce, Software Agent. UNIT IV - ELECTRONIC PAYMENTS (9)

The Corporate Digital Library Dimensions of Internal Electronics Commerce Systems, Making a Business case for a document Library, Types of Digital documents, Issues behind document Infrastructure, Corporate data warehouses, Documents Active / Compound document architecture. UNIT V - NET COMMERCE (9)

Multimedia and Digital Video Broad band Telecommunications Mobile and Wireless Computing Fundamentals.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Kalakota & Whinston , Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Pearson Education, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Kamalesh K. Bajaj, E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge & Business, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. Brenda Kennan, Managing your E-Commerce Business, PHI, 2001. 3. Elias M. Awad, Electronic Commerce from Vision to Fulfillment, PHI, Feb-2003. 4. Bharat Bhaskar, Electronic Commerce Framework, Technology and Application, TMH, 2003.

ECS 5845

SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM This deals with improving the quality of software and managing them OBJECTIVE 1. To provide the basic principles of Software quality and concepts 2. To gain knowledge by knowing different Quality Assurance models 3. To have an basic idea about Total Quality Management UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Software quality views of quality hierarchial modeling of qualtity - cost of quality quality criteria interrelation measuring quality- software quality metrics problems with metrics overall measure of quality- developments in measuring quality quality attributes/measures cocomo project advanced work on quality measures quality profiles UNIT II SOFTWARE QUALITY CONTROL (9)

Concepts of Quality Control, Quality Assurance, Quality Management - Total Quality Management; Cost of Quality; QC tools - 7 QC Tools and Modern Tools; Other related topics Business Process Re-engineering - Zero Defect, Six Sigma, Quality Function Deployment, Benchmarking, Statistical process control UNIT III - SOFTWARE ENGINEERINIG PRINCIPLES (9)

Measurement of quality - Software Engineering Principles - Software process paradigm- CASE tools- Software Project Management - Software Process, Project and Product Metrics, Risk Management- methods and tools for quality quality standards Approaches to Software Development UNIT IV - SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE MODELS (9)

Software Quality Assurance; Statistical Quality Assurance Software Reliability, Models for Quality Assurance ISO 9000 Series, CMM, SPICE, Malcolm Baldrige Award . Quality Management System historical perspective elements of QMS and terms of human quality factors time management - QMS for software quality assurance

UNIT V - INTRODUCTION TO TOTAL QUALTITY MANAGEMENT

(9)

Total quality management - introduction - software reuse for TQM - software testing method for TQM - defect prevention and Total quality management - zero defect software development.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Watt.S. Humphery, "Managing Software Process ", Addison - Wesley, 1998 2. Allan Gillies, "Software Quality Theory & Management ", Thomson International Press 1997. REFERENCES 1. Roger Pressman, "Software Engineering ", 5th edition McGraw Hill, 1999 2. G.Gordan Schulmeyer, James, "Total Quality Management for Software", International Thomson Computer Press, 1998 3. Philip B Crosby, "Quality is Free: The Art of Making Quality Certain ", 1992 4. Brian hambling, "Managing Software Quality", Mc Graw Hill

ECS 5846 AIM

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To gain knowledge about microwave, satellite, optical, telephone and cellular communication systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To have knowledge about characteristics of Transmission and microwave devices. 2. To study about the fundamentals of satellite communication 3. To gain brief knowledge about optical communication 4. To gain knowledge about optical communication 5. To gain knowledge about advances in Telephone systems 6. To understand the essentials of cellular communication systems. UNIT I- METHODS OF COMMUNICATION (9)

Transmission lines Types and Characteristics, Antenna Fundamentals Different types of antennas & their Characteristics, Radio Frequency wave propagation- Microwave Principles, Devices (Reflex Klystron, Magnetron, TWT)-(Principles Only) Radar - Pulsed Radar - CW Radar (Principles and Block Diagram Only). UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS (9)

Satellite orbits- Satellite communication systems Earth stations- Applications: Surveillance, Navigation, Mobile Communication, TV Broadcast, Satellite Radio, Satellite Telephone-The Internet. UNIT III - INTRODUCTION TO FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION (9)

Light wave communication systems Fiber structure and function types of Fiber Optical Transmitter & Receiver Fiber optic Data communication systems UNIT IV -TELEPHONE SYSTEM AND ITS APPLICATION (9)

Telephones Telephone system- Facsimile- Cellular telephone system-Paging system Integrated services Digital Networks (ISDN) UNIT V - CELLULAR RADIO (9)

Citizens band Radio, Cordless Telephone, Improved Mobile Telephone service (IMTS), Introduction to Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS), GSM RF channels and time slots Voice transmission Frequency Hopping - Subscriber ID module GSM Privacy and Security IS-95 CDMA PCS Channels Forward Channel Reverse Channel Voice Coding Power Control Hand-off and CDMA Security.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Louis.E.Frenzel, Communication Electronics Principles and Application, 3rd Editions, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002 2. Roy Blake, Wireless Communication Technology, Thomson Delmar Learning, Second Reprint 2002. REFERENCES 1. Wayne Tomasi,Electronic Communication systems 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2001. 2. Marin Cole, Introduction to Telecommunications Voice, Data and Internet, Pearson Education, 2001.

ECS 5847

SOFT COMPUTING

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To introduce the techniques of soft computing and adaptive neuro-fuzzy inferencing systems which differ from conventional AI and computing in terms of its tolerance to imprecision and uncertainty. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the ideas of fuzzy sets, fuzzy logic and use of heuristics based on human experience 2. To become familiar with neural networks that can learn from available examples and generalize to form appropriate rules for inferencing systems 3. To provide the mathematical background for carrying out the optimization associated with neural network learning 4. To familiarize with genetic algorithms and other random search procedures useful while seeking global optimum in self-learning situations 5. To introduce case studies utilizing the above and illustrate the intelligent behavior of programs based on soft computing UNIT I -FUZZY SET THEORY (9)

Introduction to Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing Fuzzy Sets Basic Definition and Terminology Set-theoretic Operations Member Function Formulation and Parameterization Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations Fuzzy If-Then Rules Fuzzy Reasoning Fuzzy Inference Systems Mamdani Fuzzy Models Sugeno Fuzzy Models Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models Input Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling. UNIT II -OPTIMIZATION (9)

Derivative-based Optimization Descent Methods The Method of Steepest Descent Classical Newtons Method Step Size Determination Derivative-free Optimization Genetic Algorithms Simulated Annealing Random Search Downhill Simplex Search. UNIT III -NEURAL NETWORKS (9)

Supervised Learning Neural Networks Perceptrons - Adaline Backpropagation Mutilayer Perceptrons Radial Basis Function Networks Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks Competitive Learning Networks Kohonen Self-Organizing Networks Learning Vector Quantization Hebbian Learning. UNIT IV -NEURO FUZZY MODELING (9)

Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems Architecture Hybrid Learning Algorithm Learning Methods that Cross-fertilize ANFIS and RBFN Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling Framework Neuron Functions for Adaptive Networks Neuro Fuzzy Spectrum.

UNIT V-APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE

(9)

Printed Character Recognition Inverse Kinematics Problems Automobile Fuel Efficiency Prediction Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing, PHI, 2004, Pearson Education 2004. REFERENCES 1. Timothy J.Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, McGraw-Hill, 1997. 2. Davis E.Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley, N.Y., 1989. 3. S. Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai, Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms, PHI, 2003. 4. R.Eberhart, P.Simpson and R.Dobbins, Computational Intelligence - PC Tools, AP Professional, Boston, 1996.

B.E-Electronics and Communication Engineering

SYLLABUS

First Year Sl N o 1 2 3 4 5 To tal 4 4 4 4 4 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Sub Code SH 4101 MA4101 SH 4102 SH 4103 CS4102

Subject Advanced English communication skills Principles of applied mathematics Advanced applied engineering physics Energy and material Chemistry Computational Systems and Programming languages Computer Graphics and Drafting Electro mechanics

L 2 3 2 2 2

T 1 -

P 2 2 2 2

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30

Total 200 150 200 200 200

6 7 8

ME4101 ME4105 EE4102

2 2

2 4

30 30

20 20

100 50 50 400

100 100 700

150 200 200 1500

Introduction to Electrical 2 - 2 4 30 20 circuits Total 15 1 14 30 240 160 (L-Lecture; T-Tutorial; P-Practical)

Semester III
Sl N o 1 2 3 4 5 6 L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 4 P 2 2 2 2 8 To tal 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 100 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 200 100 100 100 100 600

Sub Code Subject EC 4302 Semiconductor Devices MA 4302 Application of mathematics EC4303 Electro magnetic fields EE4303 Electrical Machines CS 4305 Data Structures EC 4310 Switching theory and logic design Total

Total 200 150 150 200 200 200 1100

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

Semester IV
Sl Sub No Code 1 MA4405 2 3 4 5 6 EC 4411 EC 4412 EC 4413 EE4406 EC 4414 L 3 3 T 2 P 2 To tal 5 5 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 100 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 100 600

Subject Stochastic Processes Signals and Systems

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

Microprocessors and 3 2 5 Micro controller Analog Electronic 3 2 5 Circuits I Measurements and 3 2 5 Instrumentation Analog and digital ICs 3 2 5 Total 18 2 10 30 (L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

Semester V
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 EC 4515 EC4516 EC 4517 CS 4512 L 3 3 3 3 T P 2 2 2 2 To tal 5 5 5 5 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 50 50 100 100 100

Subject Analog Communication Antennas and Wave Propagation Digital Signal Processing Computer Architecture & Organization Analog Electronic Circuits-II Control Systems Total

Total 200 200 200 150

5 6

EC 4518 EE4504

3 3 18

2 2 12

5 5 30

30 30 180

20 20 120

50 50 300

100 100 600

200 200 1150

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

Semester VI
Sl N o 1 Sub Code EC 4619 L 3 T P 2 To tal 5 Cont. Assess 30 Marks Prac Theory tical 50 100

Subject Microwave electronics and radar engineering Elective-I

Oral 20

Total 200

2 3 4 5 EC 4620 EC 4621 AEC462 2 EC 4623

2 1 -

2 2 4

5 6 5 4

30 30 30 30

20 20 20 20

50 50 100

100 100 100 -

150 200 200 150

PEC462 4

Electronic systems 3 design Digital 3 Communication Comprehension in Electronics and career skills Application specific 3 integrated circuits Design Mini Project Total 15

30

20

50

100

200

12

30

30 210

20 140

100 350

500

150 1250

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

Semester VII
Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 6 EC 4725 Sub Code L 3 3 3 3 3 3 T 1 1 2 P 2 2 2 2 Tot al 4 4 7 5 5 5 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 Marks Pract Theory ical 100 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100

Subject Elective-II Elective-III

Oral 20 20 20 20 20 20

Total 150 150 200 200 200 200

Advanced Digital Signal Processing CS 4728 Advanced Networking EC 4726 Optical Communication EC 4727 Very large scale integrated circuits design Total

18

30

180

120

200

600

1100

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

Semester VIII
Sl No 1 2 3 4 Sub Code EC4828 L 3 3 3 T 1 1 1 P 18 Tot al 4 4 4 18 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 50 Marks Prac Theory tical 100 250 250 100 100 300

Subject Total Quality Management Elective IV Elective V

Oral 20 20 20 100 160

Total 150 150 150 400 850

PEC4829 Project Work Total

9 3 18 30 140 (L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

List of electives

ELECTIVE I (VI SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEC 4642 EEC 4643 EEC 4644 Subject Digital image processing Embedded systems Microelectronics

ELECTIVE II (VII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEC 4745 EEC 4746 EEC 4747 Subject Mobile communication Television engineering Numerical methods

ELECTIVE III (VII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEC 4748 EEC 4749 EEC 4750 Subject Virtual instrumentation Wireless Communication Systems High speed networks

ELECTIVE IV (VIII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEC 4851 EEC 4852 EEC 4853 Subject Satellite communication and broadcasting Medical Electronics Computer aided analysis and design

ELECTIVE V (VIII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEC 4854 EEC 4855 EEC 4856 Subject Advanced Electronics system design Digital system design Internet and Java

SH4101

ADVANCED ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life and career related situations. OBJECTIVE 1. To improve the language proficiency of the students in English with emphasis on LSRW skills 2. To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their success. 3. To enable students to express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and professional contexts. 4. To develop the ability of students to guess the meanings of the words from the context and grasp the over all message of the text, draw inferences etc. 5. To develop an awareness in the students about writing as an exact and formal skill. UNIT I - LANGUAGE FOCUS (24)

Parts of speech - Tenses - Articles - Word formation with prefixes and suffixes - Voices Degrees of Comparison - Synonyms and Antonyms - Infinitives and Gerunds - If conditions Modal verbs - cause and effect - Purpose and function - Editing - Punctuation - sentence formation and transformation - Concord - Error correction - Imperatives (Should-form) UNIT II - LISTENING (16)

Listening comprehension - Listening for specific information - Note-making - Use of charts and diagrams - Listening to various sounds in English. UNIT III - SPEAKING (18)

Defining - Describing Objects - Describing uses - functions - Comparing - offering and giving advise - Analysing problems and providing solutions - Greetings - Suggesting - Introducing Warning - Seeking permission - Persuading - Praising and complimenting - Expressing sympathy - complaining and apologising - phoning - Symposium(Paper-presentation) - Mock Interview with HR - Mock GD - Technical conversations in the working environment. UNIT IV - READING (10)

Skimming the text for the gist - Scanning - Predicting the content - Interpreting charts and tables - Identifying stylistic features in text evaluating text - Understand discourse coherence -Note making - Guessing meaning from the context - Reading comprehension - Identifying the Slang in Journal.

UNIT V - WRITING

(22)

Sentence definition - Use of appropriate vocabulary - Paragraph writing - Essay writing Coherence - Cohesiveness - Narration and description - Precise writing - Formal and informal letters-Seeking Quotation - Ordering - Replying - Report - Writing - Technical Report writing Check-Lists - Instructions - Recommendations - E-mail writing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Dr.J.R.Nirmala, Technical English-Pearl Publishers, Chennai 2004 2. Mrs.Uma Maheswari, English for Engineers, Danam Publications, Chennai 2006. 3. Dr.S.Gunasekaran, Technical English Work Book, United Global Publishers, Chennai 2008. 4. Prof.M.Kandaswamy, Technical English Text book, Third Edition, BR Publications, Chennai 2008. REFERENCES 1. Authors: Humanities and social science department, English for Engineers and Technologists, Volume I. Anna University, published by orient Longman Lts., 1990. 2. Narayanasami, V.R, Strengthen your writing Orient Longman Ltd., Chennai 1996(Revised Edition) 3. Swan, Michael, Basic English Usage, Oxford University Press, 1984. 4. Robert.J.Dixson, Everyday dialogues in English, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,2006 5. K.R.Lakshmi Narayanan, English for Technical Communication, Vol I&2 SciTech publication, Chennai 2008. 6. Francis Soundararaj, Speaking and writing for effective Business Communication, McMillan, India Ltd., 2007.

COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB FOR BUDDING ENGINEERS AIM: 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life. 3. To eradicate their stage fear, while communicating others with high-confident. OBJECTIVE 1. To develop their vocabulary. 2. To enhance their communication skills in Listening and Speaking. PART-I (LANGUAGE LAB) 1. Listening Practice Listening for general content Listening to fill up the information Intensive listening Listening for specific information Fill in the gaps Word play/games Riddles/Puzzles Conversation practice Telephonic conversation Vocabulary building exercises a. Synonyms b. Antonyms c. Odd word d. Jumbled letters e. One word f. Homophones Error correction Pronunciation Practice-word stress-sentence stress- discussion-interpretation of visuals. Brain teasers. a. b. c. d. (20) (40)

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

PART-II (CAREER LAB) 1. Mock Group-Discussion 2. Oral Presentation skills 3. Mock-Interview 4. Debate 5. Conversational Practice.

MA4101 AIM

PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

L T P Total 310 150

To develop the basic Mathematical skills of engineering students as well as it helps them to understand the engineering subjects effectively. The topics introduced will serve as basic tools for specialized studies in many Engineering fields. OBJECTIVES 1. Be capable of mathematically formulating certain practical problems in terms of partial differential equations, solve them and practically interpret the results. 2. To understand double and triple integration and enable them to handle integrals of higher orders. 3. To know the basics of vector calculus comprising of gradient, divergence & curl and line, surface & volume integrals along with the classical theorems involving them. 4. To understand analytic functions and their interesting properties. 5. Make them to acquire a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. UNIT I -PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (18)

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-linear first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. UNIT II MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (18)

Double integration - Cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - Area as a double integral - Change of variables between Cartesian and polar co-ordinates Triple integration Volume as a triple integral- Beta and Gamma functions. UNIT III - VECTOR CALCULUS (18)

Scalar point functions - Vector point functions Gradient Divergence and Curl - Directional derivative Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields Line and surface integrals Gauss divergence theorem, Stokes and Greens theorems (with out proof) - Simple applications. UNIT IV - COMPLEX VARIABLES (18)

Function of a complex variable Analytic function Necessary conditions Cauchy Riemann equations Sufficient conditions (excluding proof) Properties of analytic function Harmonic conjugate Construction of Analytic functions - Conformal mapping w = z + a , w = az ,

w=

1 z 2 , w = e , w = z and Bilinear transformation. Statement and application of Cauchys z

integral theorem and integral formula Taylor and Laurent expansions Isolated singularities Residues - Cauchys residue theorem. Contour integration over unit circle and semicircular contours. UNIT V PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (18)

Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability Bayes theorem - Measures of central tendency Measures of dispersion Moments Correlation Rank correlation Line of Regression Test based on Normal distribution Students t-Distribution chi-squares test for goodness of fit. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi,2004. 2. Venkatraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics volume 1, Fourth Edition, National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics Eighth Edition, John Wiley Sons (Asia) Ltd., Singapore 2001 2. S.P.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics. S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi. and 90 30 TOTAL 120

SH 4102

ADVANCED APPLIED ENGINEERING PHYSICS (COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

L T P total 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. The syllabus covers the basic laws and principles of Physics and its applications. The course contents are so chosen that it should be more relevant to the modern development of science to meet the challenge posed by fast-changing technology. 2. To enable the students to correlate the theoretical principles with application oriented studies. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course the students would be exposed to 1. understand scientific concepts and to explain them logically 2. explain scientifically the new developments and technology 3. relate industrial developments to the developments in physical phenomena

UNIT 1- ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS

(18)

ACOUSTICS Introduction to Sound -Characteristics & Classification of Sound-Loudness-Weber-Fechner lawDecibel-Absorption co-efficient- Sabines law - Reverberation- Reverberation Time- Factors affecting the acoustics of building and their remedies. ULTRASONICS Introduction-Production of Ultrasonic waves-Magnetostriction method-Piezo electric methodDetection of Ultrasonic waves - Properties of Ultrasonic waves - Application to science industry and medicine - SONAR. UNIT II- LASER AND FIBER OPTICS COMMUNICATION (20)

LASER Introduction - Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission-Characteristics of Laser- Three and four level laser system He Ne laser - Nd-YAG laser- Semiconductor Laser- Application of Lasers in medicine and communication Basic principles of holography Construction and reconstruction of image on hologram Applications of holography FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION Principle and Propagation of light in optical fibers-Numerical Aperture and Acceptance angleTypes of optical fibers (Material, Refractive, Mode)-Application of fiber optics in communication and sensors.

UNIT III- ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

NONLINEAR MATERIALS Principle - passive and active materials properties of nonlinear materials applications NANO MATERIALS Introduction properties of nano particles carbon nano tubes semiconductor quantum dots application of nano particles. SUPER CONDUCTORS Introduction properties types - applications

UNIT IV - PROPERTIES OF MATTER

(18)

ELASTICITY Stress-Strain relationship- Hookes Law- Elastic behavior of a material- Uses of Stress Strain diagram-Factors affecting Elasticity-Youngs modulus-Bulk modulus- Modulus of RigidityPoissons ratio- Torsional Pendulum-Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire. BENDING OF BEAMS Bending moment of a beam - Experiment to find Youngs Modulus using Microscope-NonUniform bending-Expression for depression-Experiment to determine Youngs Modulus using pin and microscope method cantileaver loaded at the free end. UNIT V- DIELECTRICS & THERMAL PROPERTIES (17)

DIELECTRICS Introduction Dielectric constant Electronic ionic and orientational polarizations internal fields in solids clausius polarizations - mossotti equation dielectrics in alternating fields frequency dependences of the polarization ferro and piezo electricity THERMAL PROPERTIES Introduction - Specific Heat of Solids Einstein Model Debye Model Lattice Vibrations Phonons Thermal Conductivity. TEXT BOOKS: 1. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta, Engineering physics Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1987. 2. William Thomas Silfvast, Laser Fundamentals, Cambridge University Press, 2004. 3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology- a gentle introduction to next big idea Ratner Pearson Education, 2002. 4. A. K. Bandyopadhyay, Nanomaterials New Age International Publishers, 1997. 5. C. Kittel, Introduction to solid state physics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., seventh edition, 1996. 6. S. O. Pillai, Solid state physics, New age international (p) Ltd., publishers, revised Sixth edition, 2005

REFERENCES 1. Dr. Arumugam, Engineering physics, Anuradha Agencies, Third revised edition 2. G. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Physics, VRB Publishers 3. William callister, Materials Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 1997. 4. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Volume 2, John Wiley & Sons, fourth edition, 1992.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total

90 60 150

EXPERIMENTAL WORK

1. Torsional Pendulum -Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire &Moment of inertia of a Disc. 2. Viscosity Poisuilles flow Determination of Coefficient of Viscosity of a liquid. 3. Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus 4. Lees Disc Determination of Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor 5. Air Wedge -Determination of Thickness of a wire 6. Spectrometer Determination of Wavelengths of a Spectral lines using Grating 7. Spectrometer -Determination of Dispersive power of a Prism 8. Laser Determination of Particle Size & Wavelength 9. Band Gap Determination of Semiconducting material 10.Ultrasonic Interferometer -Determination of Velocity of ultrasonic waves in different liquids 11. Potentiometer E.M.F of a thermocouple 12. Non- Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus

SH 4103 AIM:

ENERGY AND MATERIAL CHEMISTRY

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

The main theme of the new syllabus is knowing the concepts and methods already exist and creating the awareness to meet the present and future needs through technology and simultaneously to motivating them to involve in the research area utilizing the current trend such as nano technology. OBJECTIVES: 1. It consist of the various energy resources to which the world is always facing numerous problems and in a position to invent new resources. 2. Material chemistry is included for the engineering student in order to know what chemistry materials are behind the technology. Also it deals with how the materials are protected from corrosion by technically. 3. Zeolites are nowadays used in various emerging catalytic field mainly in petro chemical cracking, water treatment, solar energy storing devices etc,. Also it contribute to a cleaner, safer environment in a great number of ways. 4. Nano materials are nowadays a current research area which the technology students should know about it for their future needs.

UNIT I - BASIS OF ELECTRO CHEMISTRY

(16)

Electrode potential single and standard electrode potential - Nernst Equation Reference electrode - hydrogen, calomel pH electrode - glass electrode - Electro chemical series and its applications Electrochemical cells Daniel cell Reversible and Irreversible cells concentration cell Conductometric titrations for acid-base reactions Potentiometric titration for estimation of Iron(Fe2+). . Fuel cells - H2-O2 fuel cells- Methanol- Oxygen fuel cells. UNIT II - ENERGY SOURCES & ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES Fuels Classification - Analysis of coal - Carbonyzation of metallurgical coke. Liquid fuels Petroleum - Cracking - Synthetic Petrol - Octane number - Knocking Antiknocking - Diesel oil - Cetane number. Gaseous fuels - Natural gas - CNG, LPG, Producer gas, Water gas, Coal gas, Biogas. Nuclear energy Types of nuclear reactions chain reaction Nuclear reactor. Batteries Classification - Laclanches cells - Alkaline batteries. Secondary batteries Ni - Cd battery - Lead acid storage battery - Solid polymer membrane fuel cell - Lithium-Sulphur battery Lithium battery - Solar Energy - Solar cells. (20)

UNIT III - ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

Abrasives Classification Hard Silico- soft and artificial silicon carbide- applications of abrasives. Refractories Classification - Properties of refractories - Refractoriness RUL porosity thermal spalling - thermal conductivity dimensional stability Alloys - Classification of alloys - Ferrous alloys - Micromesh and Stainless alloys- Non-ferrous alloys Copper alloys Heat treatment of alloys. Powder metallurgy Introduction definition applications of powder metallurgy manufacture of metal powders Atomisation reduction of oxides electrolytic deposition powder metallurgy processes secondary operations. Zeolites- Types- structure- properties- utilization of natural zeolites for solar energy storagesapplications. UNIT IV - CORROSION CONTROL AND METALLIC COATINGS (20)

Corrosion Control- Proper designing- using pure metals- using metal alloys- Cathodic Protection- use of Inhibitors- Application of Protective Coatings. Electro deposition - Anodic Coating - Cathodic coating - Methods of applications of Metal coatings - hot dipping - Metal Cladding- Electroplating - Displacement Plating- Metal Spraying Cementation - Electroless Plating - Chemical conversion coatings- Phosphate coating Chromate coating - Chemical Oxide coating -Anodised coating. UNIT V - POLYMERIC AND NANOMATERIALS POLYMERIC MATERIALS Engineering plastics types thermo and thermo setting plastics bakelite polyamides ABS copolymer Polyesters PVC Teflon Poly carbonates Polyurethane. Speciality Polymers - Electrical properties of polymers - Ionic polymers - Liquid crystal polymers - Polymers in electrical and electronic industries - Polymer blends and alloys- Super conductors - Organic insulators - Conducting Polymers - LED sensors. NANO MATERIALS Properties of CNT Potential applications of SWNT and MWNT - Electrochemical storage of hydrogen THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total 90 60 150 (19)

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Jain & Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai publishing Company(P) Ltd., 2002. Picket, Electrochemical Engineering, Prentice Hall Inc., 1977. J.S.Newman, Electrochemical systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 1973. C. Mantell, Electrochemical Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1972. S.K. Hajra Choudhury, Materials Science and Processes, Indian Book distributing Co., 1983.

REFERENCES 1. XU Ruren etc, Structure and Synthesis of Zeolites Molecular Sieve, Published by Jilin University 1987, 8. 2. WU Xianggan, etc., Rural Energy Source, Published by Agriculture Publishing House 1988, 6. 3. M.Burak(ed.) and U.K. Stevenge, Electrochemical Power Sources Primary and Secoundary Battries

EXPERIMENTAL WORK OBJECTIVES: In Engineering Chemistry laboratory, the experiments are based on new syllabus which includes 1. Application of electrodes and cells in the chemistry. 2. Estimating the metals such as Iron, copper and Nickel present in the sample of material by volumetric and spectrophotometric methods. 3. Hardness giving minerals and dissolved oxygen which are mainly responsible for corrosion of metals are understand by estimation of hardness of water and dissolved oxygen. 4. Properties of polymer such as viscosity can be learn from Ostwalds viscometer. PART A 1. Potentiometric estimation of FAS using standard K2Cr2O7 solution. 2. Conductometric estimation of an Acid (HCl) using standard NaOH solution. 3. Conductometric estimation of mixture of Acids (HCl) using standard NaOH. 4. Determination of strength of HCl and NaOH by pH titration. 5. Determination of molecular weigth of a polymer using Ostwalds viscometer. PART B 1. Determination of Total, temporary and permanent Hardness of a sample of water using disodium salt of EDTA. 2. Estimation of Nickel in steel by EDTA method. 3. Determination of percentage of Copper in brass using standard sodium thiosulphate solution. 4.Determination of Iron in the given sample of solution using potassium dichromate crystals by internal indicator method. 5. Determination of Dissolved Oxygen in the given water sample by Winklers method. 6. Determination of Chloride content of water sample by Mohrs method. 7. Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of the given industrial waste water sample. Note: Minimum of 10 Experiment should be conducted. Reference: 1. Vogels, Text book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, revised by J.Bassett, R.C. Denny, G.H. Jeffery, 4th Ed.

CS 4102

COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (Common for ECE & EEE)

L T 2 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To provide an awareness to Computers and Computing OBJECTIVES 1. To enable the student to learn the major components of a Computer system 2. To learn how arithmetic is handled in computers 3. To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems 4. To learn to use office automation tools 5. To learn to program in C UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (18)

Introduction-Characteristics of Computers- Components of a computer system-Computer Hardware-Software-Classification of computers-Installing and Troubleshooting SoftwareIntroduction to Internet Services -Electronic mail and bulletin boards, and the World Wide Web. Computer Arithmetic- Binary Arithmetic-Basic arithmetic Operations-Basic Computer Organization: Functional Units, basic I/O devices and storage devices; Representation of integers, real (fixed and floating point), characters (ASCII and Unicode); Software development analysis-verification-validation-testing-tools for design.

UNIT II- PROBLEM SOLVING

(14)

Problem solving techniques-Planning the computer program-Purpose-algorithm-Design-flow chart-Program control structures-Types and generation of programming languages-Pseudo codeApplication Software packages Development of algorithms for simple problems-VerificationDebugging and testing-Efficiency of algorithms.

UNIT III- INTRODUCTION TO C

(20)

Overview of C-Constants, variables and data types Operators and Expressions Operator precedence and associativity operators-input and output functions-Simple computational problems-Decision making, branching and looping-problem using control statements. Prototypes and Functions-Declaring, defining and accessing functions-Parameter passing methods-Recursion- Storage classes-auto, extern, static, and register-Library functions-User defined functions-Sample Programs. Arrays-Defining and processing arrays-Passing arrays to functions-Multi-dimensional arraysHandling of character Strings-Enumerated data types-Programs using simple sorting, searching and merging of arrays.

UNIT IV- POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND LINKED LISTS

(20)

Pointers in functions, Arrays and structures-Example programs-Dynamic memory allocationOperations on pointers Structures User defined data types-union-nested structure, passing structures to functions-Self referential structures-File pointer-High level file operations-Creating, processing and updating on files-Singly linked list-Creation, Insertion and deletion of elements-Stack and queue Implementation. UNIT V- PROGRAMMING IN JAVA (18)

Introduction- Features of java-Data Types-Variables-Expressions-operators-Classes-MethodsArrays and strings-Inheritance-Exceptions and packages-I/O streams-Threads-Interfaces-AWT. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. E.Balagurusamy,Programming in ANSI C, TMH, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, II edition, TMH publications, 2006. 3. Pradeep K.Sinha and Priti Sinha. Computer Fundamentals: Concepts, Systems and applications, BPB Publications, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Allen B.Tucker et.Al, Fundamentals of Computing I, TMH New delhi1998. 2. W.Savitch, Java and introduction to computer science and programming, Prentice Hall International 3. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, JAVA: How to Program, Pearson Education 4. H. Schildt, Java 2: The Complete Reference Book, Tata McGraw Hill. 5. V.Rajaraman, Fundamentals of Computers, Preintice Hall of India, 2002. 7. Jeri R.Hanly and Elliot B.Kofman, Problem solving and program design in C, 4th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2003. 8. R.G. Dromey, How to solve it by Computer, Prentice Hall of India. 90 60 150

LABORATORY C Programming Arrays 1. To write a program to perform Matrix multiplication 2. To write a program to prepare and print the sales report. String Manipulation 3. To write a program to perform string manipulation function like string concatenations, comparison, find the length and string copy without using library functions. 4. To write a program to arrange names in alphabetical order. Functions 5. To write a C program to calculate the mean, variance and standard deviation using functions. 6. To write a C program to perform sequential and binary search using functions. Recursion 7. To write a program to print the Fibonacci series and to calculate the factorial of the given number using functions. Structures 8. To print the mark sheet of n students using structures. Pointers 9. To write a program using pointers to access the elements of an array and count the number of occurrences of the given number in the array. Dynamic Allocation 10. To write a program for creating and displaying a linked list. Java Programming 1. Simple Java programs. 2. Inheritance and Interfaces. 3. Exceptions Handling. 4. Event handling programs.

ME 4101

COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND DRAFTING (FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION ONLY)

L T P total 0 0 2 150

AIM To draw and prepare the Engineering Drawings and CAD drawings as per B.I.S standards. OBJECTIVE To develop graphic skills for communicating concepts, ideas and designs of engineering products and to give exposure to national standards relating to technical drawings. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION, PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND SURFACES (25) Construction of curves and special curves, projection of points, straight lines, determination of true length and true inclination projection of surfaces polygon and circular lamina. UNIT II - PROJECTION OF SOLIDS, SECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES. (25) Projection of simple solids prism, pyramid, cylinder and cone drawing views when the axis of the solids is inclined to one reference plane. Sectioning of simple solids, obtaining sectional views and true shape, when the axis of solid is vertical and cutting plane inclined to one reference plane. Development of lateral surfaces of truncated simple solids. UNIT III - PICTORIAL PROJECTION (25)

Isometric projection isometric scale isometric views of simple solids truncated prism, pyramids, cylinders and cones. UNIT IV -COMPUTER AIDED DRAWING (20)

Introduction to Auto-CAD organizing a drawing area editing commands- drawing curves using BSplines and cubic splines. creation of 2 D models of simple geometric models. UNIT V -COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELLING (25)

Creation of 3D models of simple geometric models and obtaining 2 D multi view drawings from 3 D modeling. Computer Aided Drafting and Dimensioning using appropriate software.Drawing of title block with necessary text and projection symbol, dimensioning.Drawing plan of residential building (2bed room, kitchen, hall etc.,) Drawing of simple steel truss. drawing of sectional views of simple solids. TOTAL 120

TEXT BOOKS 1. Natarajan K.V, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Private Publisher, 17th Edition, 2003 2. Venugopal K., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002 REFERENCES 1. Bertoline and Wiebe, Fundamentals Graphics Communication, Third edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2002 2. Warren J. Luzaddernd Jon. D. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition, 2001 3. Gopalakrishnana K. R.,Engineering Drawing ( Vol I & II), Subhas Publications, 1998 STANDARDS 1. IS 10711 2001 Technical Product Documentation Sizes of Drawing Sheets 2. IS 9609 1983 Lettering on Technical Drawings 3. IS 10714 1983 General Principles of Presentation of Technical Drawings 4. IS 11669 - 1986 General Principles of Dimensioning of Technical Drawings

ME 4105 AIM

ELECTRO MECHANICS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

To understand and analyze the basic principles of mechanics and electro-mechanical systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions. 2. To understand the principle of work and energy. 3. To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium. 4. To understand the laws of motion, the kinetics of motion and the interrelationship. 5. To be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. 6. To analyse the mechanical system relevant to electronics engineers UNIT I BASICS, STATICS AND DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES (10) Introduction Units and Dimensions Laws of Mechanics Coplanar Forces Resolution and Composition of forces and Equilibrium of a particles Forces in space - Equilibrium of a particle in space Equivalent systems of forces Principle of transmissibility Single equivalent force. UNIT II - EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES (10) Free body diagram - types of supports and their reactions requirements of stable equilibrium Moments and couples Moment of a force about a point and about an axis Vectorial representation of moments and couples - Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions Equilibrium of rigid bodies in three dimensions. UNIT III- PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS (14) Determination of Areas and Volumes First moment of area and the centroid of sections rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula second and product moments of plane area rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula - Parallel axis theorems and perpendicular axis theorems Polar moment of inertia Principal moments of inertia of plane areas Principal axes of inertia Mass moment of inertia Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular section, prism, sphere from first principle Relation to area moments of inertia.

UNIT IV-DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES

(12)

Displacements, Velocity and acceleration their relationship Newtons Law Work Energy Equation of particles Impulse and momentum Impact of elastic bodies.

UNIT V - ANALYSIS OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM FOR ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (14) Basic Principles of Mechanics, mechanical system- friction, frictional force Laws of Coloumb friction Simple Contact friction, belt friction, wheel friction, rolling frction, bearing friction, inertia, stress, strain, deflection- load curve, bending of beams and torsion.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

60 30 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Beer F. P. and Johnson Jr. E. R. Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.1 Statics andVol.2 Dynamics, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1997. 2. Meriam, Engineering Mechanics, Vol.1 Statics and Vol.2, Dynamics 2/e, Willey International, 1998. 3. Kumar K. L. Engineering Mechanics III Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, Ltd., 1998. REFERENCES 1. Rajasekaran, S and Sankara Subramanian,G, Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics ,Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2000 2. Irrving, H.Shames, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, IV Edition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2003 3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagan, S., Engineering Mechanics Statics & Dynamics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001 4. Ashok Gupta, Interactive Engineering Mechanic Statics A Virtual Tutor (cdrom), Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002 5. Mokoshi, V.S., Engineering Mechanics Vol.1 Statics and Vol.2 Dynamics. 6. Mechatronics , H.M.T Ltd, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., 2001.

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LAB AIM To familiarize the students with electrical circuit elements and electrical networks. 1. Verification of Kirchoffs Laws. 2. Verification of Network Theorems (Thevenin, Norton and Superposition Theorems) 3. Introduction to PSPICE analysis of electric circuits. 4. Power Measurement in a three phase circuit by two wattmeter metho 5. Study of active and Passive filters 6. Power measurement by three ammeter and three voltmete 7. Study of resonance and circuit transients by PSPICE Simulation 8. Study of unbalanced circuits using symmetrical components (balanced circuit with unbalanced source only) 9. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence of RC, circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RC and RL circuits. 10. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence RL and RLC circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RL circuits.

EE4102 AIM

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

To familiarize the students with electrical circuit elements and networks. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the basic circuit laws. 2. To understand the effect of sinusoidal signals. 3. To understand the network theorems. UNIT I - BASIC (18)

Current- Voltage- Power- Branch- Tree-Loop-Network-Classifications-Ohm's and kirchoff's laws - Resistive circuits - Series and parallel reduction - Star and delta transformation - Voltage & Current Source; Ideal and Practical Voltage Source & Current Source- equivalent circuitConversion of Voltage Source into current source and vice-versa. UNIT II - D.C. NETWORK THEORY (18)

Circuit theory concepts-Mesh and node analysis. Network Theorems- Super-position theorem. Thevenins theorem- Nortonstheorem- Maximum Power Transfer theorem. UNIT III - SINGLE PHASE AC CIRCUITS (18)

Alternating Voltage & Current- Phase Angle- Phase Difference- Average Value of SinusoidRoot mean Square or Effective Value- Representation of Sine Wave by Phasor- Alternating Current and Power in Resistive- Capacitive- Inductive Circuit- Alternating Current & Power in Series RL Circuit- RC -RLC -Apparent- Active & Reactive Power & Power Factor. UNIT IV - A.C. NETWORK THEORY (18)

Circuit theory concepts-Mesh and node analysis. Network Theorems- Super-position theorem. Thevenins theorem- Nortons theorem- Maximum Power Transfer theorem. UNIT V - COUPLED CIRCUITS (18)

Self Inductance - Mutual Inductance - Co-efficient of coupling Dot convention - Analysis of coupled circuits - Analysis of single tuned and double tuned coupled circuits involving mutual inductance- Transient response of RL-RC and RLC series and parallel circuits.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Paranjothi S.R.- 'Electric Circuit Analysis'- New Age International Ltd. - Delhi- 2nd Edition- 2000. 2. Edminister- J.A.- 'Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits'- Schaum's outline series McGraw Hill Book Company- 2nd Edition- 1983. REFERENCES 1. Hyatt- W.H. Jr. and Kemmerly- J.E.- 'Engineering Circuit Analysis'- McGraw Hill International Editions- 1993. 2. Sudhakar- A. and Shyam Mohan S.P.- 'Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis'Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.- New Delhi- 1994

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LAB AIM To familiarize the students with electrical circuit elements and electrical networks. 1. Verification of Kirchoffs Laws. 2. Verification of Network Theorems (Thevenin, Norton and Superposition Theorems) 3. Introduction to PSPICE analysis of electric circuits. 4. Power Measurement in a three phase circuit by two wattmeter metho 5. Study of active and Passive filters 6. Power measurement by three ammeter and three voltmete 7. Study of resonance and circuit transients by PSPICE Simulation 8. Study of unbalanced circuits using symmetrical components (balanced circuit with unbalanced source only) 9. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence of RC, circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RC and RL circuits. 10. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence RL and RLC circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RL circuits.

EC4302

SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation- capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively. OBJECTIVE On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field 2. Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors 3. Diode operation and switching characteristics 4. Operation of BJT- FET- MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices.

UNIT I-ELECTRON BALLISTICS

(9)

Motion of charged particles in electric- magnetic & combined electric &Magnetic fields- parallel & perpendicular E & H Fields-Applications -electric & magnetic deflection of beam in CROdeflection sensitivity-focusing of electron beam in CRO. UNIT II - SEMICONDUCTOR THEORY & PN JUNCTION DIODES (9)

Review of intrinsic & extrinsic semiconductors- classical theory & energy band theory -charge densities in semiconductors- mobility & conductivity -drift & diffusion currents. Construction of PN junction diodes- VI characteristics- quantitative theory of PN diode current componentsdiode resistances-transition & diffusion Capacitances-effect of temperature on diode characteristics- model of diode -diode specifications-Clipping & Clamping Circuits- Voltage multipliers using diodes. UNIT III - BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS (9)

Construction of transistor -principle of transistor action current components -input & output characteristics of a transistor in CE-CB-CC configurations- cut off -active saturation & breakdown regions - current gain in CE- CB- CC Configurations. UNIT IV - FET & UJT (9)

Construction & characteristics of JFET -parameters of JFET -MOSFET -depletion & enhancement modes-FET in CS-CD-CG Configurations-equivalent circuit of FET at low frequencies-FET model at high frequencies-FET Specifications. Construction- theory of operation & characteristics of UJT- PUT.

UNIT V - SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

(9)

Construction & characteristics of zener diode- tunnel diode- PIN diode varactor diode. Construction & characteristics of SCR-two transistor equivalent circuit -applicationsTRIAC&DIAC--LASCR-CCD.Photodiodes- photoconductive cell & photovolataic cell construction & working of LED & LCD phototransistors solar cell- opto couplers. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. Jacob Millman & Christos C.Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. David.A.Bell- "Electronic Devices & Circuits "-PHI-1998. Salivahanan Electron Devices & Circuits- Tata Mc graw Hill-1998. Robert Boylestad- "Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory"- Sixth Edition-PHI-1998. Bogart- "Electronic Devices & Circuits"- Universal Book Stall- New Delhi-1994. 45 45 90

SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Semi conducting devices and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. DC characteristics of diodes. DC characteristics of Common Base transistor configuration DC Characteristics of Common Emitter transistor configuration DC Characteristics of Common Collector transistor configuration. Study of Phototransistors. DC characteristics of Common source FE transistor configuration DC Characteristics of Common Gate FE transistor configuration DC Characteristics of Common Drain FE transistor configuration Bias circuits for Bipolar Junction Transistors( Design of these experiments to be decided by the course instructor) 10. Bias circuits for Field effect transistors. 11. Study of transistor switch. 12. Assembly of transistor circuits using bread board (Study Experiment)

MA4302 AIM

APPLICATION OF MATHEMATICS

L T P Total 320 150

The course aims to develop the skills of the students in the areas of transformation techniques. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of engineering subjects like communication systems, electro-optics and electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and specialized studies and research. OBJECTIVES 1. Have gained a well found knowledge of Fourier series, their different possible forms and the frequently needed practical harmonic analysis that an engineer may have to make from discrete data. 2. Have grasped the concept of expression of a function, under certain conditions, as a double integral leading to identification of transform pair, and specialization on Fourier transform pair, their properties, the possible special cases with attention to their applications. 3. To have a sound knowledge of Laplace transform and its properties. To solve certain linear differential equations using the Laplace transform technique which have applications in other subjects of the current and higher semesters. 4. Have learnt the basics of Z transform in its applicability to discretely varying functions, gained the skill to formulate certain problems in terms of difference equations and solve them using the Z transform technique bringing out the elegance of the procedure involved. UNIT I - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (9)

Series solution Bessels equation Bessel function Legendres equation Legendre polynomial Rodrigues formula recurrence relation Generating Functions and orthogonal property for Bessel function of the first kind Legendre polynomial. UNIT II - FOURIER SERIES (9)

Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range sine series Half range cosine series Complex form of Fourier Series Parsevals identify Harmonic Analysis. UNIT III - FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Fourier integral theorem (without proof) Fourier transform pair Sine and Cosine transforms Properties Transforms of simple functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.

UNIT IV - LAPLACE TRANSFORM

(9)

Definition - Laplace transformssufficient conditions Basic properties Derivatives and integrals of transforms - Transforms of derivatives and integrals Initial and final value theorems Transforms of unit step function and impulse function - Transforms of periodic fractions - Inverse Laplace transform Convolution theorem Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients and first order simultaneous equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation. UNIT V - Z TRANSFORM (9)

Z-transform - Elementary properties Inverse Z transform Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations Solution of difference equations using Z transform. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi, 2004. 2. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics Volume III, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. REFERENCES 1. Wylie C. Ray and Barrett Louis, C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1995. 2. Narayanan, S., Manicavachagom Pillay, T.K. and Ramaniah, G., Advanced Mathematics for Engineering Students, Volumes II and III, S. Viswanathan (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002. 45 15 TOTAL 60

EC4303 AIM

ELECTRO MAGNETIC FIELDS

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

To familiarize the student to the concepts- calculations and pertaining to electricmagnetic and electromagnetic fields so that an in depth understanding of antennas- and waveguides is possible. OBJECTIVES 1. To analyze fields a potentials due to static changes 2. To evaluate static magnetic fields 3. To understand how materials affect electric and magnetic fields 4. To understand the relation between the fields under time varying situations 5. To understand principles of propagation of uniform plane waves. UNIT I -STATIC ELECTRIC FIELD (9)

Introduction: Overview of vector analysis: Orthogonal co-ordinate systems rectangularcylindrical- spherical transformations- Flux- circulation open and closed surface Divergencegradient- curl- stokes theorem Static Electric field: Coulombs law- superposition- scalar potential- moment method- gradient- electric field- electric flux- Gausss law for electric fluxcapacitance of sphere- concentric sphere- coaxial cable and two wire transmission line. Energy stored in a charged capacitor. UNIT II -STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD (9)

Static Electric Field Dielectric homogeneity- linearity- isotropy- permittivity- electric dipolepolarization- boundary relations- divergence of the flux density- Laplacian Field Mapping Laplace equation- uniqueness theorem- Poissons equation. Static Magnetic Field Ferromagnetic Materials- magnetic dipole- permeability- hysteresis- The Static Magnetic Field of Steady Electric Currents- magnetic flux- Biot-Savart law- Amperes law- Gausss law for magnetic flux- boundary conditions- inductance of a coaxial cable- two wire transmission lineenergy stored in a magnetic field Magnetic vector potential. UNIT III- TIME VARYING ELECTRIC FIELDS (9)

Time varying Electric and Magnetic Fields Faradays law- Stokes theorem- self and mutual inductance- eddy current- displacement current. Maxwells Equations integral & differential form General solution of wave equation in free space uniform plane waves TEM waves relation between electric and magnetic fields- phase velocity and group velocity Plane waves in a lossy medium. Skin depth- propagation constants and intrinsic impedance Time harmonic fields Solutions of wave equations.

UNIT IV -TIME VARYING MAGNETIC FIELDS

(9)

Poynting theorem real and complex Poynting vector interpretation application of Poynting theorem power flow in transmission lines- uniform plane waves. Wave polarization- Reflection of plane wavesat plane boundaries normal and oblique incidence refraction transmission Snells law critical angle Brewster angle total internal reflection evanescent wave concept. Guided waves TE- TM- TEM waves- Velocity of propagation- attenuation wave impedance. UNIT V -TRANSMISSION LINES (9)

Analogy between circuit theory and EM theory- uniform transmission line V I solution characteristic impedance. Terminated uniform transmission line VSWR impedance matching quarter wave and half wavelength transformer- stub matching single stub matching- double stub matching and tuning pulses on a transmission line Smith chart impedance matching using Smith Chart. Transmission line transformers. Wave guides: rectangular wave guide-modes of wave propagation - TEmn- TMmn waves- cut off wavelengths- derivation dominant modes cylindrical wave guides. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. John D. Kraus Electromagnetics- McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, Fourth Edition, 1991. 2. William H.Hayt,Jr., Engineering Electromagnetic- McGraw Hill Edition,2001. REFERENCES 1. Ramo, Whinnery and Van Duzer: Fields and Waves in Communications Electronics John Wiley & Sons (3rd edition 2003) 2. Narayana Rao, N : Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics 4th edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1998. 3. M.N.O.Sadiku: Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics Oxford University Press, Third edition. 4. David K.Cherp: Field and Wave Electromagnetics - Second Edition-Pearson Edition. 5. David J.Grithiths: Introduction to Electrodynamics- III Edition-PHI. 45 15 60

EE4303

ELECTRICAL MACHINES

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines principle of operation and performance. OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on 1. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of D.C. machines. 2. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of transformers. 3. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of induction motors. 4. Constructional details and principle of operation of alternators and special machines.

UNIT I - DC GENERATORS

(9)

Principle of DC generators, constructional details, field, armature and commutator or magnetic circuits, field flux distribution. Armature windings pole pitch, coil span, winding pitch and commutator pitch. Simplex lap and wave windings, parallel paths, equaliser ring connections, dummy coils methods of setting brushes in d.c machines. Methods of excitation separately excited, shunt, series and compound machines. Induced e.m.f e.m.f. equations. Armature m.m.f. UNIT II -COMMUTATOR (9)

Time of commutation, e.m.f. in the coil undergoing commutation, reactance e.m.f. effect of brush shift, interpoles polarity an d winding connections. Type of d.c. generators characteristics open circuit characteristics, condition for self excitation, criticalresistance, critical speed. Load characteristics, effect of compounding. Parallel operation parallel operation of shunt series and compound generations, equaliser connections. UNIT III -DC MOTORS (9)

Principles of operation, back e.m.f, production of torque, torque equation, developed and shaft torque, performance characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors, applications of various types of DC motors. Starting need of the starter, face plate starters three point and four point starters, calculation of resistance elements for shunt meter starter, Speed control field control, armature control Ward Leonard speed control. Testing of d.c. machines losses and efficiency, separation of losses Swinburnes test, Hopkinsons test, Fields Test, retardation test.

UNIT IV -TRANSFORMERS

(9)

Single phase transformer - constructional details core, winding, insulation and brushing. Principles of operation, turns ratio, emf equation. Operation on load - magnetising and core loss components phasor diagram equivalent circuit. Regulation losses and efficiency. UNIT V -TESTING OF TRANSFORMERS (9)

DC test, SC test, Sumpners back to back test, separation of losses, three phase connections star and delta connections using single phase transformers. Three phase transformers oscillating, neutral, tertiary winding, Scott connection open delta connection six phase connection. Parallel operation, load sharing, distribution transformers all day efficiency. THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Clayton A.E. & Hancock N.N. : Performance and Design of DC machines, ELBS/CBS Publishers,Delhi, 1990 2. Theraja B.L. : A text book of Electrical Technology Vol II, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1992 REFERENCES 1. Bhimbra P.S. : Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,1992 2. M.G. Say : Performance and Design of AC machines, ELBS & Pitman, Third edition,1980

ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY AIM To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines principle of operation and performance. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open circuit characteristics and load characteristics of d.c. shunt generator Brake test on DC shunt and series motor Study of 3 point and 4 point starters for DC shunt motor Swinburnes test on DC shunt machine Hopkinsons Test on a DC Machines Separation of losses in a d.c. machine by conducting a retardation test Separation of losses in d.c. shunt machine by conducting no load test at different excitations 8. O.C and S.C test on the single phase transformer 9. Separation of losses of single phase transformer into hysteresis and eddy current loss 10. Sumpners test on transformers

CS 4305

DATA STRUCTURES (Common for ECE / EEE)

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM 1. To provide an in-depth knowledge in problem solving techniques and data structures. OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the systematic way of solving problems 2. To understand the different methods of organizing large amounts of data 3. To learn to program in C 4. To efficiently implement the different data structures 5. To efficiently implement solutions for specific problems UNIT I - PROBLEM SOLVING (9) Problem solving Top-down Design Implementation Verification Efficiency Analysis Sample algorithms. UNIT II - LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES Abstract Data Type (ADT) The List ADT The Stack ADT The Queue ADT (8)

UNIT III -TREES (10) Preliminaries Binary Trees The Search Tree ADT Binary Search Trees AVL Trees Tree Traversals Hashing General Idea Hash Function Separate Chaining Open Addressing Linear Probing Priority Queues (Heaps) Model Simple implementations Binary Heap UNIT IV -SORTING (9) Preliminaries Insertion Sort Shellsort Heapsort Mergesort Quicksort External Sorting UNIT V - GRAPHS (9) Definitions Topological Sort Shortest-Path Algorithms Unweighted Shortest Paths Dijkstras Algorithm Minimum Spanning Tree Prims Algorithm Applications of DepthFirst Search Undirected Graphs Biconnectivity Introduction to NP-Completeness THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. R. G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. 2. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd ed, Pearson Education Asia, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, Pearson Education Asia, 2004 2. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures A Pseudocode Approach with C, Thomson Brooks / COLE, 1998. 3. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson education Asia, 1983.

DATA STRUCTURES LAB AIM To teach the principles of good programming practice and to give a practical training in writing efficient programs in C OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. To teach the students to write programs in C To implement the various data structures as Abstract Data Types To write programs to solve problems using the ADTs

Implement the following exercises using C: 1. Array implementation of List Abstract Data Type (ADT) 2. Linked list implementation of List ADT 3. Array implementations of Stack ADT 4. Linked list implementations of Stack ADT 5. Array implementation of Queue ADT 6. Linked list implementation of Queue ADT 7. Balanced Parenthesis 8. Evaluating Postfix Expressions 9. Search Tree ADT - Binary Search Tree 10. Heap Sort 11. Quick Sort

EC4310 AIM

SWITCHING THEORY AND LOGIC DESIGN

L T P 3 0 2

TOTAL 200

To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of digital systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce number systems and codes 2. To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions 3. To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions 4. To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits 5. To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices. UNIT I - BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES AND GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION (9) Basic definitions- Axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra- basic theorems and properties of Boolean algebra- Boolean functions- Canonical and standard forms- Other logic operationsDigital logic gates- Integrated circuits- The map method- Four-variable map- Five variable mapProduct of sums simplification- Dont-care conditions-NAND and NOR implementation- Other two-level implementations- Exclusive-OR function- Hardware description language (HDL) UNIT II - COMBINATIONAL LOGIC (9)

Combinational circuits- Analysis procedure- Design procedure- binary adder-subtractorDecimal adder- Binary multiplier- magnitude comparator- Decoders- Encoders- MultiplexersHDL for combinational circuits. UNIT III - SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC- REGISTERS AND COUNTERS (9) Sequential circuits- Latches- Flip-flops- Analysis of clocked sequential circuits- HDL for sequential circuits- State reduction and assignment- Design procedure- Registers- Shift registersRipple counters- Synchronous counters- Other counters- HDL for registers and counters. UNIT IV - MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC AND REGISTER TRANSFER LEVEL (9) Introduction- Random-access memory- Memory decoding- Error detection and correctionRead-only memory- programmable logic array- Programmable array logic- sequential Programmable devices- Register transfer level (RTL) notation- Register transfer level in HDLAlgorithmic state machines (ASM)- Design example- HDL description of design exampleBinary multiplier- Control logic- HDL description of binary multiplier- Design with multiplexers.

UNIT V - DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND VHDLL

(9)

Introduction- Special characteristics- Bipolar-transistor characteristics- RTL and DTL circuitsTransistor-transistor logic (TTL)- Emitter-coupled logic (ECL)- Metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)- Complementary MOS (CMOS)- CMOS transmission gate circuits- Switch-level modeling with HDL- Introduction to VHDL. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. M. Morris Mano, Digital Design, 3.ed., Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003/Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003 2. John .M Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, Thomson- Vikas publishing house, New Delhi, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Zvi Kohavi- Switching and finite automate theory - Tata McGraw Hill- 2nd edition 2. S. Salivahanan and S. Arivazhagan, Digital Circuits and Design, 2nd ed., Vikas PublishingHouse Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2004 3. CVS Rao- Switching and logic design- Pearson- 2005. 4. R.P. Jain- Switching Theory and Logic Design- TMH Edition-2003. 45 45 90

SWITCHING THEORY AND LOGIC DESIGN LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Switching Theory and logic designing and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates. 2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates a. BCD to excess-3 code and voice versa b. Binary to gray and vice-versa 3. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ BCD adder using IC 7483 4. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary subtractor and BCD adder using IC 7483 5. Design and implementation of2Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates 8 Bit Magnitude Comparator using IC 7485 6. Design and implementation of 16 bit odd/even parity checker generator using IC74180. 7. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic gates and study of IC74150 and IC 74154 8. Design and implementation of De-multiplexer using logic gates. 9. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates and study of IC7445 and IC74147 10. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 / Mod-12 Ripple counters 11. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter. Implementation of SISO,SIPO,PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip- flops

MA4405

STOCHASTIC PROCESSES

L T P Total 3 20 150

AIM This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts in random process. A knowledge of fundamentals and applications of phenomena will greatly help in the understanding of topics such an estimation and detection, pattern recognition, voice and image processing networking and queuing. OBJECTIVES 1. Have a well established knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena. 2. Acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of random variables. 3. Understand and characterize phenomena which evolve with respect to time in a probabilistic manner. 4. Be able to analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems. UNIT I - RANDOM VARIABLES (9)

Random variable - Probability mass function - Probability density function - Properties Moments - Moment generating functions and their properties. Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions Transformation of random variables - Central limit theorem. UNIT II - STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9)

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Negative Binomial, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their properties - Functions of a random variable. UNIT III - RANDOM PROCESSES AND MARKOV CHAINS (9)

Definition and Examples first order, second order, strictly stationary, wide sense stationary and Ergodic processes Markov process Binomial, Poisson and normal processes Sine wave process. UNIT IV - CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES (9)

Auto correlation Cross correlation Properties Power Spectral density Cross spectral density properties Wiener Khintchine relation relationship between cross power spectrum and cross correlation function Linear time invariant system System transfer function Linear systems with random inputs Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.

UNIT V - RELIABILITY

(9)

Concepts of Reliability Hazard functions Series and Parallel Systems Reliability and Availability of Markovian systems Maintainability Preventive maintainance. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Peebles Jr. P.Z., Probability Random Variables and Random Signal Principles Tata Mcgraw Hill publishers, Fourth Edition, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Ross, S., A first course in probability, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002. 3. Medhi J., Stochastic Processes, New Age Publishers, New Delhi, 1994. REFERENCE 1. 2. 3. Veerarajan., T., Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2003. Allen., A.O., Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory, Academic press, New Delhi, 1981. Gross, D. and Harris, C.M., Fundamentals of Queuing theory, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, New York, 1985. 45 15 TOTAL 60

EC 4411 AIM

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To study and analyse characteristics of continuous, discrete signals and systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the properties and representation of discrete and continuous signals. 2. To study the sampling process and analysis of discrete systems using z-transforms. 3. To study the analysis and synthesis of discrete time systems.

UNIT I - REPRESENTATION OF SIGNALS (9) Continuous and discrete time signals: Classification of Signals Periodic aperiodic even odd energy and power signals Deterministic and random signals complex exponential and sinusoidal signals periodicity properties of discrete time complex exponential unit impulse unit step impulse functions Transformation in independent variable of signals: time scaling, time shifting.Determination of Fourier series representation of continuous time and discrete time periodic signals Explanation of properties of continuous time and discrete time Fourier series. UNIT II - ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS (9) Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform analysis with examples properties of the Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform basic properties, Parsevals relation, and convolution in time and frequency domains.Basic properties of continuous time systems: Linearity, Causality, time invariance, stability, magnitude and Phase representations of frequency response of LTI systems -Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform: Computation of impulse response and transfer function using Laplace transform. UNIT III - SAMPLING THEOREM AND Z-TRANSFORMS (9) Representation of continuous time signals by its sample - Sampling theorem Reconstruction of a Signal from its samples, aliasing discrete time processing of continuous time signals, sampling of band pass signals Basic principles of z-transform - z-transform definition region of convergence properties of ROC Properties of z-transform Poles and Zeros inverse ztransform using Contour integration - Residue Theorem, Power Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion, Relationship between z-transform and Fourier transform. UNIT IV - DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS (9) Computation of Impulse & response & Transfer function using Z Transform. DTFT Properties and examples LTI-DT systems -Characterization using difference equation Block diagram representation Properties of convolution and the interconnection of LTI Systems Causality and stability of LTI Systems.

UNIT V -SYSTEMS WITH FINITE AND INFINITE DURATION IMPULSE RESPONSE

(9)

Systems with finite duration and infinite duration impulse response recursive and non-recursive discrete time system realization structures direct form I, direct form II, Transpose, cascade and parallel forms. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK: 1. AlanV.Oppenheim, Alan S.Willsky with S.Hamid Nawab, Signals & Systems, 2nd edn., Pearson Education, 1997. REFERENCES: 1. John G.Proakis and Dimitris G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and Applications, 3rd edn., PHI, 2000. 2. M.J.Roberts, Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform method and MATLAB, TMH 2003. 3. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen, Signals and Systems, John Wiley, 1999 4. K.Lindner, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill International, 1999. 5. Moman .H. Hays, Digital Signal Processing , Schaums outlines, Tata McGraw-Hill Co Ltd., 2004.

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LAB AIM To expose the students to the experiment the working of signals and systems and help them to develop experimental skills. A LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB/SCILAB/OCTAVE/WAB 1. Verification of sampling theorem. 2. Impulse response of a given system 3. Linear convolution of two given sequences. 4. Circular convolution of two given sequences 5. Autocorrelation of a given sequence and verification of its properties. 6. Cross correlation of given sequences and verification of its properties. 7. Solving a given difference equation. 8. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude spectrum. 9. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot phase spectrum. 10. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT. 11. Linear convolution of two sequences using IDFT.

EC 4412 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the architecture programming and interfacing of microprocessors and microcontrollers. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8085 microprocessor. To introduce the interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8086 microprocessor. To introduce the architecture, programming and interfacing of 8051 micro controller. (9)

UNIT I- INTRODUCTION OF 8085

Organization of 8085 microprocessor-Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assembly language programming-machine cycles-Read, Write-Interrupt acknowledge-Bus cycles-states-Wait stateHALT and HOLD state-State transition sequence of 8085.Organisation of 8086 microprocessormemory segmentation-Addressing bytes and words-Address formation-Addressing modes in 8086-Assembly language programming-minimum mode and maximum mode-Bus arbitration in minimum mode and maximum mode -multiprocessing. UNIT II - PERIPHERALS INTERFACING (9)

Input/Output Interface - Printer interface using 8259 - CRT interface - Keyboard/Display interfacing - A/D and D/A interface - Data acquisition systems - Interfacing high power devices Methods of parallel data transfer - Programmable parallel ports - 8255 PPI - Serial Communication - Asynchronous - Synchronous - 8251A Programmable communication interface - DMA - 8237 - Programmable DMA Controller. UNIT III - 8086 CPU (9)

Intel 8086 Internal Architecture 8086 Addressing modes- Instruction set- 8086 Assembly language ProgrammingInterrupts. UNIT IV - 8051 MICROCONTROLLER (9)

Organisation of 8051 microcontroller-I/O ports-External memory-Counter and Timers-Serial data input and output-Interrupts -Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assembly language programming. UNIT V - APPLICATIONS OF 8085 AND 8086 (9)

Microprocessor development system- applications - Temperature controller - Stepper motor controller. Data transfer schemes-Programmed data transfer-Synchronous transferAsynchronous transfer-Interrupt driven I/O-types of interrupts:8085 and 8086-direct memory

access data transfer-DMA transfer in a 8085 based system- DMA protocols in 8086 in minimum and maximum mode-types of DMA. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ramesh.S.Gaonkar, "Microprocessor architecture,programming & applications with 8085/8080A", Penram International, 1997. 2. Yu.Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, "Microcomputer system, 8086/8088 family", 2nd Edition - PHI-1986. REFERENCES 1. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing, McGraw Hill International Edition, 2000 2. Kenneth J Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application, 2nd Edition, Penram International Publishers (India), New Delhi, 1996. 3. M. Rafi Quazzaman, Microprocessors Theory and Applications: Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of microprocessors and help them to develop experimental skills. (Write programs using assemblers for 8085, 8086 and 8051) List of Experiments: 1. 8085 Assembly Language program 2. Multibyte Addition and Subtraction Multibyte decimal addition and subtraction. 3. Multiplication and division - repetitive addition and use of a register shifting operation Signed and unsigned numbers. 4. Searching, Sorting and data transfer. 5. 8086 Assembly Language Program 6.Search and Sort, Programs involving string instructions. 7.Study of programmable I/O ports of 8051 microcontroller. 8.Study of interrupt structure of 8085, 8086 and 8051. 9.D/A converter and waveform generation. 10.Stepper motor controller interface. 11.DC motor speed controller interface. 12.8279 Keyboard/display controller - Keyboard scan - blinking and rolling display.

EC 4413 AIM

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-I

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor Amplifier circuits and power supplies. OBJECTIVES On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The methods of biasing transistors 2. Design of simple amplifier circuits 3. Mid band analysis of amplifier circuits using small - signal equivalent circuits to determine gain input impedance and output impedance 4. Method of calculating cutoff frequencies and to determine bandwidth 5. Design of power amplifiers and heat sinks 6. Analysis and design of power supplies and power control using SCR. UNIT I - BIASING OF BJT & FET (9)

Introduction- Types and Configurations of BJTs- Operating Point (Quiescent- Q Or Silent Point)- Different Points On The Characteristic- Different Operating Conditions Of A TransistorTransistor Biasing - Need For Biasing A Transistor- Faithful Amplification- Transistor BiasingInherent Variations Of Transistor Parameters- Stabilization- Biasing Circuits- Base Resistor/Fixed Bias Circuit- Biasing With A Feedback Resistor- Emitter Resistance Biasing (Or Self Bias)- Voltage (Or Potential) Divider Biasing - Two Battery Bias Stabilization- Thermal Resistance- Determine Of Operating Point In Presence Of Self Heating- Thermal Stability- Bias Compensation- Design Of biasing Circuits- Biasing of FET- static FET parameters- FET as an amplifier- FET applications- Biasing the basic FET amplifier. UNIT II- SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIER (9)

Introduction- A Practical (Single Stage) Transistor Amplifier- Phase Relationship Between Input And Output Of A Transistor Amplifier (Phase Reversal)- Analysis Of Transistor Amplifier -Millers theorem- Equivalent Circuits Of Transistor Amplifier- Alternative Ac Equivalent Circuits For The Amplifier- Graphical Method ( By Drawing Load Lines)- Current- Voltage And Power Gains- Hybrid Parameters- Advantages Of Hybrid Parameters- Two-Port NetworkDetermination Of H-Parameters- Nomenclature Of H-Parameters- Hybrid Model- Performance Of A Transistor In H-Parameters- Limitations Of H-Parameters- Comparative Study Of CB-CECC Amplifier Circuits- The Common Emitter Amplifier With Emitter Resistor- Simplified Common Emitter Hybrid Model- Effect Of An Emitter Bypass Capacitor In Low Frequency Response- The Physical Model Of Cb Transistor- Resistor As A Switch. Analysis CS-CD-CG FET Amplifiers.

UNIT III - TRANSISTOR POWER AMPLIFIERS

(9)

Classification of amplifier- analysis of class A-B-C and AB Amplifiers- push pull amplifiercomplementary symmetry and paraphase amp. Distortion in amp.- Freq. Response of an amp. Its graphical analysis- harivieau distortion- power distortion- heat sinks. UNIT IV - MULTI STAGE TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIERS (9)

Introduction- Multi-Stage Transistor Amplifier- Gain Decibel- Frequency Response- Band Width- R-C-LC-transformer Coupled Transistor Amplifier- Frequency Response- Transformer Coupled Transistor Amplifiers- Direct - Coupled Amplifiers- Comparison of Different Types of Multi-Stage Amplifiers. UNIT V -POWER CIRCUITS (RECTIFIER & FILTERS & REGULATORS (9)

Introduction Half-Wave Rectifiers- Full-Wave Rectifiers- Efficiency Of An F.W. RectifierSelection Of A Circuit For F.W. Rectification- Ripple Factor- Types Of Filter Circuits- Owner Supply Filters; Capacitor Filter- L-Section Filter (LC Filter)- Filter- Zener Diode Voltage Regulator-electronically regulated power supplies-SMPS-Line regulation. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill 1991,(I,II). Schilling and Belove, "Electronic Circuits", TMH, Third Edition, 2002 (Unit - III) Millman J. and Taub H., "Pulse Digital and Switching waveform", McGraw-Hill International (UNIT IV & V) Robert L. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky, 8th edn., PHI, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. Sedra / Smith, Micro Electronic Circuits Oxford university Press, 2004. 2. David A. Bell, " Solid State Pulse Circuits ", Prentice Hall of India, 1992.

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-I LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation in analog electronic circuits-I lab and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Bias Circuits for BJT. 2. Common base transistor amplifier. 3. Common emitter transistor amplifier. 4. Common collector transistor amplifier 5. Design and testing of BJT amplifiers. (RC Coupled). 6. Design and testing of FET amplifiers. 7. Emitter Follower. 8. Differential Amplifier. 9. Field Effect Transistor Amplifiers 10. Class B power amplifier 11. Design of half-wave and full-wave rectifiers with and without filters. 12. Voltage Regulators. (Zener Diode- Transistor - Series and Shunt type).

EE4406 AIM

MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To introduce the concept of measurement and the related instrumentation requirement as a vital ingredient of electronics and communication engineering. OBJECTIVES To learn 1. Basic measurement concepts 2. Concepts of electronic measurements 3. Importance of signal generators and signal analysers in measurements 4. Relevance of digital instruments in measurement 5. The need for data acquisition systems 6. Measurement techniques in optical domains. UNIT I - BASIC MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS (9)

S.I. Units Measurement system performance, Calibration, Static characteristics errors in measurements true value static error static correction scale range and scale span (fiducial value) error calibration curve reproducibility and drift, repeatability, noise accuracy, accuracy class and precision indication of precision significant figures static sensitivity instrument efficiency linearity hysteresis threshold -dead time dead zone resolution and discrimination loading effect dynamic response measurement lag. Unit II - DC AND AC BRIDGES (9)

Measurement of resistance Wheatstone bridge Kelvin double bridge Carey Foster slide wire bridge sensitivity of d.c. bridges interchange of battery and galvanometer bridge current limitations Ohmmeter Megger measurement of insulation resistance by deflection method localization of cable fault by Murray and Varley looptests earth megger. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell and Anderson bridges Measurement of capacitance using Schering Bridge. UNIT III - POTENTIOMETERS AND INDICATING INSTRUMENTS (9)

general principle of potentiometers modern form of d.c. potentiometers vernier dial principle standardization use for measurement of voltage, current, resistance and power a.c. potentiometers co-ordinate and polar types application of a.c. potentiometers. Principle of indicating instruments: Different types of control and damping arrangements in indicating instruments Permanent magnet moving coil, moving iron, hotwire, electrostatic and dynamometer type meters ammeters and voltmeters. Extension of instrument range: Shunts for ammeters voltmeter multipliers instrument transformers current transformers phasor diagram ratio and phase angle error use of instrument transformers with wattmeter clip on ammeter.

UNIT IV - WATTMETERS, ENERGYMETERS AND OTHER MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

(9)

Measurement of energy and power : Dynamometer type Wattmeter errors and compensation Correction flux meter Methods of correction Induction type Wattmeter principle of working of ampere hour meter single and three phase energy meters errors and compensation calibration using wattmeter and rotating substandard. Frequency meters power factor meters oscillographs Duddel and cathode ray types multimeter stroboscope. UNIT V -MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS AND ILLUMINATION (9)

Classification of magnetic measurements measurement of flux and permeability Hibberts magnetic standard flux meter Hall effect gauss meter ballistic galvanometer methods of calibrating ballistic galvanometer Vibration galvanometer B-H curve and permeability measurement on bar and ring specimens hysteresis measurement Core loss measurement with Lloyd Fisher square. Illumination: Definitions and units laws of illumination Lummer Brodhum and Flicker photometers Determination of MSCP Polar curve Roussaeus construction integrating sphere Macbeth illuminometer. THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. REFERENCES 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. W. Golding : Electrical Measure ment and Measuring Instruments, ELBS . Issac F. Kinnard : Applied Electrical Measurement John Wiley Sons. Forest K. Harris : Electrical Measurements wiley Eastern (P) Ltd. C. T. Baldwin : Fundamentals of Electrical Measurement Lyall Book Depot Bhopal. Errest Frank : Electrical Measurement Analysis McGraw Hill. Melnille B. Stout : Basic Electrical Measurement Prentice Hall of India (P)Ltd

MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION LAB AIM The aim of this laboratory is to make the students have an adequate work experience in the measurement of different quantities 1. Measurement of resistance using Wheatstons bridge 2. Measurement of resistance using Kelvins double bridge 3. Measurement of self and mutual inductance of coupled coils 4. Measurement of KVAR in 3-phase circuits by single and two wattmeter method. 5. Calibration of ammeter using slide wire potentiometer 6. Calibration of Voltmeter using slide wire potentiometer 7. Measurement of internal resistance of battery using vernier potentiometer. 8. Calibration of wattmeter using vernier potentiometer 9. Calibration of single phase energy meter by direct and phantom loading 10. Calibration of 3-phase energy meter.

EC 4414 AIM

ANALOG AND DIGITAL ICS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To teach the basic concepts in the design of electronic circuits using linear integrated circuits and their applications in the processing of analog signals. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits. 2. To teach the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers. 3. To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL. 4. To teach the theory of ADC and DAC 5. To introduce a few special functions integrated circuits. UNIT I - DIFFERENTIAL AND CASCADE AMPLIFIERS (9)

Introduction- Differential Amplifier- Differential Amplifier Circuit Configuration- Dual InputBalanced output Differential Amplifier- Dual Input-Unbalanced output Differential AmplifierSingle Input-Balanced output Differential Amplifier- Single Input-unbalanced output Differential Amplifier with their DC and AC analysis- Differential Amplifier with swamping resistorsConstant current bias- Current Mirror- Cascaded differential Amplifier Stages- Level TranslatorCE-CB configuration. UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS (9)

Block diagram of a typical Op-Amp-Schematic symbol- integrated circuits and their types- IC package types- Pin Identification and temperature range- Interpretation of data sheets- Overview of typical set of data sheets- Characteristics and performance parameters of and Op-Amp- Ideal Op-Amp- Equivalent circuit of an Op-Amp- Ideal voltage transfer curve- Open loop configurations : Differential- Inverting & Non Inverting. Practical Op-Amp: Input offset voltageInput bias current- Input offset current- total output offset voltage- Thermal drift- Effcet of variation in power supply voltages on offset voltage- Change in Input offset voltage and Input offset current with time- Temperature and supply voltage sensitive parameters- Noise- Common Mode configuration and common mode rejection Ratio. UNIT III - NEGATIVE FEEDBACK IN OP-AMPS (9)

Block diagram representation of feedback configurations- Voltage-series feedback AmplifierVoltage shunt feedback amplifier- Differential amplifiers with one op-amp- two op-amps and three op-amps.

UNIT IV -FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AN OP-AMP

(9)

Frequency response- Compensating Networks- Frequency response of Internally compensated Op-Amps- Frequency response of Noncompensated Op-amps- Closed loop frequency responseSlew rate- causes of slew rate and its effect on applications. UNIT V - APLICATIONS OF OP-AMP (9)

DC and AC amplifiers- Peaking Amp- Summing- Scaling and Averaging Amp- Instrumentation Amplifier- V to I and I and to V converter- Log and Antilog Amp- Integrator- Differentiator. Active filters: First order LP Butterworth filter- Second order LP Butterworth filter- First order HP Butterworth filter- Second order HP Butterworth filter- Higher order filters- Band pass filterBand reject filters- All pass filter- Phase shift oscillator- Wein bridge oscillator- Quadrature oscillator- Square wave generator- Triangular wave generator- Sawtooth wave generatorVoltage controlled oscillator- Basic comparator- Zero crossing detector- Schmitt trigger- window detector- V to F and F to V converters- A to D and D to A converters- Peak Detector- Sample and Hold Circuit. SPECIALIZED IC APPLICATIONS: 555 Timer: Pin configuration- Block diagram- application of 555 as Monostable and Astable Multivibrator. Phase Lock Loops: Operating principles & applications of 565PLLVoltage Regulators: Fixed voltage regulators- Adjustable voltage regulators- Switching Regulators. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Sergio Franco, Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits, McGraw-Hill, 1997. 2. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000. REFERENCES 1. Millman.J. and Halkias.C.C. Integrated Electronics, McGraw-Hill, 1972. 2. William D.Stanely, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits. Pearson Education, 2004. 3. Coughlin- Op Amps & Linear Integrated circuits 4. Ravi Raj Dudeja- Op Amps & Linear Integrated circuits 45 45 90

ANALOG AND DIGITAL ICS LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of analog and digital ICs and helps them to develop experimental skills. Design and testing of: 1. Inverting- Non inverting and differential amplifiers. 2. Integrator and Differentiator. 3. Instrumentation amplifier. 4. Active lowpass and bandpass filter. 5. Astable- Monostable multivibrators and Schmitt Trigger using opamp. 6. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillator using op-amp. 7. Astable and monostable using NE555 Timer. 8. PLL characteristics and Frequency Multiplier using PLL. 9. DC power supply using LM317 and LM723. 10. Study of SMPS control IC SG3524 / SG3525.

EC 4515

ANALOG COMMUNICATION

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To study the various analog communication fundamentals viz., Amplitude modulation and demodulation, angle modulation and demodulation. Noise performance of various receivers and information theory with source coding theorem are also dealt. OBJECTIVE 1. To provide various Amplitude modulation and demodulation systems. 2. To provide various Angle modulation and demodulation systems. 3. To provide some depth analysis in noise performance of various receiver. 4. To study some basic information theory with some channel coding theorem. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Introduction, power measurements, electronic communication systems modulation and multiplexing, EM spectrum, Bandwidth and information capacity, Noise analysis UNIT II - MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTAION OF NOISE Some sources of noise, Frequency domain representation of Noise, Superposition of noise, Linear filtering of Noise, Quadrature components of noise, Representation of noise using orthogonal conditions UNIT III - AM TRANSMISSION & RECEPTION (9) (9) (9)

Introduction, principles of AM, Am circuits, AM transmitters, Trapezoidal Patterns, carrier shift, AM for Non sinusoidal signal,QAM: Introduction, Receiver parameters, AM Receivers, Receiver circuits, Double conversion AM receivers Net receiver gain ,SSB SYSTEMS: Introduction, Single sideband systems, comparison with AM,Mathematical analysis of DSBSC, SSB generation, ISB, SSB receivers, SSBSC and FDM, DSBSC and Quadrature multiplexing UNIT IV - ANGLE MODULATION TRANSMISSION (9)

Introduction, Angle modulation, Mathematical analysis, Deviation sensitivity ,FM and PM waveforms, Phase deviation and Modulation index, Frequency deviation and Percent Modulation , Frequency analysis, bandwidth requirements, Deviation ratio. Commercial FM Broadcast, Phasor representation, Average power, Noise and Angle modulation,Pre emphasis and de emphasis

UNIT V - FM TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS (9) Frequency up conversion FM transmitters, Comparison of AM and angle modulation FM receivers, demodulators, PLL demodulators, QFM demodulator, Noise suppression.FM and PM comparison, LIC receiver ( Omit internal circuits of the IC) FM stereo broadcasting THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication systems, 5th edition,Pearson Education 2007 2. Taub, Schilling and Saha, Principles of Communication Systems , TMH 3rd Edition, 2008 REFERENCES 1. Simon Haykins, Communication Systems, 3rd Edition, John Willey,2001. 2. B.P.Lathi, Modern digital and analog Communication systems 3rd ed ,2005.

ANALOG COMMUNICATION LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operations of analog communication and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Generation of AM signal and measurement of modulation index 2. Diode detector for AM signals 3. Generation of FM modulation signal 4. FM detector, Receiver measurements 5. Balanced modulator 6. Delayed AGC 7. Band pass filter 8. LPF 9. Pre-emphasis 10. De-emphasis.

EC 4516 AIM

ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION

L T P 3 0 2

TOTAL 200

To enable the student to study the various types of antennas and wave propagation. OBJECTIVES 1. To study radiation from a current element. 2. To study antenna arrays 3. To study aperture antennas 4. To learn special antennas such as frequency independent and broad band antennas. 5. To study radio wave propagation. UNIT I - RADIATION AND ANTENNAS (9)

Antenna parameters- Antenna impedance- Radiation resistance- Directional characteristicsEffective length of antenna- Radiation intensity Directive gain- Directivity- Antenna efficiencyEffective area Antenna equivalent circuit- Antenna bandwidth- Front-to-back ratio PolarizationRadiation efficiency and characteristics. UNIT II - ANALYSIS OF ANTENNAS- LINEAR ARRAYS & SYNTHESIS (9) Dipole antenna-Radiation pattern-Two-element uniform array- Uniform linear arrays- Field strength of a uniform linear array- First side lobe ratio (SLR). Fourier transform method- Line source design by Fourier transform method- Design of linear array by Fourier transform methodDolphchebychevmethod(Tschebyscheff distribution) Determination of dolph chebychev amplitude distribution- Advantages of dolph-tchebyscheff method - Taylor method. UNIT III HF, VHF AND UHF AND MICROWAVE ANTENNAS (9)

Isotropic radiators- Directional antennas- Omni-directional antennas- Resonant antennas- Nonresonant antennas- LF antennas- Antennas for HF- VHF and UHF- Dipole arrays- Broadside arrays- End-fire arrays- Folded dipole- V-Antennas- Inverted V-antennas- Rhombic antennaYagi-Uda antenna- Log-periodic antennas- Loop antenna- Helical antenna- Whip antennaFerrite rod antenna- Turnstile antennas- Discone antennas- Notch antenna UNIT IV - ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS (9)

Antenna parameters-TEM Cell- GTEM Cell-Reflected ranges- Slant range- Elevated rangeCompact range- Anechoic chambers- Near field range- Ground range- Radar cross-section range- Differences between indoor and outdoor ranges- Antenna impedance measurementsImpedance measurement-wheatstone bridge method- slotted line method- Measurement of mutual impedance between two antennas- Measurement of radiation resistance- Gain measurement by two antennas- Gain measurement by three antennas.

UNIT V - WAVE PROPAGATION

(9)

Propagation characteristics of EM Waves- Factors involved in the propagation of radio wavesGround wave field strength by Maxwells equations- Reflection of radio waves by the surface of the earth- Roughness of earth- Reflection factors of earth- Wave tilt of the ground wave- Space wave or Tropospheric wave propagation Field strength due to space wave- Considerations in space wave propagation- Effect of transition between ground and space waves- Effect of polarization- Atmospheric effects in space wave propagation.Characteristic parameters of ionospheric propagation. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. G.S.NRaju,Antennas and Wave Propagation Pearson Education- (Singapore)-2005 REFERENCES 1. John D.Kraus and Ronald J. Marhetha- Antennas for All Applications TMHI- 3rd Edn. 2003. 2. C.A. Balanis- John Wilely & Sons- Antenna Theory 2nd ed.- 2001. 3. E.C.Jordan and K.G.Balmain Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems- PHI2nd ed.- 2000.

ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of antennas and wave propagation and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Characteristics of Dipole antenna. 2. Characteristics of Folded dipole antenna. 3. Characteristics of Yagi-Uda antenna. 4. Characteristics of Isotropic antenna. 5. Characteristics of Loop antenna. 6. Characteristics of Turnstile antennas. 7. Measurement of radiation resistance. 8. Gain measurement by two antennas. 9. Gain measurement by three antennas. 10. Impedance measurement by Wheatstone bridge method.

EC 4517 AIM

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To study the signal processing methods and processors. OBJECTIVES 1. To study DFT and its computation 2. To study the design techniques for digital filters 3. To study the finite word length effects in signal processing 4. To study the non-parametric methods of power spectrum estimations 5. To study the fundamentals of digital signal processors. UNIT I - DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Brief review of signals and systems: Basic definitions- properties and applications. Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT): Frequency domain sampling and reconstruction of discrete time signals. DFT as a linear transformation- its relationship with other transforms- Properties of DFT- multiplication of two DFTs- the circular convolution- additional DFT properties- use of DFT in linear filtering- overlap-save and overlap-add method. UNIT II - FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Fast-Fourier-Transform (FFT) algorithms: Direct computation of DFT- need for efficient computation of the DFT (i.e. FFT algorithms). Radix-2 FFT algorithm for the computation of DFT and IDFTdecimation-in-time and decimation-in-frequency algorithms. Composite FFTGoertzel algorithm- and chirp-z transform algorithm UNIT III - IIR FILTERS DESIGN (9)

IIR filter design: Characteristics of commonly used analog filters Butterworth and Chebysheve filters- Design of IIR filters from analog filters (i. e.Butterworth and Chebyshev) impulse invariance method. Mapping of transfer functions: Approximation of derivative (backward difference- forward difference and bilinear transformation) method UNIT IV - FIR FILTERS DESIGN (9)

Matched z transform. Verification for stability and linearity during mapping. FIR filter design: Introduction to FIR filters- design of FIR filters using frequency sampling windowing methodRectangular- Hamming- Hanning- Bartlet and Kaiser Windows FIR filter design using frequency sampling technique. Implementation of discrete-time systems: Structures for IIR and FIR systems direct form I and direct form II systems- cascade and parallel realization UNIT V - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS (9)

Introduction to DSP architecture Harvard architecture - Dedicated MAC unit - Multiple ALUsAdvanced addressing modes- Pipelining- Overview of instruction set of TMS320C5X and C54X.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. Proakis & Monalakis, Digital signal processing Principles Algorithms & Applications- PHI- 4th Edition- New Delhi-2007. REFERENCES 1. Oppenheim & Schaffer- Discrete Time Signal Processing- PHI- 2003. 2. S..K.Mitra- Digital Signal Processing- Tata Mc-Graw Hill- 2nd Edition- 2004.

45 45 90

CS 4512 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANISATION

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM
To discuss the basic structure of a digital computer and to study in detail the organization of the Control unit, the Arithmetic and Logical unit, the Memory unit and the I/O unit.

OBJECTIVES 1. To have a thorough understanding of the basic structure and operation of a digital computer. 2. To discuss in detail the operation of the arithmetic unit including the algorithms & implementation of fixed-point and floating-point addition, subtraction, multiplication & division. 3. To study in detail the different types of control and the concept of pipelining. 4. To study the hierarchical memory system including cache memories and virtual memory. 5. To study the different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O interfaces. UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN (12)

Functional units - Basic operational concepts - Bus structures - Software performance Memory locations and addresses Memory operations Measuring and Reporting Performance Quantitative Principles of Computer Design Classifying Instruction set Architecture Instruction and instruction sequencing Addressing modes Type and Size of Operands Operations in the Instruction Set Operands and Operations for Media and Signal Processing Instructions for Control Flow Encoding an Instruction Set Assembly language Basic I/O operations Stacks and queues. Addition and subtraction of signed numbers Design of fast adders Multiplication of positive numbers - Signed operand multiplication and fast multiplication Integer division Floating point numbers and operations. UNIT II - BASIC PROCESSING UNIT (9)

Fundamental concepts Execution of a complete instruction Multiple bus organization Hardwired control Microprogrammed control - Pipelining Basic concepts Data hazards Instruction hazards Influence on Instruction sets Multiple Issues Hardware based Speculation Limitations of ILP Case Studies lP6 Micro Architecture- Data path and control consideration Superscalar operation. UNIT III -INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACH (6) Compiler Techniques for Exposing ILP Static Branch Prediction Static Multiple Issue. VLIW Advanced Compiler Support Hardware Support for Exposing Parallelism Hardware Vs Software Speculation. Mechanism IA 64 and Itanium Processor.

UNIT IV- MEMORY AND I/O

(9)

Basic concepts Semiconductor RAMs - ROMs Speed - size and cost Cache memories Performance consideration Virtual memory- Memory Management requirements Secondary storage Cache Performance Reducing Cache Miss Penalty and Miss Rate Reducing Hit Time Main Memory and Performance Memory Technology Types of Storage Devices Buses RAID Reliability Availability and Dependability I/O Performance Measures Designing I/O System. UNIT V- MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM (9)

Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures Performance Issues Synchronization Models of Memory Consistency Multithreading. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003. REFERENCES 1. D. Sima- T. Fountain and P. Kacsuk, Advanced Computer Architectures A Design Space Approach, Addison Wesley, 2000. 2. Kai Hwang, Advanced Computer Architecture Parallelism Scalability Programmability, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2001. 3. Vincent P. Heuring, Harry F. Jordan, Computer System Design and Architecture, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004.

EC 4518

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-II

L T P 3 0 2

TOTAL 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of feed back amplifiers, oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators and blocking oscillators. OBJECTIVES On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The advantages and method of analysis of feed back amplifiers 2. Analysis and design of RC and LC oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators, blocking oscillators and time based generators.

UNIT I - FEEDBACK IN AMPLIFIERS

(9)

Types of feedback, effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, stability, distortion and frequency response etc. Voltage series, current series, voltage shunt, current shunt feedback circuits and their analysis. UNIT II - OSCILLATORS (9)

Conditions of oscillations. Different types of oscillators: RC Phase Shift, Wein Bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal Oscillators. Derivation of expression for frequency and amplitude of these oscillators UNIT III - BAND-PASS AND WIDE-BAND AMPLIFIERS (9)

Single-tuned amplifiers-Impedance matching to improve gain-Doubletuned amplifiersSynchronously-tuned amplifiers and stagger-tuned amplifiers-Cascode amplifiers-Video amplifiers-Peaking circuits. UNIT IV - WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS (9)

RL & RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits. Diode clippers, clampers and slicers. Collector coupled and Emitter coupled Astable multivibrator. Monostable multivibrator. Bistable multivibrators. Triggering methods. Storage delay and calculation of switching times. Speed up capacitors. Schmitt trigger circuit. UNIT V- BLOCKING OSCILLATORS AND TIMEBASE GENERATOR (9)

Monostable and Astable Blocking Oscillators using Emitter and base timing. Frequency control using core saturation. Pushpull operation of Astable blocking oscillator i.e., inverters. Pulse transformers. UJT sawtooth generators. Linearization using constant current circuit. Bootstrap and Miller saw-tooth generators. Current time base generators.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS

45 45 90

1. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill 1991. 2. Schilling and Belove, "Electronic Circuits", TMH, Third Edition, 2002. 3. Millman J. and Taub H., "Pulse Digital and Switching waveform", McGraw-Hill International 4. Robert L. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky, 8th edn., PHI, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Sedra / Smith, Micro Electronic Circuits Oxford university Press, 2004. 2. David A. Bell, " Solid State Pulse Circuits ", Prentice Hall of India, 1992.

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-II LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation in analog electronic circuits-II and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Series and Shunt feedback amplifiers: Frequency response, Input and output impedance calculation Design of RC Phase shift oscillator: Design Wein Bridge Oscillator Design of Hartley and Colpitts Oscillator Tuned Class C Integrators, Differentiators, Clippers and Clampers

SIMULATION USING PSPICE: 7. Differentiate amplifier 8. Active filter : Butterworth IInd order LPF 9. Astable, Monostable and Bistable multivibrator - Transistor bias 10. D/A and A/D converter (Successive approximation) 11. CMOS Inventor, NAND and NOR

EE4504

CONTROL SYSTEMS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the open loop and closed loop (feedback ) systems 2. To understand time domain and frequency domain analysis of control systems required for stability analysis. 3. To understand the compensation technique that can be used to stabilize control systems UNIT I- SYSTEMS & THEIR REPRESENTATION (9)

Open loop and closed loop control systems : Transfer function- poles and zeros block diagram representation block diagram reduction signal flow graph Masons gain formulacharacteristics equations concept of stability stability of feed back systems Rouths stability criterion. UNIT II- TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9)

Time domain analysis of control systems Transient and steady state response Time domain test signals Time domain specifications second order systems impulse and step responses. steady state error analysis static error coefficient of type 0, 1 ,2, systems Generalized error series. UNIT III- STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM (9)

PID controllers Trade off between steady state and transient behaviour. Root locus diagram. General rules for constructing Root loci root locus analysis of control system effect of addition of poles and zeros. UNIT IV- FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9)

Frequency domain analysis: Introduction Bode plot polar plot Log magnitude Vs Phase plot closed loop frequency response Frequency domain specifications gain margin phase margin Nyquist stability criterion stability analysis from bode plot. UNIT V- CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (9)

Control system components: Electrical systems DC motor DC servomotor AC servo motor synchro magnetic amplifier series and parallel connections. Basic principle of operation and transfer function of gyroscope stepper motor Tacho meters. Simulation of time domain solution of control systems by using Analog computer fundamentals of time and amplitude scaling - simulation of transfer function using Analog Computer.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Kastuhiko Ogata, Modern control engineering, second edition Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1991. 2. Nagarath I.J and Gopal M, Control System, Engineering, Wiley Eastern, NEW DELHI, 1992. REFERENCE 1. Kuo B.C.: Automatic control systems, Prentice Hall of Delhi Sixth edition, 1991.

CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB AIM To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems. 1. Determination of step response for first order system with unity feedback on CRO & calculations of control system specifications like time constant , %peak overshoot, settling time etc., from the response. 2. Determination of step response for second order system with unity feedback on CRO & calculations of control system specifications like time constant , %peak overshoot, settling time etc., from the response. 3. Simulation of step response & impulse response for type-0 , type-1 & type 2 system with unity feedback using matlab & pspice. 4. Determination of root locus, bode- plot, Nyquist plot using matlab- control system toolbox for 2nd order system & determination of differerent control systemspecifications from the plot. 5. Determination of PI controller action of first order simulated process. 6. Determination of PD controller action of first order simulated process. 7. Determination of PID controller action of first order simulated process. 8. Determination of approximate transfer function experimentally from bode plot. 9. Evaluation of steady state error, setting time, percentage peak overshoot, gain margin, phase margin with addition of lead compensator & by compensator using PSPICE . 10. Study of a practical position control system & determination of control system specifications for variation of system parameters.

EC 4619 MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS AND RADAR ENGINEERING AIM

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To enable the student to become familiar with active & passive microwave and radar devices & components used in Microwave communication systems and radar systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To study passive microwave & radar components and their S- Parameters. 2. To study Microwave semiconductor and radar devices & applications. 3. To study Microwave and radar sources and amplifiers. UNIT I- PASSIVE MICROWAVE DEVICES (9)

Terminations, attenuators, phase changers, directional couplers and hybrid junctions. Microwave propagation in ferrites, Faraday rotation. Ferrite devices- isolators, gyrators and circulators. UNIT II- MATRIX DESCRIPTION OF MICROWAVE CIRCUITS (9)

Scattering matrix formulation - symmetry of scattering matrix, scattering matrix for a loss less junction and two-port junction. Basic microwave measurements: frequency, wavelength, attenuation, power, impedance, VSWR and dielectric constant. UNIT III- MICROWAVE TUBES (9)

High frequency effects in conventional tubes, Klystrons: velocity modulation, bunching, output power and efficiency for two cavity klystrons, multi-cavity klystrons, reflex klystrons - velocity modulation, power output and efficiency, helix TWT - operation principle, magnetrons - types, principles of operation, hull cut-off condition, pushing and pulling. UNIT IV- MICROWAVE SOLID-STATE DEVICES (9)

Microwave transistors- JFET, MESFET, MOSFET: physical structures, principles of operation and characteristics. Transferred electron devices (TED's): GUNN effect GUNN diode, gunn diode as oscillator and amplifier. Avalanche transit-time devices.LASER and MASER. UNIT V- RADAR SYSTEMS (9)

RADAR equations - Monostatic & bistatic RADAR - CW RADAR - FM RADAR altimeters MTI & Pulse Doppler RADAR - tracking RADARs - Conical scan, sequential loping monopulse.Line type and Hard tube modulation Duplexers and displays -RADAR antennas.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. S.Y. Liao: "Microwave Devices And Circuits",PHI, 1992. 2. M.L. Sisodia And G.S.Raghuvanshi: "Microwave Circuits And Passive Devices" New Age International,Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1991 3. Skolnik.M.I.,"Introduction To Radar Systems",Mcgraw Hill Kogakusha Ltd.,2nd Edition, 1992. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. George Kennedy "Electronic Communication Systems",Mcgraw Hill , 1995. 2. K.C.Gupta "Microwaves", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1983. 3. Hund "Microwave Communication", Tmh, 1989. 4. Collins," Microwave Electronics", Mcgraw Hill, 1990.

MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS AND RADAR ENGINEERING LAB AIM To fortify the students with an adequate work experience in the measurement of various constants. 1. Study of microwave components and instruments. 2. Measurement of crystal characteristics and proof of the square law characteristics of the diode. 3. Measurement of klystron characteristics. 4. Measurement of VSWR and standing wave ratio. 5. Measurement of Dielectric constants. 6. Measurement of Directivity and coupling coefficient of a directional coupler. 7. Measurement of Q of a cavity. 8. Calibration of the attenuation constant of an attenuator. 9. Determination of the radiation characteristics and gain of an antenna. 10. Determination of the phase-shift of a phase shifter. 11. Determination of the standing wave pattern on a transmission line and 12. Finding the length and position of the short circuited stub.

EC 4620

ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 1 2 200

AIM To get knowledge about usage of electronic devices and design knowledge. OBJECTIVE 1. To study RF component such as resonator- filter- transmission lines- etc 2. To learn design of RF amplifiers using transistors. 3. To study modern Power Supplies using SCR and SMPS technology 4. To learn about signal shielding & grounding techniques and study of A/D and D/A Converters. 5. To learn knowledge about fabrication of PCBs using CAD. UNIT I -PASSIVE COMPONENTS (9)

Role of passive components in electronic systems- Selection of resistors for electronic subsystems- Design of resistor networks for biasing. Design of coupling capacitors for electronic amplifiers. Design of RC circuits for filtering and timer applications. Selection of Inductors for typical applications. Design of LC circuits for Oscillators UNIT II - ACTIVE COMPONENTS (9)

Transistors for amplifiers and oscillators- Common BJTs and FETs used in typical electronic subsystems- Ratings and characteristic curves. Selection of transistors for low and high frequency applications- Signal and power diodes- typical ratings and characteristic curvesTransistor pairs and opto-couplers UNIT III -TRANSDUCERS (9)

Temperature sensors Thermocouple- RTD and thermistor- selection design and applicationPressure and acceleration transducers- Design of pre amplifiers for various transducers- Role of acceleration transducer in vibration measurement. UNIT IV - AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS (9)

Design of amplifiers and oscillators- Design goals- Role of Gain bandwidth product-Voltage and power amplifiers- High frequency effects- Practical amplifiers- Oscillators for typical applications- Colpitts oscillator- Hartley Oscillator- Use Inductor with a tap- Phase shift oscillator UNIT V- POWER SUPPLY AND VOLTAGE REGULATORS (9)

Design of power supplies Rectifiers selection and design of transformers- power diodes Voltage regulation- Design of Filters Design of voltage regulators using discrete components and Integrated circuit

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOK

45 45 90

1. T. F. Bogart- Electronic Devices and Circuit- Universal Book Stall- New Delhi- ISBN 8185392-86-2 REFERENCES 1. Keith H.Billings- Handbook of Switched Mode Supplies McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.1989. 2. Michael Jaacob- Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits Prentice Hall of India- 1991. 3. Otmar Kigenstein- Switched Mode Power supplies in Practice- John Wiley and Sons- 1989. 4. Muhammad H.Rashid- power Electronics Circuits- Devices and Applications- Prentice Hall of India- 2004.

ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS DESIGN LAB AIM To get knowledge about usage of electronic devices and Design knowledge 1. Design of Bias circuits for Transistor amplifiers 2. Design of simple RC filter circuits 3. Design of Optocoupler 4. Design of signal conditioning circuits for transducers 5. Design of a Transistor switch 6. Design of modern Transistor Amplifier (Class D) 7. Design of Transistor Oscillators. 8. Design of voltage regulators using discrete components. 9. Design of voltage regulators using Integrated Circuits. 10. Design of regulated Power supply.

EC 4621

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To introduce the basic concepts of Digital Communication modulation to baseband- passband modulation and to give an exposure to error control coding and finally to discuss about the spread spectrum modulation schemes. OBJECTIVES 1. To study pulse modulation and discuss the process of sampling- quantization and coding that are fundamental to the digital transmission of analog signals. 2. To learn baseband pulse transmission- which deals with the transmission of pulseamplitude- modulated signals in their baseband form. 3. To learn error control coding which encompasses techniques for the encoding and decoding of digital data streams for their reliable transmission over noisy channels. UNIT I -ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (9)

Introduction- Contaminations- The Audio Spectrum- Signal Power Units- Volume Unit - SignalTo-Noise Ratio- Modulation- Fundamental Limitations In A Communication System- Number Systems- AM-Introduction- definition of am- generation of am wave- double-sideband supressed-carrier modulation- single-sideband modulation (ssb)- vestigial sideband modulation (vsb).- demodulation of am. UNIT II- PULSE CODE MODULATION & DELTA MODULATION (9)

Quantization of signals-quantization error-pulse code modulationelectrical representation of binary digits - PCM system-compandingmultiplexingPCM signals - differential PCM - Delta modulation-adaptive delta modulation-voice coders - channel vocoder-linear predictive codersynchronization. UNIT III -PASSBAND DATA TRANSMISSION (9) Introduction Pass band Transmission model- Generation- Detection- Signal space diagram- bit error probability and Power spectra of BPSK- QPSK- FSK and MSK schemes Differential phase shift keying Comparison of Digital modulation systems using a single carrier Carrier and symbol synchronization. UNIT IV- BASEBAND DATA TRANSMISSION DPCM- DM- coding speech at low bit rates-applications. Base-Band Shaping for Data Transmission- Discrete PAM signals- power spectra of discrete PAM signals (9)

UNIT V -SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION

(9)

Pseudo noise sequences- notion of spread spectrum- direct sequence spread coherent binary PSK- signal space dimensionality and processing gain-Frequency hop spread spectrumapplications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Taub and Schlling, Principles of Communication Systems, Mc Graw Hill, 1986. REFERENCES 1. Sam Shanmugam.K. "Digital and Analog Communication Systems", John Wiley & Sons1979. 2. Lathi.B.P. "Mordern Digital and Analog Communication Systems" Holt & Reinhart Publishers 1995. 3. Proakis- "Digital Communication "- Tmh 1998. 4. Simon, "Digital Communication Techniques", Phi, 1998.

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operations of digital communication and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Characteristics of AM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity) 2. Characteristics of FM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity) 3. Sampling & time division multiplexing 4. Pulse modulation- PAM / PWM /PPM 5. Pulse code modulation 6. Line coding & Decoding 7. Delta modulation / Differential pulse code modulation 8. Digital modulation - ASK9. Digital modulation - PSK10. Digital modulation - QPSK11. Digital modulation - FSK.

AEC4622

COMPREHENSION IN ELECTRONICS AND CAREER SKILLS L T P TOTAL 0 0 4 150

AIM To improve the communication skills of learners and to become successful in their career. To face the challenges in the existing global scenario which is highly competitive. To enhance their leadership quality. OBJECTIVE 1. To encourage learners to look at the functional usage of the language. 2. To enforce the most important skills that are required to be used while attending interviews and taking part in GDs. 3. To enrich ones vocabulary in the language for better communication. UNIT I DATA STRUCTURES (14)

Data Structures - C - C++ - Java - Computer Architecture - Operative Systems - Software Engineering - Data Base Management System - Computer Networks - Visual Programming Compiler Design. UNIT II SYSTEM SOFTWARE (12)

System Software - Embedded System - Electron Devices - Object Oriented System Design Digital Electronics - Control Systems. UNIT III APTITUDE (12)

Verbal Aptitude - Synonyms-Antonyms - Analogy - Substitution - Sentence Completion Odd word out - Reading Comprehension - Error Correction - Preposition - Articles - Tenses Concord - Idiom and phrases - Statement and Conclusion - Alphabetical Series. Arithmetic Ability - Numbers - Average - Percentage - Ratio and Proportion - Time and Work - Time and Distance - Problems on Trains - Permutations and Combinations Probability. UNIT IV - INTERVIEW SKILLS (12)

Introduction to Group Discussion - Structure and types of GD - Led and other GDs Strategies of GD- Moderators - Team Work - Body Language - Mock Interviews Conversational Etiquette - Common Errors in Spoken Language - Telephonic Conversation Oral Practice related to Professional Skills - Role Play Activities - Speech On Common Topics -Kinds of Interviews - Required Key Skills - Corporate Culture - Resume Preparation - Video Samples.

UNIT V - ORAL PRESENTATION SKILLS

(10)

Elements of effective presentations - Structure and tools of Presentation - Voice Modulation Body Language - Audience analysis Psychometrics - Stress Management Poise Assertiveness - Innovation and Creativeness - Video Samples

REFERENCES 1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma, Technical communication- Principles and Practice, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2004) 2. Barker .A, Improve Your communication skills, Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2006) 3. Adrian Doff and Christopher Jones- Language in Use (Upper-Intermediate), Cambridge University Press, First South Asian Ed. (2004) 4. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to writing and speaking, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 5. Barrons GRE, Latest Edition. 6. R.S.Agarwals, Verbal Nonverbal Reasoning, Latest Edition.

EC4623 APPLICATION SPECIFIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DESIGN L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200 AIM To introduce the technology, design concepts and testing of Integrated Circuits OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the basic CMOS circuits. 2. To learn the CMOS process technology. 3. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices. 4. To learn the concepts of modeling a digital system using Hardware Description Language.

UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO ASICS, CMOS LOGIC AND ASIC LIBRARY DESIGN (9) Types of ASICs - Design flow - CMOS transistors CMOS Design rules - Combinational Logic Cell Sequential logic cell - Data path logic cell - Transistors as Resistors - Transistor Parasitic Capacitance- Logical effort Library cell design - Library architecture . UNIT II- PROGRAMMABLE ASICS, PROGRAMMABLE ASIC LOGIC CELLS AND PROGRAMMABLE ASIC I/O CELLS (9) Anti fuse - static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology - PREP benchmarks - Actel ACT Xilinx LCA Altera FLEX - Altera MAX DC & AC inputs and outputs - Clock & Power inputs Xilinx I/O blocks. UNIT III- PROGRAMMABLE ASIC INTERCONNECT, PROGRAMMABLE ASIC DESIGN SOFTWARE AND LOW LEVEL DESIGN ENTRY (9)

Actel ACT -Xilinx LCA - Xilinx EPLD - Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Altera MAX 9000 Altera FLEX Design systems - Logic Synthesis - Half gate ASIC -Schematic entry - Low level design language - PLA tools -EDIF- CFI design representation. UNIT IV -LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING (9)

Verilog and logic synthesis -VHDL and logic synthesis - types of simulation -boundary scan test fault simulation - automatic test pattern generation.

UNIT V- ASIC CONSTRUCTION, FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING (9) System partition - FPGA partitioning - partitioning methods - floor planning - placement - physical design flow global routing - detailed routing - special routing - circuit extraction - DRC.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. 2.

45 45 90

M.J.S .Smith, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Addison -Wesley Longman Inc., 1997. Farzad Nekoogar and Faranak Nekoogar, From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach, Prentice Hall PTR, 2003.

REFERENCES 1. Wayne Wolf, FPGA-Based System Design, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004. 2. R. Rajsuman, System-on-a-Chip Design and Test, Santa Clara, CA: Artech House Publishers, 2000. 3. F. Nekoogar, Timing Verification of Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Prentice Hall PTR, 1999

APPLICATION SPECIFIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DESIGN LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of electronic circuits and help them to develop experimental skills 1. Modeling of Half Adder VHDL. 2. Modeling of Full Adder VHDL 3. Modeling of subtractorVHDL 4. Modeling of half adder using verilog 5. Modeling of full adder using verilog 6. Modeling of subtract using verilog 7. Modeling of multiplexer using VHDL 8. Modeling of multiplexer using VERILOG 9. Design and Implementation of ALU using FPGA. 10. Simulation of NMOS and CMOS circuits using SPICE

EC 4725

ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 2 200

AIM To introduce the student to advanced digital signal processing techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the parametric methods for power spectrum estimation. 2. To study adaptive filtering techniques using LMS algorithm and to study the applications of adaptive filtering. 3. To study multirate signal processing fundamentals. 4. To study the analysis of speech signals. 5. To introduce the student to wavelet transforms. UNIT I - DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING (9)

Discrete Random Processes- Ensemble averages- stationary processes- Autocorrelation and Auto covariance matrices. Parseval's Theorem- Wiener-Khintchine Relation- Power Spectral Density- Periodogram Spectral Factorization- Filtering random processes. Low Pass Filtering of White Noise. Parameter estimation: Bias and consistency. UNIT II - SPECTRUM ESTIMATION (9)

Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals- Non-Parametric Methods-Correlation Method - Periodogram Estimator- Performance Analysis of Estimators -Unbiased- Consistent Estimators- Modified periodogram- Bartlett and Welch methods- Blackman Tukey method. Parametric Methods - AR- MA- ARMA model based spectral estimation. Parameter Estimation -Yul e-Walker equations- solutions using Durbins algorithm UNIT III - LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION (9)

Linear prediction- Forward and backward predictions- Solutions of the Normal equationsLevinson-Durbin algorithms. Least mean squared error criterion -Wiener filter for filtering and prediction - FIR Wiener filter and Wiener IIR filters -Discrete Kalman filter UNIT IV - ADAPTIVE FILTERS (9)

FIR adaptive filters -adaptive filter based on steepest descent method-Widrow-Hoff LMS adaptive algorithm- Normalized LMS. Adaptive channel equalization-Adaptive echo cancellation-Adaptive noise cancellation- Adaptive recursive filters (IIR). RLS adaptive filtersExponentially weighted RLS-sliding window RLS. UNIT V - MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (9)

Mathematical description of change of sampling rate - Interpolation and Decimation Decimation by an integer factor - Interpolation by an integer factor- Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor- Filter implementation for sampling rate conversion- direct form FIR

structures- Polyphase filter structures- time-variant structures. Multistage implementation of multirate system. Application to sub band coding - Wavelet transform and filter bank implementation of wavelet expansion of signals. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Monson H.Hayes- Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling- John Wiley and Sons- Inc.- Singapore- 2002. 2. John G. Proakis- Dimitris G.Manolakis- Digital Signal Processing Pearson Education2002. REFERENCES 1. John G. Proakis et.al.Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing- Pearson Education2002. 2. Dimitris G.Manolakis et.al. Statistical and adaptive signal Processing- McGraw HillNewyork- 2000. 3. Rafael C. Gonzalez- Richard E.Woods- Digital Image Processing- Pearson EducationInc.- Second Edition- 2004.( For Wavelet Transform Topic)

EC 4725

ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB

AIM To study various types of filters by conducting the following experiments . 1. Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals 2. Durbins algorithm 3. FIR adaptive filters. 4. IIR adaptive filters. 5. Adaptive recursive filters (IIR). 6. Adaptive recursive filters (FIR). 7. Adaptive non- recursive filters (IIR). 8. Adaptive non-recursive filters (FIR). 9. RLS adaptive filters. 10. LMS adaptive filters.

CS 4728

ADVANCED NETWORKING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To introduce the concepts, terminologies and technologies used in modern days data communication and computer networking. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data communications. 2. To study the functions of different layers. 3. To introduce IEEE standards employed in computer networking. 4. To make the students to get familiarized with different protocols and network components. UNIT I - DATA COMMUNICATIONS (8)

Introduction to Networks and Communication Media: Uses- Network Hardware- Network Software- Components and Categories types of Connections Topologies Protocols and Standards ISO / OSI mode - Reference Models. Basis for data communication- Transmission Media- Wireless Transmission- Telephone Systems- Satellite Communication RS232 Interfacing sequences UNIT II - DATA LINK LAYER (10)

Error detection and correction Parity LRC CRC Hamming code low Control and Error control - stop and wait go back-N ARQ selective repeat ARQ- sliding window HDLC. - LAN - Reliable Transmission Token Rings Wireless Network Adapters Ethernet IEEE 802.3 - IEEE 802.4 - IEEE 802.5 - IEEE 802.11 FDDI - SONET Bridges.. UNIT III - NETWORK LAYER (10)

Internetworks Packet Switching and Datagram approach IP addressing methods Subnetting Routing Distance Vector Routing Link State Routing Routers. UNIT IV - TRANSPORT LAYER (9)

Duties of transport layer Multiplexing Demultiplexing Sockets User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion Control Quality of services (QOS) Integrated Services. UNIT V - APPLICATION LAYER (8)

Domain Name Space (DNS) SMTP FTP HTTP - Electronic Mail - WWW Network Security Cryptography. The Application layer: Application layer design issues - MultimediaOther applications- - DES- RSA.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communication and Networking, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. REFERENCES 1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Larry L.Peterson and Peter S. Davie, Computer Networks, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition. 3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2003. 4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.

EC 4726

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM 1. To introduce the various optical fiber modes- configurations and various signal degradation factors associated with optical fiber. 2. To study about various optical sources and optical detectors and their use in the optical communication system. Finally to discuss about digital transmission and its associated parameters on system performance. OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the basic elements of optical fiber transmission link- fiber modes configurations and structures. 2. To understand the different kind of losses- signal distortion in optical wave guides and other signal degradation factors. Design optimization of SM fibers- RI profile and cut-off wave length. 3. To learn the various optical source materials- LED structures- quantum efficiency- Laser diodes and different fiber amplifiers. 4. To learn the fiber optical receivers such as PIN APD diodes- noise performance in photo detector- receiver operation and configuration. 5. To learn fiber slicing and connectors- noise effects on system performance- operational principles WDM and solutions. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Need of Fiber Optic Communications- Evolution of Light wave Systems- Basic Concepts; Analog & Digital Signals- Channel Multiplexing- Modulation Formats- Optical Communication Systems- Light wave System Components; Optical Fibers as a Communication Channel- Optical Transmitters- Optical Receivers.EM spectrum - System model description -Selection of system components - Choice of operating wave length System perfomance - Future trends. UNIT II- OPTICAL FIBERS (9)

Geometrical-Optics Description; Step-Index Fibers- Graded IndexFibers- Wave Propagation; Maxwells Equations- Fiber Modes- Single-Mode-Fibers-Dispersion in Single-Mode Fibers; Group Velocity Dispersion- Material Dispersion-Wave guide Dispersion- Higher-order Dispersion- Polarization-Mode Dispersion-Dispersion-Induced Limitations; Basic Propagation Equation- Chirped GaussianPulses- Limitations on the Bit Rate- Fiber Bandwidth- Fiber Losses; AttenuationCoefficient- Material Absorption- Rayleigh scattering- wave guide ImperfectionsNonlinear Optical effects; Stimulated Light Scattering- Nonlinear Phase Modulation-Four Wave Mixing- Fiber Manufacturing; Design Issues- Fabrication Methods- Cables and Connectors. UNIT III- OPTICAL TRANSMITTERS (9)

Basic Concepts; Emission and Absorption Rates- p-n Junctions- Non radiative RecombinationSemi conductor Materials- Light Emitting Diodes; Power-current Characteristics- LED spectrum- Modulation Response- LEDStructures- Semi Conductor Lasers; DFB Lasers- Coupled Cavity semiconductor Lasers- Tunable Semiconductor Lasers- Vertical Cavity Semiconductor

Lasers- Laser Characteristics- Small & Large Signal Modulation- Spectral Line width- Source Fiber Coupling. UNIT IV- OPTICAL RECEIVERS (9)

Basic concepts- p-n Photo Diodes- p-i-n Photo Diodes-Avalanche Photo Diode- MSM Photo detector- Receiver Design- Receiver Noise; Noise mechanism- Receiver sensitivity; Bit error rate- Minimum Receiver Power- Sensitivity Degradation- Receiver Performance. UNIT V- LIGHT WAVE SYSTEMS (9)

System Architecture- Loss limited Light wave systems- Dispersion limited Light wave systemsPower Budget- Long Haul systems- Sources of Power Penalty; Model Noise- Dispersive Pulse Broadening- Mode Partition Noise- Frequency Chirping- Reflection Feedback Noise.Multi channel Systems-WDM Light wave systems- Optical TDM Systems-Subscriber MultiplexingCode Division Multiplexing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communication McGraw Hill International, Singapore, 3rd ed., 2000

REFERENCES
1. J.Senior, Optical Communication, Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 1994. 2. J.Gower, Optical Communication System, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION LAB AIM To study about various optical sources and optical detectors and their use in the optical communication system lab. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10 D.C. Characteristics of LED and PIN Photo Diode Optical transmission using Analog Modulation System bandwidth Determination by Intensity Modulation. Data transmission through Fiber Optic Link. Time Division Multiplexing PI Characteristics of LASER diode. Study of OTDR Optical power measurement. Study of optical connectors Study of optical fiber splicing and joining.

EC 4727

VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DESIGN L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To introduce the technology, design concepts and testing of Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the basic CMOS circuits. 2. To learn the CMOS process technology. 3. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices. 4. To learn the concepts of designing VLSI subsystems. 5. To learn the concepts of modeling a digital system using Hardware Description Language. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO MOS TECHNOLOGY (9)

MOS Technology & VLSI -Basic MOS transistor -depletion & enhancement type -NMOS & CMOS Transistors fabrications -electrical properties of MOS circuits - characteristics -threshold voltage - ransconductance -pass transistors - NMOS Inverter -pull-up pull-down ratio for NMOS Inverter driven by NMOS Inverter & through one or more pass transistors CMOS Inverter latch-up-sheet-resistance & capacitance calculation delay Calculation - super buffer - HMOS & native transistors. UNIT II- LAYOUT DESIGN (9)

MOS & CMOS Layers - stick diagram - design rules & layout subsystems design: switch logic - gate logic - other forms logic - combinational logic design example: passing generator - bus arbitration logic multiplexers gray to binary code converter - sequential circuit example: two phase clocking -dynamic register element - dynamic shift register - precharged bus concept scaling circuits. UNIT III - DESIGN OF SYSTEM (9)

PLA - Finite state machine - PLA based finite state machine design -design of 4-bit shifter design of ALU subsystem: adders - multiplexers -memory: dynamic shift register - dynamic RAM cells - one transistor dynamic memory cell - 4*4 bit register array - RAM array. UNIT IV -DESIGN WITH CPLDS AND FPGAS (9)

Programmable logic devices : ROM, PLAs, GAL, PEEL, CPLDs and FPGA. Design and implementation using CPLDs and FPGAs

UNIT V -CMOS DESIGN PROJECTS & FAST VLSI CIRCUITS

(9)

Incremental/decremental - left/right - serial/parallel shift register - comparator - GaAs device layout design for GaAs devices. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. D.A.Pucknell & K.Eshraghian , Basic VLSI Design, PHI, 1993. REFERENCE 1. R.L.Geiger & P.H.Allen & N.R.Starder., VLSI Design Techniques for Analog & Digital Circuits, Mc Grawhill International Edition ,1990 45 45 90

VLSI DESIGN LAB AIM To impart the knowledge of designing concepts and testing of Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits. 1. Design of Gates 2. Design of AND gate 3. Design of OR gate 4. Design of XOR gate 5. Design of XOR gate using other basic gates 6. Design of 2:1 Mux using other basic gates 7. Design of 2 to 4 Decoder 8. Design of Half-Adder, Full Adder, Half Substractor, Full Substractor 9. Design of 3:8 Decodre 10. Design of 8:3 Priority Encoders 11. Design of 4 Bit Binary to Grey code Converter 12. Design of 4 Bit Binary to BCD Converter using sequential statement

EC4828

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To familiarize the students with the Qualities and principles of management. OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools available to achieve Total Quality Management. 2. To understand the statistical approach for quality control. 3. To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries. UNIT I- QUALITY AND TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (9)

Excellence in manufacturing/service- factors of excellence- relevance of TQM. Concept and definition of quality; total quality control (TQC) and Total Quality Management (TQM)- salient features of TQC and TQM. Total Quality Management Models- benefits of TQM. UNIT II -JUST-IN-TIME (JIT) (9)

Definition: Elements- benefits- equipment layout for JIT system- Kanban system MRP (Material Requirement planning) vs JIT system- Waste elimination- workers involvement through JIT: JIT cause and effect chain JITimplementation.Customer: Satisfaction- data collection and complaintredressal mechanism. UNIT III -PLANNING PROCESS (9)

Policy development and implementation; plan formulation and implementation. Process Management: Factors affecting process management- Quality function development (QFD)- and quality assurance system. UNIT IV- TOTAL EMPLOYEES INVOLVEMENT (TEI) (9)

Empowering employees: team building; quality circles; reward and Recognition; education and training- Suggestion schemes. Problems solving Defining problem; Problem identification and solving process;QCtoolsBenchmarking definition- concept- process and types of benchmarking. UNIT V -QUALITY SYSTEMS (9)

Concept of quality system standards: relevance and origin of ISO 9000; Benefits; Elements of ISO 9001- ISO 9002- ISO 9003. Advanced techniques of TQM: Design of experiments: failure mode effect analysis:Taguchi methods.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled- et al.- Total Quality Management- Pearson Education- Inc. 2003. (Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6.

REFERENCES 1. James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality (5th Edition)- South-Western (Thomson Learning)- 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5). 2. Feigenbaum.A.V. Total Quality Management, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

ELECTIVE-I EEC4642 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to various image processing techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image processing. 2. To study the image enhancement techniques 3. To study image restoration procedures. 4. To study the image compression procedures. 5. To study the image segmentation and representation techniques. UNIT I- CONTINUOUS IMAGE MATHEMATICAL CHARACTERIZATION (9)

Image Representation- Two-Dimensional Systems- Two-Dimensional Fourier Transform- Image Stochastic Characterization psychophysical vision properties Light Perception- Eye PhysiologyVisual Phenomena- Monochrome Vision Model- Color Vision Model UNIT II -PHOTOMETRY AND COLORIMETRY (9)

Photometry- Color Matching- Colorimetry Concepts- Tristimulus Value Transformation. image sampling and reconstruction Image Sampling And Reconstruction Concepts- Image Sampling Systems- Image reconstruction systems UNIT III- DISCRETE IMAGE MATHEMATICALCHARACTERIZATION (9)

Vector-Space Image Representation- Generalized Two-Dimensional Linear Operator- Image Statistical Characterization- Image Probability Density Models- Linear Operator Statistical Representation image quantization Scalar Quantization- Processing Quantized VariablesMonochrome And Color Image Quantization. UNIT IV -SUPERPOSITION AND CONVOLUTION (9)

Finite-Area Superposition And Convolution- Sampled Image Superposition And ConvolutionCirculant Superposition And Convolution- Superpositon And Convolution Operator Relationship unitary transforms General unitary transforms- fourier transform- cosine- sine- and hartley transforms- hadamard- haar- anddaubechies transforms- karhunen-loeve transform.

UNIT V -IMAGE ENHANCEMENT

(9)

Contrast Manipulation- Histogram Modification- Noise Cleaning- Edge Crispening- Color Image Enhancement- Multispectral Image Enhancement image restoration models General Image Restoration Models- Optical Systems Models- Photograpidc Process Models- Discrete Image Restoration Models. morphological image processing Binary Image Connectivity- Binary Image Hit Or Miss Transformations- Binary Image Shrinking- Thinning- Skeletonizing- And Thickening- Binary Image Generalized Dilation And Erosion- Binary Image Close And Open Operations- Gray Scale Image Morphological Operations THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, Digital Image Processing 2nd Edition, Pearson Education 2003. REFERENCES 1. William K Pratt- Digital Image Processing- John Willey (2001) 2. Millman Sonka- Vaclav hlavac- Roger Boyle- Broos/colic- Thompson- Image Processing Analysis and Machine Vision- Learniy (1999). 3. A.K. Jain- Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing- PHI- New Delhi (1995) 4. Chanda Dutta Magundar Digital Image Processing and Applications- Prentice Hall of India- 2000.

EEC 4643

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To give sufficient background for undertaking embedded systems design. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce students to the embedded systems- its hardware and software. 2. To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking. 3. To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++. 4. To explain real time operating systems- inter-task communication and an exemplary case of MUCOS IIRTOS. UNIT I- EMBEDDED ARCHITECTURE (9)

Embedded Computers- Characteristics of Embedded Computing Applications- Challenges in Embedded Computing system design- Embedded system design process- RequirementsSpecification- Architectural Design- Designing Hardware and Software Components- System Integration- Formalism for System Design- Structural Description- Behavioral Description- Design Example: Model Train Controller UNIT II- EMBEDDED PROCESSOR AND COMPUTING PLATFORM (9)

ARM processor- processor and memory organization- Data operations- Flow of Control- SHARC processor- Memory organization- Data operations- Flow of Control- parallelism with instructionsCPU Bus configuration- ARM Bus- SHARC Bus- Memory devices- Input/output devicesComponent interfacing- designing with microprocessor development and debugging- Design Example : Alarm Clock. UNIT III- NETWORKS (9)

Distributed Embedded Architecture- Hardware and Software Architectures- Networks for embedded systems- I2C- CAN Bus- SHARC link pports- Ethernet- Myrinet- Internet- Network-Based designCommunication Analysis- system performance Analysis- Hardware platform design- Allocation and scheduling- Design Example: Elevator Controller. UNIT IV- REAL-TIME CHARACTERISTICS (9)

Clock driven Approach- weighted round robin Approach- Priority driven Approach- Dynamic Versus Static systems- effective release times and deadlines- Optimality of the Earliest deadline first (EDF) algorithm- challenges in validating timing constraints in priority driven systems- Off-line Versus Online scheduling.

UNIT V- SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES

(9)

Design Methodologies- Requirement Analysis- Specification- System Analysis and Architecture Design- Quality Assurance- Design Example: Telephone PBX- System Architecture- Ink jet printerHardware Design and Software Design- Personal Digital Assistants- Set-top Boxes. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2001. 2. Jane.W.S, Liu Real-Time systems, Pearson Education Asia, 2000 REFERENCES 1. C. M. Krishna and K. G. Shin, Real-Time Systems, McGraw-Hill, 1997 2. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargi Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.

EEC4644

MICROELECTRONICS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of microelectronics. OBJECTIVES 1. To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits in microelectronics 2. To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Advantages of ICs- General classification of ICs (Linear/Digital ICs - Monolithic/ Hybrid ICs)- Basic IC fabrication steps UNIT II- CRYSTAL GRTOWTH AND EPITAXY (9)

Starting material for formation of crystal- Horizontal Bridgeman Method- Czochralski growthDistribution of dopants- Zone refining- Silicon Float Zone process- Si-Wafer preparationEpitaxial growth- Techniques used for epitaxial growth (LPE-VPE-MBE) UNIT III- SILICON OXIDATION (9)

Thermal oxidation process (Kinetics of growth - Thin oxide growth)- Effect of impurities on the oxidation rate- Preoxidation Cleaning- Various oxidation techniques- Masking properties of SiO2 - photolithography and etching- Pattern generation/Mask making- Contact and Proximity printing- Photoresistsl- Photolithography Process (Lift off technology - Fine line photolithography)- Wet/Dry etching- Reactive Plasma etching techniques and applications UNIT IV- DIFFUSION AND ION IMPLANTATION (9)

Basic diffusion process(Diffusion equation- Diffusion profiles)- Extrinsic diffusion- Lateral Diffusion- Ion Implantation Process (Ion distribution - Ion Stopping)- Implant Damage and Annealing process (Furnace and RTA)- VI IC PACKAGING- Isolation Techniques- Testing of the Chip- Wire Bonding techniques- Flip Chip technique- Various Packaging methods and MaterialsUNIT V- FABRICATION OF MONOLITHIC COMPONENTS (9)

Fabrication of Diodes- Resistors- capacitors and inductors- Fabrication of BJT and FETFabrication of MOS Devices - CMOS fabrication techniques(n-well and p-well process sequences)- Introduction to MEMS.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Ben.G.Streetman & Sanjan Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, 5th Edition, PHI Private Ltd., 2003 REFERENCES 1. Yannis Tsividis, Operation & Mode line of The MOS Transistor, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 1999 2. Nandita Das Gupta &Aamitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices Modeling a Technology, PHI, 2004.

ELECTIVE-II EEC 4745 AIM To introduce the concepts of wireless / mobile communication using cellular environment. To make the students to know about the various modulation techniquespropagation methods- coding and multi access techniques used in the mobile communication. Various wireless network systems and standards are to be introduced. OBJECTIVES 1. It deals with the fundamental cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse and handoff. This also demonstrates the principle of trunking efficiency and how trunking and interference issues between mobile and base stations combine to affect the overall capacity of cellular systems. 2. It presents different ways to radio propagation models and predict the large scale effects of radio propagation in many operating environment. This also covers small propagation effects such as fading- time delay spread and Doppler spread and describes how to measures and model the impact that signal bandwidth and motion have on the instantaneous received signal through the multi-path channel. 3. It provides idea about analog and digital modulation techniques used in wireless communication. It also deals with the different types of equalization techniques and diversity concepts. 4. It provides an introduction to speech coding principles which have driven the development of adaptive pulse code modulation and linear predictive coding techniques are presented. This unit also describes the time- frequency code division multiple access techniques as well as more recent multiple access technique such as space division multiple access. 5. It deals with second generation and third generation wireless networks and worldwide wireless standards. MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

UNIT I-CELLULAR CONCEPT AND SYSTEM DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS (9) Introduction to wireless communication: Evolution of mobile communications- mobile radio systems- Examples- trends in cellular radio and personal communications. Cellular Concept: Frequency reuse- channel assignment- hand off- Interference and system capacity- tracking and grade of service- Improving Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems.

UNIT II- MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION (9) Free space propagation model- reflection- diffraction- scattering- link budget design- Outdoor Propagation models- Indoor propagation models- Small scale Multipath propagation- Impulse model- Small scale Multipath measurements- parameters of Mobile multipath channels- types of small scale fading- statistical models for multipath fading channels. UNIT III- MODULATION TECHNIQUES AND EQUALIZATION (9) Modulation Techniques: Minimum Shift Keying- Gauss ion MSK- M-ary QAM- M-ary FSKOrthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing- Performance of Digital Modulation in Slow-Flat Fading Channels and Frequency Selective Mobile Channels. Equalization: Survey of Equalization Techniques- Linear Equalization- Non-linear Equalization- Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization. Diversity Techniques- RAKE receiver. UNIT IV- CODING AND MULTIPLE ACESS TECHNIQUES (9)

Coding: Vocoders- Linear Predictive Coders- Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile Communication- GSM Codec- RS codes for CDPD. Multiple Access Techniques: FDMATDMA- CDMA- SDMA- Capacity of Cellular CDMA and SDMA. UNIT V - WIRELESS SYSTEMS AND STANDARDS (9)

Second Generation and Third Generation Wireless Networks and Standards- WLL- Blue tooth. AMPS- GSM- IS-95 and DECT THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. T.S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India- Third Indian Reprint, 2003. REFERENCES 1. R. Blake, Wireless Communication Technology Thomson Delmar, 2003. 2. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications Second Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998. 3. Stephen G. Wilson, Digital Modulation and Coding Pearson Education, 2003

EEC4746 AIM

TELEVISION ENGINEERING

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

Television Technology has now become a vital tool to the information revolution that is sweeping across the countries of the world. The syllabus aims at a comprehensive coverage of Television Systems with all the new developments in Television Engineering. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the analysis and synthesis of TV Pictures- Composite Video Signal- Receiver Picture Tubes and Television Camera Tubes 2. To study the principles of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems. 3. To study the various Color Television systems with a greater emphasis on PAL system. 4. To study the advanced topics in Television systems and Video Engineering UNIT I- TELEVISION PICTURE AND TV STANDARDS (9)

Geometric form and aspect ratio of the picture - Scanning -Interlaced Scanning - Number of scanned lines - Vertical &Horizontal resolution - Picture brightness Transfer characteristics Negative transmission - Vestigial Sideband transmission - Complete Channel bandwidth Reception of Vestigial side band signals - Allocation of frequency bands of TVsignals - CCIRB and FCC standards. Camera Tubes : Camera tube requirements - Iconoscope Image orthicon Vidicon - Plumbicon - Silicon diode array Solid state Image scanners - Gamma correction. UNIT II- TELEVISION TRANSMITTERS (9)

Requirement of TV broadcast transmission - TV transmitters Visual exciter - Aural exciter Diplexers - Transmitting Antennas Microwave TV relay systems - Television via satelliteCCTV - Cable television TV receiver as a data communication terminal - Teleconference. UNIT III- TELEVISION RECEIVER (9)

Receiver Block diagrams - Receiving antennas - Balun and IF filters RF tuners - VHF tuners IF state - IF response - Wave traps - Video detector - Video amplifier - DC restoration - Sync separator - Vertical and Horizontal deflection system - Vertical output stage - EHT generation Picture tube - Beam- deflection - Centering and focussing - Geometric Distortion in raster Sound section. UNIT IV- COLOUR TELEVISION (9)

Nature of colour - Chromacity diagram - Compatability with monochrome and Vice Versa Colour TV - Transmission and reception - Video tape recording - VCR / VCPs - Video disks Tele text and video text systems - Video games.

UNIT V -ADVANCES IN TV TECHNOLOGY

(9)

Projection Television - Stereo sound in TV - 3D TV picture - Digital TV -High definition TV (HDTV) - Flat panel display - TV via satellite. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Gulati.R.R. "Monochrome and Colour Television", Wiley Eastern Ltd- 1994. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Grob.B., "Basic Television Principles and Servicing", McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, Ltd. 1992. 2. Gulati.R.R., Modern TV Practice Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1992. 3. A.M.Dhake, Television Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill.,1998.

EEC 4747

NUMERICAL METHODS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop efficient algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This course gives a complete procedure for solving different kinds of problems occur in engineering numerically. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course, the students would be acquainted with the basic concepts in numerical methods, 1. The roots of nonlinear (algebraic or transcendental) equations, solutions of large system of linear equations and eigenvalue problem of a matrix can be obtained numerically where analytical methods fail to give solution. 2. When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values. 3. The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as series of measurements, observations or some other empirical information. 4. Since many physical laws are couched in terms of rate of change of one/two or more independent variables, most of the engineering problems are characterized in the form of either nonlinear ordinary differential equations or partial differential equations. The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem. UNIT I- SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS (9)

Linear interpolation methods (method of false position) Newtons method Statement of Fixed Point Theorem Fixed point iteration x = g (x) method Solution of linear system by Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon methods- Iterative methods: Gauss Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel methods- Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordon method Eigenvalue of a matrix by power method. UNIT II - INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION (9)

Lagrangian Polynomials Divided differences Interpolating with a cubic spline Newtons forward and backward difference formulas. UNIT III- NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION (9)

Derivatives from difference tables Divided differences and finite differences Numerical integration by trapezoidal and Simpsons 1/3 and 3/8 rules Rombergs method Two and Three point Gaussian quadrature formulas Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpsons rules

UNIT IV- INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9) Single step methods: Taylor series method Euler and modified Euler methods Fourth order RungeKutta method for solving first and second order equations Multistep methods: Milnes and Adams predictor and corrector methods UNIT V- BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9) Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation Finite difference solution of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods One dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K. and Gunavathy, K., Numerical Methods, S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. Burden, R.L and Faires, T.D., Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2002. Gerald, C.F, and Wheatley, P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002. Balagurusamy, E., Numerical Methods, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 1999.

ELECTIVE-III EEC 4848 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to advanced instrumentation processing techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the perspective of VI. 2. To study the programming techniques using loops & structures 3. To study the data acquisition basics. UNIT I- REVIEW OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (9)

Historical perspective- Need of VI- Advantages of VI-Define VI- block diagram & architecture of VI- data flow techniques- graphical programming in data flow- comparison with conventional programming. UNIT II- PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES (9)

VIS & Sub VIS- loops & charts- arrays- clusters- graphs- case & sequence structures- formula modes- local & global variables- string & file Input. UNIT III- DATA ACQUISITION BASICS (9)

ADC- DAC- DIO- Counters & timers- PC Hardware structure- timing- interrupts- DMASoftware and Hardware Installation. UNIT IV- COMMON INSTRUMENT INTERFACES (9)

Current loop- Rs 232C/Rs 485- GPIB- System basics- interface basics: USB- PCMCIA- VXISCXI- PXI etc- networking basics for office & industrial application VISA & IVI- image acquisition & processing- Motion Control. Use of Analysis Tools- Fourier transfo+rms- Power spectrum- Correlation methods- windowing & flittering. UNIT V- APPLICATION OF VI (9)

Application in Process Control projects- Major equipments-Oscilloscope- Digital Multimeter120 MHz PentiumComputers- Labview Software- Study of Data Acquisition & Control using Labview - Virtual instrumentation for an Innovative Thermal Conductivity - Apparatus to measure the Thermal Conductivity - Apparatus to measure the conductivity of non Newtonian fluids while they are subjected to sharing force

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Gary Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, second edition, MC GrawHill, Newyork, 1997. REFERENCE 1. Lisa K.Wells & Jeffrey Travis, Labview for everyone, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997.

EEC 4849 AIM

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To study some fundamental concepts in wireless communication systems and networks. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To understand physical as wireless MAC layer alternatives techniques. To learn planning and operation of wireless networks. To study various wireless LAN and WAN concepts. To understand WPAN and geo-location systems.

UNIT I -INTRODUCTION

(9)

Mobile Radio Systems around the world- Examples of Wireless Communication Systems; Paging Systems- Cordless Telephone Systems- Cellular Telephone Systems- Comparison of common Wireless Communication systems Digital Communication through fading multi path channels: Fading channel and their characteristics- Channel modeling- Digital signaling over a frequency non selective slowly fading channel- frequency selective slowly fading channelCalculation of error probabilities- Tapped Delay line model- The RAKE demodulatorperformance-Concept of diversity branches and signal paths- Combining methods- Selective diversity combining-pre-detection and post-detection combining- Switched combining- maximal ratio combining- Equal gain combining. UNIT II- MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS (9) Introduction- Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)- Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)- Spread Spectrum Multiple Access- Space Division Multiple Access- Packet Radio Protocols; Pure ALOHA- Sloted ALLOHA- Capacity of Cellular Systems. UNIT III- WIRELESS NETWORKING (9)

Introduction- Difference between Wireless & Fixed Telephone Networks- Development of Wireless Networks- Traffic Routing in Wireless NetworksWireless Data Services- Common Channel signaling- Broad band ISDN & ATM- Signaling System No. 7(SS-7)- Personal Communication Services/ Networks- Protocols for Network Access- Network Databases.

UNIT IV- WIRELESS SYSTEMS & STANDARDS

(9)

AMPS and ETACS- United states digital cellular (IS- 54 & IS 136)- Global system for Mobile (GSM); Services- Features- System Architecture- and Channel Types- Frame Structure for GSM- Speech Processing in GSM- CDMA Digital standard (IS 95); Frequency and Channel

specifications- Forward CDMA Channel- Reverse CDMA Channel- CT2 Standard for Cordless Telephones- Personal Access Communication System- Pacific Digital Cellular- Personal Handy phone Systems- PCS and ISM Bands- Wireless Cable Television.

UNIT V -WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLAN)

(9)

Components and working of WLAN- transmission media for WLAN- Modulation techniques for WLAN (DSSS- FHSS)- IEEE 802.11 standards and protocols for WLAN (MACA- MACAW). Mobile Network and Transport layer: Mobile IP- Mobile TCP- traffic routing in wireless networks- wire less ATM. Wireless Local Loop(WLL) : WLL Architecture- WLL Technologies and frequency spectrum. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Theodore S.Rappaport, Wireless communications: Principles and practice, third Indian reprint Pearson Education Asia, 2003. REFERENCE 1. Raj Pandya, Mobile and Personal Communication systems and services, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

EEC 4850

HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To highlight the features of different technologies involved in High Speed Networking and their performance. OBJECTIVES 1. Students will get an introduction about ATM and Frame relay. 2. Students will be provided with an up-to-date survey of developments in High Speed Networks. 3. Enable the students to know techniques involved to support real-time traffic and congestion control. 4. Students will be provided with different levels of quality of service (Q.S) to different applications. UNIT I -HIGH SPEED NETWORKS (9)

Frame Relay Networks Asynchronous transfer mode ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM logical Connection, ATM Cell ATM Service Categories AAL. High Speed LANs: Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel Wireless LANs: applications, requirements Architecture of 802.11 UNIT II - CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT (9)

Queuing Analysis- Queuing Models Single Server Queues Effects of Congestion Congestion Control Traffic Management Congestion Control in Packet Switching Networks Frame Relay Congestion Control. UNIT III- TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL (9)

TCP Flow control TCP Congestion Control Retransmission Timer Management Exponential RTO backoff KARNs Algorithm Window management Performance of TCP over ATM.Traffic and Congestion control in ATM Requirements Attributes Traffic Management Frame work, Traffic Control ABR traffic Management ABR rate control, RM cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations GFR traffic management. UNIT IV-INTEGRATED AND DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES (9)

Integrated Services Architecture Approach, Components, Services- Queuing Discipline, FQ, PS, BRFQ, GPS, WFQ Random Early Detection, Differentiated Services

UNIT V- PROTOCOLS FOR QOS SUPPORT

(9)

RSVP Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms Multiprotocol Label Switching Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details RTP Protocol Architecture, Data Transfer Protocol, RTCP. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. William Stallings, High Speed Networks and Internet, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. Warland & Pravin Varaiya, High Performance Communication Networks, Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001. Irvan Pepelnjk, Jim Guichard and Jeff Apcar, MPLS and VPN architecture, Cisco Press, Volume 1 and 2, 2003

ELECTIVE-IV EEC 4851 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION AND BROADCASTING L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the basic concepts of Satellite Communication OBJECTIVES 1. 2. To study the concept of FDMA- TDMA- CDMA and Spread Spectrum communication To learn the satellite application. (9)

UNIT I - ORBIT DYNAMICS

Keplers Laws- Newtons law- orbital parameters- orbital perturbations- station keeping- geo stationaryand non Geo-stationary orbits- frequency allocation- frequency co-ordination and regulatory services- sun transit outrages- limits of visibility- launching vehicles and propulsion. UNIT II - SPACE SEGMENT (9)

Space craft configuration- communication Payload and supporting subsystems- satellite up link down link- link power budget- c/no. G/T- Noise temperature- System noise- propagation factors- rain and ice effects- polarization. UNIT III - SATELLITE ACCESS (9)

Modulation and Multiplexing: Voice- Data- Video- Analog digital transmission systemDigital video Brocast- multiple access: FDMA- TDMA- CDMA- Assignment Methods- Spread Spectrum communication- compression encryption UNIT IV - EARTH SEGMENT (9)

Transmitters- receivers- Antennas- Terrestrial Interface- Tvro- Matv- Catv- Test Equipments Measurements on G/T- C/No- EIRP- Antenna Gain. UNIT V - SATELLITE APPLICATIONS (9)

INTELSAT Series- INSAT- VSAT- Facsimile system- Weather service- Remote sensingmobile satellite services: GSM- GPS- INMARSAT- LEO- MEO- Satellite Navigational SystemDirect Broadcast satellites (DBS)- Direct to home Broadcast (DTH)- Digital audio broadcast (DAB)- Business TV(BTV)- GRAMSAT- Specialized services E mail- Video conferencinginternet

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Dennis Rody, Satellite Communication, Regents/Prentice Hall, Englewood cliffs- New Jersey, 1989. 2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems Engineering Prentice Hall- II Edition, 1993. REFERENCES 1. N.Agarwal, Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft- Prentice Hall, 1986. 2. Bruce R. Elbert, The Satellite Communication Applications Hand Book, Artech House Bostan London- 1997. 3. Tri T. Ha, Digital Satellite Communication, II edition, 1990. 4. Emanuel Fthenakis, Manual of Satellite Communications- McGraw Hill Book Co. 1984. 5. Robert G. Winch, Telecommunication Trans Mission Systems McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1983. 6. Brian Ackroyd, World Satellite Communication and earth station Design BSP professional Books, 1990. 7. G.B.Bleazard, Introducing Satellite communications, NCC Publication, 1985.

ELECTIVE-V (VIII SEMESTER) EEC4854 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To get knowledge about usage of electronic devices in Communication Engineering and Power supplies.

OBJECTIVE 1. To study RF component such as resonator- filter- transmission lines- etc 2. To learn design of RF amplifiers using transistors. 3. To study modern Power Supplies using SCR and SMPS technology 4. To learn about signal shielding & grounding techniques and study of A/D and D/A Converters. 5. To learn knowledge about fabrication of PCBs using CAD. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO RF DESIGN (9)

RF behaviour of passive components- Chip components and circuit board considerationsReview of transmission lines- Impedance and admittance transformation- Parallel and series connection of networks- ABCD and scattering parameters- Analysis of amplifier using scattering parameter. RF filter Basic resonator and filter configurations Butterworth and Chebyshev filters. Implementation of microstrip filter design. Band pass filter and cascading of band pass filter elements. UNIT II -RF TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIER DESIGN (9)

Impedance matching using discrete components. Microstrip line matching networks. Amplifier classes of operation and biasing networks Amplifier power gain- Unilateral design(S12 =0) Simple input and output matching networks Bilateral design - Stability circle and conditional stability- Simultaneous conjugate matching for unconditionally stable transistors. Broadband amplifiers- High power amplifiers and multistage amplifiers. UNIT III - DESIGN OF POWER SUPPLIES (9)

DC power supply design using transistors and SCRs- Design of crowbar and foldback protection circuits- Switched mode power supplies- Forward- flyback- buck and boost converters- Design of transformers and control circuits for SMPS. UNIT IV - DESIGN OF DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS (9)

Amplification of Low level signals- Grounding- Shielding and Guarding techniques- Dual slopequad slope and high speed A/D converters- Microprocessors Compatible A/D convertersMultiplying A/D converters and Logarithmic A/D converters- Sample and Hold- Design of two and four wire transmitters.

UNIT V- DESIGN OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

(9)

Introduction to technology of printed circuit boards (PCB)- General lay out and rules and parameters- PCB design rules for Digital- High Frequency- Analog- Power Electronics and Microwave circuits- Computer Aided design of PCBs. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Reinhold Luduig and Pavel Bretchko- RF Circuit Design Theory and ApplicationsPearson Education- 2000. 2. Sydney Soclof- Applications of Analog Integrated Circuits- Prentice Hall of India1990. 3. Walter C.Bosshart- Printed circuit Boards Design and Technology- TATA McGrawHill- 1983. REFERENCES 1. Keith H.Billings- Handbook of Switched Mode Supplies McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.1989. 2. Michael Jaacob- Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits Prentice Hall of India- 1991. 3. Otmar Kigenstein- Switched Mode Power supplies in Practice- John Wiley and Sons1989. 4. Muhammad H.Rashid- Power Electronics Circuits- Devices and Applications- Prentice Hall of India- 2004.

EEC4855

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to advanced digital system design. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the parametric methods for power spectrum estimation. 2. To study adaptive filtering techniques using LMS algorithm and to study the applications of adaptive filtering. 3. To study multirate signal processing fundamentals. 4. To study the analysis of speech signals. 5. To introduce the student to wavelet transforms. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction to combinational modules and modular network. Standard combinational modules design of arithmetic modules. Implementation of combinational systems with ROMs and PLAs. Comparison with other approaches. Implementation of multi- module combinational systems decoder networks- Mux trees- demux network- encoder network- shifter network and barrel shifters. UNIT II -DIGITAL SYSTEMS (9)

Introduction to digital systems-Synchronous and asynchronous state diagram- state names- mili and moor machines binary description- Time behavior of synchronous Sequential systemsMinimization of no. of states -Specification of various types of sequential system. UNIT III- INTRODUCTION TO CANONCAL METHODS (9)

Canonical implementation analysis and synthesis of networks in the canonical implementation.-Flip Flop modules and networks- Modular sequential networks. UNIT IV - SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT (9)

Standard sequential modules registers- shift register counters RAM- Content addressable memories and programmable sequential arrays (PSA) design of sequential systems with small number of standard modules state register and combinational networks use of ROMs in sequential networks counter and combinational networks RAM and combinational networks SR and combinational networks. UNIT V-HARDWARE/FIRMWARE ALGORITHMS (9)

Multimodule implementation of sequential systems multimodule registers shift registers and RAMs multimodule counters sequential arrays introduction to hardware/firmware algorithms.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Reinhold Luduig and Pavel Bretchko- RF Circuit Design Theory and ApplicationsPearson Education- 2000. 2. Sydney Soclof- Applications of Analog Integrated Circuits- Prentice Hall of India1990. 3. Walter C.Bosshart- Printed circuit Boards Design and Technology- TATA McGraw

REFERENCES 1. Milos D Ercegovac- Tomas Lang- Digital systems and hardware/firmware algorithmsJohn Wiley. 2. William I Flethcher- An engineering approach to digital design- Prentice Hall. 3. Hayes- Digital System design and Microprocessors- McGraw Hill. 4. John B Peatman- Digital Hardware design- McGraw Hill.

EEC4856 AIM

INTERNET AND JAVA

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To highlight the features of internet and java in the internet applications. OBJECTIVES 1. Students will get an introduction internet working with TCP/IP. 2. Students will be provided with an up-to-date survey of internet routing 3. Enable the students to know techniques involved to support world wide web(WWW) 4. Students will be provided with complete knowledge of java programming.

UNIT I -INTERNET WORKING WITH TCP/IP

(9)

Review of network technologies- internet addressing address resolution protocols(ARP /RARP)routing IP datagrams- Reliable stream transport service(TCP) TCP / IP over ATM networksInternet applications E-mail- Telnet- FTP- NFS- Internet traffic Management. UNIT II - INTERNET ROUTING (9)

Concepts of graph theory- routing protocols- Distance vector protocols (RIP)- link state protocol (OSPP)- path vector protocols (BGP and IDRP)- routing for high speed multimedia trafficMulticasting- Resource reservation (RSVP)- IP switching. UNIT III - WORLD WIDE WEB (9)

Http Protocol- Web browsers Netscape- Internet explorer- Web sites and web pages designHTML- XML Dynamic HTML- CGI. UNIT IV - JAVA PROGRAMMING (9)

Languages features- Classes- Object and methods- Sub classing and dynamic bindingMultithreading. Overview of class library- Object method serialization- Remote method invocation- Java script. UNIT V - MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS E-Commerce- Network operating Systems- Web Design case studies. (9)

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Douglass E. Comer- Internetworking with TCP/IP- Vol. I: 3rd Edition- Prentice Hall of India- 1999. 2. Eric Ladd and Jim 0Donnell- Using HTML 4- XML and Java 1.2- Que Platinum edition- Prentice Hall of India- 1999. REFERENCES 1. William Stallings- High Speed Networks- Prentice Hall inc.- 1998. 2. Margaret Levine young Internet: The complete Reference- Tata McGraw-Hill- 1999. 3. Balaguruswamy. E Programming with Java- A Primer- Second edition- Tata McGrawHill- New Delhi- 1999.

B.E-Electrical and Electronics Engineering

SYLLABUS

First Year
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SH3101 MA3101 SH3102 SH3103 CS3102 ME3101 ME3105 EE3101
L T P Total Cont. Assess Marks Pract ical Theo ry

Subject Advanced English Communication Skills Principles of Applied Mathematics Advanced Applied Engineering Physics Energy and Material Chemistry Computational Systems and Programming Languages Computer Graphics and Drafting Electrical Mechanics Principle of Electrical Technology Total

Oral

Total

2 3 2 2 2 2 2 15

1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 14

4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 30

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160

50 50 50 50 100 50 50 400

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700

200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 1500

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

III SEMESTER Sl.No Sub Code 1 2 3 CS3305 Subject L T P Total Cont. Assess 30 30 30 Marks Oral Practical Theory Total 20 20 20 50 50 100 100 100 200 150 200

Data Structures

3 3 3

2 -

2 2

5 5 5

4 5 6

MA3302 Application of Mathematics ME3306 Solid Mechanics&Fluid Machinery EE3308 Electric Circuit Analysis EC3335 Solid State Electronics EE3309 Electrical Machines I TOTAL

3 3 3 18

2 2 2

5 5 5 30

30 30 30 180

20 20 20 120

50 50 50 250

100 100 100 600

200 200 200 1150

2 10

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

IV SEMESTER
Sl.No

Sub Code EC3436 EE3410

Subject

Total Cont. Asses s Oral

MARKS Pract ical Theo ry Total

1 2 3

Electronics Circuits Electrical Machines II

3 3 3

2 2 -

5 5 5

30 30 30

20 20 20 -

50 50

100 100 100

200 200 150

5 6

MA3406 Introduction To Numerical Methods EE3411 Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments ME3407 Modern Thermodynamics EC3437 Electromagnetic Theory

30

20

50

100

200

3 3 18

2 4

2 8

5 5 30

30 30 180

20 20 120

50 200

100 100 600

200 150 1100

TOTAL

(L-LECTURE;T-TUTORIAL;P-PRACTICAL)

V SEMESTER
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject

TOT AL

MARKS CONT. ASSESS ORAL PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2

EE3512 Control Systems EE3513 Industrial & Power Electronics EE3514 Power System I EC3538 Digital Electronics CS3512 Computer Architecture and Organisation EE3515 Switch Gear and Protection TOTAL

3 3

2 2

5 5

30 30

20 20

50 50

100 100

200 200

3 4 5

3 3 3

2 2 -

5 5 5

30 30 30

20 20 20

50 50 -

100 100 100

200 200 150

3 18

2 4

5 30

30 180

20 120

200

100 600

150 1100

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

VI SEMESTER
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject

TOTAL CONT. ASSESS ORAL

MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 EC3639

Elective - I Microprocessors And Microcontroller Power System II Electronic Instrumentation

3 3

1 2

4 5

30 30

20 20

50

100 100

150 200

3 4 5

EE3616 EC3640

3 3 -

2 2 4

5 5 4

30 30 30

20 20 20

50 100

100 100 -

150 200 150

6 7

AEE3617 Comprehension In Electrical And Career Skills EC3641 Digital Signal Processing PEE3618 Mini Project

3 -

2 -

2 -

7 30

30 30 210

20 20 140

50 100 350

100 500

200 150 1200

15 5 10 TOTAL

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

VII SEMESTER
SL.NO SUB CODE SUBJECT L T P TOTAL CONT. ASSESS ORAL MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 3 EE3719 EE3720

Elective-II High Voltage Engineering Electrical Machine Design Elective-III Advanced Networking Solid State Drives

3 3 3

1 2 2

4 5 5

30 30 30

20 20 20

100 100 100

150 150 150

4 5 6 CS3728 EE3721

3 3 3

1 2 2

4 5 7 30

30 30 30 180

20 20 20 120

50 50

100 100 100 600

150 150 200 950

TOTAL

18 10 2

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

VIII SEMESTER
SL.NO SUB CODE

Subject

TOTAL CONT. ASSESS ORAL

MARKS PRACTICAL THEORY TOTAL

1 2 3 4 EE3822

Elective-IV Elective-V Total Quality Management PEE3823 Project Total

3 1 3 1 3 1 -

18

4 4 4 18 30

30 30 30 50 140

20 20 20 100 160

250 250

100 100 100 300

150 150 150 400 850

9 3 18

(L-Lecture;T-Tutorial;P-Practical)

ELECTIVE I (VI SEMESTER)

Sl No 1 2 3

Sub Code EEE 3624 EEE 3625 EEE 3626

Subject Digital System Design New Renewable Sources of Energy Advanced Power Electronics

ELECTIVE II (VII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEE 3727 EEE 3728 EEE 3729 Subject Hvdc Transmission Special Machines And Controllers Flexible AC Transmission Systems

ELECTIVE III (VII SEMESTER) Sl No 1 2 3 Sub Code EEE 3730 EEE 3731 EEE 3732 Subject Computer Aided Design of Electrical Machines Embedded System Design Power System Dynamics

ELECTIVE IV (VIIISEMESTER) Sl No Sub Code 1 EEE 3833 2 3 EEE 3834 EEE 3835 Subject Electrical Power Transmission & Distribution Microelectronics Mobile Communication

ELECTIVE V (VIIISEMESTER) Sl No Sub Code 1 EEE 3836 2 3 EEE 3837 EEE 3838 Subject Television Engineering Wireless Communication System and Networks Virtual Instrumentation

SH3101

ADVANCED ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life and career related situations. OBJECTIVE 1. To improve the language proficiency of the students in English with emphasis on LSRW skills 2. To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their success. 3. To enable students to express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and professional contexts. 4. To develop the ability of students to guess the meanings of the words from the context and grasp the over all message of the text, draw inferences etc. 5. To develop an awareness in the students about writing as an exact and formal skill. UNIT I - LANGUAGE FOCUS (24)

Parts of speech - Tenses - Articles - Word formation with prefixes and suffixes - Voices Degrees of Comparison - Synonyms and Antonyms - Infinitives and Gerunds - If conditions Modal verbs - cause and effect - Purpose and function - Editing - Punctuation - sentence formation and transformation - Concord - Error correction - Imperatives (Should-form) UNIT II - LISTENING (16)

Listening comprehension - Listening for specific information - Note-making - Use of charts and diagrams - Listening to various sounds in English. UNIT III - SPEAKING (18)

Defining - Describing Objects - Describing uses - functions - Comparing - offering and giving advise - Analysing problems and providing solutions - Greetings - Suggesting - Introducing Warning - Seeking permission - Persuading - Praising and complimenting - Expressing sympathy - complaining and apologising - phoning - Symposium(Paper-presentation) - Mock Interview with HR - Mock GD - Technical conversations in the working environment. UNIT IV - READING (10)

Skimming the text for the gist - Scanning - Predicting the content - Interpreting charts and tables - Identifying stylistic features in text evaluating text - Understand discourse coherence -Note making - Guessing meaning from the context - Reading comprehension - Identifying the Slang in Journal.

UNIT V - WRITING

(22)

Sentence definition - Use of appropriate vocabulary - Paragraph writing - Essay writing Coherence - Cohesiveness - Narration and description - Precise writing - Formal and informal letters-Seeking Quotation - Ordering - Replying - Report - Writing - Technical Report writing Check-Lists - Instructions - Recommendations - E-mail writing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Dr.J.R.Nirmala, Technical English-Pearl Publishers, Chennai 2004 2. Mrs.Uma Maheswari, English for Engineers, Danam Publications, Chennai 2006. 3. Dr.S.Gunasekaran, Technical English Work Book, United Global Publishers, Chennai 2008. 4. Prof.M.Kandaswamy, Technical English Text book, Third Edition, BR Publications, Chennai 2008. REFERENCES 1. Authors: Humanities and social science department, English for Engineers and Technologists, Volume I. Anna University, published by orient Longman Lts., 1990. 2. Narayanasami, V.R, Strengthen your writing Orient Longman Ltd., Chennai 1996(Revised Edition) 3. Swan, Michael, Basic English Usage, Oxford University Press, 1984. 4. Robert.J.Dixson, Everyday dialogues in English, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,2006 5. K.R.Lakshmi Narayanan, English for Technical Communication, Vol I&2 SciTech publication, Chennai 2008. 6. Francis Soundararaj, Speaking and writing for effective Business Communication, McMillan, India Ltd., 2007.

COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB FOR BUDDING ENGINEERS AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life. 3. To eradicate their stage fear, while communicating others with high-confident. OBJECTIVE 1. To develop their vocabulary. 2. To enhance their communication skills in Listening and Speaking. PART-I (LANGUAGE LAB) 1. (40)

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

Listening Practice Listening for general content Listening to fill up the information Intensive listening Listening for specific information Fill in the gaps Word play/games Riddles/Puzzles Conversation practice Telephonic conversation Vocabulary building exercises a. Synonyms b. Antonyms c. Odd word d. Jumbled letters e. One word f. Homophones Error correction Pronunciation Practice-word stress-sentence stress- discussion-interpretation of visuals. Brain teasers. a. b. c. d. (20)

PART-II (CAREER LAB) 1. Mock Group-Discussion 2. Oral Presentation skills 3. Mock-Interview 4. Debate 5. Conversational Practice.

MA3101 AIM

PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

L T P Totalmarks 310 150

To develop the basic Mathematical skills of engineering students as well as it helps them to understand the engineering subjects effectively. The topics introduced will serve as basic tools for specialized studies in many Engineering fields. OBJECTIVES 1. Be capable of mathematically formulating certain practical problems in terms of partial differential equations, solve them and practically interpret the results. 2. To understand double and triple integration and enable them to handle integrals of higher orders. 3. To know the basics of vector calculus comprising of gradient, divergence & curl and line, surface & volume integrals along with the classical theorems involving them. 4. To understand analytic functions and their interesting properties. 5. Make them to acquire a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. UNIT I -PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (18)

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-linear first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. UNIT II - MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (18)

Double integration - Cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - Area as a double integral - Change of variables between Cartesian and polar co-ordinates Triple integration Volume as a triple integral- Beta and Gamma functions. UNIT III - VECTOR CALCULUS (18)

Scalar point functions - Vector point functions Gradient Divergence and Curl - Directional derivative Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields Line and surface integrals Gauss divergence theorem, Stokes and Greens theorems (with out proof) - Simple applications.

UNIT IV - COMPLEX VARIABLES

(18)

Function of a complex variable Analytic function Necessary conditions Cauchy Riemann equations Sufficient conditions (excluding proof) Properties of analytic function Harmonic conjugate Construction of Analytic functions - Conformal mapping w = z + a , w = az ,

w=

1 z 2 , w = e , w = z and Bilinear transformation. Statement and application of Cauchys z

integral theorem and integral formula Taylor and Laurent expansions Isolated singularities Residues - Cauchys residue theorem. Contour integration over unit circle and semicircular contours. UNIT V PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (18)

Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability Bayes theorem - Measures of central tendency Measures of dispersion Moments Correlation Rank correlation Line of Regression Test based on Normal distribution Students t-Distribution chi-squares test for goodness of fit.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXT BOOKS

90 30 120

1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2004. 2. Venkatraman, M. K. Engineering Mathematics volume 1, Fourth Edition, National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics Eighth Edition, John Wiley Sons (Asia) Ltd, Singapore, 2001. 2. S.P.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics. S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi. and

SH 3102

ADVANCED APPLIED ENGINEERING PHYSICS (COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

L T P total 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. The syllabus covers the basic laws and principles of Physics and its applications. The course contents are so chosen that it should be more relevant to the modern development of science to meet the challenge posed by fast-changing technology. 2. To enable the students to correlate the theoretical principles with application oriented studies. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course the students would be exposed to 1. understand scientific concepts and to explain them logically 2. explain scientifically the new developments and technology 3. relate industrial developments to the developments in physical phenomena

UNIT 1- ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS

(18)

ACOUSTICS Introduction to Sound -Characteristics & Classification of Sound-Loudness-Weber-Fechner lawDecibel-Absorption co-efficient- Sabines law - Reverberation- Reverberation Time- Factors affecting the acoustics of building and their remedies. ULTRASONICS Introduction-Production of Ultrasonic waves-Magnetostriction method-Piezo electric methodDetection of Ultrasonic waves - Properties of Ultrasonic waves - Application to science industry and medicine - SONAR. UNIT II- LASER AND FIBER OPTICS COMMUNICATION (20)

LASER Introduction - Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission-Characteristics of Laser- Three and four level laser system He Ne laser - Nd-YAG laser- Semiconductor Laser- Application of Lasers in medicine and communication Basic principles of holography Construction and reconstruction of image on hologram Applications of holography FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION Principle and Propagation of light in optical fibers-Numerical Aperture and Acceptance angleTypes of optical fibers (Material, Refractive, Mode)-Application of fiber optics in communication and sensors. UNIT III- ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS (17)

NONLINEAR MATERIALS Principle - passive and active materials properties of nonlinear materials applications

NANO MATERIALS Introduction properties of nano particles carbon nano tubes semiconductor quantum dots application of nano particles. SUPER CONDUCTORS Introduction properties types - applications UNIT IV - PROPERTIES OF MATTER (18)

ELASTICITY Stress-Strain relationship- Hookes Law- Elastic behavior of a material- Uses of Stress Strain diagram-Factors affecting Elasticity-Youngs modulus-Bulk modulus- Modulus of RigidityPoissons ratio- Torsional Pendulum-Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire. BENDING OF BEAMS Bending moment of a beam - Experiment to find Youngs Modulus using Microscope-NonUniform bending-Expression for depression-Experiment to determine Youngs Modulus using pin and microscope method cantileaver loaded at the free end. UNIT V- DIELECTRICS & THERMAL PROPERTIES (17)

DIELECTRICS Introduction Dielectric constant Electronic ionic and orientational polarizations internal fields in solids clausius mossotti equation dielectrics in alternating fields frequency dependences of the polarization ferro and piezo electricity THERMAL PROPERTIES Introduction - Specific Heat of Solids Einstein Model Debye Model Lattice Vibrations Phonons Thermal Conductivity. TEXT BOOKS 1. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta, Engineering physics Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1987. 2. William Thomas Silfvast, Laser Fundamentals, Cambridge University Press, 2004. 3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology- a gentle introduction to next big idea Ratner Pearson Education, 2002. 4. A. K. Bandyopadhyay, Nanomaterials New Age International Publishers, 1997. 5. C. Kittel, Introduction to solid state physics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., seventh edition, 1996. 6. S. O. Pillai, Solid state physics, New age international (p) Ltd., publishers, revised Sixth edition, 2005 REFERENCES 1. Dr. Arumugam, Engineering physics, Anuradha Agencies, Third revised edition 2. G. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Physics, VRB Publishers 3. William callister, Materials Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 1997.

4. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Volume 2, John Wiley & Sons, fourth edition, 1992.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total

90 60 150

EXPERIMENTAL WORK

1. Torsional Pendulum -Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire & Moment of inertia of a Disc. 2. Viscosity Poisuilles flow Determination of Coefficient of Viscosity of a liquid. 3. Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus 4. Lees Disc Determination of Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor 5. Air Wedge -Determination of Thickness of a wire 6. Spectrometer Determination of Wavelengths of a Spectral lines using Grating 7. Spectrometer -Determination of Dispersive power of a Prism 8. Laser Determination of Particle Size & Wavelength 9. Band Gap Determination of Semiconducting material 10. Ultrasonic Interferometer -Determination of Velocity of ultrasonic waves in different liquids 11. Potentiometer E.M.F of a thermocouple 12. Non- Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus

SH 3103 AIM:

ENERGY AND MATERIAL CHEMISTRY

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

The main theme of the new syllabus is knowing the concepts and methods already exist and creating the awareness to meet the present and future needs through technology and simultaneously to motivating them to involve in the research area utilizing the current trend such as nano technology. OBJECTIVES: 1. It consist of the various energy resources to which the world is always facing numerous problems and in a position to invent new resources. 2. Material chemistry is included for the engineering student in order to know what chemistry materials are behind the technology. Also it deals with how the materials are protected from corrosion by technically. 3. Zeolites are nowadays used in various emerging catalytic field mainly in petro chemical cracking, water treatment, solar energy storing devices etc,. Also it contribute to a cleaner, safer environment in a great number of ways. 4. Nano materials are nowadays a current research area which the technology students should know about it for their future needs.

UNIT I - BASIS OF ELECTRO CHEMISTRY

(16)

Electrode potential single and standard electrode potential - Nernst Equation Reference electrode - hydrogen, calomel pH electrode - glass electrode - Electro chemical series and its applications Electrochemical cells Daniel cell Reversible and Irreversible cells concentration cell Conductometric titrations for acid-base reactions Potentiometric titration for estimation of Iron(Fe2+). Fuel cells - H2-O2 fuel cells- Methanol- Oxygen fuel cells. UNIT II - ENERGY SOURCES & ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES Fuels Classification - Analysis of coal - Carbonyzation of metallurgical coke. Liquid fuels Petroleum - Cracking - Synthetic Petrol - Octane number - Knocking Antiknocking - Diesel oil - Cetane number. Gaseous fuels - Natural gas - CNG, LPG, Producer gas, Water gas, Coal gas, Biogas. Nuclear energy Types of nuclear reactions chain reaction Nuclear reactor. Batteries Classification - Laclanches cells - Alkaline batteries. Secondary batteries Ni - Cd battery - Lead acid storage battery - Solid polymer membrane fuel cell - Lithium-Sulphur battery Lithium battery - Solar Energy - Solar cells. (20)

UNIT III - ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

Abrasives Classification Hard Silico - soft and artificial silicon carbide- applications of abrasives. Refractories Classification - Properties of refractories - Refractoriness RUL porosity thermal spalling - thermal conductivity dimensional stability Alloys - Classification of alloys - Ferrous alloys - Micromesh and Stainless alloys- Non-ferrous alloys Copper alloys Heat treatment of alloys. Powder metallurgy Introduction definition applications of powder metallurgy manufacture of metal powders Atomisation reduction of oxides electrolytic deposition powder metallurgy processes secondary operations. Zeolites- Types- structure- properties- utilization of natural zeolites for solar energy storagesapplications. UNIT IV - CORROSION CONTROL AND METALLIC COATINGS (20)

Corrosion Control- Proper designing- using pure metals- using metal alloys- Cathodic Protection- use of Inhibitors- Application of Protective Coatings. Electro deposition - Anodic Coating - Cathodic coating - Methods of applications of Metal coatings - hot dipping - Metal Cladding- Electroplating - Displacement Plating- Metal Spraying Cementation - Electroless Plating - Chemical conversion coatings- Phosphate coating Chromate coating - Chemical Oxide coating -Anodised coating. UNIT V - POLYMERIC AND NANOMATERIALS POLYMERIC MATERIALS: Engineering plastics types thermo and thermo setting plastics bakelite polyamides ABS copolymer Polyesters PVC Teflon Poly carbonates Polyurethane. Speciality Polymers - Electrical properties of polymers - Ionic polymers - Liquid crystal polymers - Polymers in electrical and electronic industries - Polymer blends and alloys- Super conductors - Organic insulators - Conducting Polymers - LED sensors. NANOMATERIALS Properties of CNT Potential applications of SWNT and MWNT - Electrochemical storage of hydrogen (19)

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total

90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Jain & Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai publishing Company(P) Ltd., 2002. Picket, Electrochemical Engineering, Prentice Hall Inc., 1977. J.S.Newman, Electrochemical systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 1973. C. Mantell, Electrochemical Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1972. S.K. Hajra Choudhury, Materials Science and Processes, Indian Book distributing Co., 1983.

REFERENCES 1. XU Ruren etc, Structure and Synthesis of Zeolites Molecular Sieve, Published by Jilin University 1987, 8. 2. WU Xianggan, etc., Rural Energy Source, Published by Agriculture Publishing House 1988, 6. 3. M.Burak(ed.) and U.K. Stevenge, Electrochemical Power Sources Primary and Secondary Batteries.

EXPERIMENTAL WORK OBJECTIVES In Engineering Chemistry laboratory, the experiments are based on new syllabus which includes 1. Application of electrodes and cells in the chemistry. 2. Estimating the metals such as Iron, copper and Nickel present in the sample of material by volumetric and spectrophotometric methods. 3. Hardness giving minerals and dissolved oxygen which are mainly responsible for corrosion of metals are understand by estimation of hardness of water and dissolved oxygen. 4. Properties of polymer such as viscosity can be learn from Ostwalds viscometer. PART A 1. Potentiometric estimation of FAS using standard K2Cr2O7 solution. 2. Conductometric estimation of an Acid (HCl) using standard NaOH solution. 3. Conductometric estimation of mixture of Acids (HCl) using standard NaOH. 4. Determination of strength of HCl and NaOH by pH titration. 5. Determination of molecular weigth of a polymer using Ostwalds viscometer. PART B 1. Determination of Total, temporary and permanent Hardness of a sample of water using disodium salt of EDTA. 2. Estimation of Nickel in steel by EDTA method. 3. Determination of percentage of Copper in brass using standard sodium thiosulphate solution. 4. Determination of Iron in the given sample of solution using potassium dichromate crystals by internal indicator method. 5. Determination of Dissolved Oxygen in the given water sample by Winklers method. 6. Determination of Chloride content of water sample by Mohrs method. 7. Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of the given industrial waste water sample. Note: Minimum of 10 Experiment should be conducted. Reference: 1. Vogels, Text book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, revised by J.Bassett, R.C. Denny, G.H. Jeffery, 4th Ed.

CS 3102

COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (Common for ECE & EEE)

L T 2 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To provide an awareness to Computers and Computing OBJECTIVES 1. To enable the student to learn the major components of a Computer system 2. To learn how arithmetic is handled in computers 3. To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems 4. To learn to use office automation tools 5. To learn to program in C UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (18)

Introduction-Characteristics of Computers- Components of a computer system-Computer Hardware-Software-Classification of computers-Installing and Troubleshooting SoftwareIntroduction to Internet Services -Electronic mail and bulletin boards, and the World Wide Web. Computer Arithmetic- Binary Arithmetic-Basic arithmetic Operations-Basic Computer Organization: Functional Units, basic I/O devices and storage devices; Representation of integers, real (fixed and floating point), characters (ASCII and Unicode); Software development analysis-verification-validation-testing-tools for design.

UNIT II- PROBLEM SOLVING

(14)

Problem solving techniques-Planning the computer program-Purpose-algorithm-Design-flow chart-Program control structures-Types and generation of programming languages-Pseudo codeApplication Software packages Development of algorithms for simple problems-VerificationDebugging and testing-Efficiency of algorithms.

UNIT III- INTRODUCTION TO C

(20)

Overview of C-Constants, variables and data types Operators and Expressions Operator precedence and associativity operators-input and output functions-Simple computational problems-Decision making, branching and looping-problem using control statements. Prototypes and Functions-Declaring, defining and accessing functions-Parameter passing methods-Recursion- Storage classes-auto, extern, static, and register-Library functions-User defined functions-Sample Programs. Arrays-Defining and processing arrays-Passing arrays to functions-Multi-dimensional arraysHandling of character Strings-Enumerated data types-Programs using simple sorting, searching and merging of arrays.

UNIT IV- POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND LINKED LISTS

(20)

Pointers in functions, Arrays and structures-Example programs-Dynamic memory allocationOperations on pointers Structures User defined data types-union-nested structure, passing structures to functions-Self referential structures-File pointer-High level file operations-Creating, processing and updating on files-Singly linked list-Creation, Insertion and deletion of elements-Stack and queue Implementation. UNIT V- PROGRAMMING IN JAVA 18

Introduction- Features of java-Data Types-Variables-Expressions-operators-Classes-MethodsArrays and strings-Inheritance-Exceptions and packages-I/O streams-Threads-Interfaces-AWT. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. E.Balagurusamy,Programming in ANSI C, TMH, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, II edition, TMH publications, 2006. 3. Pradeep K.Sinha and Priti Sinha. Computer Fundamentals: Concepts, Systems and applications, BPB Publications, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Allen B.Tucker et.Al, Fundamentals of Computing I, TMH New delhi1998. 2. W.Savitch, Java and introduction to computer science and programming, Prentice Hall International 3. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, JAVA: How to Program, Pearson Education 4. H. Schildt, Java 2: The Complete Reference Book, Tata McGraw Hill. 5. V.Rajaraman, Fundamentals of Computers, Preintice Hall of India, 2002. 7. Jeri R.Hanly and Elliot B.Kofman, Problem solving and program design in C, 4th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2003. 8. R.G. Dromey, How to solve it by Computer, Prentice Hall of India.

LABORATORY C Programming Arrays 1. To write a program to perform Matrix multiplication 2. To write a program to prepare and print the sales report. String Manipulation 3. To write a program to perform string manipulation function like string concatenations, comparison, find the length and string copy without using library functions. 4. To write a program to arrange names in alphabetical order. Functions 5. To write a C program to calculate the mean, variance and standard deviation using functions. 6. To write a C program to perform sequential and binary search using functions. Recursion 7. To write a program to print the Fibonacci series and to calculate the factorial of the given number using functions. Structures 8. To print the mark sheet of n students using structures. Pointers 9. To write a program using pointers to access the elements of an array and count the number of occurrences of the given number in the array. Dynamic Allocation 10. To write a program for creating and displaying a linked list. Java Programming 1. Simple Java programs. 2. Inheritance and Interfaces. 3. Exceptions Handling. 4. Event handling programs.

ME 3101

COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND DRAFTING (FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION ONLY)

L T P Total 0 0 2 150

AIM To draw and prepare the Engineering Drawings and CAD drawings as per B.I.S standards. OBJECTIVE To develop graphic skills for communicating concepts, ideas and designs of engineering products and to give exposure to national standards relating to technical drawings. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION, PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND SURFACES (25) Construction of curves and special curves, projection of points, straight lines, determination of true length and true inclination projection of surfaces polygon and circular lamina. UNIT II - PROJECTION OF SOLIDS, SECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES. (25) Projection of simple solids prism, pyramid, cylinder and cone drawing views when the axis of the solids is inclined to one reference plane. Sectioning of simple solids, obtaining sectional views and true shape, when the axis of solid is vertical and cutting plane inclined to one reference plane. Development of lateral surfaces of truncated simple solids. UNIT III - PICTORIAL PROJECTION (25)

Isometric projection isometric scale isometric views of simple solids truncated prism, pyramids, cylinders and cones. UNIT IV -COMPUTER AIDED DRAWING (20)

Introduction to Auto-CAD organizing a drawing area editing commands- drawing curves using BSplines and cubic splines. creation of 2 D models of simple geometric models. UNIT V -COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELLING (25)

Creation of 3D models of simple geometric models and obtaining 2 D multi view drawings from 3 D modeling. Computer Aided Drafting and Dimensioning using appropriate software.Drawing of title block with necessary text and projection symbol, dimensioning.Drawing plan of residential building (2bed room, kitchen, hall etc.,)Drawing of simple steel truss.Drawing of sectional views of simple solids. TOTAL 120

TEXT BOOKS 1. Natarajan K.V, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Private Publisher, 17th Edition, 2003 2. Venugopal K., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002 REFERENCES 1. Bertoline and Wiebe, Fundamentals Graphics Communication, Third edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2002 2. Warren J. Luzaddernd Jon. D. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition, 2001 3. Gopalakrishnana K. R.,Engineering Drawing ( Vol I & II), Subhas Publications, 1998 STANDARDS: 1. IS 10711 2001 Technical Product Documentation Sizes of Drawing Sheets 2. IS 9609 1983 Lettering on Technical Drawings 3. IS 10714 1983 General Principles of Presentation of Technical Drawings 4. IS 11669 - 1986 General Principles of Dimensioning of Technical Drawings

ME 3105

ELECTRICAL MECHANICS

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

AIM To understand and analyze the basic mechanics and mechanical systems relevant to electrical engineers. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions. 2. To understand the principle of work and energy. 3. To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium. 4. To understand the laws of motion, the kinetics of motion and the interrelationship. 5. To be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. 6. To analyse the mechanical system relevant to electrical engineers

UNIT I - BASICS, STATICS AND DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES

(10)

Introduction Units and Dimensions Laws of Mechanics Coplanar Forces Resolution and Composition of forces and Equilibrium of a particles Forces in space - Equilibrium of a particle in space Equivalent systems of forces Principle of transmissibility Single equivalent force. UNIT II- EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES (10)

Free body diagram - types of supports and their reactions requirements of stable equilibrium Moments and couples Moment of a force about a point and about an axis Vectorial representation of moments and couples - Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions Equilibrium of rigid bodies in three dimensions. UNIT III- PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS (14)

Determination of Areas and Volumes First moment of area and the centroid of sections rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula second and product moments of plane area rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula - Parallel axis theorems and perpendicular axis theorems Polar moment of inertia Principal moments of inertia of plane areas Principal axes of inertia Mass moment of inertia Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular section, prism, sphere from first principle Relation to area moments of inertia. UNIT IV - DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES (12)

Displacements, Velocity and acceleration their relationship Newtons Law Work Energy Equation of particles Impulse and momentum Impact of elastic bodies.

UNIT V - ANALYSIS OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS

(14)

Basic Principles of Mechanics, mechanical system- friction, frictional force Laws of Coloumb friction Simple Contact friction, belt friction, wheel friction, rolling friction, bearing friction, inertia, stress, strain, deflection- load curve, bending of beams and torsion. Calculation of drive requirements on feed motor shaft, load torque, load inertia, and maximum speed calculation.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

60 30 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Beer F. P. and Johnson Jr. E. R. Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.1 Statics andVol.2 Dynamics, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1997. 2. Meriam, Engineering Mechanics, Vol.1 Statics and Vol.2, Dynamics 2/e, Willey International, 1998. 4. Kumar K. L. Engineering Mechanics III Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., 1998. REFERENCES 1. Rajasekaran, S and Sankara Subramanian,G, Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2000 2. Irrving, H.Shames, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, IV Edition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2003 3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagan, S., Engineering Mechanics Statics & Dynamics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001 4. Ashok Gupta, Interactive Engineering Mechanics Statics A Virtual Tutor (CDROM), Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002

ELECTRICAL MECHANICS LABORATORY AIM To verify the basic principles of mechanics experimentally and be able to conduct experiment to analyse the given mechanics problems.

OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the application of theory in practice, by performing experiments and verifying results. 2. To develop the effective skill to observe experimental data and to analyse the results. 3. To build the confidence in performing the utilization of principle of mechanics in engineering works.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of polygon law & triangular law of forces. 2. Determination of elongation of wire under external load. 3. Determination of reaction at the support of beam & bending moment of a simply supported beam. 4. Study of equilibrium of a particle, under the action of forces in a plane. 5. Determination co-efficient of friction on inclined plane. 6. Determination of youngs modulus of elasticity of wire. 7. To determine the effort required to lift a load, and efficiency of lifting by some simple machines. 8. Determination of moment of inertia of flywheel. 9. To undergo a human experience of the principle of conservation of Angular momentum. 10. To understand the implications of simultaneous conservation momentum and energy in a multiple elastic impacts. 11. To determine the co-efficient of restitution of a given body. 12. To study the principle and action of Gyroscope.

EE 3101 PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM To familiarize the student to the concepts- calculations and pertaining to electrical technology. OBJECTIVES 1. To analyze the principle of operation of linear elements. 2. To evaluate circuit laws. 3. To understand the ac circuits. UNIT I - ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ELEMENTS (18)

Energy- Power- Electric charge- Electric Current- EMF- Voltage- Potential Difference Concepts of Ac/Dc Voltage/current. Resistance- Specific Resistance- Resistance in Series & ParallelOpen Circuit and Short Circuit- Temperature Coefficient of Resistance- Linear & Non-linear Resistance. Capacitor- Capacitance of parallel Plate Capacitor- Energy Stored in CapacitorCapacitors in Series & Parallel- Capacitance of a Multiplate Capacitor- Force of Attraction between plated of Capacitor- Insulation Resistance of Cable.Inductance- Energy Stored in Inductance- Inductance in Terms of Flux Linkage Per Ampere- Inductance in Series & ParallelLinear & Non-linear Inductances. UNIT II - ELECTROMAGNETISM (18)

Magnetic Field- Electromagnetism- Magnetic & Non-Magnetic Materials- Permanent & Temporary magnets- Magnetic flux Density- MMF- Magnetic Field Strength- Force on a Conductor Carrying Current in a Magnetic Field- Biot Savart Law- Amperes law- PermeabilityForce between parallel Conductors- Definition of Ampere- magnetic Shielding- B-H CurveMagnetisation Curve- Hysteresis- Hysteresis Loss- Modern Theory of MagnetismElectromagnetic Induction- Fleming Right Hand Rule- Lenzs law- Dynamically Induced e.m.f.Statically induced e.m.f.- Eddy Currents- Eddy current loss- Self & Mutual InductanceCoefficient of Coupling. UNIT III - D.C.CIRCUITS (18)

Ohms law- Kirchoffs law- Networks simplification by loop current and node voltage methodsstar delta transformations.

UNIT IV - SINGLE PHASE AC CIRCUITS

(18)

Alternating Voltage & Current- Phase Angle- Phase Difference- Average Value of SinusoidRoot mean Square or Effective Value- Representation of Sine Wave by Phasor- Alternating Current and Power in Resistive- Capacitive- Inductive Circuit- Alternating Current & Power in Series RL Circuit- RC -RLC -Apparent- Active & Reactive Power & Power Factor.

UNIT V - THREE PHASE A.C. CIRCUITS

(18)

Star-Delta connections- line and phase voltage/current relations- three phase power and its measurement. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Paranjothi S.R. 'Electric Circuit Analysis'- New Age International Ltd. Delhi- 2nd Edition- 2000. 2. Edminister- J.A. - 'Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits'- Schaum's outline series McGraw Hill Book Company- 2nd Edition- 1983. REFERENCES 1. Hyatt- W.H. Jr. and Kemmerly- J.E. - 'Engineering Circuit Analysis'- McGraw Hill International Editions- 1993. 2. Sudhakar- A. and Shyam Mohan S.P.- 'Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis'Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.- New Delhi- 1994

PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB AIM To understand the basic principles of electrical concepts through the electrical laboratory. 1. 2. 3. 4. Determination of the voltage-current characteristics of linear resistance . Measurement of linear resistance using voltmeter. Measurement of linear resistance using ammeter. Potential divider connection of rheostat and dependence of output voltage upon the value of the load resistance. 5. Single phase power measurement using a wattmeter 6. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by three voltmeter method 7. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit verification using wattmeter. 8. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by three ammeter method. 9. Staircase wiring. 10.Fluorescent wiring.

CS 3305

DATA STRUCTURES (Common for ECE / EEE)

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM 1. To provide an in-depth knowledge in problem solving techniques and data structures. OBJECTIVES To learn the systematic way of solving problems To understand the different methods of organizing large amounts of data To learn to program in C To efficiently implement the different data structures To efficiently implement solutions for specific problems UNIT I - PROBLEM SOLVING (9)

Problem solving Top-down Design Implementation Verification Efficiency Analysis Sample algorithms. UNIT II LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES Abstract Data Type (ADT) The List ADT The Stack ADT The Queue ADT UNIT III -TREES (10) (8)

Preliminaries Binary Trees The Search Tree ADT Binary Search Trees AVL Trees Tree Traversals Hashing General Idea Hash Function Separate Chaining Open Addressing Linear Probing Priority Queues (Heaps) Model Simple implementations Binary Heap UNIT IV -SORTING (9)

Preliminaries Insertion Sort Shellsort Heapsort Mergesort Quicksort External Sorting UNIT V GRAPHS (9)

Definitions Topological Sort Shortest-Path Algorithms Unweighted Shortest Paths Dijkstras Algorithm Minimum Spanning Tree Prims Algorithm Applications of DepthFirst Search Undirected Graphs Biconnectivity Introduction to NP-Completeness THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. R. G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer (Chaps 1-2), Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. 2. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd editon, Pearson Education Asia, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, Pearson Education Asia, 2004 2. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures A Pseudocode Approach with C, Thomson Brooks / COLE, 1998. 3. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson education Asia, 1983.

DATA STRUCTURES LAB AIM To teach the principles of good programming practice and to give a practical training in writing efficient programs in C OBJECTIVES To teach the students to write programs in C To implement the various data structures as Abstract Data Types To write programs to solve problems using the ADTs Implement the following exercises using C: 1. Array implementation of List Abstract Data Type (ADT) 2. Linked list implementation of List ADT 3. Array implementations of Stack ADT 4. Linked list implementations of Stack ADT 5. Array implementation of Queue ADT 6. Linked list implementation of Queue ADT 7. Balanced Paranthesis 8. Evaluating Postfix Expressions 9. Search Tree ADT - Binary Search Tree 10. Heap Sort 11. Quick Sort

MA3302 AIM

APPLICATION OF MATHEMATICS

L T P Totalmarks 3 2 0 150

The course aims to develop the skills of the students in the areas of transformation techniques. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of engineering subjects like communication systems, electro-optics and electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and specialized studies and research. OBJECTIVES 1. Have gained a well found knowledge of Fourier series, their different possible forms and the frequently needed practical harmonic analysis that an engineer may have to make from discrete data. 2. Have grasped the concept of expression of a function, under certain conditions, as a double integral leading to identification of transform pair, and specialization on Fourier transform pair, their properties, the possible special cases with attention to their applications. 3. To have a sound knowledge of Laplace transform and its properties. To solve certain linear differential equations using the Laplace transform technique which have applications in other subjects of the current and higher semesters. 4. Have learnt the basics of Z transform in its applicability to discretely varying functions, gained the skill to formulate certain problems in terms of difference equations and solve them using the Z transform technique bringing out the elegance of the procedure involved. UNIT I - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (9)

Series solution Bessels equation Bessel function Legendres equation Legendre polynomial Rodrigues formula recurrence relation Generating Functions and orthogonal property for Bessel function of the first kind Legendre polynomial. UNIT II - FOURIER SERIES (9)

Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range sine series Half range cosine series Complex form of Fourier Series Parsevals identify Harmonic Analysis. UNIT III - FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Fourier integral theorem (without proof) Fourier transform pair Sine and Cosine transforms Properties Transforms of simple functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.

UNIT IV - LAPLACE TRANSFORM

(9)

Definition - Laplace transformssufficient conditions Basic properties Derivatives and integrals of transforms - Transforms of derivatives and integrals Initial and final value theorems Transforms of unit step function and impulse function - Transforms of periodic fractions - Inverse Laplace transform Convolution theorem Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients and first order simultaneous equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation. UNIT V - Z TRANSFORM (9)

Z-transform - Elementary properties Inverse Z transform Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations Solution of difference equations using Z transform. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi, 2004. 2. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics Volume III, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. REFERENCES 1. Wylie C. Ray and Barrett Louis, C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1995. 2. Narayanan, S., Manicavachagom Pillay, T.K. and Ramaniah, G., Advanced Mathematics for Engineering Students, Volumes II and III, S. Viswanathan (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002. 45 15 TOTAL 60

ME 3306 SOLID MECHANICS AND FLUID MACHINERY

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

AIM To study and understand the mechanics of solids and fluids and its applications in machinery. OBJECTIVE At the end of this course the student is expected to have 1. knowledge of the concepts of forces, equilibrium, stress, strain, shear force, bending moment and torsion and should be able to apply these concepts to simple problems and shafts. 2. He/she is also expected to gain knowledge of the fundamentals of fluid flow and their applications to flow through pipes and hydraulic machines. 3. He/she should be able to solve application problems in these areas.

UNIT I - DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS AND BENDING OF BEAMS

(14)

Concepts of stress and strain- Normal and shear stresses Simple and compound stresses Elasticity and elastic modulli Poisons ratio Concepts of shear force and Bending Moment BMD and SMD for simply supported, cantilever and over hanging beams. UNIT II - SHAFT AND STRINGS (12)

Torsion and shear stress in circular solid and hollow shaft Torque and power helical and leaf spring Load deflection stress and stiffness relationships. UNIT III -FLUID PROPERTY AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS (10)

Surface tension capillary viscosity Newtons law fluid pressure head fluid velocity uniform and steady flow Reynolds number laminar and turbulent flow continuity equation. UNIT IV - FLOW DYNAMICS AND MEASUREMENTS IN PIPES (14)

Eulers and Bernoullis equations, venturi and orifice meters- pressure losses along the flow Minor and major laws flow through circular pipes Darcy and Weisbach equations friction factors pipes in series and parallel- hydraulic gradient. UNIT V - PUMPS AND TURBINES (10)

Pumps classification of pumps characteristics of pumps specific speed - efficiency calculation - uses and applications.Turbines pelton wheel francis turbine - kaplan turbines Turgo turbines characteristics of turbine specific speed governance - efficiency calculation application of turbine power plants. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 60 30 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. R.K Rajput. Strength of materials , S.Chand and Co Ltd., 2003 2. K.L Kumar, Engineering fluid mechanics, S.Chand and Co Ltd., 2002 REFERENCES 1. R.K Bansal A Text book on fluid mechanics and hydraulic machines, M/s Lakshmi publications (P) Ltd .,2004 2. R.K Bansal Strength of materials M/S Lakshmi publications (P) Ltd .,2004

SOLID AND FLUID LAB EXPERIMENTS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Determination of the co efficient of discharge of given orifice meter. Determination of the co efficient of discharge of given venturi meter Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes Calculation of the rate of flow using rota meter. Measurement of velocity of flow using pitot tube Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Centrifugal pump. 7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Reciprocating pump. 8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel turbine. 9. Brinell hardness testing machine. 10. Rockwell hardness testing machine. 11. Torsion testing machine. 12. .Universal testing machine.

EE3308

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To study and analyze characteristics of electric circuits. OBJECTIVE 1. To study the properties of electric circuit elements such as resistors, inductors and capacitors. 2. To study and analysis of sinusoidal signals. 3. To study the network theorem and applications. UNIT I - BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS (9)

Lumped circuits -Kirchoffs Laws -VI relationships of R, L and C -independent sources dependent sources simple resistive circuits -network reduction -voltage division -current division -source transformation. UNIT II - SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE ANALYSIS (9)

Phasor- sinusoidal steady state response -concepts of impedance and admittance -analysis of simple circuits- power and power factor -series resonance and parallel resonance bandwidth and Q factor. Solution of three-phase balanced circuits -power measurements by two-wattmeter methods - solution of three phase unbalanced circuits. UNIT III - MESH-CURRENT AND NODE-VOLTAGE METHODS (9)

Formation of matrix equations and analysis of complex circuits using mesh-current and nodalvoltage methods - mutual inductance- coefficient of coupling -ideal transformer. UNIT IV - NETWORK THEOREMS AND APPLICATIONS (9)

Superposition theorem -reciprocity theorem compensation theorem -substitution theorem maximum power transfer theorem -Thevenin's theorem. -Norton's theorem and Millman's theorem with applications. UNIT V - TRANSIENT ANALYSIS (9)

Forced and source free response of RL, RC and RLC circuits with D.C. and sinusoidal excitations. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Paranjothi S.R., 'Electric Circuit Analysis', New Age International Ltd. , Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2000. 2. Edminister, J.A., 'Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits', Schaum's outline series McGraw Hill Book Company, 2nd Edition, 1983. REFERENCES 1. Hyatt, W.H. Jr. and Kemmerly, J.E., 'Engineering Circuit Analysis', McGraw Hill International Editions, 1993. 2. Sudhakar, A. and Shyam Mohan S.P., 'Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS LABORATORY AIM To study and analyse characteristics of electric circuits. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Verification of Kirchoffs Laws. Verification of Network Theorems (Thevenin, Norton and Superposition Theorems) Introduction to PSPICE analysis of electric circuits. Power Measurement in a three phase circuit by two wattmeter metho Study of active and Passive filters Power measurement by three ammeter and three voltmete Study of resonance and circuit transients by PSPICE Simulation Study of unbalanced circuits using symmetrical components (balanced circuit with unbalanced source only) 9. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence of RC, circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RC and RL circuits. 10. Measurement of real power, reactive power, power factor and impedence RL and RLC circuit using voltmeter and ammeter frequency response of RL circuits.

EC3335

SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation, capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively. OBJECTIVE 1. On completion of this course the student will understand 2. The basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field 3. Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors 4. Diode operation and switching characteristics 5. Operation of BJT, FET, MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices.

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION

( 9)

Band Theory of solids conductors, semiconductor and insulators energy band diagram semiconductor materials and their properties elemental semiconductors the energy band model of semiconductor valence band model of semiconductor equilibrium concentration of electrons and holes fermi level and energy distribution of carriers inside the bands temperature dependence of carrier concentration inside the bands carrier transport in semiconductor drift of carriers in electric fields, carrier flow by diffusion constancy of fermi level across junction, excess carriers in semiconductors injection of excess carriers recombination of excess carriers continuity equation current flow equation. UNIT II -CHARACTERSTICS OF PN JUNCTION ( 9)

PN junction abrupt PN junction energy band diagram - barrier potential, biasing PN junction, excess carrier calculation current components diffusion drift boundary conditions for long and short diodes solution PN junction characteristics calculation of diffusion layer capacitance simple model principle of Zener and avalanche diodes photodiodes LDR tunnel diode and PIN diode varactor diode. UNIT III- BASIC TYPES OF TRANSISTORS AND THEIR CHARACTERSTICS (9) Bipolar junction transistor NPN, PNP types, Basic structure biasing mechanism of carrier flow current components in transistors boundary conditions in active region solution for short base width base width modulation transistor configuration characteristics current amplification factor relations between alpha & beta comparison Ebbers-Moll model field effect transistors JFET basic structure principles of operation characteristics and current equation basic principles of phototransistors UJT characteristics.

UNIT IV- FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS

( 9)

MOSFET semiconductor surfaces C-V characteristics the Si-SiO2 system basic structure and operating principles current equation V-I characteristics simple model CMOS. Compound semi conductor semiconductor heterojunctions V-I characteristics real heterojunctions frequency limitation of transistor transit time effect heterojunction bipolar transistor. UNIT V- DC POWER SUPPLIES ( 9)

DC power supplies power transformers rectification half wave, full wave, bridge expression for ripple factor, efficiency, comparison, diode ratings filters capacitor inductor LC filters use of bleeder resistor voltage multipliers dual power supplies simple voltage regulator. Series regulators IC regulators. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill 1991,(I,II). 2. Schilling and Belove, "Electronic Circuits", TMH, Third Edition, 2002 (Unit - III) 3. Millman J. and Taub H., "Pulse Digital and Switching waveform", McGraw-Hill International (UNIT IV & V) 4. Robert L. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky, 8th edn., PHI, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Sedra / Smith, Micro Electronic Circuits Oxford university Press, 2004. 2. David A. Bell, " Solid State Pulse Circuits ", Prentice Hall of India, 1992. 45 45 90

SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS LABORATORY AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the characteristics of Electronic devices. 1. DC characteristics of diodes. 1. DC characteristics of Common Base transistor configuration 2. DC Characteristics of Common Emitter transistor configuration 3. DC Characteristics of Common Collector transistor configuration 4. Study of Phototransistors. 5. DC characteristics of Common source FET configuration 6. DC Characteristics of Common Gate FET configuration 7. DC Characteristics of Common Drain FET configuration 8. Bias circuits for Bipolar Junction Transistors 9. ( Design of these experiments to be decided by the course instructor) 10. Bias circuits for Field effect transistors. 11. Study of transistor switch. 12. Assembly of transistor circuits using bread board (Study Experiment)

EE3309

ELECTRICAL MACHINES I

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines principle of operation and performance. OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on 1. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of D.C. machines. 2. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of transformers. 3. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of induction motors. 4. Constructional details and principle of operation of alternators and special machines.

UNIT I - DC GENERATORS

(9)

Principle of DC generators, constructional details, field, armature and commutator or magnetic circuits, field flux distribution. Armature windings pole pitch, coil span, winding pitch and commutator pitch. Simplex lap and wave windings, parallel paths, equaliser ring connections, dummy coils methods of setting brushes in d.c machines. Methods of excitation separately excited, shunt, series and compound machines. Induced e.m.f e.m.f. equations. Armature m.m.f. UNIT II -COMMUTATOR (9)

Time of commutation, e.m.f. in the coil undergoing commutation, reactance e.m.f. effect of brush shift, interpoles polarity an d winding connections. Type of d.c. generators characteristics open circuit characteristics, condition for self excitation, criticalresistance, critical speed. Load characteristics, effect of compounding. Parallel operation parallel operation of shunt series and compound generations, equaliser connections. UNIT III- DC MOTORS (9)

Principles of operation, back e.m.f, production of torque, torque equation, developed and shaft torque, performance characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors, applications of various types of DC motors. Starting need of the starter, face plate starters three point and four point starters, calculation of resistance elements for shunt meter starter, Speed control field control, armature control Ward Leonard speed control. Testing of d.c. machines losses and efficiency, separation of losses Swinburnes test, Hopkinsons test, Fields Test, retardation test.

UNIT IV -TRANSFORMERS

(9)

Single phase transformer - constructional details core, winding, insulation and brushing. Principles of operation, turns ratio, emf equation. Operation on load - magnetising and core loss components phasor diagram equivalent circuit. Regulation losses and efficiency. UNIT V-TESTING OF TRANSFORMERS (9)

DC test, SC test, Sumpners back to back test, separation of losses, three phase connections star and delta connections using single phase transformers. Three phase transformers oscillating, neutral, tertiary winding, Scott connection open delta connection six phase connection. Parallel operation, load sharing, distribution transformers all day efficiency. THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Clayton A.E. & Hancock N.N. : Performance and Design of DC machines, ELBS/CBS Publishers,Delhi, 1990 2. Theraja B.L. : A text book of Electrical Technology Vol II, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1992 REFERENCES 1. Bhimbra P.S. : Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,1992 2. M.G. Say : Performance and Design of AC machines, ELBS & Pitman, Third edition,1980

ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY I AIM To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines principle of operation and performance. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open circuit characteristics and load characteristics of d.c. shunt generator Brake test on DC shunt and series motor Study of 3 point and 4 point starters for DC shunt motor Swinburnes test on DC shunt machine Hopkinsons Test on a DC Machines Separation of losses in a d.c. machine by conducting a retardation test Separation of losses in d.c. shunt machine by conducting no load test at different excitations 8. O.C and S.C test on the single phase transformer 9. Separation of losses of single phase transformer into hysteresis and eddy current loss 10. Sumpners test on transformers

EC3436

ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor amplifier circuits and power supplies. OBJECTIVES On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The methods of biasing transistors 2. Design of simple amplifier circuits 3. Mid band analysis of amplifier circuits using small - signal equivalent circuits to determine gain input impedance and output impedance 4. Method of calculating cutoff frequencies and to determine bandwidth 5. Design of power amplifiers and heat sinks 6. Analysis and design of power supplies and power control using SCR.

UNIT I - SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS

(9)

Units of gain, low, frequency equivalent circuits -parameters, h-parameters CE amplifiers Biasing techniques stabilization of operating point methods of coupling DC coupled amplifier CE RC coupled amplifier concept of load lines loading effect at the input and output emitter follower as Buffer stage Boot strapping frequency response of RC coupled amplifier frequency analysis of RC coupled amplifier lower cut-off frequency upper cut-off frequency 3 db bandwidth frequency response of DC coupled amplifier. UNIT II - FET AMPLIFIER (9)

RC coupled common source amplifier expression for gain frequency response comparison with BJT FET as voltage variable resistor- Multistage amplifier, Negative and positive feedback different types of negative feedback amplifier voltage shunt voltage series current shunt current series. UNIT III- POWER AMPLIFIERS (9)

Power amplifier classification class A, class B, class AB, class C transformer coupled class A power amplifier transformer less class AB push-pull power amplifier complementary symmetry power amplifier harmonic distortion in power amplifier transistor rating heat sinks Oscillators principles of sinusoidal oscillators Bark Hausen criteria RC oscillators phase shift Wienbridge LC oscillators Hartley, Colpitts clap oscillators. (Using BJTs and FETs)

Unit IV- PULSE CIRCUITS

(9)

Pulse circuits pulse characteristics pulse shaping using RC circuits Differentiating and integrating circuits clipping and clamping circuits using diodes and transistors Transis tor as a switch sweep circuits Transistor sweep circuits voltage and current sweep Miller sweep circuit Bootstrap sweep circuit UJT relaxation oscillator. Multivibrators using transistors astable monostable and bistable operations. UNIT V- RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS (9)

High frequency amplifier Tuned amplifier coupled circuit, unilateralisation of transistor, Qfactor, single tuned, double tuned and stagger tuned amplifier (analysis not required) Wide band amplifier gain bandwidth trade off. Wide band transistor configuration cascade emitter coupled broad banding-bandwidth trade-off, wide band transistor configuration with negative feed back- frequency compensation low frequency RC compensation- High frequency inductor compensation (analysis not required). THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Jacob,Millman,christos C. Halkias.Electronic Devices &Circuits,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited,New Delhi,2003. 2. David A.Bell ,Electronic Devices and CircuitsPrentice Hall of India Private Limited,New Delhi,2003

REFERENCES 1. Robert. L. Boylestad &Lo Nashlsky,Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory,Eighth Edition ,Pearson Education ,Third Indian Reprint,2002 2. Donald L Schilling and Charles Belove,Elecronic Circuits, third Edition ,Tata Mc Graw Hill,2003

ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB AIM The aim of this course is to the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor Amplifier circuits and power supplies. 1. Bias circuits for Bipolar Junction Transistor Amplifier. 2. Bias Circuits for Field effect transistors. 3. Common base transistor amplifier. 4. Common emitter transistor amplifier. 5. Common collector transistor amplifier. 6. Field Effect Transistor Amplifiers 7. Diode Bridge rectifier 8. Differential amplifier using BJT 9. Study of transistor pairs. 10. Class B power amplifier

EE3410 AIM

ELECTRICAL MACHINES II

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines, principle of operation and performances. OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on 1. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of alternators. 2. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of cylindrical rotation motor. 3. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of synchronous motors UNIT I - ALTERNATORS (9)

Constructional features of high speed cylindrical rotor and low speed salient pole machines, synchronous speed AC windings- emf equation- distribution factor- coil span factor- field mmf and gap flux density distribution harmonics in induced emf - mmf of AC windings- space harmonics- revolving magnetic field. Theory of cylindrical rotor machines- armature reactionsynchronous impedance- voltage regulation determination of regulation by mmf, emf and Potier methods - determination of Xd, Xq by slip test. Parallel operation of alternators - synchronising power effect of speed regulation on load sharing - methods of synchronizing- synchroscopeprinciple of automatic synchronizing. UNIT II- SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR (9)

Torque and power relationship - phasor diagram- starting of synchronous motors - losses and efficiency calculations. Synchronous machines on infinite bus bars - power angle diagrams - V curves- synchronous condenser -load angle-power flow equation for cylindrical and salient pole machines-reluctance power maximum power transfer-stability limit-control of active and reactive power in synchronous machines on infinite bus bars. Symmetrical short circuits (only qualitative analysis) - steady state, transient and subtransient reactance - time constants. Hunting in synchronous machines. UNIT III- THREE PHASE AND SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR (9)

Three phase induction motor - constructional details - slip ring and squirrel cage types- slip phasor diagram - mechanical power and developed torque - Torque slip curves - pull out torque losses and efficiency - approximate and exact equivalent circuits - circle diagram - No load and blocked rotor tests - performance calculations from the equivalent circuit. starting of slip ring motors - Effects of harmonics - Harmonic induction and harmonic synchronous torques cogging, crawling and noise production - methods of elimination Single phase induction motor revolving field theory equivalent circuit - torque slip curve . Single phase induction motor revolving field theory equivalent circuit - torque slip curve

UNIT IV- STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR

(9)

Methods of speed control - pole cha nging methods - rotor rheostatic control - change of supply frequency - use of SCR for speed control - principle of speed regulation and improvement of power factor by rotor injected emf. Starting methods - split phase, capacitor start, capacitor run motors shaded pole motor - repulsion start andrepulsion induction motor. UNIT V- COMMUTATOR MOTORS (9)

General, principles and theory - commutator as a frequency converter emf induced in a commutator winding - single phase series motor - theory - phasor and circle diagram compensating and interpole windings - universal motor - principle of repulsion motor torque production - phasor diagram - compensated type of motors repulsion start induction motor applications. Poly phase commutator motors - Three phase series and shunt type - schrage motor - characteristics and applications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P. Theory of AC machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,2002. 2. Bimbra P.S. Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers,2003 REFERENCES 1. A.E.Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley,Stephen D.Umans, Electric Machinery,Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing company Ltd.,2003. 2. J.B. Gupta, Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines,S.K.Kataria &Sons,2002. 45 45 90

ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY II AIM To familiarize the students to various electrical machines through the given experiments. 1. Slip test and regulation of salient pole alternator 2. Variation of starting torque with rotor resistance in slip ring induction motor. 3. Direct load test on induction motor. 4. Pre determination of Characteristic and equivalent circuit of induction motor from no load and blocked rotor test. 5. V/f control of induction motor. 6. Characteristic of single phase induction motor. 7. Complete torque slip characteristic of induction motor. 8. Characteristic of double cage induction motor. 9. Slip power recovery schemes: 10. Cascade operation of induction motor. 11. Determination of slip and load shared by each motor and overall efficiency of the test.

MA3406 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL METHODS AIM

L T P Total 320 150

With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop efficient algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This course gives a complete procedure for solving different kinds of problems occur in numerical engineering. OBJECTIVES 1. The roots of nonlinear (algebraic or transcendental) equations, solutions of large system of linear equations and eigenvalue problem of a matrix can be obtained numerically where analytical methods fail to give solution.

2. When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values. 3. The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as series of measurements, observations or some other empirical information. 4. Since many physical laws are couched in terms of rate of change of one/two or more independent variables, most of the engineering problems are characterized in the form of either nonlinear ordinary differential equations or partial differential equations. The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem. UNIT I - SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS (9)

Linear interpolation methods (method of false position) Newtons method Statement of Fixed Point Theorem Fixed point iteration x = g (x) method Solution of linear system by Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon methods- Iterative methods: Gauss Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel methods- Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordon method Eigenvalue of a matrix by power method. UNIT II - INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION (9)

Lagrangian Polynomials Divided differences Interpolating with a cubic spline Newtons forward and backward difference formulas. UNIT III - NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION (9)

Derivatives from difference tables Divided differences and finite differences Numerical integration by trapezoidal and Simpsons 1/3 and 3/8 rules Rombergs method Two and Three point Gaussian quadrature formulas Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpsons rules.

UNIT IV - INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

(9)

Single step methods: Taylor series method Euler and modified Euler methods Fourth order RungeKutta method for solving first and second order equations Multistep methods: Milnes and Adams predictor and corrector methods. UNIT V - BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

(9)

Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation Finite difference solution of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods One dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Gerald, C.F, and Wheatley, P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Balagurusamy, E., Numerical Methods, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd., New Delhi, 1999. REFERENCES 1. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K. and Gunavathy, K., Numerical Methods, S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. 2. Burden, R.L and Faires, T.D., Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2002.

EE3411 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS L T P Total 3 0 2 200 AIM To introduce the concept of measurement and the related instrumentation requirement as a vital ingredient of electronics and electrical engineering. OBJECTIVES To learn 1. Basic measurement 2. Concepts of electronic measurements 3. Importance of signal generators and signal analysers in measurements 4. Relevance of digital instruments in measurement 5. The need for data acquisition systems 6. Measurement techniques in optical domains. UNIT I- GENERAL (9)

S.I. Units Measurement system performance, Calibration, Static characteristics errors in measurements true value static error static correction scale range and scale span (fiducial value) error calibration curve reproducibility and drift, repeatability, noise accuracy, accuracy class and precision indication of precision significant figures static sensitivity instrument efficiency linearity hysteresis threshold -dead time dead zone resolution and discrimination loading effect dynamic response measurement lag. UNIT II -MEASURING INSTRUMENTS (9)

Measurement of resistance Wheatstone bridge Kelvin double bridge Carey Foster slide wire bridge sensitivity of d.c. bridges interchange of battery and galvanometer bridge current limitations Ohmmeter Megger measurement of insulation resistance by deflection method localization of cable fault by Murray and Varley looptests earth megger. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell and Anderson bridges Measurement of capacitance using Schering Bridge. UNIT III- POTENTIOMETERS AND INDICATING INSTRUMENTS (9)

general principle of potentiometers modern form of d.c. potentiometers vernier dial principle standardization use for measurement of voltage, current, resistance and power a.c. potentiometers co-ordinate and polar types application of a.c. potentiometers. Principle of indicating instruments: Different types of control and damping arrangements in indicating instruments Permanent magnet moving coil, moving iron, hotwire, electrostatic and dynamometer type meters ammeters and voltmeters. Extension of instrument range: Shunts for ammeters voltmeter multipliers instrument transformers current transformers.

UNIT IV- ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS INSTRUMENT

(9)

Dynamometer type Wattmeter errors and compensation Correction flux meter Methods of correction Induction type Wattmeter principle of working of ampere hour meter single and three phase energy meters errors and compensation calibration using wattmeter and rotating substandard. Frequency meters power factor meters oscillographs Duddel and cathode ray types multimeter stroboscope. UNIT V- MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS AND ILLUMINATION (9)

Classification of magnetic measurements measurement of flux and permeability Hibberts magnetic standard flux meter Hall effect gauss meter ballistic galvanometer methods of calibrating ballistic galvanometer Vibration galvanometer B-H curve and permeability measurement on bar and ring specimens hysteresis measurement Core loss measurement with Lloyd Fisher square. Illumination: Definitions and units laws of illumination Lummer Brodhum and Flicker photometers. THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOK 1. A. K. Sawhney : A course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation Dhanpat Rai and Co,2004. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. W. Golding , Electrical Measure ment and Measuring Instruments, ELBS . Issac F. Kinnard Applied Electrical Measurement John Wiley Sons. Forest K. Harris Electrical Measurements wiley Eastern (P) Ltd. C. T. Baldwin Fundamentals of Electrical Measurement Lyall Book Depot Bhopal. Errest Frank ,Electrical Measurement Analysis McGraw Hill. Melnille B. Stout , Basic Electrical Measurement Prentice Hall of India (P)Ltd.

ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS LABORATORY AIM The aim of this laboratory is to provide the students an adequate work experience in the measurement of different quantities. 1. .Measurement of resistance using Wheatstons bridge 2. Measurement of resistance using Kelvins double bridge 3. Measurement of self and mutual inductance of coupled coils 4. Measurement of KVAR in 3-phase circuits by single and two wattmeter method. 5. Calibration of ammeter using slide wire potentiometer 6. Calibration of Voltmeter using slide wire potentiometer 7. Measurement of internal resistance of battery using vernier potentiometer. 8. Calibration of wattmeter using vernier potentiometer 9. Calibration of single phase energy meter by direct and phantom loading 10. Calibration of 3-phase energy meter.

ME 3407

MODERN THERMODYNAMICS

LT P 3 0 2

Total 200

AIM To expose the fundamentals of modern thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accounting for the bulk behavior of the sample physical systems. OBJECTIVE 1. To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines, Gas turbines, Steam boilers, Steam turbine, Compressor, Refrigeration and Air conditioning. 2. To enlighten the various modes of heat transfer and their engineering applications. UNIT I SYSTEM AND LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS (08)

Closed and open system equilibrium first law second law reversibility entropy processes heat and work transfers entropy change Carnot cycle UNIT II POWER CYCLES AND INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES (10)

Carnot Cycle Otto cycle diesel cycle dual cycle Brayton cycle air standard efficiency two stroke and four stroke engines SI and CI engines gas turbine operation UNIT III - STEAM BOILERS AND TURBINES (09)

Steam properties use of steam tables and charts steam power cycle boilers and accessories boiler testing layout of thermal power station steam turbines impulse and reaction turbines compounding of turbines simple velocity diagrams UNIT IV - AIR COMPRESSORS, REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING (08) Reciprocating and rotary compressors staging compressor work vapour compression refrigeration cycle applications air conditioning system layout selection UNITV - HEAT TRANSFER (10)

Conduction plane wall, cylinder, sphere, composite walls critical insulation thickness simple fins convection free convection and forced convection flow over flat plates and flow through pipes empirical relations radiation black body, grey body radiation exchanges cooling of machines THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. Nag P. K. Engineering Thermodynamics , Tata McGraw Hill, 1995 Sachedeva, R. C. Heat Transfer , Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1992

REFERENCES 1. T. Roy Choudhury, Basic Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd. 1997. 2. Kothandaraman and Domkundwar, Applied Thermodynamics,Dhanpat Rai Publishers. 3. Ballany, P. L. Applied Thermodynamics, Khanna Publishers 4. Rai and Sorao, Applied Thermodynamics, Satya Prakasm 1985

MODERN THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY AIM To verify the fundamentals of modern thermodynamics experimentally and be able to conduct experiments to analyse the given thermodynamics system. OBJECTIVE 1. To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines, Compressor, Refrigeration and Air conditioning. 2. To enlighten the various modes of heat transfer and their engineering applications. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Valve timing diagram for a four stroke cycle diesel engine. 2. Port timing diagram for a two stroke cycle petrol engine. 3. Performance test on four stroke diesel engine. 4. Performance test on two stroke petrol engine. 5. Heat transfer from pin- fin (natural and forced convections modes). 6. Determination of Stefan Boltz mann constant. 7. Determination of emissivity of grey surface. 8. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system. 9. Determination of COP of an Air-conditioning system. 10. Performance test on single/ two stage reciprocating air compressor.

EC3437

ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

AIM To familiarize the student to the concepts, calculations and pertaining to electric, magnetic and electromagnetic fields so that an in depth understanding ofantennas, electronic devices, Waveguides is possible. OBJECTIVES 1. To analyze fields a potentials due to static charges 2. To evaluate static magnetic fields 3. To understand how materials affect electric and magnetic fields 4. To understand the relation between the fields under time varying situations 5. To understand principles of propagation of uniform plane waves. UNIT I - STATIC ELECTRIC FIELDS INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction: Overview of vector analysis: Orthogonal co-ordinate systems rectangular, cylindrical, spherical transformations, Flux, circulation open and closed surface Divergence, gradient, curl, stokes theorem Static Electric field: Coulombs law, superposition, scalar potential, moment method, gradient, electric field, electric flux, Gausss law for electric flux, capacitance of sphere, concentric sphere, coaxial cable and two wire transmission line. Energy stored in a charged capacitor. UNIT II -STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS (9)

Static Electric Field Dielectric homogeneity, linearity, isotropy, permittivity, electric dipole, polarization, boundary relations, divergence of the flux density, Laplacian Field Mapping Laplace equation, uniqueness theorem, Poissons equation. Static Magnetic Field Ferromagnetic Materials, magnetic dipole, permeability, hysteresis, The Static Magnetic Field of Steady Electric Currents, magnetic flux, Biot-Savart law, Amperes law, Gausss law for magnetic flux, boundary conditions, inductance of a coaxial cable, two wire transmission line, energy stored in a magnetic field Magnetic vector potential. UNIT III -TIME VARYING ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS (9)

Time varying Electric and Magnetic Fields Faradays law, Stokes theorem, self and mutual inductance, eddy current, displacement current. Maxwells Equations integral & differential form General solution of wave equation in free space uniform plane waves TEM waves relation between electric and magnetic fields, phase velocity and group velocity Plane waves in a lossy medium. Skin depth.

UNIT IV -ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS IN MATERIALS

(9)

Poynting theorem real and complex Poynting vector interpretation application of Poynting theorem power flow in transmission lines, uniform plane waves. Wave polarization, Reflection of plane wavesat plane boundaries normal and oblique incidence refraction transmission Snells law critical angle Brewster angle total internal reflection evanescent wave concept. Guided waves TE, TM, TEM waves, Velocity of propagation, attenuation wave impedance. UNIT V- TRANSMISSION LINES (9)

Analogy between circuit theory and EM theory, uniform transmission line V I solution characteristic impedance. Terminated uniform transmission line VSWR impedance matching quarter wave and half wavelength transformer, stub matching single stub matching, double stub matching and tuning pulses on a transmission line Smith chart impedance matching using Smith Chart. Transmission line transformers. Wave guides: rectangular wave guide,modes of wave propagation. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. John.D. Kraus, Electro Magnetics, McGraw Hill Book Co.,New York,Fourth Edition,1991. 2. Wiiliam. H. Hayt,Jr., Engineering Electromagnetic,Tata McGraw HillEdition,2001 REFERENCE
1.Joseph.A. Edminister,Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics,Second edition,

Schuam Series,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1993

EE3512

CONTROL SYSTEMS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the open loop and closed loop (feedback ) systems 2. To understand time domain and frequency domain analysis of control systems required for stability analysis. 3. To understand the compensation technique that can be used to stabilize control systems

UNIT I- SYSTEMS & THEIR REPRESENTATION

(9)

Open loop and closed loop control systems : Transfer function- poles and zeros block diagram representation block diagram reduction signal flow graph Masons gain formulacharacteristics equations concept of stability stability of feed back systems Rouths stability criterion. UNIT II- TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9)

Time domain analysis of control systems Transient and steady state response Time domain test signals Time domain specifications second order systems impulse and step responses. steady state error analysis static error coefficient of type 0, 1 ,2, systems Generalized error series. UNIT III- STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM (9)

PID controllers Trade off between steady state and transient behaviour. Root locus diagram. General rules for constructing Root loci root locus analysis of control system effect of addition of poles and zeros. UNIT IV- FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9)

Frequency domain analysis: Introduction Bode plot polar plot Log magnitude Vs Phase plot closed loop frequency response Frequency domain specifications gain margin phase margin Nyquist stability criterion stability analysis from bode plot. UNIT V- CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (9)

Control system components: Electrical systems DC motor DC servomotor AC servo motor synchro magnetic amplifier series and parallel connections. Basic principle of operation and transfer function of gyroscope stepper motor Tacho meters. Simulation of time domain solution of control systems by using Analog computer fundamentals of time and amplitude scaling - simulation of transfer function using Analog Computer.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Kastuhiko Ogata, Modern control engineering, second edition Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1991. 2. Nagarath I.J and Gopal M, Control System, Engineering, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi, 1992. REFERENCE 1. Kuo B.C.: Automatic control systems, Prentice Hall of Delhi Sixth edition, 1991.

CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB AIM To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems 1. Determination of step response for first order system with unity 2. feedback on CRO & calculations of control system specifications like time constant , %peak overshoot, settling time etc., from the response. 3. Determination of step response for second order system with unity 4. feedback on CRO & calculations of control system specifications like time constant , %peak overshoot, settling time etc., from the response. 5. Simulation of step response & impulse response for type-0 , type-1 & type 2 system with unity feedback using matlab & pspice. 6. Determination of root locus, bode- plot, Nyquist plot using matlab- control system toolbox for 2nd order system & determination of differerent control systemspecifications from the plot. 7. Determination of PI controller action of first order simulated process. 8. Determination of PD controller action of first order simulated process. 9. Determination of PID controller action of first order simulated process. 10. Determination of approximate transfer function experimentally from bode plot. 11. Evaluation of steady state error, setting time, percentage peak overshoot, gain margin, phase margin with addition of lead compensator & by compensator using PSPICE . 12. Study of a practical position control system & determination of control system specifications for variation of system parameters.

EE3513

INDUSTRIAL & POWER ELECTRONICS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To familate the students the concepts of the power electronics and there industrial applications OBJECTIVE To impart knowledge on 1. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, of power semiconductors 2. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of converters and inverters 3. Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of rectifiers. and there applications

UNIT I- POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

(9)

Power transistors- Design of high power amplifier- Transistor as a switch- Parallel operation of transistor- power MOSFET- Operating Principles- Structure and Characteristics. Thyristors Classification and Constructional details . SCR - working principle - turn on, turn off and VI characteristics- gate characteristics, and rating: Series and parallel operation of SCR-TRIAC characteristics, modes of operation, Trigger circuits-magnetic & solid state, half wave and full wave operation. UNIT II - CONTROL RECTIFIERS (9)

Single phase controlled rectifiers- half wave, full wave, half controlled and fully controlledtypical waveforms with R, RL, RL with diode and RL with voltage source-voltage and current equation for half wave controlled rectifier. Three phase half wave and full wave control rectifier with R load, waveforms.DC motor speed control- various schemes- multiquadrant operationsimple circuits for speed control of series, PM and separately excited motors. UNIT III - CONVERTERS AND INVERTERS (9)

Commutation schemes-(different classes) waveforms-single phase inverters-series, parallel and bridge- PWM inverter- square wave and sine wave output. Chopper circuits using SCR transistor (detailed analysis not required)-Jones Chopper. AC Motor speed control- various schemeselectronic control of speed of induction motors and synchronous motors.switching regulatorsBasic concepts and analysis and design of Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and de rived converters. UNIT IV - GATING AND PROTECTION CIRCUITS (9)

Static switches - Timer circuits- Flasher circuits UPS - Characteristics configuration application- battery selection, charging circuits. Thyristor protection- over current, over voltage, di/dt, dv/dt, gate protection, RFI minimization, Thyristor mounting and heat transfer.

UNIT V- APPLICATIONS

(9)

Principle, characteristics and application of induction heating and dielectric heating- Ultrasonic characteristics-application in non-destructive testing - application of power electronics in welding. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK 45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Muhammed H. Rashid, Power Electronics;Circuits,devices and Applications, Pearson Education,Third Edition,2004/PHI 2. Ned Mohan ,Tore M.Undeland,William P.Robbins, Power Electronics:Converters,Applications and Design, John Wiley and Sons,Third Edition,2003 REFERENCES 1. Cyril W.Lander,Power Electrnics,Mcgraw Hill International,Third Edition,1993

INDUSTRIAL & POWER ELECTRONICS LAB

AIM To familate the students the concepts of the power electronics and there industrial applications 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Study of V-I characteristics of an SCR. Study of V-I characteristics of a TRIAC. Study of different trigerring circuits for thyristor. Study of Uni- junction transistor (UJT) trigerring circuit. Study of a firing circuit suitable for single phase half controlled converter. Simulation on the single phase ac-dc uncontrolled converter with & without the source inductance. 7. Simulation of a single phase ac to controlled dc converter with & without the source inductance. 8. Single phase half controlled bridge converter with two thyristors & two diodes. 9. Single phase fully controlled bridge converter using four thyristors. 10. PSPICE simulation of dc to dc step down chopper.

EE3514

POWER SYSTEM I

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To study some fundamental concepts in power system. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand fundamentals of power system. 2. To learn planning and operation of network modelling. 3. To study various short circuit analysis concepts. 4. To understand the power flow analysis and stability analysis. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Need for system analysis in planning and operation of power system -distinction between steady state and transient state -per phase analysis of symmetrical three-phase system. General aspects relating to power flow, short circuit and stability analysis -per unit representation. UNIT II - NETWORK MODELLING (9)

Primitive network and its matrices - bus impedence matrix - bus admittance and bus impedance matrix formation - equivalent circuit of transformer with off-nominal-tap ratio. Modeling of generator, load, shunt capacitor, transmission line, shunt reactor for short circuit, power flow and stability studies. UNIT III - SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (9)

Need for short circuit study. Approximations in modeling - calculation for radial networks. Symmetrical short circuit analysis -symmetrical component transformation -sequence impedances -Z-bus in phase frame and in sequence frame fault matrices -unsymmetrical fault analysis. UNIT IV - POWER FLOW ANALYSIS (9) Problem definition -bus classification -derivation of power flow equation -solution by GaussSeidel and Newton - Raphson methods- P-V bus adjustments for both methods -computation of slack bus power, transmission loss and line flow. UNIT V - STABILITY ANALYSIS (9) Swing equation in state space form -equal area criterion - stability analysis of single machine connected to infinite bus by modified Euler's method using classical machine model -critical clearing angle and time. Multi-machine stability analysis using classical machines model and constant admittance load representation using Runge-Kutta method. Causes of voltage instability -voltage stability proximity indices for two-bus system. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. John J. Grainger and Stevenson Jr. W.D., 'Power System Analysis', McGraw Hill International Edition, 1994. REFERENCES 1. Stagg, G. W. and EI-Abaid, A. H. 'Computer Methods in Power System Analysis', McGraw-Hill International Book Company, 1980. 2. Nagarath, I.J., and Kothari, D.P., 'Modern Power System Analysis', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 1990.

POWER SYSTEM I LAB AIM To study some fundamental concepts in power system. 1. Study on (i) on load Time Delay Relay (ii) off load Time Delay Relay 2. Polarity, Ratio and Magnatisation Characteristics Test of CT & PT 3. Testing on (i) Under Voltage Relay and (ii) Earth Fault Relay 4. Study on D C Load Flow 5. Study of A C Load Flow Using Gauss Seidel Method 6. Study of A C Load Flow Using Newton Raphson Method 7. Study on Economic Load Dispatch 8. Study of Transformer Protection by Simulation 9. Study of Generator Protection by Simulation 10. Study of Motor Protection by Micon Relay 11. Study of Different Characteristics of Over Current Relay

EC 3538

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of digital systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce number systems and codes 2. To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions 3. To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions UNIT I- NUMBER SYSTEM AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA (9)

Number System and binary codes: Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems binary arithmetic,binary codes, excess-3 code, Gray code error detection and correction Boolean algebra minimization of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map and Quine-Mclusky methods formation of switching functions from word statements, realisation using NAND, NOR & XOR gates combinational circuits multiplexer demultiplexer, decoder, encoder. UNIT II - SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (9)

Sequential circuits: flip-flops RS, JK, T & D flip- flops, shift registers counters asynchronous and synchronous counters, up -down counters, Modulo counter, ring counter, Johnson counter sequence generators analysis of sequential circuits state table and diagrams. UNIT III - COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (9)

Arithmetic circuits: Half adder, full adder, subtractor, serial and parallel addition carry look ahead adder binary multiplication and division multivibrators monostable and astable multivibrators using discrete gates. UNIT IV - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES AND MEMORY FAMILIES (9) Memories ROM , RAM, EPROM, Programmable logic array, devices basic ideas PLD architecture PAL and PLA programmable examples with software tools study of PAL 22v10. UNIT V- LOGIC FAMILIES (9)

DCTL, RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL, and CMOS tristate logic specification and transfer characteristics of basic TTL interfaces, - standard logic levels current and voltage parameters fan in and fan out propagation delay, integrated circuits modules, noise consideration interfacing of CMOS to TTL and interfacing of TTL to CMOS.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK

45 45 TOTAL 90

TEXT BOOK 1.M. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Prentice-Hall of India, Private Limited, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Switching and finite automate theory by Zvi Kohavi- Tata McGraw Hill- 2nd editionSwitching and logic design CVS Rao- Pearson- 2005. Switching Theory and Logic Design R.P. Jain- TMH Edition- 2003. An Engineering Approach to Digital Design Fletcher- PHI.

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY AIM To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of digital systems 1. Transfer characteristics and specifications of TTL and MOS gate 2. Design of half adder and full adder using NAND gates 3. Set up R-S & JK flip- flops using NAND gates 4. Code converter Binary to Gray and gray to Binary using mode control 5. Asynchronous UP/DOWN counter using JK Flip-Flops 6. Design and realisation of sequence generators. 7. Study of shift registers and design of Jo hnson and Ring counter using it 8. Binary addition and subtraction (a) 1s complement (b) 2s complement 9. Study of IC counters 7490, 7493 and 74192. 10. Astable and monostable multi-vibrators using gates IC version Timing circuit using 555 11. ADC using dual slope method. 12. Study of MUX & Demux

CS 3512 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANISATION L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150 AIM To discuss the basic structure of a digital computer and to study in detail the organization of the Control unit, the Arithmetic and Logical unit, the Memory unit and the I/O unit. OBJECTIVES 1. To have a thorough understanding of the basic structure and operation of a digital computer. 2. To discuss in detail the operation of the arithmetic unit including the algorithms & implementation of fixed-point and floating-point addition, subtraction, multiplication & division. 3. To study in detail the different types of control and the concept of pipelining. 4. To study the hierarchical memory system including cache memories and virtual memory. 5. To study the different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O interfaces. UNIT I -FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN (12)

Functional units - Basic operational concepts - Bus structures - Software performance Memory locations and addresses Memory operations Measuring and Reporting Performance Quantitative Principles of Computer Design Classifying Instruction set Architecture Instruction and instruction sequencing Addressing modes Type and Size of Operands Operations in the Instruction Set Operands and Operations for Media and Signal Processing Instructions for Control Flow Encoding an Instruction Set Assembly language Basic I/O operations Stacks and queues. Addition and subtraction of signed numbers Design of fast adders Multiplication of positive numbers - Signed operand multiplication and fast multiplication Integer division Floating point numbers and operations. UNIT II - BASIC PROCESSING UNIT (9) Fundamental concepts Execution of a complete instruction Multiple bus organization Hardwired control Microprogrammed control - Pipelining Basic concepts Data hazards Instruction hazards Influence on Instruction sets Multiple Issues Hardware based Speculation Limitations of ILP Case Studies lP6 Micro Architecture- Data path and control consideration Superscalar operation. UNIT III -INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACH (6) Compiler Techniques for Exposing ILP Static Branch Prediction Static Multiple Issue. VLIW Advanced Compiler Support Hardware Support for Exposing Parallelism Hardware Vs Software Speculation. Mechanism IA 64 and Itanium Processor. UNIT IV- MEMORY AND I/O (9)

Basic concepts Semiconductor RAMs - ROMs Speed - size and cost Cache memories Performance consideration Virtual memory- Memory Management requirements Secondary storage Cache Performance Reducing Cache Miss Penalty and Miss Rate Reducing Hit Time Main Memory and Performance Memory Technology Types of Storage Devices Buses

RAID Reliability Availability and Dependability I/O Performance Measures Designing I/O System. UNIT V- MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM (9)

Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures Performance Issues Synchronization Models of Memory Consistency Multithreading. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003. REFERENCES 1. D. Sima- T. Fountain and P. Kacsuk, Advanced Computer Architectures A Design Space Approach, Addison Wesley, 2000. 2. Kai Hwang, Advanced Computer Architecture Parallelism Scalability Programmability,Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2001. 3. Vincent P. Heuring, Harry F. Jordan, Computer System Design and Architecture, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004.

EE3515

SWITCH GEAR AND PROTECTION

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

AIM To study some fundamental concepts in switch gear and its protection. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand physical as circuit breakers and isolators. 2. To learn planning and operation of relays and apparatus protection. 3. To study various heating and welding concepts. 4. To understand illumination systems.

UNIT I- CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND ISOLATORS

(9)

Types of circuit breakers basic principles of operation arc extinction arc voltage and current wave form in AC circuit breaking restriking and recovery voltage DC breakers rupturing capacity making capacity Oil circuit breakers MOCB, ABCB SF6 circuit breakers. UNIT II- RELAYS (9)

Classification of relays induction types inverse time characteristics directional over current and power relays earth fault protection distance relay distance earth fault protection.Basic static relay block schematic auxiliary voltage supply voltage stabilization by Zener diode time delay circuit block diagram of over current and directional relay. UNIT III- APPARATUS PROTECTION (9)

Generator protection over current external and internal faults earth fault protection self balanced system protection against failure of excitation. Transformer protection differential protection self balanced system Bucholz relay Feeder protection protection of ring mains differential pilot wire protection Merzprice voltage balanced system. UNIT IV- HEATING AND WELDING (9)

Electric heating resistance types design of heating element induction heating types high frequency heating Dielectric heating direct and indirect arc furnaces welding resistance welding arc welding electric welding control. UNIT V - ILLUMINATION (9)

Lighting calculation design of interior and exterior lighting systems factory lighting flood lighting street lighting arc lamps. Industrial drives electric drives advantages factors affecting choice of motor mechanical characteristics of DC and AC motors motors for

particular application textile mill steel mill paper mill mine hoist crane motor selection for intermittent loads. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60 TEXT BOOKS 1. Sunil S. Rao : Switch Gear Protection and Power Systems (Khanna Publication) 2. S.L. Uppal : Electrical Power (Khanna Publication) REFERENCES 1. B. Ravindranath & M. Chander : Power System Protection and Switch Gear (New Age International) 2. E. Openshaw Taylor : Utilisation of Electrical Energy (Orient Longman)Warrington A.C : Power system protection I, II

EC 3639 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the architecture programming and interfacing of microprocessors and microcontrollers. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8085 microprocessor. 2. To introduce the interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor. 3. To introduce the architecture and programming of 8086 microprocessor. 4. To introduce the architecture, programming and interfacing of 8051

UNIT I-INTRODUCTION TO 8085 CPU

(9)

Organization of 8085 microprocessor-Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assemblylanguage programming-machine cycles-Read,Write-Interrupt acknowledge-Buscycles-states-Wait stateHALT and HOLD state-State transition sequence of 8085.Organisation of 8086 microprocessormemory segmentation-Addressing bytes and words-Address formation-Addressing modes in 8086-Assembly language programming-minimum mode and maximum mode-Bus arbitration in minimum mode and maximum mode -multiprocessing. UNIT II - PERIPHERALS INTERFACING (9)

Input/Output Interface - Printer interface using 8259 - CRT interface - Keyboard/Display interfacing - A/D and D/A interface - Data acquisition systems - Interfacing high power devices Methods ofparallel data transfer - Programmable parallel ports - 8255 PPI - Serial Communication - Asynchronous - Synchronous - 8251A Programmable communication interface - DMA - 8237 - Programmable DMA Controller UNIT III - 8051 PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS (9)

Organisation of 8051 microcontroller-I/O ports-External memory-Counter and Timers-Serial data input and output-Interrupts Instruction set-Addressing modes-Assembly language programming.

UNIT IV-MICROPROCESSOR DEVELOPMENT SYSTEMS

(9)

Microprocessor development system- applications - Temperature controller - Stepper motor controller. Data transfer schemes-Programmed data transfer-Synchronous transferAsynchronous transfer-Interrupt driven I/O-types of interrupts:8085 and 8086-direct memory access data transfer-DMA transfer in a 8085 based system- DMA protocols in 8086 in minimum and maximum mode-types of DMA.

UNIT V- APPLICATIONS OF 8085 AND 8086

(9)

Microprocessor development system- applications - Temperature controller - Stepper motor controller. Data transfer schemes-Programmed data transfer-Synchronous transferAsynchronous transfer-Interrupt driven I/O-types of interrupts-8085 and 8086-direct memory access data transfer-DMA transfer in a 8085 based system- DMA protocols in 8086 in minimum and maximum mode-types of DMA. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORKS TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ramesh.S.Gaonkar "Microprocessor architecture,programming & applications with 8085/8080A" -Penram International - 1997. 2. Yu.Cheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson, "Microcomputer system, 8086/8088 family"-2nd Edition - PHI-1986. 3. .Kenneth J.Ayala "The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming.

MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER LAB AIM To learn the architecture programming and interfacing of microprocessors and microcontrollers. (Write programs using assemblers for 8085, 8086 and 8051) 1. 8085 Assembly Language program 2. Multibyte Addition and Subtraction Multibyte decimal addition and subtraction. 3. Multiplication and division - repetitive addition and use of a register shifting operation Signed and unsigned numbers. 4. Searching, Sorting and data transfer. 5. 8086 Assembly Language Program: 6. Search and Sort, Programs involving string instructions. 7. Simple program using 8051 Assembly Language. 8. Study of programmable I/O ports of 8051 microcontroller. 9. Study of interrupt structure of 8085, 8086 and 8051. 10. D/A converter and waveform generation. 11. Stepper motor controller interface. 12. DC motor speed controller interface.

EE3616 AIM

POWER SYSTEM II

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

To study and make the students familiar concepts in power system. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand fundamentals of real power and frequency control 2. To learn planning of reactive power 3. To study various computer control of power system concepts. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9 )

Need for voltage and frequency regulation in power system - system load characteristics - basic P-f and Q-v control loops - cross coupling between control loops - plant level and system level controls - recent trends of real-time control of power systems. UNIT II- REAL POWER AND FREQUENCY CONTROL (9 )

Fundamentals of speed governing mechanisms and modeling speed load characteristics regulation of two synchronous machines in parallel control areas LFC control of a single area static and dynamic analysis of uncontrolled and controlled cases - multi-area systems two area system modeling - static analysis -uncontrolled case - tie line with frequency bias control of two-area and multi-area system steady state instabilities. UNIT III - REACTIVE POWER VOLTAGE CONTROL (9 )

Typical excitation system modeling static and dynamic analysis stability compensation effect of generator loading - static shunt capacitor/reactor VAR compensator, synchronous condenser, tap-changing transformer - static VAR system - modeling system level voltage control UNIT IV - COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEM (9 )

Energy control center functions system hardware configuration SCADA system functional aspects security monitoring and control system states and their transition - various controls for secure operation. UNIT V - ECONOMIC DISPATCH CONTROL (9 )

Incremental cost curve co-ordination equations with loss and without losses, solution by iteration method. (No derivation of loss coefficients). Base point and participation factors. Economic controller added to LFC control.

THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS

45 15 TOTAL 60

1. Olle I.Elgerd, Electric Energy and System Theory An Introduction, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1983. 2. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 1994 REFERENCES 1. Kirchmayer .L.K. Economic operation of power system, John wiley & Sons, 1953 2. Allen J.Wood, Bruce F.Woolenbarg, Power Generation Operation and Control, John Wiley and Sons, 1984. 3. Mahalanbis, A.K., Kothari, D.P and Ahson, S.I., Computer Aided Power System Analysis and Control, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.

EC3640 AIM

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION

L T P Total 3 0 2 200

To study some fundamental concepts in electronic instrumentation. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand fundamentals of.operational amplifier 2. To learn planning and operation of digital instruments. 3. To study about tranducers. 4. To understand the science of instruments.

UNIT I- OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER

(9)

characteristics of ideal op-amps internal circuit block diagram linear circuits using op-amps DC & AC analysis inverting amplifiers non- inverting amplifiers voltage follower differential amplifier adder subtractor instrumentation amplifier, precision rectifiers, half wave and full wave - log and antilog amplifier differentiator integrator non-ideal characteristics of op-amps bias current offset voltage drift offset compensation frequency response frequency compensation slew rate. UNIT II -APPLICTIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (9)

Non-linear circuits using op-amps comparators, multivibrators, Schmitt triggers, triangular wave generators, phase shift and Wein bridge oscillators introduction to different types of ADCs and DACs (brief idea only) PLL: block diagram, basic principles. Applications timer IC 555: functional diagram, applications 723 general purpose regulators: functional diagram, current limit and fold back protection. UNIT III- SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENTS (9)

Methods of measurement functional block of a measurement system input output configuration of measuring instruments and instrument systems. Methods of correction for interfering and modifying inputs. Definition of transducers classification based on physical effect employed classification based on quantity converted classification based on source of energy for the output. Resistance transducers strain gauge types construction temperature effect on strain gauge strain gauge circuitry. Semiconductor strain gauge - load cell. Resistance thermometer types- circuits errors thermistor advantage of thermistor. UNIT IV -TRANSDUCERS (9)

Inductive transducers LVDT principle of operation applications LVDT load cell LVDT pressure transducer resolver capacitive transducer principle of operation applications capacitor microphone.Piezoelectric transducer materials of piezoelectric transducers equivalent circuit d,g,h, coefficients thermocouple princip le applications

magnetostrictive transducers magnetostrictive materials application Hall effect transducer application elastic transducers (brief study) Bourdon tubes diaphragms Bellows Fibre Optics transducers digital transducers shaft encoder. UNIT V-DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS (9)

Operating principles of DVM using successive approximation V/F conversion and integrating principles counter digital method for frequency, phase, time and period measurements digital RLC meters Q-meter vector impedance meter electronic multimeter. CRO- block diagram cathode ray tube vertical deflection system horizontal deflection system oscilloscope probes time base applications voltage, frequency and phase angle measurements. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORKS TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. W. Golding : Electrical Measure ment and Measuring Instruments, ELBS . Issac F. Kinnard : Applied Electrical Measurement John Wiley Sons. Forest K. Harris : Electrical Measurements wiley Eastern (P) Ltd. C. T. Baldwin : Fundamentals of Electrical Measurement Lyall Book Depot Bhopal. Errest Frank : Electrical Measurement Analysis McGraw Hill. Melnille B. Stout : Basic Electrical Measurement Prentice Hall of India (P)Ltd 45 45 90

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION LAB AIM To study some fundamental concepts in electronic instrumentation. Design and testing of: 1. Inverting, Non inverting and Differential amplifiers. 2. Integrator and Differentiator. 3. Instrumentation amplifier. 4. Active lowpass and bandpass filter. 5. Astable, Monostable multivibrators and Schmitt Trigger using op-amp. 6. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillator using op-amp. 7. Astable and monostable using NE555 Timer. 8. PLL characteristics and Frequency Multiplier using PLL. 9. DC power supply using LM317 and LM723. 10. Study of SMPS control IC SG3524 / SG3525.

AEE3617

COMPREHENSION IN ELECTRICAL AND CAREER SKILLS L T P TOTAL 0 0 4 150

AIM To improve the communication skills of learners and to become successful in their career. To face the challenges in the existing global scenario which is highly competitive. To enhance their leadership quality. OBJECTIVE 1. To encourage learners to look at the functional usage of the language. 2. To enforce the most important skills that is required to be used while attending interviews and taking part in GDs. 3. To enrich ones vocabulary in the language for better communication. UNIT I ELECTRICAL MECHINES (14)

Electrical Mechanics-I - Electrical Mechanics-II - Electric Circuit Analysis - Control Systems - Electromagnetic Theory - Measurement and Instrumentation - Power System Analysis - Electrical Machine Design. UNIT II ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS (12)

Electron Devices - Electronic Circuits - Digital Electronics - Micro Processor and Micro Controller - Data Structures - C - C++ - Computer Architecture. UNIT III APTITUDE (12)

Verbal Aptitude - Synonyms - Antonyms - Analogy - Substitution - Sentence Completion Odd word out - Reading Comprehension - Error Correction - Preposition - Articles - Tenses Concord - Idiom and phrases - Statement and Conclusion - Alphabetical Series. Arithmetic Ability - Numbers - Average - Percentage - Ratio and Proportion - Time and Work -Time and Distance - Problems on Trains - Permutations and CombinationsProbability. UNIT IV - INTERVIEW SKILLS (12)

Introduction to Group Discussion - Structure and types of GD - Led and other GDs Strategies of GD - Moderators - Team Work - Body Language - Mock Interviews Conversational Etiquette - Common Errors in Spoken Language - Telephonic Conversation Oral Practice related to Professional Skills - Role Play Activities - Speech On Common Topics - Kinds of Interviews - Required Key Skills - Corporate Culture - Resume Preparation - Video Samples.

UNIT V - ORAL PRESENTATION SKILLS

(10)

Elements of effective presentations - Structure and tools of Presentation - Voice Modulation Body Language - Audience analysis - Psychometrics - Stress Management Poise Assertiveness -Innovation and Creativeness-Video Samples

REFERENCES 1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma, Technical communication- Principles and Practice, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2004) 2. Barker .A, Improve Your communication skills, Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2006) 3. Adrian Doff and Christopher Jones, Language in Use (Upper-Intermediate), Cambridge University Press, First South Asian Ed. (2004) 4. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to writing and speaking, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2004) 5. Barrons GRE, Latest Edition. 6. R.S.Agarwals, Verbal Nonverbal Reasoning, Latest Edition.

EC3641 AIM

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P Total 3 2 2 200

To study the signal processing methods and processors. OBJECTIVES 1. To study DFT and its computation 2. To study the design techniques for digital filters 3. To study the finite word length effects in signal processing 4. To study the non-parametric methods of power spectrum estimations 5. To study the fundamentals of digital signal processors.

UNIT I-DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM

(9)

Introduction to discrete time signals & system-Discrete time signals and systems-Properties of discrete systems-linearity-time invariance-causality-stability-convolution-difference equation representation of discrete systems -The z transform-properties of z transform- the inverse z transform-system function. UNIT II- FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Discrete Fourier Transform & Fast Fourier Transform. Discrete Fourier series-properties-discrete Fourier transform properties-block convolution-decimation in-time FFT algorithms-decimation infrequency FFT algorithms-FFT algorithms for N, a composite number. UNIT III-DESIGN OF FIR DIGITAL FILTERS (9)

FIR digital Filters Realizations-direct-cascade- lattice forms-hardware implementation-FIR filter design using Fourier series- use of window functions - frequency sampling design. UNIT IV- DESIGN OF IIR DIGITAL FILTERS (9)

IIR Digital Filters Realizations-Direct-Cascade-Parallel forms -hardware implementationAnalog filter approximations - Butterworth and Chebycheve approximations - The method of mapping of differentials- impulse invariant transformation- Bilinear transformation- Matched z transform technique. UNIT V-FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS (9)

Finite word length effects in digital filters- fixed point arithmetic -Floating point arithmeticBlock floating point arithmetic - Truncation-Rounding - Quantization error in analog to digital conversion finite register length effects in IIR & FIR filters Limit cycles. Digital signal

processing application (only brief description required) Software implementation of digital filters- Architecture of typical DSP processor. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

1. 2.

TEXTBOOKS John G.Proakis, Dimitris G.Manobakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and Applications, Third edition, (2000) PHI. Monson H.Hayes Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, Wiley, 2002. REFERENCES L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schaber, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Pearson Education (1979). Roberto Crist, Modern Digital Signal Processing, Thomson Brooks/Cole (2004) Raghuveer. M. Rao, Ajit S.Bopardikar, Wavelet Transforms, Introduction to Theory and applications, Pearson Education, Asia, 2000.

1. 2. 3.

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY AIM To introduce the student to various digital Signal Processing techniques using TMS 320c5x family processors and MATLAB. USING TMS320C5X 1. Study of various addressing modes of DSP using simple programming examples 2. Sampling of input signal and display 3. Implementation of FIR filter 4. Calculation of FFT USING MATLAB 1. Generation of Signals 2. Linear and circular convolution of two sequences 3. Sampling and effect of aliasing 4. Design of FIR filters 5. Design of IIR filters 6. Calculation of FFT of a signal

EE3719

HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

AIM To expose the students to various types of over voltage transients in power system and its effect on power system. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the various types of over voltages in power system and protection methods. 2. Generation of over voltages in laboratories. 3. Measurement of over voltages. 4. Nature of Breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics discussion on commercial insulants. 5. Testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination

UNIT I- GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES

(9)

Generation of High DC. voltages Half Wave and full wave circuits Ripple voltages in HW and FW rectifiers. Voltage doubler circuits Simple voltage doubler and cascade voltage doubler. Voltage multiplier circuits Crockroft Walton voltage multiplier circuits. Ripple and regulation. Electrostatic machines principles Van de Graff generator. Generation of high AC voltages: Cascade transformers, resonant transformers parallel and series resonant test systems. Generation of high frequency high voltages Tesla coil.

UNIT II -GENERATION OF IMPULSE VOLTAGES AND CURRENT

(9)

Generation of impulse voltages Standard impulse wave shape Basic circuits for producing impulse waves Analysis of commercial impulse generator circuits Wave shape control, multistage impulse generators Marx circuit modified Marx impulse generator circuit Components of multi stage impulse generator. Generation of Switching surges. Generation of impulse current. Definition of impulse current waveform Circuit for prod using impulse current waves. UNIT III- PRINCIPLES OF INSULATION CO ORDINATION (9)

Principles of insulation co ordination on HV and EHV power systems: Over voltage and their significance insulation level of an equipment. Insulation co-ordination of a substation. Insulation coordination of EHV systems Terms and definitions- Normal system voltage, highest system voltage, over voltage.

UNIT IV- OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS

(9)

Protective devices against lightning over voltages rod rod gaps, overhead ground wires voltage current characteristic of surge arrestors, Thyrite & ZnO arresters. Switching over voltages origin and characteristics switching over voltage in EHV and UHV systems. Switching over-voltages in EHV substation (400 K V AC, 765 K V AC) Control of over voltages due to switching Method for reducing switching over voltage. Connections and rated voltages of surge arresters. UNIT V -HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING (9)

Non- destructiv e testing of dielectric materials measurement dielectric constant and loss factor. Partial discharge phenomena discharge detection using straight detectors. HV testing of electrical apparatus Definitions Terms and conditions. Test on insulators, bushings, cables, transformer surge arrester, High current impulse test on surge arresters HV and EHV bushing design, selection, quality control, maintenance and diagnostic testing. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. M S Naidu & V Kamaraju High Voltage Engineering Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1997 REFERENCES 1. Kuffel Ea and Zaengai W High Voltage Engineering Pergam Press, Oxford 2. Dieter Kind An Introduction to High Voltage Experimental Techniques Wiley Eastern

EE3720

ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

AIM To expose the students to the concept of design of various types of electrical machines. OBJECTIVES 1. To provide sound knowledge about constructional details and design of various electrical machines. 2. To study mmf calculation and thermal rating of various types of electrical machines. 3. To design armature and field systems for D.C. machines. 4. To design core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers. 5. To design stator and rotor of induction machines. 6. To design stator and rotor of synchronous machines and study their thermal behaviour.

UNIT I- PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN AND COOLING METHODS (9) Principles of electrical machine design - general design considerations - specifications of machines - types of enclosures - types of ventilations - hydrogen cooling - heating - short - time rating overload capacity - temperature rise time curve - hotspot rating. Review of properties of materials used in electrical machines. UNIT II -TRANSFORMERS (9)

Design of power transformers - single phase and three phase transformers - distribution and power transformers - output equation - specific magnetic loading - core design - window area, window space factor - overall dimensions of core. Windings number of turns - current density conductor section - types of coils - insulation electric stress. Cooling of transformers - design of cooling tank and tubes. UNIT III- MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND D.C. MACHINES (9)

Field flux distribution curve - field form factor - magnetic leakage co-efficient calculation of field ampere turns - air gap mmf- effect of slot and ventilating duct - active iron length - mmf for teeth real and apparent flux densities - mmf per pole - design electromagnet. Design of dc machines output equations - specific loading - choice of speed and number of poles calculation of main dimensions - choice of type of winding - number of slots - number of conductors per slot - current density conductor section - slot insulation - length of air gap. UNIT IV- SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES (9)

Design of field winding - excitation voltage - conductor cross-section -height of pole - design of interpole - flux density under interpole - calculation of interpole winding. Design of synchronous machines - specific loading - output equation - main dimensions - types of winding - number of

turns - number of slots and slot design - field design for waterwheel and turbo alternators cooling of alternators. UNIT V- THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS (9)

Design of three phase induction motors - main dimensions - stator design - squirrel cage and slip ring type - number of stator and rotor slots - rotor bar current - design of rotor bar - end ring current design of end ring - design of slip ring rotor winding. Introduction to computer aided design. Analysis and synthesis methods - hybrid techniques - optimization - electrical machine design - general procedure - simple programs. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60 TEXT BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K. Course in electrical machine design;Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi,1984 REFERENCE 1. M.G. Deshpandae : Design and testing of electrical machines, Wheeler publishing. 2. R.K. Agarwal : Principles of electrical machine design, Esskay Publications. 3. Ramamurthy. M. : Computer aided design of electrical equipment, East West Press.

CS 3728

ADVANCED NETWORKING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To introduce the concepts, terminologies and technologies used in modern days data communication and computer networking. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data communications. 2. To study the functions of different layers. 3. To introduce IEEE standards employed in computer networking. 4. To make the students to get familiarized with different protocols and network components. UNIT I - DATA COMMUNICATIONS (8) Introduction to Networks and Communication Media: Uses- Network Hardware- Network Software- Components and Categories types of Connections Topologies Protocols and Standards ISO / OSI mode - Reference Models. Basis for data communication- Transmission Media- Wireless Transmission- Telephone Systems- Satellite Communication RS232 Interfacing sequences UNIT II - DATA LINK LAYER (10) Error detection and correction Parity LRC CRC Hamming code low Control and Error control - stop and wait go back-N ARQ selective repeat ARQ- sliding window HDLC. - LAN - Reliable Transmission Token Rings Wireless Network Adapters Ethernet IEEE 802.3 - IEEE 802.4 - IEEE 802.5 - IEEE 802.11 FDDI - SONET Bridges.. UNIT III - NETWORK LAYER (10) Internetworks Packet Switching and Datagram approach IP addressing methods Subnetting Routing Distance Vector Routing Link State Routing Routers. UNIT IV - TRANSPORT LAYER (9) Duties of transport layer Multiplexing Demultiplexing Sockets User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion Control Quality of services (QOS) Integrated Services. UNIT V - APPLICATION LAYER (8)

Domain Name Space (DNS) SMTP FTP HTTP - Electronic Mail - WWW Network Security Cryptography. The Application layer: Application layer design issues - MultimediaOther applications- - DES- RSA.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communication and Networking, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. REFERENCES 1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Larry L.Peterson and Peter S. Davie, Computer Networks, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition. 3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2003. 4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.

EE3721

SOLID STATE DRIVES

L T P Total 3 2 2 200

AIM To study and understand the operation of electric drives controlled from a power electronic converter and to introduce the design concepts of controllers. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the stable steady-state operation and transient dynamics of a motor-load system. 2. To study and analyze the operation of the converter / chopper fed dc drive and to solve simple problems. 3. To study and understand the operation of both classical and modern induction motor drives. 4. To understand the differences between synchronous motor drive and induction motor drive and to learn the basics of permanent magnet synchronous motor drives. 5. To analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid-state d.c motor drive.

UNIT I - CHARACTERISTICS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES

(9)

Speed -torque characteristics of various types of loads and drive motors -Joint speed-torque characteristics - selection of power rating for drive motors with regard to thermal overloading and load variation factors - load equalization - starting, braking and reversing operations. UNIT II - DC DRIVES (9)

Speed control of dc motors - Ward- Leonard scheme - drawbacks - thyristor converter fed dc drives: single, two and four quadrant operations SRM drive Micromotor drive. chopper fed dc drives: Time ratio control and current limit control - single, two and four quadrant operations - effect of ripples on the dc motor performance UNIT III - THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES (9)

Speed control of three phase induction motors - stator control - stator voltage and frequency control - Ac chopper, inverter and Cycloconverter fed induction motor drives, rotor control rotor resistance control and slip power recovery schemes - static control of rotor resistance using dc chopper - static Kramer and Scherbius drives. UNIT IV - THREE PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES (9)

Speed control of three phase synchronous motors - voltage source and current source inverter fed synchronous motors - commutatorless dc motors - Cycloconverter fed synchronous motors - effects of harmonics on the performance of ac motors - closed loop control of drive motors.

UNIT V - DIGITAL CONTROL AND DRIVE APPLICATIONS

(9)

Digital techniques in speed control - advantages and limitations - microprocessor based control of drives - selection of drives and control schemes for steel rolling mills, paper mills, lifts and cranes. THEORY EXPERIMENTALWORKS TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. Pillai, S.K., A First Course on Electrical Drives, New Age International Publishers, 2nd Edition, 1994. Vedam Subrahmanyam, Thyristor Control of Electric Drives, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd., New Delhi, 1994. 45 45 90

REFERENCE 1. 2. 3. Sen, P.C, Thyristor, DC Drives, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1981. Bose, B.K, Power Electronics and AC Drives, Prentice Hall, Englewood cliffs, New Jersey, 1986 Ramamoorthy M., An Introduction to Thyristor and their Application, Affiliated East West Press (P) Ltd, 2nd Edition , 1991.

SOLID STATE DRIVES LAB AIM To understand the operation of electric drives controlled from a power electronic converter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Performance of Chopper fed D.C. Drive. Operation of a four quadrant Chopper on D.C. Drive Operation of a 1-phase A.C. Voltage controller on motor load. Operation of a 3-phase A.C Voltage controller on a 3- phase Squirrel Cage Induction Motor. 5. Performance & speed control of S.C. Induction motor by Static Rotor Resistance Controller. 6. Performance & speed control of D.C motor by single phase Semi-converter. 7. 2-Quadrant operation of a 1-phase Full Converter using D.C. drive. 8. Performance & speed control of D.C. drive using 3-phase Semi-Converter. 9. Performance & speed control of 3-phase Induction motor using 3-phase PWM Inverter. 10. Performance & speed control of S.C. Induction motor using cyclo-converter

EE3822

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To familiarize the students with the Qualities and principles of management. OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools available to achieve Total Quality Management. 2. To understand the statistical approach for quality control. 3. To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries. UNIT I- QUALITY AND TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (9)

Excellence in manufacturing/service- factors of excellence- relevance of TQM. Concept and definition of quality; total quality control (TQC) and Total Quality Management (TQM)- salient features of TQC and TQM. Total Quality Management Models- benefits of TQM. UNIT II -JUST-IN-TIME (JIT) (9)

Definition: Elements- benefits- equipment layout for JIT system- Kanban system MRP (Material Requirement planning) vs JIT system- Waste elimination- workers involvement through JIT: JIT cause and effect chain JITimplementation.Customer: Satisfaction- data collection and complaintredressal mechanism. UNIT III -PLANNING PROCESS (9)

Policy development and implementation; plan formulation and implementation. Process Management: Factors affecting process management- Quality function development (QFD)- and quality assurance system. UNIT IV- TOTAL EMPLOYEES INVOLVEMENT (TEI) (9)

Empowering employees- team building; quality circles; reward and Recognition; education and training- Suggestion schemes. Problems solving Defining problem; Problem identification and solving process;QC tools Benchmarking definition- concept- process and types of benchmarking.

UNIT V -QUALITY SYSTEMS

(9)

Concept of quality system standards: relevance and origin of ISO 9000; Benefits; Elements of ISO 9001- ISO 9002- ISO 9003. Advanced techniques of TQM: Design of experiments: failure mode effect analysis:Taguchi methods.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled- et al.- Total Quality Management- Pearson Education- Inc. 2003. (Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6.

REFERENCES 1. James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay- The Management and Control of Quality- (5th Edition)- South-Western (Thomson Learning)- 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5). 2. Feigenbaum.A.V. Total Quality Management- McGraw-Hill- 1991.

ELECTIVE-I (VI SEMESTER) EEE 3624 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to advanced digital system design. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the parametric methods for power spectrum estimation. 2. To study adaptive filtering techniques using LMS algorithm and to study the applications of adaptive filtering. 3. To study multirate signal processing fundamentals. 4. To study the analysis of speech signals. 5. To introduce the student to wavelet transforms. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction to combinational modules and modular network. Standard combinational modules design of arithmetic modules. Implementation of combinational systems with ROMs and PLAs. Comparison with other approaches. Implementation of multi- module combinational systems decoder networks, Mux trees, demux network, encoder network, shifter network and barrel shifters. UNIT II - DIGITAL SYSTEMS (9)

Introduction to digital systems-Synchronous and asynchronous state diagram, state names, mili and moor machines binary description- Time behavior of synchronous Sequential systemsMinimization of no. of states -Specification of various types of sequential system. UNIT III - INTRODUCTION TO CANONCAL METHODS (9)

Canonical implementation analysis and synthesis of networks in the canonical implementation.-Flip Flop modules and networks- Modular sequential networks. UNIT IV - SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT (9)

Standard sequential modules registers- shift register counters RAM- Content addressable memories and programmable sequential arrays (PSA) design of sequential systems with small number of standard modules state register and combinational networks use of ROMs in sequential networks counter and combinational networks RAM and combinational networks SR and combinational networks.

UNIT V- HARDWARE/FIRMWARE ALGORITHMS

(9)

Multimodule implementation of sequential systems multimodule registers shift registers and RAMs multimodule counters sequential arrays introduction to hardware/firmware algorithms. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Milos D Ercegovac, Tomas Lang, Digital systems and hardware/firmware algorithms, John Wiley. 2. William I Flethcher, An engineering approach to digital design, Prentice Hall REFERENCES 1. Hayes, Digital System design and Microprocessors, McGraw Hill. 2. John B Peatman, Digital Hardware design, McGraw Hill.

EEE 3625

NEW RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY

L T P TOTAL 3 10 150

AIM To introduce the student to renewable energy sources. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the Renewable and non-renewable sources of energy 2. To study the solar cell material and prospects 3. To study Wind energy and wind turbines 4. To study the Ocean thermal energy conversion. 5. To introduce the student to bio energy. UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9)

Renewable and non-renewable sources of energy brief review of conventional sources of energy energy production and world energy consumption green house effect and global warming. Solar energy option. Thermal conversion design fabrication and performance of flat plate collectors description of solar thermal devices (stills water heater, furnaces cookers and refrigerators) Solar thermal power generation systems thermal storage. UNIT II -SOLAR ENERGY (9)

Photo voltaic conversion conceptual description of photo voltaic effect electrical characteristic of silicon PV cells and modules solar cell material and prospects Instruments for measurement of solar radiation Empirical equations for predicting availability of solar radiation. UNIT III -WIND ENERGY (9)

Wind energy wind turbines Horizontal axis and vertical axis with turbines Power and energy from wind turbines wind characteristics. Energy from oceans : wave energy Physical principles wave characteristics and wave power wave energy technology. fixed devices floating devices UNIT IV -THERMAL AND TIDAL ENERGY (9)

Ocean thermal energy conversion. (OTEC) principles Methods of power generation Heat exchangers Basic ideas about other practical considerations. Tidal power Basic principles power generation limitations of tidal generator.

UNIT V -BIO ENERGY

(9)

Bio mass extracting energy from bio fuels. Direct combustion gasification, pyrolisis anaerobic digestion, fermentation energy from refuse refuse derived fuel (RDF) Energy farming, small hydro power: classification as micro, mini and small hydro projects. Basic concepts and types of turbines design and selection consideration. Recent trends (only brief treatment expected) Fuel cells, hydrogen energy, alcohol energy, cold fusion energy, power from satellite stations. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. John W, Twidell & Antony D. Wier, Renewable energy sources, ELBS Publication 2. Godfrey Boyle , Renewable Energy: Power for sustainable Future, Oxford University Press in association with the open university, 1996. REFERENCES 1. Applied solar Energy- Meinel A B and Meinel MP, Addison Wesley Publications. 2. Renewable and Novel energy sources SL Sah, MI Publications, New Delhi, 1995. 3. Direct Energy Conversion George Sutton McGraw hill Publications.

EEE 3626 AIM

ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONICS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To introduce the student to advanced power electronics. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the three phase converter. 2. To study the firing circuits and converters 3. To study Forced commutated inverters 4. To study the D.C. motor speed control. 5. To study the A.C. Motor control UNIT I -THREE PHASE CONVERTER (9)

Thyristor Converter 3-phase fully controlled bridge principles of working continuous and discontinuous working-Average DC output voltage- effect of source inductance. Voltage lost due to source inductance- wave forms of output voltage output current- analysis by Fourier seriesvoltage across any device with and without overlap Twelve pulse converter-use of inter phase transformer. UNIT II -FIRING CIRCUITS AND CONVERTERS (9)

Firing circuits for six pulse converter- linear comparison and cosine comparison technique. Dual converter-principle of working circulating current and circulating current free modes of operation. Necessary wave forms of using half bridge converters. UNIT III -COMMUTATION CIRCUITS (9)

Forced commutated inverters-Forced commutation circuits-basic parallel inverter-modified parallel inverter-power circuit of half bridge and full bridge 3-phase inverter-Harmonic analysis by Fourier series Inverter voltage control- pulse width modulation-single pulse-multiple pulse and sinusoidal pulse. UNIT IV -SPEED CONTROL (9)

D.C. motor speed control speed control at constant power and constant torque Two and four quadrant operation closed loop control. Dynamics of D.C. motor speed control controllerdifferent types-optimization control-magnitude optimization - 4 quadrant operation-closed loop control (Block schematic). UNIT V -AC MOTOR AND CHOPPERS (9)

A.C. Motor control stator voltage control Rotor resistance on - off-control slip power recovery scheme closed loop control.Chopper circuits Types of chopper circuits analysis of Type A and B choppers D.C. motor control using chopper.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Muhammad H.Rashid- power Electronics Circuits- Devices and Applications- Prentice Hall of India- 2004. REFERENCES 1. Narin G. Hingorani, "High Power Electronics and Flexible AC Transmission Systems", IEEE Power Engineering Review, 1998. 2. Narin G.Hingorani, "Power Electronics in Electric Utilities: Role of Power Electronics in future power systems", Proc. of IEEE, Vol.76, no.4, April 1988.

ELECTIVE-II (VII SEMESTER) EEE 3727 HVDC TRANSMISSION L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to hvdc transmission OBJECTIVES 1. To study the Historical development of HVAC and DC links. 2. To study the thyristor converters 3. To study about the converter control. 4. To study the Basics of protection of HVDC systems. 5. To study the harmonics, filters and ground return. UNIT I - GENERAL ASPECTS (9)

Historical development HVAC and DC links kinds of DC links-HVDC projects in India and abroad advantages and disadvantages of HVDC transmission principal applications of DC transmission economic factors development of power devices for HVDC transmission thyristors light activated thyristors MOS controlled thyristors (MCTs) Switching and steady state characteristics. UNIT II-THYRISTOR CONVERTERS (9)

Three phase fully controlled thyristor bridge converters operation as rectifiers and line commutated inverters converter equivalent circuits parameters and characteristics of rectifiers and inverters series and parallel arrangement of thyristors multibridge converters. UNIT III- CONTROL OF CONVERTERS (9)

Gate control basic means of control power reversal desired features of control control characteristics constant current control constant extinction angle control stability of control tap changer control power control and current limits. UNIT IV-PROTECTION (9)

Basics of protection of HVDC systems DC reactors voltage and current oscillations DC line oscillations clearing line faults and re-energizing the line circuit breakers over voltage protections. UNIT V- HARMONICS, FILTERS AND GROUND RETURN (9)

Characteristics and uncharacteristic harmonics troubles caused by harmonics means of reducing harmonics telephone interference harmonic filters ground return current fields compatibility with other services electrodes.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Kimbark E.X., Direct Current Transmission, Vol. I, Wiley Interscience, Newyork 1971. REFERENCES 1. Hcolin Adamson and Hingorani N.G., High Voltage Direct Current Power Transmission, Garraway ltd., England, 1960. 2. Kory(ed) B. J., High Voltage Direct Current Converters and Systems. Macdonald & Co, London 1995. 3. Weedy B.M., Electric Power Systems, John Wiley & Sons, London,1979. 4. Padiyar K.R., HVDC Power Transmission System Technology and System Interactions, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1991.

EEE 3728

SPECIAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to special machines and controllers OBJECTIVES 1. To study the stepping motors. 2. To study the switched reluctance motors. 3. To study about the Commutation in DC motors. 4. To study the permanent magnet synchronous motors. UNIT I- SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS (9) Constructional features-Types-Axial and radial air gap motors-operating principle-ReluctancePhasor diagram-Characteristics-Vernier motor. UNIT II - STEPPING MOTORS (9)

Constructional features, principle of operation, modes of excitation torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepping motor, Dynamic characteristics, Drive systems and circuit for open loop control, Closed loop control of stepping motor. UNIT III - SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS (9)

Constructional features, principle of operation. Torque equation, Power controllers, Characteristics and control Microprocessors based controller. UNIT IV - PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS (9)

Commutation in DC motors, Difference between mechanical and electronic commutators, Hall sensors, Optical sensors, Multiphase Brush less motor, Square wave permanent magnet brushless motor drives, Torque and emf equation, Torque-speed characteristics, ControllersMicroprocessors based controller. UNIT V -PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (9)

Principle of operation, EMF, power input and torque expressions, Phasor diagram, Power controllers, Torque speed characteristics, Self control, Vector control, Current control schemes.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Miller, T.J.E. Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Kenjo, T and Naganori, S Permanent Magnet and brushless DC motors, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 2. Kenjo, T, Stepping motors and their microprocessor control, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

EEE 3729

FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM To introduce the student to flexible ac transmission systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the Phase angle regulator and other controllers. 2. To study the series compensation schemes. 3. To study the Implementation of unified power flow controller. 4. To study the design of facts controllers. 5. To study the static var compensation.

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION

(9)

FACTS-a toolkit, Basic concepts of Static VAR compensator, Resonance damper, Thyristor controlled series capacitor, Static condenser, Phase angle regulator, and other controllers. UNIT II - SERIES COMPENSATION SCHEMES (9)

Sub-Synchronous resonance, Torsional interaction, torsional torque, Compensation of conventional ASC, NGH damping schemes, Modelling and control of thyristor controlled series compensators. UNIT III - UNIFIED POWER FLOW CONTROL (9)

Introduction, Implementation of power flow control using conventional thyristors, Unified power flow concept, Implementation of unified power flow controller. UNIT IV -DESIGN OF FACTS CONTROLLERS (9)

Approximate multi-model decomposition, Variable structure FACTS controllers for Power system transient stability, Non-linear variable-structure control, variable structure series capacitor control, variable structure resistor control. UNIT V - STATIC VAR COMPENSATION (9)

Basic concepts, Thyristor controlled reactor (TCR), Thyristors switched reactor (TSR), Thyristor switched capacitor(TSC), satured reactor (SR) , and fixed capacitor (FC) . THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Barain G. Hingorani, Understanding Facts, IEEE Press, New York 2000 2. Yong Hua Sung and Allan T. John (ed), Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS), The Institution of Electrical Engineering, London 1999. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Narin G.Hingorani, "Flexible AC Transmission", IEEE Spectrum, April 1993, pp 40-45. 2. Narin G. Hingorani, "High Power Electronics and Flexible AC Transmission Systems", IEEE Power Engineering Review, 1998. 3. Narin G.Hingorani, "Power Electronics in Electric Utilities: Role of Power Electronics in future power systems", Proc. of IEEE, Vol.76, no.4, April 1988. 4. Einar V.Larsen, Juan J. Sanchez-Gasca, Joe H.Chow, "Concepts for design of FACTS Controllerstodamppowerswings",IEEETransOnPower Systems,Vol.10,No.2,May1995. 5. Gyugyi L., "Unified power flow control concept for flexible AC transmission", IEEE Proc-C Vol.139, No.4, July 1992.

ELECTIVE-III (VII SEMESTER) EEE 3730COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150 AIM To introduce the student to computer aided design of electrical machines. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the Conventional design procedures. 2. To study the Development of torque/force. 3. To study about the Shape functions and Stiffness matrix. 4. To study the Elements of a CAD System and Modelling.

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION Conventional design procedures -Limitations -Need for field analysis based design. UNIT II - MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF FIELD PROBLEMS

(9)

(9) Development of torque/force -Electromagnetic Field Equations -Magnetic Vector/Scalar potential -Electrical Vector/Scalar potential- Stored energy in field problems Inductances Laplace and Poisson's Equations -Energy functional- Principle of energy conversion. UNIT III - PHILOSOPHY OF FEM (9)

Mathematical Models -Differential/Integral equations -Finite Difference method -Finite Element Method -Energy minimization -Variational method -2D Field problems - Discretisation- Shape functions -Stiffness matrix -Solution techniques. UNIT IV - CAD PACKAGES (9)

Elements of a CAD System -Preprocessing -Modelling -Meshing -Material properties -Boundary Conditions -Setting up solution -Postprocessing. UNIT V - DESIGN APPLICATIONS (9)

Design of Solenoid Actuator -Induction Motor -Switched Reluctance Motor Synchronous Machines.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK: 1. Silvester and Ferrari, Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers Cambridge University press, 1983

REFERENCES 1. S.R.H.Hoole, Computer- Aided, Analysis and Design of Electromagnetic Devices,Elsevier, New York, Amsterdam, London, 1989. 2. D.A. Lowther and P.P.Silvester, Computer Aided Design in Magnetics, Springer Verlag, New York, 1956. 3. S.J.Salon, "Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines" Kluwer Academic Publishers, London,1995. 4. C. W. Trowbridge, "An Introduction to Computer Aided Electromagnetic Analysis"' Vector Field Ltd. User Manuals of MAGNET, MAXWELL & ANSYS. Software Packages.

EEE 3731

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 0 150

AIM To introduce to the functional building blocks of an embedded system for developing a real time system application. OBJECTIVES 1. Introduce to features that build an embedded system. 2. To help the understanding of the interaction that the various components within an embedded system have with each other. 3. Techniques of inter facing between processors & peripheral device related to embedded processing. 4. To enable writing of efficient programs on any dedicated processor. 5. To present in lucid manner the basic concepts of systems programming like operating system, assembler compliers etc and to understand the management task needed for developing embedded system. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM (9)

Introduction to functional building blocks of embedded systems Register, memory devices, ports, timer, interrupt controllers using circuit block diagram representation for each categories. UNIT II- PROCESSOR AND MEMORY ORGANIZATION (6)

Structural units in a processor; selection of processor & memory devices; shared memory; DMA; interfacing processor, memory and I/O units; memory management Cache mapping techniques, dynamic allocation - Fragmentation. UNIT III- DEVICES & BUSES FOR DEVICES NETWORK (9)

I/O devices; timer & counting devices; serial communication using I2C, CAN, USB buses; parallel communication using ISA, PCI, PCI/X buses, arm bus; interfacing with devices/ports, device drivers in a system Serial port & parallel port. UNIT IV- I/O PROGRAMMING SCHEDULE MECHANISM (12)

Intel I/O instruction Transfer rate, latency; interrupt driven I/O - Non-maskable interrupts; software interrupts, writing interrupt service routine in C & assembly languages; preventing interrupt overrun; disability interrupts. Multi threaded programming Context switching, premature & non-premature multitasking, semaphores. Scheduling Thread states, pending threads, context switching, round robin scheduling, priority based scheduling, assigning priorities, deadlock, watch dog timers.

UNIT V- REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM (RTOS)

(9)

Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS, Basics of real time & embedded system operating systems, RTOS Interrupt handling, task scheduling; embedded system design issues in system development process Action plan, use of target system, emulator, use of software tools. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Rajkamal, Embedded System Architecture, Programming, Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 2. Daniel W. Lewis Fundamentals of Embedded Software, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. David E. Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education, 2004. 2. Frank Vahid, Embedded System Design A Unified Hardware & Software Introduction, John Wiley, 2002. 3. Sriram V. Iyer, Pankaj Gupte, Embedded Real Time Systems Programming, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004. 4. Steve Heath, Embedded System Design, II edition, Elsevier, 2003.

EEE 3732

POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

AIM

To become familiar with the modelling of components and system for carrying out transient and dynamic stability analysis of large scale power system. OBJECTIVES 1. To study detailed modeling of synchronous machine and its excitation and speedgoverning controllers. 2. To study transient stability simulation of multimachine power system. 3. To study small signal stability analysis of a single-machine infinite bus system with excitation system and power system stabilizer. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (4) Concept and importance of stability in power system operation and design; distinction between transient and dynamic stability; complexity of stability problem in large system: Need for reduced models; stability of interconnected systems. UNIT II -MACHINE MODELLING (12) Parks transformation; flux linkage equations, current space model, per unit conversion, normalizing the equations, equivalent circuit, flux linkage state space model, sub transient and transient inductances and time constants. Simplified models (one axis and constant flux linkage), steady state equations and phasor diagrams. UNIT III- MACHINE CONTROLLERS (9) Exciter and voltage regulators, function of excitation systems, types of excitation systems, typical excitation system configuration, block diagram and state space representation of IEEE type 1 excitation system, saturation function, stabilizing circuit.Function of speed governing systems, block diagram and state space representation of IEEE mechanical hydraulic governor and electrical hydraulic governors for hydro turbines and steam turbines. UNIT IV-TRANSIENT STABILITY (8) State equation for multimachine simulation with one axis model, transient stability simulation of multimachine power system with one axis machine model including excitation system and speed governing system using R-K method of fourth order (Gills technique), power system stabilizer. UNIT V-DYNAMIC STABILITY (12) System response to small disturbances: Linear model of the unregulated synchronous machine and its modes of oscillation, regulated synchronous machine, distribution of power impact, linearization of the load equation for the one machine problem Simplified linear model, effect of excitation on dynamic stability, approximate system representation; supplementary stabilizing signals, dynamic performance measure, small signal performance measures.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. P.M. Anderson and A.A.Fouad, Power System Control and Stability, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi, 2003. 2. P.Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill Inc., USA, 1994. REFERENCE BOOK 1. M.A.Pai and W.Sauer, Power System Dynamics and Stability, Pearson Education Asia, India, 2002.

ELECTIVE-IV (VIII SEMESTER) EEE 3833 ELECTRICAL POWER TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P Total 3 1 0 150

AIM To enable the student to become familiar with electrical power transmission and distribution. OBJECTIVES 1. To study transmission line parameters and their characteristics. 2. To study about insulators and cables. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Structure of electric power system -transmission and distribution systems -recent trends in power transmission EHV AC and HVDC transmission. UNIT II- TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS (9)

Resistance - inductance and capacitance of single and three phase transmission lines -stranded and bundled conductors - symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing -transposition - application of self and mutual GMD -skin and proximity effect - inductive interference with neighbouring circuits. UNIT III - CHARACTERISTICS AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES (9) Equivalent circuits for short, medium and long lines -attenuation constant, phase constant, surge impedance - transmission efficiency and voltage regulation - real and reactive power flow in lines - power angle diagram - receiving end power circle diagram - limiting factors of transmission line loadability shunt and series compensation - Ferranti effect and corona loss. UNIT IV - INSULATORS AND CABLES (9)

Insulators: Types of insulators for overhead lines, voltage distribution in string insulator and grading -string efficiency. Underground cables: Constructional features of LT and HT cables capacitance -dielectric stress and grading thermal characteristics. UNITV - GENERAL ASPECTS Mechanical design of transmission lines -tariff and economic utilization and conservation of energy. (9)

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Wadhwa, C.L., 'Electrical Power Systems', Wiley Eastern Limited India, 1985. 2. Nagarath I.J and Kothari D.P., 'Modern Power System Analysis', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 1990. REFERENCE 1. Despande, M.V., 'Electrical Power Systems Design', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.

EEE 3834 AIM

MICROELECTRONICS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of microelectronics. OBJECTIVES 1. To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits in microelectronics 2. To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices. UNIT I-INTRODUCTION (9)

Advantages of ICs, General classification of ICs (Linear/Digital ICs , Monolithic/ Hybrid ICs), Basic IC fabrication steps UNIT II-CRYSTAL GRTOWTH AND EPITAXY (9)

Starting material for formation of crystal, Horizontal Bridgeman Method, Czochralski growth, Distribution of dopants, Zone refining, Silicon Float Zone process, Si-Wafer preparation, Epitaxial growth, Techniques used for epitaxial growth(LPE,VPE,MBE) UNIT III- SILICON OXIDATION (9)

Thermal oxidation process (Kinetics of growth , Thin oxide growth), Effect of impurities on the oxidation rate, Preoxidation Cleaning, Various oxidation techniques, Masking properties of SiO2 , PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND ETCHING, Pattern generation/Mask making, Contact and Proximity printing, Photoresistsl, Photolithography Process(Lift off technology , Fine line photolithography), Wet/Dry etching, Reactive Plasma etching techniques and applications UNIT IV-DIFFUSION AND ION IMPLANTATION (9)

Basic diffusion process(Diffusion equation, Diffusion profiles), Extrinsic diffusion, Lateral Diffusion, Ion Implantation Process (Ion distribution , Ion Stopping), Implant Damage and Annealing process (Furnace and RTA), VI IC PACKAGING, Isolation Techniques, Testing of the Chip, Wire Bonding techniques, Flip Chip technique, Various Packaging methods and Materials, UNIT V-FABRICATION OF MONOLITHIC COMPONENTS: (9)

Fabrication of Diodes, Resistors, capacitors and inductors, Fabrication of BJT and FET, Fabrication of MOS Devices , CMOS fabrication techniques(n-well and p-well process sequences), Introduction to MEMS.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Ben.G.Streetman & Sanjan Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, 5th Edition, PHI Private Ltd., 2003 REFERENCES 1.Yannis Tsividis, Operation & Mode line of The MOS Transistor, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 1999 2. Nandita Das Gupta &Aamitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices Modeling a Technology, PHI, 2004.

EEE 3835 AIM

MOBILE COMMUNICATION

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To introduce the concepts of wireless / mobile communication using cellular environment. To make the students to know about the various modulation techniques, propagation methods, coding and multi access techniques used in the mobile communication. Various wireless network systems and standards are to be introduced. OBJECTIVES 1. It deals with the fundamental cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse and handoff. This also demonstrates the principle of trunking efficiency and how trunking and interference issues between mobile and base stations combine to affect the overall capacity of cellular systems. 2. It presents different ways to radio propagation models and predict the large scale effects of radio propagation in many operating environment. This also covers small propagation effects such as fading, time delay spread and Doppler spread and describes how to measures and model the impact that signal bandwidth and motion have on the instantaneous received signal through the multi-path channel. 3. It provides idea about analog and digital modulation techniques used in wireless communication. It also deals with the different types of equalization techniques and diversity concepts. 4. It provides an introduction to speech coding principles which have driven the development of adaptive pulse code modulation and linear predictive coding techniques are presented. This unit also describes the time, frequency code division multiple access techniques as well as more recent multiple access technique such as space division multiple access. 5. It deals with second generation and third generation wireless networks and worldwide wireless standards. UNIT I -CELLULAR CONCEPT AND SYSTEM DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS (9) Introduction to wireless communication: Evolution of mobile communications, mobile radio systems- Examples, trends in cellular radio and personal communications. Cellular Concept: Frequency reuse, channel assignment, hand off, Interference and system capacity, tracking and grade of service, Improving Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems.

UNIT II - MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION (9) Free space propagation model, reflection, diffraction, scattering, link budget design, Outdoor Propagation models, Indoor propagation models, Small scale Multipath propagation, Impulse model, Small scale Multipath measurements, parameters of Mobile multipath channels, types of small scale fading, statistical models for multipath fading channels. UNIT III - MODULATION TECHNIQUES AND EQUALIZATION (9) Modulation Techniques: Minimum Shift Keying, Gauss ion MSK, M-ary QAM, M-ary FSK, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing, Performance of Digital Modulation in Slow-Flat Fading Channels and Frequency Selective Mobile Channels. Equalization: Survey of Equalization Techniques, Linear Equalization, Non-linear Equalization, Algorithms for Adaptive Equalization. Diversity Techniques, RAKE receiver. UNIT IV - CODING AND MULTIPLE ACESS TECHNIQUES (9) Coding: Vocoders, Linear Predictive Coders, Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile Communication, GSM Codec, RS codes for CDPD. Multiple Access Techniques: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, SDMA, Capacity of Cellular CDMA and SDMA. UNIT V WIRELESS SYSTEMS AND STANDARDS (9) Second Generation and Third Generation Wireless Networks and Standards, WLL, Blue tooth. AMPS, GSM, IS-95 and DECT THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1. T.S.Rappaport, Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, Third Indian Reprint 2003. REFERENCES 1. R. Blake, Wireless Communication Technology, Thomson Delmar, 2003. 2. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998. 3. Stephen G. Wilson, Digital Modulation and Coding, Pearson Education, 2003.

EEE 3836 AIM

TELEVISION ENGINEERING

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

Television Technology has now become a vital tool to the information revolution that is sweeping across the countries of the world. The syllabus aims at a comprehensive coverage of Television Systems with all the new developments in Television Engineering OBJECTIVES To study the analysis and synthesis of TV Pictures, Composite Video Signal, Receiver Picture Tubes and Television Camera Tubes To study the principles of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems. To study the various Color Television systems with a greater emphasis on PAL system. To study the advanced topics in Television systems and Video Engineering UNIT I- TELEVISION PICTURE AND TV STANDARDS (9)

Geometric form and aspect ratio of the picture - Scanning -Interlaced Scanning - Number of scanned lines - Vertical &Horizontal resolution - Picture brightness Transfer characteristics Negative transmission - Vestigial Sideband transmission - Complete Channel bandwidth Reception of Vestigial side band signals - Allocation of frequency bands of TVsignals - CCIRB and FCC standards. Camera Tubes : Camera tube requirements - Iconoscope Image orthicon Vidicon - Plumbicon - Silicon diode array Solid state Image scanners - Gamma correction. UNIT II -TELEVISION TRANSMITTERS (9)

Requirement of TV broadcast transmission - TV transmitters Visual exciter - Aural exciter Diplexers - Transmitting Antennas Microwave TV relay systems - Television via satelliteCCTV - Cable television TV receiver as a data communication terminal - Teleconference. UNIT III -TELEVISION RECEIVER (9)

Receiver Block diagrams - Receiving antennas - Balun and IF filters RF tuners - VHF tuners IF state - IF response - Wave traps - Video detector - Video amplifier - DC restoration - Sync separator - Vertical and Horizontal deflection system - Vertical output stage - EHT generation Picture tube - Beam, deflection - Centering and focussing - Geometric Distortion in raster Sound section. UNIT IV- COLOUR TELEVISION : (9)

Nature of colour - Chromacity diagram - Compatability with monochrome and Vice Versa Colour TV - Transmission and reception - Video tape recording - VCR / VCPs - Video disks Tele text and video text systems - Video games. UNIT V -ADVANCES IN TV TECHNOLOGY : (9)

Projection Television - Stereo sound in TV - 3D TV picture - Digital TV -High definition TV (HDTV) - Flat panel display - TV via satellite.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOK 1.Gulati.R.R., "Monochrome and Colour Television" - Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1994. REFERENCE BOOKS 1.Grob.B ., "Basic Television Principles and Servicing " - McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, Ltd. 1992. 2.Gulati.R.R., "Modern TV Practice" - Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1992. 3. A.M.Dhake, Television Engineering" Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.

EEE 3837 AIM

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To study some fundamental concepts in wireless communication systems and networks. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand physical as wireless MAC layer alternatives techniques. 2. To learn planning and operation of wireless networks. 3. To study various wireless LAN and WAN concepts. 4. To understand WPAN and geo-location systems.

UNIT I-INTRODUCTION

(9)

Mobile Radio Systems around the world, Examples of Wireless Communication Systems; Paging Systems, Cordless Telephone Systems, Cellular Telephone Systems, Comparison of common Wireless Communication systems Digital Communication through fading multi path channels: Fading channel and their characteristics- Channel modeling, Digital signaling over a frequency non selective slowly fading channel- frequency selective slowly fading channelCalculation of error probabilities- Tapped Delay line model- The RAKE demodulatorperformance-Concept of diversity branches and signal paths- Combining methods- Selective diversity combining-pre-detection and post-detection combining- Switched combining- maximal ratio combining- Equal gain combining. UNIT II- MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS

(9)

Introduction, Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Spread Spectrum Multiple Access, Space Division Multiple Access, Packet Radio Protocols; Pure ALOHA, Sloted ALLOHA, Capacity of Cellular Systems. UNIT III- WIRELESS NETWORKING (9)

Introduction, Difference between Wireless & Fixed Telephone Networks, Development of Wireless Networks, Traffic Routing in Wireless Networks, Wireless Data Services, Common Channel signaling, Broad band ISDN & ATM, Signaling System No. 7(SS-7), Personal Communication Services/ Networks, Protocols for Network Access, Network Databases. UNIT IV- WIRELESS SYSTEMS & STANDARDS (9)

AMPS and ETACS, United states digital cellular (IS- 54 & IS 136), Global system for Mobile (GSM); Services, Features, System Architecture, and Channel Types, Frame Structure for GSM, Speech Processing in GSM, CDMA Digital standard (IS 95); Frequency and Channel specifications, Forward CDMA Channel, Reverse CDMA Channel, CT2 Standard for Cordless

Telephones, Personal Access Communication System, Pacific Digital Cellular, Personal Handy phone Systems, PCS and ISM Bands, Wireless Cable Television.

UNIT V-WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLAN)

(9)

Components and working of WLAN, transmission media for WLAN, Modulation techniques for WLAN (DSSS, FHSS), IEEE 802.11 standards and protocols for WLAN (MACA, MACAW). Mobile Network and Transport layer: Mobile IP, Mobile TCP, traffic routing in wireless networks, wire less ATM. Wireless Local Loop(WLL) : WLL Architecture, WLL Technologies and frequency spectrum.

THEORY TUTORIAL

45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Theodore S.Rappaport, Wireless communications: Principles and practice, third Indian reprint Pearson Education Asia 2003. 2. Raj Pandya, Mobile and Personal Communication systems and services, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

EEE 3838 AIM

VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

L T P TOTAL 3 1 0 150

To introduce the student to advanced instrumentation processing techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the perspective of VI. 2. To study the programming techniques using loops & structures 3. To study the data acquisition basics. UNIT I-REVIEW OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (9)

Historical perspective, Need of VI, Advantages of VI,Define VI, block diagram & architecture of VI, data flow techniques, graphical programming in data flow, comparison with conventional programming. UNIT II- PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES (9)

VIS & Sub VIS, loops & charts, arrays, clusters, graphs, case & sequence structures, formula modes, local & global variables, string & file Input. UNIT III- DATA ACQUISITION BASICS (9)

ADC, DAC, DIO, Counters & timers, PC Hardware structure, timing, interrupts, DMA, Software and Hardware Installation. UNIT IV- COMMON INSTRUMENT INTERFACES (9)

Current loop, Rs 232C/Rs 485, GPIB, System basics, interface basics: USB, PCMCIA, VXI, SCXI, PXI etc, networking basics for office & industrial application VISA & IVI, image acquisition & processing, Motion Control. Use of Analysis Tools- Fourier transfo+rms, Power spectrum, Correlation methods, windowing & flittering. UNIT V-APPLICATION OF VI (9)

Application in Process Control projects, Major equipments-Oscilloscope, Digital Multimeter, 120 MHz PentiumComputers, Labview Software, Study of Data Acquisition & Control using Labview Virtual instrumentation for an Innovative Thermal Conductivity Apparatus to measure the Thermal Conductivity Apparatus- to measure the conductivity of non Newtonian fluids while they are subjected to sharing force. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Gary Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming second edition, MC GrawHill, Newyork, 1997. 2. Lisa K.Wells & Jeffrey Travis, Labview for everyone, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997.

B.Tech Information Technology

SYLLABUS

First Year
Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sub Code SH 6101 MA 6101 SH 6102 SH 6103 CS 6101 ME 6101 EC 6101 ME 6102 Subject Advanced English Communication Skills Principles of applied mathematics Advanced applied engineering physics Energy & material Chemistry Programming languages Computer graphics & drafting Principles of semiconductor devices Information mechanics Total L 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 T P 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 4 Tot al 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 30 Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 240 Marks Pra Oral ctic Theory al 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 160 50 50 50 100 50 50 450 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 Tot al 200 150 200 200 200 150 200 200 155 0

15 1

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester III
Sl Sub Subject No Code 1 MA6302 Applications of Mathematics 2 3 4 5 IT 6302 System Software IT 6303 Data Structures EE6305 Electrical Engineering & Control Systems EC 6304 Digital Principles and System Design EC 6305 Signals and Systems Total L 3 3 3 3 3 T 2 P 2 2 2 2 Total 5 5 5 5 5 Marks Prac The Oral tical ory 20 100 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30

Total 150 200 200 200 200

3 18

2 10

5 30

30 180

20 120

50 250

100 600

200 1150

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester IV
Sl Sub No Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total MA 6404 EC 6408 EC 6409 IT 6404 IT 6405 IT 6406 Marks Pra Oral ctic Theory al 20 100 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 50 250 100 100 100 100 600

Subject Mathematical Statistics Digital Signal Processing Principles of Communication Computer Networks Software Engineering Data Base Management System

L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18

T 2 2

P 2 2 2 2 2 10

Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 150 200 200 200 200 200 1150

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester V
Sl Sub No Code 1 IT 6507 2 IT 6508 3 IT 6509 4 5 6 IT 6510 L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 4 P 2 2 2 2 8 Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 50 100 20 100 20 20 20 120 50 50 200 100 100 100 600

Subject Operating Systems Advanced java Component Based Technology Internet Programming

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 30 180

Total 200 200 150 200 200 150 1100

IT 6511 Web Technology IT 6512 Data ware housing and mining Total

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester VI
Sl No Sub Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 IT 6613 L 3 3 3 3 3 T 2 2 P 2 2 2 4 Total 5 5 5 5 5 4 Marks Prac Oral Theory tical 20 50 100 20 20 20 20 40 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 -

Subject

7 Total

Graphics and Multimedia IT 6614 Visual Programming IT 6615 Object Oriented Analysis and Design IT 6616 Information Security Elective I ACS 6621 Comprehension in information and carrer skill PIT 6622 Mini Project

Cont. Assess 30 30 30 30 30 60

Total 200 200 200 150 150 200

12

2 12

2 31

50 260

50 190

100 350

500

200 1300

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester VII
Sl Sub No Code 1 IT 6723 2 3 4 5 6 IT 6724 IT 6725 IT 6726 L 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 T 2 2 2 6 P 2 2 2 6 Total 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 Marks Cont. Prac Theor Oral Assess tical y 30 20 50 100 30 30 30 30 30 180 20 20 20 20 20 120 50 50 50 200 100 100 100 100 100 600

Subject Distributed Computing Artificial intelligence Neural Networks Software Testing Elective-II Elective-III Total

Total 200 200 150 200 150 150 1050

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

Semester VIII
Sl Sub No Code 1 IT 6835 2 3 4 L Quality 3 3 3 9 T 2 2 2 6 P 30 30 Total 5 5 5 30 45 Marks Cont. Prac Oral Theory Total Assess tical 30 20 100 150 30 30 50 190 20 20 100 160 250 200 100 100 300 150 150 400 850

Subject Total Management Elective-IV Elective -V

PIT 6846 Project Work Total

( L - Lecture; T - Tutorial ; P - Practical )

List of Electives for IT

Electives I (VI SEM) Sl No 1 2 3 4 5

Sub code EIT 6617 EIT 6618 ECS 6619 ECS 6620 MA 6606

Subject Embedded System Information System Design Advanced Computer Architecture Advanced Database Introduction to Numerical Analysis

Electives II (VII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 Sub code EIT 6727 EIT 6728 ECS 6729 ECS 6730

Subject Enterprise Resource Planning Mobile Computing Real Time Operating System C # and .Net Framework

Electives III (VII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 Sub code ECS 6731 ECS 6732 ECS 6733 ECS 6734

Subject Grid Computing Wireless Application protocol Software metrics TCP/IP Design and Implementation

Electives IV (VIIISEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 Sub code EIT 6836 EIT 6837 EIT 6838 EIT 6839 EIT 6840

Subject Satellite Communication Software Project Management Bio Informatics Resource Management Techniques Parallel Computing

Electives V (VIII SEM)

Sl No 1 2 3 4 5 Sub code ECS 6841 ECS 6842 ECS 6843 ECS 6844 ECS 6845

Subject Wireless communication Electronic Commerce Software Quality Management Telecommunication system Soft Computing

SH6101 ADVANCED ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life and career related situations. OBJECTIVE 1. To improve the language proficiency of the students in English with emphasis on LSRW skills 2. To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their success. 3. To enable students to express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and professional contexts. 4. To develop the ability of students to guess the meanings of the words from the context and grasp the over all message of the text, draw inferences etc. 5. To develop an awareness in the students about writing as an exact and formal skill. UNIT I - LANGUAGE FOCUS (24)

Parts of speech - Tenses - Articles - Word formation with prefixes and suffixes - Voices Degrees of Comparison - Synonyms and Antonyms - Infinitives and Gerunds - If conditions Modal verbs - cause and effect - Purpose and function - Editing - Punctuation - sentence formation and transformation - Concord - Error correction - Imperatives (Should-form) UNIT II - LISTENING (16)

Listening comprehension - Listening for specific information - Note-making - Use of charts and diagrams - Listening to various sounds in English. UNIT III - SPEAKING (18)

Defining - Describing Objects - Describing uses - functions - Comparing - offering and giving advise - Analysing problems and providing solutions - Greetings - Suggesting - Introducing Warning - Seeking permission - Persuading - Praising and complimenting - Expressing sympathy - complaining and apologising - phoning - Symposium(Paper-presentation) - Mock Interview with HR - Mock GD - Technical conversations in the working environment. UNIT IV - READING (10)

Skimming the text for the gist - Scanning - Predicting the content - Interpreting charts and tables - Identifying stylistic features in text evaluating text - Understand discourse coherence -Note making - Guessing meaning from the context - Reading comprehension - Identifying the Slang in Journal.

UNIT V - WRITING

(22)

Sentence definition - Use of appropriate vocabulary - Paragraph writing - Essay writing Coherence - Cohesiveness - Narration and description - Precise writing - Formal and informal letters-Seeking Quotation - Ordering - Replying - Report - Writing - Technical Report writing Check-Lists - Instructions - Recommendations - E-mail writing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOKS 1. Dr.J.R.Nirmala, Technical English-Pearl Publishers, Chennai 2004 2. Mrs.Uma Maheswari, English for Engineers, Danam Publications, Chennai 2006. 3. Dr.S.Gunasekaran, Technical English Work Book, United Global Publishers, Chennai 2008. 4. Prof.M.Kandaswamy, Technical English Text book, Third Edition, BR Publications, Chennai 2008. REFERENCES 1. Authors: Humanities and social science department, English for Engineers and Technologists, Volume I. Anna University, published by orient Longman Lts., 1990. 2. Narayanasami, V.R, Strengthen your writing Orient Longman Ltd., Chennai 1996(Revised Edition) 3. Swan, Michael, Basic English Usage, Oxford University Press, 1984. 4. Robert.J.Dixson, Everyday dialogues in English, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,2006 5. K.R.Lakshmi Narayanan, English for Technical Communication, Vol I&2 SciTech publication, Chennai 2008. 6. Francis Soundararaj, Speaking and writing for effective Business Communication, McMillan, India Ltd., 2007.

COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB FOR BUDDING ENGINEERS AIM: 1. To intensify and enforce the basic need of English as a Communicative Language. 2. To help learners acquire the ability to speak effectively in English, in real life. 3. To eradicate their stage fear, while communicating others with high-confident. OBJECTIVE 1. To develop their vocabulary. 2. To enhance their communication skills in Listening and Speaking. PART-I (LANGUAGE LAB) 1. (40)

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

Listening Practice Listening for general content Listening to fill up the information Intensive listening Listening for specific information Fill in the gaps Word play/games Riddles/Puzzles Conversation practice Telephonic conversation Vocabulary building exercises a. Synonyms b. Antonyms c. Odd word d. Jumbled letters e. One word f. Homophones Error correction Pronunciation Practice-word stress-sentence stress- discussion-interpretation of visuals. Brain teasers. a. b. c. d. (20)

PART-II (CAREER LAB) 1. Mock Group-Discussion 2. Oral Presentation skills 3. Mock-Interview 4. Debate 5. Conversational Practice.

MA6101 AIM

PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

L T P Total 310 150

To develop the basic Mathematical skills of engineering students as well as it helps them to understand the engineering subjects effectively. The topics introduced will serve as basic tools for specialized studies in many Engineering fields. OBJECTIVES 1. Be capable of mathematically formulating certain practical problems in terms of partial differential equations, solve them and practically interpret the results. 2. To understand double and triple integration and enable them to handle integrals of higher orders. 3. To know the basics of vector calculus comprising of gradient, divergence & curl and line, surface & volume integrals along with the classical theorems involving them. 4. To understand analytic functions and their interesting properties. 5. Make them to acquire a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. UNIT I -PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (18)

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-linear first order partial differential equations - Linear and Non-Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. UNIT II MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (18)

Double integration - Cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - Area as a double integral - Change of variables between Cartesian and polar co-ordinates Triple integration Volume as a triple integral- Beta and Gamma functions. UNIT III - VECTOR CALCULUS (18)

Scalar point functions - Vector point functions Gradient Divergence and Curl - Directional derivative Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields Line and surface integrals Gauss divergence theorem, Stokes and Greens theorems (with out proof) - Simple applications.

UNIT IV - COMPLEX VARIABLES

(18)

Function of a complex variable Analytic function Necessary conditions Cauchy Riemann equations Sufficient conditions (excluding proof) Properties of analytic function Harmonic conjugate Construction of Analytic functions Conformal mapping w = z + a , w = az ,

w=

1 z 2 , w = e , w = z and Bilinear transformation. Statement and application of Cauchys z

integral theorem and integral formula Taylor and Laurent expansions Isolated singularities Residues - Cauchys residue theorem. Contour integration over unit circle and semicircular contours. UNIT V PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (18)

Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability Bayes theorem - Measures of central tendency Measures of dispersion Moments Correlation Rank correlation Line of Regression Test based on Normal distribution Students t-Distribution chi-squares test for goodness of fit. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi , 2004. 2. Venkatraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics volume 1, Fourth Edition, National Publishing Co., Chennai, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics Eighth Edition, John Wiley Sons (Asia) Ltd., Singapore 2001. and 90 30 TOTAL 120

2. S.P.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics. S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi.

SH 6102

ADVANCED APPLIED ENGINEERING PHYSICS (COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

L T P total 2 0 2 200

AIM 1. The syllabus covers the basic laws and principles of Physics and its applications. The course contents are so chosen that it should be more relevant to the modern development of science to meet the challenge posed by fast-changing technology. 2. To enable the students to correlate the theoretical principles with application oriented studies. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course the students would be exposed to 1. understand scientific concepts and to explain them logically 2. explain scientifically the new developments and technology 3. relate industrial developments to the developments in physical phenomena

UNIT 1- ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS

(18)

ACOUSTICS Introduction to Sound -Characteristics & Classification of Sound-Loudness-Weber-Fechner lawDecibel-Absorption co-efficient- Sabines law - Reverberation- Reverberation Time- Factors affecting the acoustics of building and their remedies. ULTRASONICS Introduction-Production of Ultrasonic waves-Magnetostriction method-Piezo electric methodDetection of Ultrasonic waves - Properties of Ultrasonic waves - Application to science industry and medicine - SONAR. UNIT II- LASER AND FIBER OPTICS COMMUNICATION: (20)

LASER Introduction - Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission-Characteristics of Laser- Three and four level laser system He Ne laser - Nd-YAG laser- Semiconductor Laser- Application of Lasers in medicine and communication Basic principles of holography Construction and reconstruction of image on hologram Applications of holography FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION Principle and Propagation of light in optical fibers-Numerical Aperture and Acceptance angleTypes of optical fibers (Material, Refractive, Mode)-Application of fiber optics in communication and sensors.

UNIT III- ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

NONLINEAR MATERIALS Principle - passive and active materials properties of nonlinear materials applications

NANO MATERIALS Introduction properties of nano particles carbon nano tubes semiconductor quantum dots application of nano particles. SUPER CONDUCTORS Introduction properties types - applications

UNIT IV - PROPERTIES OF MATTER

(18)

ELASTICITY Stress-Strain relationship- Hookes Law- Elastic behavior of a material- Uses of Stress Strain diagram-Factors affecting Elasticity-Youngs modulus-Bulk modulus- Modulus of RigidityPoissons ratio- Torsional Pendulum-Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire. BENDING OF BEAMS Bending moment of a beam - Experiment to find Youngs Modulus using Microscope-NonUniform bending-Expression for depression-Experiment to determine Youngs Modulus using pin and microscope method cantileaver loaded at the free end. UNIT V- DIELECTRICS & THERMAL PROPERTIES (17)

DIELECTRICS Introduction Dielectric constant Electronic ionic and orientational polarizations internal fields in solids clausius mossotti equation dielectrics in alternating fields frequency dependences of the polarization ferro and piezo electricity THERMAL PROPERTIES Introduction - Specific Heat of Solids Einstein Model Debye Model Lattice Vibrations Phonons Thermal Conductivity.

TEXT BOOKS 1. K. Gaur & S. L. Gupta, Engineering physics Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1987. 2. William Thomas Silfvast, Laser Fundamentals, Cambridge University Press, 2004. 3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology- a gentle introduction to next big idea Ratner Pearson Education, 2002. 4. A. K. Bandyopadhyay, Nanomaterials New Age International Publishers, 1997. 5. C. Kittel, Introduction to solid state physics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., seventh edition, 1996. 6. S. O. Pillai, Solid state physics, New age international (p) Ltd., publishers, revised Sixth edition, 2005 REFERENCES 1. Dr. Arumugam, Engineering physics, Anuradha Agencies, Third revised edition

2. G. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Physics, VRB Publishers 3. William callister, Materials Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 1997. 4. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Volume 2, John Wiley & Sons, fourth edition, 1992.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total

90 60 150

EXPERIMENTAL WORK

1. Torsional Pendulum -Determination of Rigidity modulus of a wire & Moment of inertia of a Disc. 2. Viscosity Poisuilles flow Determination of Coefficient of Viscosity of a liquid. 3. Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus 4. Lees Disc Determination of Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor 5. Air Wedge -Determination of Thickness of a wire 6. Spectrometer Determination of Wavelengths of a Spectral lines using Grating 7. Spectrometer -Determination of Dispersive power of a Prism 8. Laser Determination of Particle Size & Wavelength 9. Band Gap Determination of Semiconducting material 10. Ultrasonic Interferometer -Determination of Velocity of ultrasonic waves in different liquids 11. Potentiometer E.M.F of a thermocouple 12. Non- Uniform Bending Pin & Microscope - Determination of Youngs Modulus

SH 6103 AIM

ENERGY AND MATERIAL CHEMISTRY

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

The main theme of the new syllabus is knowing the concepts and methods already exist and creating the awareness to meet the present and future needs through technology and simultaneously to motivating them to involve in the research area utilizing the current trend such as nano technology. OBJECTIVES 1. It consist of the various energy resources to which the world is always facing numerous problems and in a position to invent new resources. 2. Material chemistry is included for the engineering student in order to know what chemistry materials are behind the technology. Also it deals with how the materials are protected from corrosion by technically. 3. Zeolites are nowadays used in various emerging catalytic field mainly in petro chemical cracking, water treatment, solar energy storing devices etc,. Also it contribute to a cleaner, safer environment in a great number of ways. 4. Nano materials are nowadays a current research area which the technology students should know about it for their future needs.

UNIT I - BASIS OF ELECTRO CHEMISTRY

(16)

Electrode potential single and standard electrode potential - Nernst Equation Reference electrode - hydrogen, calomel pH electrode - glass electrode - Electro chemical series and its applications Electrochemical cells Daniel cell Reversible and Irreversible cells concentration cell Conductometric titrations for acid-base reactions Potentiometric titration for estimation of Iron(Fe2+). . Fuel cells - H2-O2 fuel cells- Methanol- Oxygen fuel cells. UNIT II - ENERGY SOURCES & ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES Fuels Classification - Analysis of coal - Carbonyzation of metallurgical coke. Liquid fuels Petroleum - Cracking - Synthetic Petrol - Octane number - Knocking Antiknocking - Diesel oil - Cetane number. Gaseous fuels - Natural gas - CNG, LPG, Producer gas, Water gas, Coal gas, Biogas. Nuclear energy Types of nuclear reactions chain reaction Nuclear reactor. Batteries Classification - Laclanches cells - Alkaline batteries. Secondary batteries Ni - Cd battery - Lead acid storage battery - Solid polymer membrane fuel cell - Lithium-Sulphur battery Lithium battery - Solar Energy - Solar cells. (20)

UNIT III - ENGINEERING MATERIALS

(17)

Abrasives Classification Hard Silico- soft and artificial silicon carbide- applications of abrasives. Refractories Classification - Properties of refractories - Refractoriness RUL porosity thermal spalling - thermal conductivity dimensional stability Alloys - Classification of alloys - Ferrous alloys - Micromesh and Stainless alloys- Non-ferrous alloys Copper alloys Heat treatment of alloys. Powder metallurgy Introduction definition applications of powder metallurgy manufacture of metal powders Atomisation reduction of oxides electrolytic deposition powder metallurgy processes secondary operations. Zeolites- Types- structure- properties- utilization of natural zeolites for solar energy storagesapplications. UNIT IV - CORROSION CONTROL AND METALLIC COATINGS (20)

Corrosion Control- Proper designing- using pure metals- using metal alloys- Cathodic Protection- use of Inhibitors- Application of Protective Coatings. Electro deposition - Anodic Coating - Cathodic coating - Methods of applications of Metal coatings - hot dipping - Metal Cladding- Electroplating - Displacement Plating- Metal Spraying Cementation - Electroless Plating - Chemical conversion coatings- Phosphate coating Chromate coating - Chemical Oxide coating -Anodised coating. UNIT V - POLYMERIC AND NANOMATERIALS POLYMERIC MATERIALS Engineering plastics types thermo and thermo setting plastics bakelite polyamides ABS copolymer Polyesters PVC Teflon Poly carbonates Polyurethane. Speciality Polymers - Electrical properties of polymers - Ionic polymers - Liquid crystal polymers - Polymers in electrical and electronic industries - Polymer blends and alloys- Super conductors - Organic insulators - Conducting Polymers - LED sensors. NANO MATERIALS Properties of CNT Potential applications of SWNT and MWNT - Electrochemical storage of hydrogen THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK Total 90 60 150 (19)

TEXT BOOKS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Jain & Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai publishing Company(P) Ltd., 2002. Picket, Electrochemical Engineering, Prentice Hall Inc., 1977. J.S.Newman, Electrochemical systems, Prentice Hall Inc., 1973. C. Mantell, Electrochemical Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1972. S.K. Hajra Choudhury, Materials Science and Processes, Indian Book distributing Co., 1983.

REFERENCES: 1. XU Ruren etc, Structure and Synthesis of Zeolites Molecular Sieve, Published by Jilin University 1987, 8. 2. WU Xianggan, etc., Rural Energy Source, Published by Agriculture Publishing House 1988, 6. 3. M.Burak(ed.) and U.K. Stevenge, Electrochemical Power Sources Primary and Secondary Batteries

EXPERIMENTAL WORK OBJECTIVES: In Engineering Chemistry laboratory, the experiments are based on new syllabus which includes 1. Application of electrodes and cells in the chemistry. 2. Estimating the metals such as Iron, copper and Nickel present in the sample of material by volumetric and spectrophotometric methods. 3. Hardness giving minerals and dissolved oxygen which are mainly responsible for corrosion of metals are understand by estimation of hardness of water and dissolved oxygen. 4. Properties of polymer such as viscosity can be learn from Ostwalds viscometer. PART A 1. Potentiometric estimation of FAS using standard K2Cr2O7 solution. 2. Conductometric estimation of an Acid (HCl) using standard NaOH solution. 3. Conductometric estimation of mixture of Acids (HCl) using standard NaOH. 4. Determination of strength of HCl and NaOH by pH titration. 5. Determination of molecular weigth of a polymer using Ostwalds viscometer. PART B 1. Determination of Total, temporary and permanent Hardness of a sample of water using disodium salt of EDTA. 2. Estimation of Nickel in steel by EDTA method. 3.Determination of percentage of Copper in brass using standard sodium thiosulphate solution. 4. Determination of Iron in the given sample of solution using potassium dichromate crystals by internal indicator method. 5. Determination of Dissolved Oxygen in the given water sample by Winklers method. 6. Determination of Chloride content of water sample by Mohrs method. 7. Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of the given industrial waste water sample. Note: Minimum of 10 Experiment should be conducted. Reference: 1. Vogels, Text book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, revised by J.Bassett, R.C. Denny, G.H. Jeffery, 4th Ed.

CS 6101

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (Common to CSE & IT)

L 2

T 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM To provide an awareness about programming languages OBJECTIVES 1. To enable the student to learn the major components of a Computer system 2. To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems 3. To learn to program in C and C++ UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (15)

Introduction-Characteristics of Computers- Components of a computer system-Computer Hardware-Software-Classification of computers-Installing and Troubleshooting SoftwareIntroduction to Internet Services Computer Arithmetic- Binary Arithmetic-Basic arithmetic Operations-Basic Computer Organization: Functional Units, basic I/O devices and storage devices; Representation of integers, real (fixed and floating point), characters (ASCII and Unicode) UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO C (16)

Introduction to Language Overview of C Constants, Variables and data types Operators and expressions- Input and Output functions Simple computational problems Decision making and branching decision making and Looping . Arrays defining and processing arrays passing arrays to functions Multi-dimensional arrays- Handling of character strings-enumerated data types programs using simple sorting, searching and merging arrays Structures User defined data types Union- Nested structure, passing structures to functions Self referential structure UNIT III - POINTERS, FUNCTIONS AND FILE HANDLING (20)

Pointer concept- declaration- Initialization of pointer variable-Accessing variable through pointer Pointers and functions pointers and arrays pointers and structures example programscommand line arguments Dynamic memory allocation Operation on pointers. Prototypes and functions Declaring, defining and accessing functions Parameter passing methods Recursion Storage classes Library functions- User defined functions file pointer high level. File operations opening and closing of file creating, Processing and Updation on files Simple file handling programs Introduction to data structures singly linked list creation, Insertion, deletion of elements Stack Queue implementation using linked list.

UNIT IV- PROGRAMMING IN C++

(19)

Object oriented paradigm, elements of object oriented to programming Merits and Demerits of OO methodology C++ fundamentals data types, operators and expressions, control flow, arrays, pointers and functions- Classes and objects Constructors and destructors, Operator overloading. UNIT V - INHERITANCE, POLYMORPHISM AND FILE HANDLING (20) Inheritance- Virtual functions and polymorphism- C++ streams console streams console stream classes formatted and unformatted I/O operations, manipulators File streams classes file pointers and manipulations file I/O Exception handling

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS

90 60 150

1. Pradeep K. Sinha and Priti Sinha ,Computer Fundamentals : Concepts, Systems and Applications, BPB Publications, 2003 2. E.Balaguruswamy. Programming in ANSI C, TMH, New Delhi, 2002. 3. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, II edition, (Indian Adapted Edition), TMH publications, 2006. 4 . K.R.Venugopal, Rajkumar Buyya, T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, TMH, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Allen B.Tucker et Al, Fundamentals Of Computing , TMH New Delhi , 1998 2. V. Rajaraman, Fundamentals Of Computers ,Preintice Hall Of India, 2002 3. Brian W.Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie, The C programming Language, Pearson Edition Inc.(2005) 4. Ira Pohl, Object oriented programming using C++, Pearson Education Asia, 2003 5. Bjarne Stroustrup, "The C++ programming language" Addison Wesley, 2000 6. John R.Hubbard, "Programming with C++", Schaums outline series, TMH, 2003 7. E.Balagurusamy Object Oriented Programming with C++, TMH 2/e .

PROGRAMMING LAB C Programming Basics 1. Operators & Expressions To write a simple menu driven calculator program using switch statement 2. Arrays To write a program to perform Matrix multiplication. 3. String Manipulation To write a program to perform string manipulation function like string concatenations, comparison, find the length and string copy without using library functions. 4. Functions To write a C program to perform sequential and binary search using functions. 5. Recursion To write a program to print the Fibonacci series and to calculate the factorial of the given number using functions. 6. Structures To print the mark sheet of n students using structures. 7. Pointers To write a program using pointers to access the elements of an array and count the number of occurrences of the given number in the array. 8. Files To write a program for inventory management using files C++ Programming 1. Programs Using Functions Implementation of Call by Value, Call by Address and Call by Reference 2. Simple Classes for understanding objects, member functions and Constructors - Classes with primitive data members - Classes with arrays as data members - Classes with pointers as data members String Class - Classes with constant data members - Classes with static member functions 3. Compile time Polymorphism Operator Overloading including Unary and Binary Operators. Function Overloading 4. Runtime Polymorphism Inheritance Virtual functions Virtual Base Classes Templates

ME 6101

COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND DRAFTING (FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION ONLY) )

L T P Total 0 0 2 150

AIM To draw and prepare the Engineering Drawings and CAD drawings as per B.I.S standards. OBJECTIVE To develop graphic skills for communicating concepts, ideas and designs of engineering products and to give exposure to national standards relating to technical drawings. UNIT-I INTRODUCTION, PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND SURFACES (25) Construction of curves and special curves, projection of points, straight lines, determination of true length and true inclination projection of surfaces polygon and circular lamina. UNIT- II PROJECTION OF SOLIDS, SECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES. (25) Projection of simple solids prism, pyramid, cylinder and cone drawing views when the axis of the solids is inclined to one reference plane. Sectioning of simple solids, obtaining sectional views and true shape, when the axis of solid is vertical and cutting plane inclined to one reference plane. Development of lateral surfaces of truncated simple solids. UNIT III PICTORIAL PROJECTION (25)

Isometric projection isometric scale isometric views of simple solids truncated prism, pyramids, cylinders and cones. UNIT- IV COMPUTER AIDED DRAWING (20)

Introduction to Auto-CAD organizing a drawing area editing commands- drawing curves using BSplines and cubic splines. creation of 2 D models of simple geometric models. UNIT-V COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELLING (25)

Creation of 3D models of simple geometric models and obtaining 2 D multi view drawings from 3 D modeling. Computer Aided Drafting and Dimensioning using appropriate software.Drawing of title block with necessary text and projection symbol, dimensioning.Drawing plan of residential building (2bed room, kitchen, hall etc.,)Drawing of simple steel truss.Drawing of sectional views of simple solids. TOTAL 120

TEXT BOOKS 1. Natarajan K.V, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Private Publisher, 17th Edition, 2003 2.Venugopal K., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002 REFERENCES 1. Bertoline and Wiebe, Fundamentals Graphics Communication, Third edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2002 2. Warren J. Luzaddernd Jon. D. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition, 2001 3. Gopalakrishnana K. R.,Engineering Drawing ( Vol I & II), Subhas Publications, 1998 STANDARDS 1. IS 10711 2001 Technical Product Documentation Sizes of Drawing Sheets 2. IS 9609 1983 Lettering on Technical Drawings 3. IS 10714 1983 General Principles of Presentation of Technical Drawings 4. IS 11669 - 1986 General Principles of Dimensioning of Technical Drawings

EC 6101

PRINCIPLES OF SEMICONDUCTORS

L T P TOTAL 2 0 2 200

AIM The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation- capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively. OBJECTIVES On completion of this course the student will understand 1. The basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field 2. Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors 3. Diode operation and switching characteristics 4. Operation of BJT- FET- and MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices. UNIT I -ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS (18)

Passive Components - Resistors -- Types- Rating- Colour Code- Tolerance- Fixed ValueVariable (Potentiometer) - Thermistor- Negative & Positive temperature Coefficient- Basic Construction of Various types of Resistors. Capacitors- - Types (air- paper- ceramic- micaelectrolyte)- Fixed Value & Variable- Rating- Basic Construction. Inductors- - Types- Inductors of high frequency application. Active Components- - Voltage & Current Source; Ideal and Practical Voltage Source & Current Source- equivalent circuit- Conversion of Voltage Source into current source and vice-versa. UNIT II - P-N JUNCTION& SPECIAL PURPOSE DIODES (18)

Insulator- Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors- Energy bar diagrams- Doping- Conduction in Semiconductors- P-N junction- Forward and Reversed biased p-n junction- V-I characteristics of p-n junction diode.Zener diodes- Tunnel diodes- Varactor diodes- Schottky diodes- Light emitting diode (LEDs)- Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)- Diodes for High Frequency applications. UNIT III -DIODE APPLICATIONS (18)

Rectifiers (half wave and full wave) calculation of transformer utilization factor and diode ratings- filter (LC-filter)- calculation of ripple factor and load regulation -clipping circuitsclamping circuits- voltage multipliers. UNIT IV -TRANSISTORS (18)

Base- Common Emitter and Common Collector (CB- CE- & CC) Configuration- Biasing of transistors- methods of Transistor Biasing- Base Resistor Method- Biasing with flb resistorsVoltage divider bias method- Transistor action & Characteristics- Comparison of CB-CC & CE configuration- Application of CB- CE- & CC configuration.Construction- Operation & characteristic of FET- FET as a switch- typical application of FET- MOSFET-Working Principle of MOSFET.

UNIT V -THYRISTORS AND THE UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR

(18)

The Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)- The Triac- Triggering Devices- Typical Diac-Triac Phase-Control Circuit- The Unijunction Transistor (UJT). THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 90 60 150

TEXT BOOK 1. Jacob Millman & Christos C.Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits Tata McGraw Hill- 1991. REFERENCES 1. David.a.bell- "electronic devices & circuits "-PHI-1998. 2. Robert boylestad- "electronic devices & circuit theory"-sixth edition-PHI-1998. 3. Bogart- "electronic devices & circuits"-universal book stall- new delhi-1994.

PRINCIPLES OF SEMICONDUCTORS LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Semi conducting devices and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Familiarization with electronic components- devices and equipments. 2. Study of Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes 3. Characteristics of semiconductor diodes Germanium diodes- silicon diode and Zener diode 4. Characteristics of BJT in CE configuration drawing maximum power dissipation curve and fixing the operating point in the linear region of operation. 5. Static characteristics of the BJT in CB configuration 6. Characteristics of FET and drawing equivalent circuit. 7. Rectifiers and filters- Study of waveform with and without capacitor filters calculation of % regulation- ripples factor and transformer utilisation factor. 8. FET amplifier- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gain and current gain. 9. BJT CE amplifier- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gaincurrent gain and distortion. Determination of h parameters. 10. BJT emitter follower- Measurement of input impedance- output impedance- voltage gain and current gain. 11. Clipping- clamping and slicing circuits using diodes.

ME 6102 AIM

INFORMATION MECHANICS

L T P Total 2 0 2 200

To understand and analyze the basic mechanics and to solve the problems with the aid of advanced computational techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions. 2. To understand the principle of work and energy. 3. To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium. 4. To understand the laws of motion, the kinetics of motion and the interrelationship. 5. To be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. 6. To analyse the mechanical system relevant to computer engineers

UNIT I BASICS, STATICS AND DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES

(10)

Introduction Units and Dimensions Laws of Mechanics Coplanar Forces Resolution and Composition of forces and Equilibrium of a particles Forces in space - Equilibrium of a particle in space Equivalent systems of forces Principle of transmissibility Single equivalent force. UNIT II- EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES ( 10)

Free body diagram - types of supports and their reactions requirements of stable equilibrium Moments and couples Moment of a force about a point and about an axis Vectorial representation of moments and couples - Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions Equilibrium of rigid bodies in three dimensions. UNIT III- PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS (14)

Determination of Areas and Volumes First moment of area and the centroid of sections rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula second and product moments of plane area rectangle, circle, triangle from integration T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula - Parallel axis theorems and perpendicular axis theorems Polar moment of inertia Principal moments of inertia of plane areas Principal axes of inertia Mass moment of inertia Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular section, prism, sphere from first principle Relation to area moments of inertia. UNIT IV- DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES (12)

Displacements, Velocity and acceleration their relationship Newtons Law Work Energy Equation of particles Impulse and momentum Impact of elastic bodies.

UNIT V - COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS

(14)

Introduction to computational and simulation techniques for engineering and Engineering system. Introduction to finite element methods robotics over view of robotic mechanics, dynamics and intelligence controls.Computer aided approach to problems in mechanics, simple computer programs for problems in mechanics THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 60 30 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Beer F. P. and Johnson Jr. E. R. Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.1 Statics andVol.2 Dynamics, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1997. 2. Meriam, Engineering Mechanics, Vol.1 Statics and Vol.2, Dynamics 2/e, Willey International, 1998. 3. Kumar K. L. Engineering Mechanics, III Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., 1998. REFERENCES 1. Rajasekaran, S and Sankara Subramanian,G, Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2000 2. Irrving, H.Shames, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, IV Edition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2003 3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagan, S., Engineering Mechanics Statics & Dynamics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001 4. Ashok Gupta, Interactive Engineering Mechanics, Statics A Virtual Tutor (cdrom), Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002 5. Mokoshi, V.S., Engineering Mechanics Vol.1 Statics and Vol.2 Dynamics.

INFORMATION MECHANICS LABORATORY

AIM To verify the basic principles of mechanics experimentally and be able to conduct experiment to analyse the given mechanics problems.

OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the application of theory in practice, by performing experiments and verifying results. 2. To develop the effective skill to observe experimental data and to analyse the results. 3. To build the confidence in performing the utilization of principle of mechanics in engineering works.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of polygon law & triangular law of forces. 2. Determination of elongation of wire under external load. 3. Determination of reaction at the support of beam & bending moment of a simply supported beam. 4. Study of equilibrium of a particle, under the action of forces in a plane. 5. Determination co-efficient of friction on inclined plane. 6. Determination of youngs modulus of elasticity of wire. 7. To determine the effort required to lift a load, and efficiency of lifting by some simple machines. 8. Determination of moment of inertia of flywheel. 9. To undergo a human experience of the principle of conservation of Angular momentum. 10. To understand the implications of simultaneous conservation momentum and energy in a multiple elastic impacts. 11. To determine the co-efficient of restitution of a given body. 12. To study the principle and action of Gyroscope.

MA6302 AIM

APPLICATION OF MATHEMATICS

L T P Total 3 20 150

The course aims to develop the skills of the students in the areas of transformation techniques. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of engineering subjects like communication systems, electro-optics and electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and specialized studies and research. OBJECTIVES 1. Have gained a well found knowledge of Fourier series, their different possible forms and the frequently needed practical harmonic analysis that an engineer may have to make from discrete data. 2. Have grasped the concept of expression of a function, under certain conditions, as a double integral leading to identification of transform pair, and specialization on Fourier transform pair, their properties, the possible special cases with attention to their applications. 3. To have a sound knowledge of Laplace transform and its properties. To solve certain linear differential equations using the Laplace transform technique which have applications in other subjects of the current and higher semesters. 4. Have learnt the basics of Z transform in its applicability to discretely varying functions, gained the skill to formulate certain problems in terms of difference equations and solve them using the Z transform technique bringing out the elegance of the procedure involved. UNIT I - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (9)

Series solution Bessels equation Bessel function Legendres equation Legendre polynomial Rodrigues formula recurrence relation Generating Functions and orthogonal property for Bessel function of the first kind Legendre polynomial. UNIT II - FOURIER SERIES (9)

Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range sine series Half range cosine series Complex form of Fourier Series Parsevals identify Harmonic Analysis. UNIT III - FOURIER TRANSFORM (9)

Fourier integral theorem (without proof) Fourier transform pair Sine and Cosine transforms Properties Transforms of simple functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.

UNIT IV - LAPLACE TRANSFORM

(9)

Definition - Laplace transformssufficient conditions Basic properties Derivatives and integrals of transforms - Transforms of derivatives and integrals Initial and final value theorems Transforms of unit step function and impulse function - Transforms of periodic fractions - Inverse Laplace transform Convolution theorem Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients and first order simultaneous equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transformation. UNIT V - Z TRANSFORM (9)

Z-transform - Elementary properties Inverse Z transform Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations Solution of difference equations using Z transform. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S. , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Thirty Eighth Edition, Khanna Publishers , Delhi, 2004. 2. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics Volume III, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. REFERENCES 1. Wylie C. Ray and Barrett Louis, C., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1995. 2. Narayanan, S., Manicavachagom Pillay, T.K. and Ramaniah, G., Advanced Mathematics for Engineering Students, Volumes II and III, S. Viswanathan (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002. 45 15 TOTAL 60

IT 6302 AIM

SYSTEM SOFTWARE

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To introduce the very powerful system software programming and to have an understanding of foundations of design of assemblers, loaders, linkers, and macro processors. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the relationship between system software and machine architecture. 2. To write assembly language programs. 3. To know the design and implementation of assemblers, linkers and loaders. 4. To have an understanding of macro processors. 5. To Gain knowledge about various editors, debuggers and system software tools. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

System software and machine architecture The Simplified Instructional Computer (SIC) Machine architecture - Data and instruction formats - addressing modes - instruction sets - I/O and programming. UNIT II - ASSEMBLERS (10)

Basic assembler functions - A simple SIC assembler Assembler algorithm and data structures Machine dependent assembler features - Instruction formats and addressing modes Program relocation - Machine independent assembler features - Literals Symbol-defining statements Expressions - One pass assemblers and Multi pass assemblers - Implementation example MASM assembler. UNIT III - LOADERS AND LINKERS (9)

Basic loader functions - Design of an Absolute Loader A Simple Bootstrap Loader - Machine dependent loader features - Relocation Program Linking Algorithm and Data Structures for Linking Loader - Machine-independent loader features - Automatic Library Search Loader Options - Loader design options - Linkage Editors Dynamic Linking Bootstrap Loaders Implementation example - MSDOS linker. UNIT IV - MACRO PROCESSORS & ITS UTILITIES (9)

Basic macro processor functions - Macro Definition and Expansion Macro Processor Algorithm and data structures - Machine-independent macro processor features - Concatenation of Macro Parameters Generation of Unique Labels Conditional Macro Expansion Recursive Macro Expansions Keyword Macro Parameters Macro within Macro Macro processor design options Implementation example MASM Macro Processor ANSI C Macro language Text Editors Interactive debugging systems.

UNIT V - COMPILERS AND UTILITIES

(9)

Introduction to Compilers - Different phases of a compiler - Basic Functions - Machine dependent compiler features - Machine independent compiler features - Compiler design options - implementation examples Interpreters THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Leland L. Beck, System Software An Introduction to Systems Programming, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2000. REFERENCES 1. D. M. Dhamdhere, Systems Programming and Operating Systems, Second Revised Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999. 2. John J. Donovan Systems Programming, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 1972.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE LAB (Using C or C++) 1. Implement a symbol table with functions to create, insert, modify, search, and display. 2. Implement pass one of a two pass assembler. 3. Implement pass two of a two pass assembler. 4. Implement a single pass assembler. 5. Implement a macro processor. 6. Implement an absolute loader. 7. Implement a relocating loader. 8. Implement pass one of a direct-linking loader. 9. Implement pass two of a direct-linking loader. 10. Implement a simple text editor with features like insertion / deletion of a character, word, and sentence. (For loader exercises, output the snap shot of the main memory as it would be, after the loading has taken place)

IT 6303

DATA STRUCTURES

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

AIM To provide an in-depth knowledge in problem solving techniques and advanced representations in Data structures and algorithms OBJECTIVES To learn the systematic way of solving problems To learn the linear and Non linear data structures To learn the representations and notations used in data structures To learn the various analysis of algorithms UNIT I- PROBLEM SOLVING (8)

Problem solving Top-down Design Implementation Verification Efficiency Analysis Sample algorithms. UNIT II -INTRODUCTION (9)

Abstract Data Types - Time and Space Analysis of Algorithms - Big Oh and Theta Notations Average, best and worst case analysis - Simple recurrence relations and use in algorithms. UNIT III - LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (9)

Arrays, Lists, Stacks, Queues Array and Linked Structure Implementation of Lists, Stacks and Queues - Applications - Array of Nodes and Dynamic Pointer Implementation of Linked Structures - Sets, Applications of linear data structures UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (10)

Trees - Binary trees - Search trees - Balanced trees - Advanced tree structures - B trees - AVL trees, 2 - 3 trees, Splay trees - applications of trees - Graphs - Directed - Shortest path Undirected graph - Minimal spanning tree - Tree traversals - Articulation points and biconnected components - Advanced Data Structures - Priority Queues - Hashing - Applications of Graphs

UNIT V - ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF ALGORITHM

(9)

Algorithms Analysis - Sorting - Searching - Design Techniques - Greedy Methods - Dynamic Programming - Divide and Conquer - Back Tracking - Applications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. R. G. Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. 2. Alfred. V. Aho, John. E. Hopcroft, Jeffrey. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Addison - Wesley Publications., 1985. 3. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, Pearson Education Asia, 2004 2. Jean - Paul Tremblay, Paul. G. Sorenson, "An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications", Tata Mc Graw Hill second edition, 1991 3. Thomas. H. Cormen, Charles. E. Leiserson, Ronald. L. Rivest, "Introduction to Algorithms", PHI 1998 4. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Songuthevan Rajasekaran, "Fundamentals of Computer algorithms", Galgotial Publications Pvt. Ltd., 1999

DATA STRUCTURES LAB

AIM To teach the principles of good programming practice and to give a practical training in writing efficient programs in C OBJECTIVES 1. To teach the students to write programs in C 2. To implement the various data structures as Abstract Data Types 3. To write programs to solve problems using the ADTs Implement the following exercises using C: 1. Array implementation of List Abstract Data Type (ADT) 2. Linked list implementation of List ADT 3. Array implementations of Stack ADT 4. Linked list implementations of Stack ADT 5. Array implementation of Queue ADT 6. Linked list implementation of Queue ADT 7. Balanced Paranthesis 8. Evaluating Postfix Expressions 9. Search Tree ADT - Binary Search Tree 10. Heap Sort 11. Quick Sort

EE6305 ELECTRICALENGINEERING & CONTROL SYSTEMS AIM

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines and transmission and distribution of electrical power. OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on 1.Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of D.C. machines. 2.Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of transformers. 3.Constructional details, principle of operation and performance of induction motors. 4.Constructional details and principle of operation of alternators and special machines. 5.To familiarize the students with concepts related to the operation analysis and stabilization of control systems UNIT 1- DC CIRCUITS& D.C MACHINES (9)

Electrical quantities Ohms Law Kirchoffs Laws resistors inductors capacitors series and parallel circuits simple problems Construction and principle of operation of DC machines generator/motor characteristics and applications UNIT II - AC CIRCUITS& AC MACHINES (9) Sinusoidal functions- RMS Effective values - form and peak factors RLC circuits, power and power factor simple problems. Construction and principle of operation of AC machines, alternators three phase and single phase induction motors. UNIT III - SYSTEMS & THEIR REPRESENTATION (9) Open loop and closed loop control systems- Transfer function- poles and zeros block diagram representation block diagram reduction signal flow graph Masons gain formulacharacteristics equations concept of stability Rouths stability criterion. UNIT IV - FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS (9) Frequency domain analysis- Introduction Bode plot polar plot Log magnitude Vs Phase plot closed loop frequency response Frequency domain specifications gain margin phase margin. UNIT V - CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (9) Control system components- Electrical systems DC motor DC servomotor AC servo motorBasic principle of operation and transfer function of gyroscope stepper motor. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. T. Thyagarajan, K.P. Sendur Chelvi and T.R. Rangaswamy, Engineering Age international publishers, 2001. 45 45 90

basicsNew

2. Paranjothi S. R , Electric Circuit analysis, New Age International Ltd,Delhi ,2nd Edition, 2000. 3. Nagrath I.J and Kothari D.P., Electric Machines ,T.H.H Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1990. 4. V.K. Mehta, Principles of Electronics, S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2000. 5. Kastuhiko Ogata, Modern control engineering, second edition Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1991. 6. Nagarath I.J and Gopal M, Control System, Engineering, Wiley Eastern, NEW DELHI, 1992. REFERENCES 1. T. Thyagarajan, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, SciTech publications (Ind.) Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, October 2000. 2. Sudhakar A. and Shyam Mohan S.P, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994. 3. Theraja B. L and Theraja A. K, Electrical Technology, Nirja Construction & Development company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Volume II,22nd Edition,1997. 4. Say M. G, Alternating Current Machines, ELBS and Pitman, London, 5th Edition,1992. 5. Kuo B.C.- Automatic control systems, Prentice Hall of Delhi Sixth edition, 1991.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING & CONTROL SYSTEMS LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operations of electrical machines and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verification of Kirchoffs laws Verification of superposition theorem Verification of Thevenins theorem in d.c. circuits. Verification of generalised Reciprocity theorem in a d.c. circuit. RLC series parallel circuit Measurement of current in various branches and verification by calculation drawing Phasor diagram. 6. Study of voltage current relationship of series circuit with given RLC elements and condition for series resonance. 7. Single phase power measurement using a wattmeter determination of thermal efficiency of a kettle. 8. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by a) three voltmeter method b) verification using wattmeter. 9. Measurement of power in a single phase circuit by a) three ammeter method b) verification using wattmeter. 10. Measurement of power in three-phase circuits.

EC6304

DIGITAL PRINCIPLE AND SYSTEM DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To learn the basic methods for the design of digital circuits and provide the fundamental concepts used in the design of digital systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce number systems and codes. 2. To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions. 3. To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions. 4. To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits. 5. To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices. UNIT I - BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES AND GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION

(9)

Basic definitions- Axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra- basic theorems and properties of Boolean algebra- Boolean functions- Canonical and standard forms- Other logic operationsDigital logic gates- Integrated circuits- The map method- Four-variable map- Five variable mapProduct of sums simplification- Dont-care conditions- AND and NOR implementation- Other two-level implementations- Exclusive-OR function- Hardware description language (HDL) UNIT II - COMBINATIONAL LOGIC (9)

Combinational circuits- Analysis procedure- Design procedure- binary adder-subtractorDecimal adder- Binary multiplier- magnitude comparator- Decoders- Encoders- MultiplexersHDL for combinational circuits. UNIT III - SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC- REGISTERS AND COUNTERS (9) Sequential circuits- Latches- Flip-flops- Analysis of clocked sequential Circuits- HDL for sequential circuits- State reduction and assignment-Design procedure- Registers- Shift registersRipple counters- SynchronousCounters- Other counters- HDL for registers and counters. UNIT IV- MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC AND REGISTER TRANSFER LEVEL (9) Introduction- Random-access memory- Memory decoding-Error detection and correction- Readonly memory- programmable logic array- Programmable array logic- sequential Programmable devices- Register transfer level (RTL) notation- Register transfer level in HDL- Algorithmic state machines (ASM)- Design example- HDL description of design example- Binary multiplierControl logic- HDL description of binary multiplier- Design with multiplexers.

UNIT V - DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND VHDLL

(9)

Introduction- Special characteristics- Bipolar-transistor characteristics- RTL and DTL circuitsTransistor-transistor logic (TTL)- Emitter-coupled logic (ECL)- Metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)- Complementary MOS (CMOS)-CMOS transmission gate circuits- Switch-level modeling with HDL-Introduction to VHDL. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. M. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Prentice-Hall of India, Private Limited, 2002. REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Switching and finite automate theory by Zvi Kohavi- Tata McGraw Hill- 2nd editionSwitching and logic design CVS Rao- Pearson- 2005. Switching Theory and Logic Design R.P. Jain- TMH Edition- 2003. An Engineering Approach to Digital Design Fletcher- PHI.

DIGITAL PRINCIPLE AND SYSTEM DESIGN LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operation of Digital and logic designing and help them to develop experimental skills. 1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates. 2. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates a. BCD to excess-3 code and voice versa b. Binary to gray and vice-versa 3. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ subtractor and BCD adder using IC 7483 4. Design and implementation of2Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates 8 Bit Magnitude Comparator using IC 7485 5. Design and implementation of 16 bit odd/even parity checker generator using IC74180. 6. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic gates and study of IC74150 and IC 74154 7. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates and study of IC7445 and IC74147 8. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 / Mod-12 Ripple counters 9. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter. 10. Implementationof SISO- SIPO- PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip- flops

EC 6305 AIM

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To study and analyze characteristics of continuous- discrete signals and systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the properties and representation of discrete and continuous signals. 2. To study the sampling process and analysis of discrete systems using z-transforms. 3. To study the analysis and synthesis of discrete time systems. UNIT I - REPRESENTATION OF SIGNALS (9)

Continuous and discrete time signals: Classification of Signals Periodic aperiodic even odd energy and power signals Deterministic and random signals complex exponential and sinusoidal signals periodicity properties of discrete time complex exponential unit impulse unit step impulse functions Transformation in independent variable of signals: time scalingtime shifting.Determination of Fourier series representation of continuous time and discrete time periodic signals Explanation of properties of continuous time and discrete time Fourier series. UNIT II - ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS (9)

Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform analysis with examples properties of the Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform basic properties- Parsevals relation- and convolution in time and frequency domains.Basic properties of continuous time systems: Linearity- Causality- time invariance- stability- magnitude and Phase representations of frequency response of LTI systems -Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform: Computation of impulse response and transfer function using Laplace transform. UNIT III - SAMPLING THEOREM AND Z-TRANSFORMS (9)

Representation of continuous time signals by its sample - Sampling theorem Reconstruction of a Signal from its samples- aliasing discrete time processing of continuous time signalssampling of band pass signals Basic principles of z-transform - z-transform definition region of convergence properties of ROC Properties of z-transform Poles and Zeros inverse ztransform using Contour integration - Residue Theorem- Power Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion- Relationship between z-transform and Fourier transform. UNIT IV - DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS (9)

Computation of Impulse & response & Transfer function using Z Transform. DTFT Properties and examples LTI-DT systems -Characterization using difference equation Block diagram representation Properties of convolution and the interconnection of LTI Systems Causality and stability of LTI Systems.

UNIT V -SYSTEMS WITH FINITE AND INFINITE DURATION IMPULSE RESPONSE

(9)

Systems with finite duration and infinite duration impulse response recursive and non-recursive discrete time system realization structures direct form I- direct form II- Transposecascade and parallel forms. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. AlanV.Oppenheim- Alan S.Willsky with S.Hamid Nawab- Signals & Systems- 2nd edn.Pearson Education- 1997. REFERENCES 1. John G.Proakis and Dimitris G.Manolakis- Digital Signal Processing- PrinciplesAlgorithms and Applications- 3rd edn.- PHI- 2000. 2. M.J.Roberts- Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform method and MATLABTMH 2003. 3. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen- Signals and Systems- John Wiley- 1999 4. K.Lindner- Signals and Systems- McGraw Hill International- 1999. 5. Moman .H. Hays- Digital Signal Processing - Schaums outlines- Tata McGraw-Hill Co Ltd.- 2004. 6. Ashok Amhardar- Analog and Digital Signal Processing- 2 nd Edition Thomson

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LAB AIM To introduce the student to various Signals techniques using MATLAB. A LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING MATLAB/SCILAB/OCTAVE/WAB Verification of sampling theorem. Impulse response of a given system Linear convolution of two given sequences. Circular convolution of two given sequences Autocorrelation of a given sequence and verification of its properties. Cross correlation of given sequences and verification of its properties. Solving a given difference equation. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum. 9. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT. 10. Linear convolution of two sequences using IDFT. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

MA6404

MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

L T P Total 320 150

AIM This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts in mathematical statistics. Statistical models provide solution to a number of situations that arise in real life. The course aims at providing necessary mathematical support and confidence to solve real life problems. OBJECTIVES 1. Have a well established knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena. 2. Acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of random variables. 3. To enable the students to have the perfect knowledge in their own field so as to make them evaluate the quality of production and control the position of the products at the right place. 4. To enable the students to arrange the statistical data in accordance to the time of occurrence or in chronological order. UNIT I - RANDOM VARIABLES (9)

Random variable - Probability mass function - Probability density function - Properties Moments - Moment generating functions and their properties. Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions Transformation of random variables - Central limit theorem. UNIT II - STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9)

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Negative Binomial, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their properties - Functions of a random variable. UNIT III - DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS AND QUALITY CONTROL (9)

Completely randomized design-Randomized block design-Latin square design-Process controlControl charts of measurements and attributes-Tolerance limits. UNIT IV - TIME SERIES ANALYSIS (9)

Time series-Variation in time series Trend analysis-Cyclical, seasonal and irregular variation dealing with all four variations of time series.

UNIT V - RELIABILITY

(9)

Concepts of Reliability Hazard functions Series and Parallel Systems Reliability and Availability of Markovian systems Maintainability Preventive maintainance. THEORY TUTORIAL TEXT BOOKS 1. S.P.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. 2. Veerarajan., T., Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCE 1. Ross, S., A first course in probability, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002. 2. Medhi J., Stochastic Processes, New Age Publishers, New Delhi, 1994. 3. Allen., A.O., Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory, Academic press, New Delhi, 1981. 45 15 TOTAL 60

EC 6408

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To study the signal processing methods and processors. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To study DFT and its computation To study the design techniques for digital filters To study the finite word length effects in signal processing To study the non-parametric methods of power spectrum estimations To study the fundamentals of digital signal processors. (9)

UNIT I - APPLICATIONS OF Z TRANSFORMS

System functions H(Z) of Digital Systems- Stability Analysis- Structure and Realizationof Digital Filters- Finite Word Length Effects. UNIT II - DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT) (9)

Properties of The DFS- DFS Representation of Periodic sequences- Properties of DFTConvolution of Sequences. UNIT III - FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMS (FFT) (9)

Radix 2 Decimation in Time (DIT) and Decimation In Frequency (DIF)- FFT Algorithms- Inverse FFT. UNIT IV - IIR DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN TECHNIQUES (9)

Design of IIR- Filters from Analog Filters- Analog Filters Approximations (Butterworth and Chebyshev Approximation). Frequency transformations- General Considerations in Digital Filter Design- Bilinear Transformation Method- step and Impulse invariance Technique. UNIT V - DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS (9)

Fourier series Method- Window Function Techniques- Comparison of IIR and FIR Filters.Applications of FFT in Spectrum Analysis and Filtering- Application of DSP in Speech Processing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. John G Proakis and Dimtris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application, PHI/Pearson Education, 2000, 3rd Edition. REFERENCES 1. Sanjit K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing, A Computer Based Approach, Tata McGrawHill. 2. Alan V Oppenheim, Ronald W Schafer and John R Buck, Discrete Time Signal Processing, PHI/Pearson Education, 2000, 2nd Edition. 3. Raddar and Rabiner, Application of Digital Signal Processing. 4. S.P.Eugene Xavier- Signals- Systems and Signal Processing S.Chand and Co. Ltd. 5. Antonio- Analysis and Design of Digital Filters- Tata McGraw

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB AIM To introduce the student to various digital Signal Processing techniques using TMS 320c5x family processors and MATLAB. 1. Verification of Sampling theorem. 2. Impulse response of a given system 3. Linear convolution of two given sequences. 4. Circular convolution of two given sequences 5.Autocorrelation of a given sequence and verification of its properties. 6. Cross correlation of given sequences and verification of its properties. 7. Solving a given difference equation. 8. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum. 9. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT. 10. Linear convolution of two sequences using IDFT

EC 6409

PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION

L T P 3 0 2

TOTAL 200

AIM To study the various communication fundamentals viz.- Amplitude modulation and demodulation- angle modulation and demodulation. Noise performance of various receivers and information theory with source coding theorem are also dealt. OBJECTIVES 1. To provide various Amplitude modulation and demodulation systems. 2. To provide various Angle modulation and demodulation systems. 3. To provide some depth analysis in noise performance of various receiver. 4. To study some basic information theory with some channel coding theorem. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (9)

Introduction- power measurements- electronic communication systems modulation and multiplexing- EM spectrum- Bandwidth and information capacity- Noise analysis UNIT II- MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTAION OF NOISE (9)

Some sources of noise- Frequency domain representation of Noise- Superposition of noiseLinear filtering of Noise- Quadrature components of noise- Representation of noise using orthogonal conditions UNIT III- AM TRANSMISSION & RECEPTION (9)

Introduction- principles of AM- Am circuits- AM transmitters- Trapezoidal Patterns- carrier shift- AM for Non sinusoidal signal- QAM- Introduction- Receiver parameters- AM ReceiversReceiver circuits- Double conversion AM receivers Net receiver gain SSB SYSTEMSIntroduction- Single sideband systems- comparison with AM- Mathematical analysis of DSBSCSSB generation- ISB- SSB receivers- SSBSC and FDM- DSBSC and Quadrature multiplexing UNIT IV - ANGLE MODULATION TRANSMISSION (9)

Introduction- Angle modulation- Mathematical analysis- Deviation sensitivity -FM and PM waveforms- Phase deviation and Modulation index- Frequency deviation and Percent Modulation- Frequency analysis- bandwidth requirements- Deviation ratio. Commercial FM Broadcast- Phasor representation- Average power- Noise and Angle modulation- Pre emphasis and de -emphasis UNIT V - FM TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS (9)

Frequency up conversion FM transmitters- Comparison of AM and angle modulation FM receivers- demodulators- PLL demodulators- QFM demodulator- Noise suppression .FM and PM comparison- LIC receiver ( Omit internal circuits of the IC) FM stereo broadcasting.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Wayne Tomasi- Electronic Communication systems- 5Th edition-Pearson Education 2007 2. Taub- Schilling and Saha- Principles of Communication Systems - TMH 3rd Edition2008 REFERENCES 1. Simon Haykins- Communication Systems- 3rd Edition- John Willey-2001. 2. B.P.Lathi- Modern digital and analog Communication systems 3rd ed 2005 Oxford university press 3. Singh and Sapre- Communication systems- Analog and digital TMH 2nd Ed 2007

45 45 90

PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION LAB AIM To expose the students to the basic operations of analog & digital communication and help them to develop experimental skills 1. Generation of AM signal and measurement of modulation index 2. Diode detector for AM signals 3. Generation of FM modulation signal 4. FM detector- Receiver measurements 5. Balanced modulator 6. Delayed AGC 7. Band pass filter 8. LPF 9. Pre-emphasis 10. De-emphasis.

IT 6404

COMPUTER NETWORKS

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

AIM To introduce the concepts, terminologies and technologies used in data communication and computer networking. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data communications. 2. To study the functions of different layers. 3. To introduce IEEE standards employed in computer networking. 4. To make the students to get familiarized with different protocols and network components. UNIT I - DATA COMMUNICATIONS (8)

Introduction to Networks and Communication Media: Uses- Network Hardware- Network Software- Components and Categories types of Connections Topologies Protocols and Standards ISO / OSI mode - Reference Models. Basis for data communication- Transmission Media- Wireless Transmission- Telephone Systems- Satellite Communication RS232 Interfacing sequences UNIT II - DATA LINK LAYER (10)

Error detection and correction Parity LRC CRC Hamming code low Control and Error control - stop and wait go back-N ARQ selective repeat ARQ- sliding window HDLC. - LAN - Reliable Transmission Token Rings Wireless Network Adapters Ethernet IEEE 802.3 - IEEE 802.4 - IEEE 802.5 - IEEE 802.11 FDDI - SONET Bridges.. UNIT III - NETWORK LAYER (10)

Internetworks Packet Switching and Datagram approach IP addressing methods Subnetting Routing Distance Vector Routing Link State Routing Routers. UNIT IV - TRANSPORT LAYER (9)

Duties of transport layer Multiplexing Demultiplexing Sockets User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion Control Quality of services (QOS) Integrated Services.

UNIT V - APPLICATION LAYER

(8)

Domain Name Space (DNS) SMTP FTP HTTP - Electronic Mail - WWW Network Security Cryptography. The Application layer: Application layer design issues - MultimediaOther applications- - DES- RSA.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data communication and Networking, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. REFERENCES 1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Larry L.Peterson and Peter S. Davie, Computer Networks, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., Second Edition. 3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI, Fourth Edition, 2003. 4. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Sixth Edition, Pearson, Education, 2000.

NETWORK LAB (All the programs are to be written using C) 1. Simulation of ARP / RARP. 2. Write a socket Program for Echo/Ping/ Talk commands. 3. Write a program that takes a binary file as input and performs bit stuffing and CRC Computation. 4. Simulation of Sliding-Window protocol. 5. Simulation of BGP / OSPF routing protocol. 6. Develop a Client Server application for chat. 7. Develop a Client that contacts a given DNS Server to resolve a given host name. 8. Write a Client to download a file from a HTTP Server. 9. Create a socket (TCP) between two computers and enable file transfer between them. 10. Write a program to implement Remote Command Execution( Two M/Cs may be used) 11. Write a program for TCP module Implementation.(TCP Services) 12. Write a program for File Transfer in client- server architecture using following methods. USING RS232C, TCP/IP

IT 6405

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide an in-depth understanding of the Software Engineering principles and methodologies OBJECTIVES To be aware of 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Planning and Estimation of Software projects Different life cycle models Software Requirements Specification, Software Design Concepts Implementation issues, Validation and Verification Procedures and testing strategies Maintenance of Software and methodologies Use of CASE tools (9)

UNIT I - SOFTWARE PROCESS

Introduction A Generic View of Processes Process Maturity Process Models Agile Process and Models Software project planning: Importance of software - Introduction Defining the problem - Developing a solution strategy - Planning and development process Other planning activities. Software Cost Estimation Introduction - Software cost factors - cost estimation techniques - Staffing level estimation - Estimating software maintenance costs- Risk Analysis S/W Engineering Paradigm system engineering system engineering hierarchy computer based system verification validation life cycle process development process. UNIT II - SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (9)

Introduction requirement engineering process feasibility studies requirements elicitation validation and management software prototyping prototyping in the software process rapid prototyping techniques user interface prototyping -The software requirement specifications S/W document. Analysis and modeling data, functional and behavioral models structured analysis and data dictionary. UNIT III - DESIGN CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES (9)

Design process and concepts modular design design model and document. Architectural design software architecture data design architectural design transform and transaction mapping user interface design user interface design principles. Real time systems - Real time software design system design real time executives data acquisition system - monitoring and control system. SCM Need for SCM Version control Introduction to SCM process Software configuration items.

UNIT IV TESTING AND IMPLEMENTATION

(9)

Software Testing Issues Test Strategies for Conventional and Object Oriented Software Validation and System Testing Testing Tactics White Box Testing Basis Path Testing Control Structure Testing Black Box Testing Object Oriented Testing Testing GUI Testing Client/Server Test Documentation. Implementation Issues: Introduction - Structured coding techniques - Coding style - Standards and guidelines - Documentation guidelines. Modern Programming Languages Features: The translation process - PL characteristics - PL fundamentals: Type checking - Separate compilation - User defined data types - Data abstraction - Scoping rules - Excepting handling - Concurrency mechanisms UNIT V VERIFICATION, VALIDATION AND MANAGEMENT (9)

Introduction - Quality assurance - Walk through and inspections - Static analysis - Symbolic execution - Unit testing and debugging - System testing - Formal verification. Software Maintenance: Introduction - Enhancing maintainability during development - Source code metrics - Other maintenance tools and techniques. Measures and measurements S/W complexity and science measure size measure data and logic structure measure information flow measure. Scheduling Earned Value Analysis Error Tracking - Software changes program evolution dynamics. Taxonomy of CASE tools. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Roger S.Pressman, Software engineering- A practitioners Approach, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th edition, 2001. REFERENCES 1. Ian Sommerville, Software engineering, Pearson education Asia, 6th edition, 2000. 2. Pankaj Jalote- An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Springer Verlag, 1997. 3. James F Peters and Witold Pedryez, Software Engineering An Engineering Approach, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2000. 4. Ali Behforooz and Frederick J Hudson, Software Engineering Fundamentals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 1996.

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING LAB Develop two or three of the following applications using the software engineering methodologies given below using C/C++ as front end and MS-ACCESS as Backend. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Requirements Analysis Design Concepts Function Point Analysis Implementation Software Testing Techniques Error Tracking

Suggested List of Applications:

1. Library Management System 2. Bank Management System 3. Inventory System 4. Software for a Game 5. Text Editor 6. Natural Language Based Grammar Checker 7. Airline Reservation System 8. Online Survey 9. Financial Accounting System 10. Graphics Toolkit

IT 6406

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide a strong foundation in database technology and an introduction to the current trends in this field. OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the fundamentals of data models and to conceptualize and depict a database system using ER diagram. 2. To make a study of SQL and relational database design. 3. To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing techniques which will help in physical DB design. 4. To know the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency control techniques and recovery procedure. 5. To have an introductory knowledge about the emerging trends in the area of distributed DB- OO DB- Data mining and Data Warehousing and XML. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION AND CONCEPTUAL MODELING (8)

Introduction to File and Database systems- Database system structure Software architecture of a typical DBMS-Data Models, Schemas and Instances- ER and EER diagrams and Data Flow Diagrams Data Models Introduction to Network and Hierarchical Models ER model. UNIT II - RELATIONAL MODEL (9)

Introduction to Relational Model Relational Algebra and Calculus. SQL Data definitionQueries in SQL- Updates- Views Integrity and Security Relational Database design Functional dependences and Normalization for Relational Databases (up to BCNF). UNIT III- DATA STORAGE AND QUERY PROCESSING (9)

Record storage and Primary file organization- Secondary storage Devices- Operations on FilesHeap File- Sorted Files- Hashing Techniques Index Structure for files Different types of Indexes- B-Tree - B+Tree Query Processing. UNIT IV -TRANSACTION MANAGEMENT (9)

Transaction Processing Introduction- Need for Concurrency control- Desirable properties of Transaction- Schedule and Recoverability- Serializability and Schedules Concurrency Control

 Types of Locks- Two Phases locking- Deadlock- Time stamp based concurrency control Recovery Techniques Concepts- Immediate Update- Deferred Update - Shadow Paging. UNIT V PARALLEL DATABASE AND CURRENT TRENDS (10)

Parallel databases - Parallel Architectures, performance measures, shared nothing/ shared disk/ shared memory based architectures. Object Oriented Databases Need for Complex Data types- OO data Model- Nested relationsComplex Types- Inheritance Reference Types - Distributed databases- Homogenous and Heterogenous- Distributed data Storage Data Mining and Data Warehousing. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan- Database System Concepts, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Ramez Elmasri and Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamental Database Systems, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Database Management System, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2003. 3. Hector GarciaMolina, Jeffrey D.Ullman and Jennifer Widom- Database System Implementation- Pearson Education- 2000. 4. Peter Rob and Corlos Coronel- Database System, Design, Implementation and Management, Thompson Learning Course Technology- Fifth edition, 2003.

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LAB

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Data Definition Language (DDL) commands in RDBMS. Data Manipulation Language (DML) and Data Control Language (DCL) commands in RDBMS. High-level language extension with Cursors. High level language extension with Triggers Procedures and Functions. Embedded SQL. Database design using E-R model and Normalization. Design and implementation of Payroll Processing System. Design and implementation of Banking System. Design and implementation of Library Information System.

IT 6507

OPERATING SYSTEMS

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

AIM To have a thorough knowledge of processes, scheduling concepts, memory management, I/O and file systems in an operating system and distributed operating system. OBJECTIVES 1. To have an overview of different types of operating systems 2. To know the components of an operating system. 3. To have a thorough knowledge of process management 4. To have a thorough knowledge of storage management 5. To know the concepts of I/O and file systems. UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS (7)

Main frame Systems Desktop Systems Multiprocessor Systems Distributed Systems Clustered Systems Real Time Systems Hand held Systems Operating Systems structures:System Components Operating System Services System Calls System Programs SystemDesign and Implementation CPU scheduling Basic Concepts Scheduling Algorithms. UNIT II - PROCESS MANAGEMENT (11)

Process Concepts Process Scheduling Operation on Process Co operating process Inter Process Communication Threads Multithreading Models Process Synchronization The Critical Section Problem Synchronization Hardware Semaphores Classical problem of Synchronization Monitors Deadlock Deadlock Characterization Methods for handling Deadlocks Deadlock Prevention Deadlock Avoidance Deadlock Detection Recovery from Deadlock. UNIT III - MEMORY MANAGEMENT (9)

Background Swapping Contiguous Memory Allocation Paging Segmentation Segmentation with Paging Virtual Memory Demand Paging Page Replacement Thrashing. UNIT IV - FILE SYSTEMS (9)

File Concepts Access methods Directory Structure File Protection File System Implementation File System Structure and Implementation Directory Implementation Allocation methods Free Space Management Recovery Disk Structure Disk Scheduling.

UNIT V - DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEM

(9)

Design Issues in Distributed Operating System Distributed File Systems Naming and Transparency Remote File Access Stateful versus Stateless service Distributed Coordination Event OrderingMutual Exclusion Atomicity Concurrency Control Deadlock Handling Election Algorithms THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, Operating System Concepts, Sixth Edition, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, 2003.. 2. Pradeep K. Sinha, Distributed OS concepts and Design, IEEE computer Society Press, PHI,1998. REFERENCES 1. Harvey M. Deitel, Operating Systems, Second Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, 2002. 2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 2003. 3. William Stallings, Operating System, Prentice Hall of India, 4th Edition, 2003. 4. Charles Crowley, Operating Systems A Design Oriented Approach, Tata McGraw Hill,1999.

OPERATING SYSTEM LAB (Implement the following on LINUX platform. Use C for high level language implementation) 1. Shell programming - command syntax - write simple functions - basic tests 2. Shell programming - loops - patterns - expansions - substitutions 3. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system: fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir 4. Write programs using the I/O system calls of UNIX operating system (open, read, write, etc) 5. Write C programs to simulate UNIX commands like ls, grep, etc. 6. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for FCFS and SJF. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 7. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the Gantt chart for Priority and Round robin. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the average waiting time and average turnaround time 8. Implement the Producer Consumer problem using semaphores. 9. Implement some memory management schemes I 10. Implement some memory management schemes II Example for expt 9 & 10 : Free space is maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the starting byte address and the ending byte address of a free block. Each memory request consists of the process-id and the amount of storage space required in bytes. Allocated memory space is again maintained as a linked list of nodes with each node having the process-id, starting byte address and the ending byte address of the allocated space. When a process finishes (taken as input) the appropriate node from the allocated list should be deleted and this free disk space should be added to the free space list. [Care should be taken to merge contiguous free blocks into one single block. This results in deleting more than one node from the free space list and changing the start and end address in the appropriate node]. For allocation use first fit, worst fit and best fit.

IT 6508 AIM

ADVANCED JAVA

L 3

T P TOTAL 0 2 200

To provide the in depth knowledge of Advanced java language and programming OBJECTIVES 4. To learn the fundamentals of java 5. To gain knowledge on Java Data structure 6. To learn the Java Networking and Beans UNIT I - JAVA FUNDAMENTALS (8)

Java fundamentals - IO Streaming- Threading concepts - Networking features - Byte code interpretation - Media Techniques. UNIT II - JAVA DATA STRUCTURES Lists - Linear Structures - Ordered Structures - Sorting Trees UNIT III - ADVANCED NETWORKING AND BEANS (9) (10)

Client - Sever computing - Sockets - Content and Protocols handlers - Developing distributed applications - RMI - Remote objects - Object serialization - Bean Concepts - Events in Bean Box - Bean customization and persistence.

UNIT IV - JAVA DATABASE PROGRAMMING

(9)

Connecting to Databases - JDBC principles - Databases access - Interacting - Database search Accessing Multimedia databases - Database support in Web applications. UNIT V - RELATED JAVA TECHNIQUES 3D graphics - JAR file format and creation - Internationalization - Swing Programming Advanced Java Scripting Techniques. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Jame Jaworski, "Java Unleashed", SAMS Techmedia Publications, 1999 2. Herbert Schildt, "the Java 2 : Complete Reference", Fourth edition, TMH, 2002 45 45 90 (9)

REFERENCES 1. Campione, Walrath and Huml, "The Java Tutorial", Addison Wesley, 1999 2. Duane A. Bailey, "Java Structures", McGraw - Hill Publications, 1999 3. Jeff Frentzen and Sobotka, "Java Script", Tata McGraw - Hill, 1999

JAVA LABORARTORY JAVA BASICS I 1. Programs illustrating class, objects and methods 2. Programs illustrating Overloading in Java 3. Programs illustrating the implementation of Various forms of Inheritance( Single, Hierarchical, Multilevel ) 4. Programs illustrating Overriding methods in Java 5. Programs illustrating Exception Handling

JAVA BASICS II 6. Programs illustrating Interfaces in Java 7. Programs to create Packages in Java 8. Programs illustrating Threads in Java JAVA APPLETS 9. Programs to write applets to draw the various shapes 10. Programs to manipulate labels, lists, text fields and panels 11. Programs to handle mouse events 12. Programs using layout mangers

IT 6509 AIM

COMPONENT BASED TECHNOLOGY

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To introduce different software components and their application. OBJECTIVES 1. Introduces in depth JAVA, Corba and .Net Components 2. Deals with Fundamental properties of components, technology and architecture and middleware. 3. Component Frameworks and Development are covered in depth. UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9)

Software Components objects fundamental properties of Component technology modules interfaces callbacks directory services component architecture components and middleware UNIT II - JAVA BASED COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES (9)

Threads Java Beans Events and connections properties introspection JAR files reflection object serialization Enterprise Java Beans Distributed Object models RMI and RMI-IIOP, Advanced concepts in RMI-Basic Examples. UNIT III -CORBA COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES (9)

Java and CORBA Interface Definition language Object Request Broker system object model CORBA services CORBA component model containers application server model driven architecture UNIT IV- NET BASED COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES (9)

COM Distributed COM object reuse interfaces and versioning dispatch interfaces connectable objects OLE containers and servers Active X controls .NET components assemblies appdomains contexts reflection remoting UNIT V -COMPONENT FRAMEWORKS AND DEVELOPMENT (9)

Connectors contexts EJB containers CLR contexts and channels Black Box component framework directory objects cross-development environment component-oriented programming Component design and implementation tools testing tools - assembly tools, Basic Examples using EJB. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Clemens Szyperski, Component Software: Pearson Education publishers, 2003

Beyond Object-Oriented Programming,

REFERENCES 1. Ed Roman, Mastering Enterprise Java Beans, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1999. 2. Mowbray, Inside CORBA, Pearson Education, 2003. 3. Freeze, Visual Basic Development Guide for COM & COM+, BPB Publication, 2001. 4. Hortsamann, Cornell, CORE JAVA Vol-II Sun Press, 2002.

IT 6510

INTERNET PROGRAMMING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide Internet Programming concepts and related programming and scripting languages. OBJECTIVES 1. To describe basic Internet Protocols. 2. Explain JAVA and HTML tools for Internet programming. 3. Describe scripting languages Java Script. 4. To learn dynamic HTML & XML programming. 5. Explain Server Side Programming tools. UNIT I - BASIC NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS (8)

Internet standards TCP and UDP protocols URLs MIME CGI Introduction to SGML. UNIT II - JAVA PROGRAMMING (9)

Java basics I/O streaming files Looking up Internet Address - Socket programming client/server programs E-mail client SMTP - POP3 programs web page retrieval protocol handlers content handlers - applets image handling - Remote Method Invocation. UNIT III - SCRIPTING LANGUAGES (9)

HTML forms frames tables web page design - JavaScript introduction control structures functions arrays objects simple web applications UNIT IV - DYNAMIC HTML & XML (10)

Dynamic HTML introduction cascading style sheets object model and collections event model filters and transition data binding data control ActiveX control handling of multimedia data XML - Introduction - Structuring Data - XML Namespaces - XML vocabularies - Web server. UNIT V - SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING (9)

Servlets deployment of simple servlets web server (Java web server / Tomcat / Web logic) HTTP GET and POST requests session tracking cookies JDBC simple web applications multi-tier applications. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Deitel, Deitel and Nieto, Internet and World Wide Web How to program, Pearson Education Publishers, 2000. 2. Elliotte Rusty Harold, Java Network Programming, OReilly Publishers, 2002 REFERENCES 1. R. Krishnamoorthy & S. Prabhu, Internet and Java Programming, New Age International Publishers, 2004. 2. Thomno A. Powell, The Complete Reference HTML and XHTML, fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 3. Naughton, The Complete Reference Java2, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd edition, 1999.

INTERNET PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

1. Write programs in Java to demonstrate the use of following components Text fields, buttons, Scrollbar, Choice, List and Check box 2. Write Java programs to demonstrate the use of various Layouts like Flow Layout, Border Layout, Grid layout, Grid bag layout and card layout 3. Write programs in Java to create applets incorporating the following features: Create a color palette with matrix of buttons Set background and foreground of the control text area by selecting a color from color palette. In order to select Foreground or background use check box control as radio buttons To set background images 4. Write programs in Java to do the following. Set the URL of another server. Download the homepage of the server. Display the contents of home page with date, content type, and Expiration date. Last modified and length of the home page. 5. Write programs in Java using sockets to implement the following: HTTP request FTP SMTP and POP3 6. Write a program in Java for creating simple chat application with datagram sockets and datagram packets. 7. Write programs in Java using Servlets: To invoke servlets from HTML forms To invoke servlets from Applets 8. Write programs in Java to create three-tier applications using servlets for conducting on -line examination and displaying student mark list. Assume that student information is available in a database which has been stored in a database server. 9. Create a web page with the following using HTML To embed a map in a web page To fix the hot spots in that map and Show all the related information 10. Create a web page with the following. Cascading style sheets. Embedded style sheets. Inline style sheets. Use our college information for the web pages.

IT 6511

WEB TECHNOLOGY

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM Uses of web sites and portals have become common for knowledge sharing and business. The course focuses on the fundamentals of CGI, Networking, Web Applications. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Basic web concept and Internet protocols CGI Concepts & CGI Programming Networking principles & RMI Study of DHTML, XML,AJAX,JSP,JAVA BEANS Study of On - Line web application & Internet Concepts

UNIT I - INTRODUCTION

(9)

Internet Principles - Basic Web Concepts - Client/ Server model - retrieving data from Internet HTML and Scripting Languages - Standard Generalized Mark-up languages - Next Generation Internet - Protocols and Applications. UNIT II - COMMON GATEWAY INTERFACE PROGRAMMING (9)

HTML forms - CGI Concepts - HTML tags Emulation - Server - Browser Communication - Email generation - CGI client Side applets - CGI server applets - authorization and security, Dynamic HTML-CSS-XML. UNIT III - JSP (9)

Introduction to JSP- JSP processing,-JSP Application Design- Tomcat Server- Implicit JSP objects- Conditional Processing, Declaring variables and methods- Error Handling and Debugging- Sharing data between JSP pages- Sharing Session and Application Data. UNIT IV - JAVA BEANS AND WEB SERVERS (9)

Introduction to Java Beans- Advantage- Properties- BDK- Introduction to EJB- Java Beans API Introduction to Servelets- Lifecycle- JSDK- Servlet API- Servlet Packages: HTTP packageWorking with Http request and response-Security Issues- concepts of AJAX. UNIT V - DATABASE CONNECTIVITY (9)

Database Programming using JDBC- Studying Javax.sql.*package- accessing a database from a JSP page- Application-specific Database Action- Developing Java Beans in a JSP pageintroduction to Struts framework.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOK 1. Deitel & Deitel, Goldberg, Internet and World Wide Web How to Program, Pearson Education Asia, 2001. 2. Hans Bergsten, Java Server Pages, SPD OReilly 3. Burdman, Collaborative Web Development Addison Wesley. REFERENCES 1. Eric Ladd, Jim O Donnel, Using HTML 4, XML and JAVA, Prentice Hall of India QUE, 1999. 2. Aferganatel, Web Programming: Desktop Management, PHI, 2004. 3. Rajkamal, Web Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001. 4. Chris Bates, Web Programing Building Internet Applications, 2nd Edition, WILEY, Dreamtech

WEB TECHNOLOGY LAB

1. Development of static pages using HTML of an online Departmental Store. The website should be user friendly and should have the following pages: 1. Home page, Registration and user login 2. User profile page, Items catalog, Shopping cart 3. Payment by credit card 4. Order confirmation 2. Add validations to the above static pages of registration, user login, user profile and payment by credit card using Java Script. 3. Creation of a XML document of 20 students. Add their roll numbers, marks Obtained in 5 subjects, total and percentage and save this XML document at the server. Write a program that takes students roll number as an input and returns the students marks, total and percentage by t.aking the students information from the XML document. 4. Creation of a Java Bean which gives the converted value of Temperature (in degree celcius) into equivalent Fahrenheit. 5. Creation of a simple Bean with a label which is a count of number of clicks. Then create a BeanInfo class such that only the count is visible in the Property Window. 6. Creation of two Beans a) Keypad b) Display pad. After that integrate the two beans to make it work as a calculator. 7. Installation of TOMCAT web server. Convert the static web pages of assignments 2 into dynamic web pages using servlets and cookies. 8. Do the assignment 7 using JSP by converting the static web pages of assignment 2 into dynamic web pages. Create database with User Information and Item information. The Item catalog should be dynamically loaded from the database. 9. Creation of dynamic web pages using JSP/AJAX using J2EE server 10. Create a discussion forum using ASP and other advanced technologies for an educational institution.

IT 6512

DATA WAREHOUSING AND MINING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To understand the concepts of data ware housing and Data Mining and its applications. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of data mining techniques and algorithm 2. To know in depth about data mining environments and applications. 3. To familiarize the concepts of OLTP and data ware housing. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Relation to Statistics Databases Data Mining Functionalities Steps in Data Mining Process Architecture of a Typical Data Mining Systems Classification of Data Mining Systems Overview of Data Mining Techniques UNIT II - DATA PREPROCESSING AND ASSOCIATION RULES (9)

Data Preprocessing Data Cleaning Integration Transformation Reduction Discretization Concept Hierarchies Concept Description Data Generalization and Summarization based Characterization Mining Association Rules in Large Databases. UNIT III - PREDICTIVE MODELING (9)

Classification and Prediction Issues Regarding Classification and PredictionClassification by Decision Tree Induction Bayesian Classification Other Classification Methods Prediction Clusters Analysis Types of Data in Cluster Analysis Categorization of Major Clustering Methods Partitioning Methods Hierarchical Methods UNIT IV - DATA WAREHOUSING (9)

Data Warehousing Components Multi Dimensional Data Model Data Warehouse Architecture Data Warehouse Implementation Mapping the Data Warehouse to Multiprocessor Architecture OLAP Need Categorization of OLAP Tools UNIT V - APPLICATIONS (9)

Applications of Data Mining Social Impacts of Data Mining Tools An Introduction to DB Miner Case Studies Mining WWW Mining Text Database Mining Spatial Databases THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. Alex Berson and Stephen J. Smith, Data Warehousing- Data Mining & OLAP, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2004. 2. Usama M. Fayyad, Gregory Piatetsky, Shapiro, Padhrai Smyth and Ramasamy Uthurusamy, Advances in Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining, The M.I.T Press, 1996. 3. Ralph Kimball, The Data Warehouse Life Cycle Toolkit, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1998. 4. Sean Kelly, Data Warehousing In Action, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1997.

IT 6613

GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA

L T P 3 0 2

TOTAL 200

AIM To impart the fundamental concepts of Computer Graphics and Multimedia. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the graphics techniques and algorithms. 2. To study the multimedia concepts and various I/O technologies. 3. To enable the students to develop their creativity UNIT I- OUTPUT PRIMITIVES (9)

Introduction - Line - Curve and Ellipse Drawing Algorithms Attributes Two-Dimensional Geometric Transformations Two-Dimensional Clipping and Viewing. UNIT II -THREE-DIMENSIONAL CONCEPTS (9)

Three-Dimensional Object Representations Three-Dimensional Geometric and Modeling Transformations Three-Dimensional Viewing Color models Animation, tools for animation- Raster Scan Graphics: Derivative of a Function, Digital Differential Analyzer, Bresenham's Algorithm, Integer Bresenham's Algorithm, General Bresenham's Algorithm, Circle Generation - Bresenham's Algorithm, Scan Conversion-Generation of the Display, Real-Time Scan Conversion, Run-Length Encoding, Cell Encoding, Frame Buffers, Addressing the Raster, Line Display. UNIT III-MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS DESIGN (9)

An Introduction, Multimedia Terms, Multimedia Hardware, Hardware Peripherals, Basic tools in Multimedia-Multimedia applications Multimedia System Architecture Evolving technologies for Multimedia Defining objects for Multimedia systems Multimedia Data interface standards Multimedia Databases. UNIT IV- MULTIMEDIA FILE HANDLING (9)

Compression & Decompression Data & File Format standards Multimedia I/O technologies Digital voice and audio Video image and animation Full motion video Storage and retrieval Technologies UNIT V -HYPERMEDIA (9)

Multimedia Authoring & User Interface Hypermedia messaging - Mobile Messaging Hypermedia message component Creating Hypermedia message Integrated multimedia message standards Integrated Document management Distributed Multimedia Systems.

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL

45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, Computer Graphics C Version, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Prabat K Andleigh and Kiran Thakrar, Multimedia Systems and Design, PHI, 2003.

REFERENCES 1. Judith Jeffcoate, Multimedia in practice technology and Applications, PHI, 1998. 2. Foley, Vandam, Feiner, Huges, Computer Graphics: Principles & Practice, Pearson Education, second edition 2003.

GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LAB

1. To implement Bresenhams algorithms for line, circle and ellipse drawing 2. To perform 2D Transformations such as translation, rotation, scaling, reflection and sharing. 3. To implement Cohen-Sutherland 2D clipping and window-viewport mapping 4. To perform 3D Transformations such as translation, rotation and scaling. 5. To visualize projections of 3D images. 6. To convert between color models. 7. To implement text compression algorithm 8. To implement image compression algorithm 9. To perform animation using any Animation software (MacroMedia) 10. To perform basic operations on image using any image editing software (Adobe)

IT 6614

VISUAL PROGRAMMING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide a strong foundation in Visual Programming concepts. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the concepts of windows programming 2. To introduce GUI programming using Microsoft Foundation Classes 3. Visual C++ and Visual JAVA Programming 4. Java Applets and Networking concepts UNIT I - WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (8)

Windows environment a simple windows program windows and messages creating the window displaying the window message loop the window procedure message processing text output painting and repainting introduction to GDI device context basic drawing child window controls UNIT II - VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION (8) Application Framework MFC library Visual C++ Components Event Handling Mapping modes colors fonts modal and modeless dialog windows common controls bitmaps UNIT III -THE DOCUMENT VIEW ARCHITECTURE AND ACTIVEX CONTROL (10) Menus Keyboard accelerators rich edit control toolbars status bars reusable frame window base class reading and writing SDI and MDI documents creating DLLs dialog based applications - ActiveX controls Vs. Ordinary Windows Controls create ActiveX control at runtime Component Object Model (COM) containment and aggregation Vs. inheritance OLE drag and drop sample applications UNIT IV - ADVANCED CONCEPTS (9)

Database Management with Microsoft ODBC Structured Query Language MFC ODBC classes sample database applications filter and sort strings DAO concepts displaying database records in scrolling view Threading VC++ Networking issues Winsock WinInet building a web client Internet Information Server ISAPI server extension chat application playing and multimedia (sound and video) files UNIT V VISUAL JAVA (10)

Java basics - Java classes - Object references - Inheritance - Exception handling - File I/O - Java tools - Developing Java applications - Visual J++ Applet wizard - Handling events Multithreading . THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Charles Petzold, Windows Programming, Microsoft press, 1996 2. David J.Kruglinski, George Shepherd and Scot Wingo, Programming Visual C++, Microsoft press, 1999 3. Kate Gregory "Using Visual C++", Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 1999 4. H. M. Deitel and P. J. Deitel, "Java how to program with an Introduction to Visual J++", Prentice Hall, 1998 REFERENCES 1. Steve Holtzner, Visual C++ 6 Programming, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., 2003. 2. C. H. Pappas, W. H. Murray, III "Visual C++: The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill 3. Publishing Company, 1999 4. Stephen R.Davis, "Lean Java Now", Microsoft Press, 1996

VISUAL PROGRAMMING LAB

Windows SDK / Visual C++ 1. Writing code for keyboard and mouse events. 2. Dialog Based applications 3. Creating MDI applications Visual C++ 4. Threads 5. Document view Architecture, Serialization 6. Dynamic controls 7. Menu, Accelerator, Tool tip, Tool bar 8. Creating DLLs and using them 9. Data access through ODBC 10. Creating ActiveX control and using it

IT 6615

OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To understand the concepts of object oriented analysis and design. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the object oriented life cycle and to know about Object Oriented Design process. 2. To Gain enough competence in object - oriented analysis and design (OOAD) to tackle a complete object oriented project 3. Using UML, a common language for talking about requirements, designs, and component interfaces 4. To know how to identify objects, relationships, services and attributes through UML. 5. To Develop Testing strategies to ensure Software Quality and usability. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

An Overview of Object Oriented Systems Development - Classes And Objects - Complexity Of Software Classification Notation Process Pragmatics Binary And Entity Relationship Object Types Object State Object Basics Object Oriented Systems Development Life Cycle. UNIT II - OBJECT ORIENTED METHODOLOGIES AND UML (12) Rumbaugh Methodology - Booch Methodology - Jacobson Methodology-Patterns Frameworks Unified Approach Unified Modeling Language Use case - class diagram - Interactive Diagram - Package Diagram - Collaboration Diagram - State Diagram - Activity Diagram Dynamic modeling. UNIT III - OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS (9) Identifying use cases - Noun Phrase approach - Responsibilities - Collaborators - Object Analysis - Classification Identifying Object relationships - Attributes and Methods - case study. UNIT IV - OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN (8) Design Process - OO Design Axioms, Class Design, Object Storage and Object Interoperability refining Attributes - Methods - Access Layer OODBMS - Table - Class Mapping View Layercase study.

UNIT V - SOFTWARE QUALITY AND USABILITY

(8)

Testing Strategies - Test cases - Quality Assurance testing - inheritance & testing - Test plan Continuous testing - usability testing debugging principles - Designing Interface Objects Software Quality Assurance System Usability - Measuring User Satisfaction - case study. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOKS 1. Ali Bahrami, Object Oriented Systems Development, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999 2. Martin Fowler, UML Distilled, Second Edition, PHI/Pearson Education, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Stephen R. Schach, Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, Grady Booch The Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual, Addison Wesley, 1999. 3. Hans-Erik Eriksson, Magnus Penker, Brain Lyons, David Fado, UML Toolkit, OMG Press Wiley Publishing Inc., 2004. 45 45 90

CASE TOOLS LAB

Prepare the following documents for two or three of the experiments listed and develop the software engineering methodology. Program Analysis and Project Planning. Thorough study of the problem Identify project scope, Objectives, Infrastructure. Software requirement Analysis Describe the individual Phases / Modules of the project, Identify deliverables.

Data Modeling Use work products Data dictionary, Use diagrams and activity diagrams, build and test lass diagrams, Sequence diagrams and add interface to class diagrams. Software Development and Debugging Software Testing Prepare test plan, perform validation testing, Coverage analysis, memory leaks, develop test case hierarchy, Site check and Site monitor. 1. Suggested List of Applications: 2. Student Marks Analyzing SysteM 3. Quiz System 4. Online Ticket Reservation System 5. Payroll System 6. Course Registration System 7. Expert Systems 8. ATM Systems 9. Stock Maintenance 10. Real-Time Scheduler 11. Remote Procedure Call Implementation

IT 6616

INFORMATION SECURITY

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

AIM To study the critical need for ensuring Information Security in Organizations OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the basics of Information Security 2. To know the legal, ethical and professional issues in Information Security 3. To know the aspects of risk management 4. To know the technological aspects of Information Security

UNIT 1- INTRODUCTION

(9)

History of Information Security - Critical Characteristics of Information - NSTISSC Security Model - Components of an Information System - Securing the Components - Balancing Security and Access - The SDLC - The Security SDLC UNIT II -SECURITY INVESTIGATION (9)

Need for Security, Business Needs, Threats, Attacks, Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues UNIT III - SECURITY ANALYSIS Risk Management: Identifying and Assessing Risk, Assessing and Controlling Risk UNIT IV - LOGICAL DESIGN (9) (9)

Blueprint for Security, Information Security Poicy, Standards and Practices, ISO 17799/BS 7799, NIST Models, VISA International Security Model, Design of Security Architecture, Planning for Continuity UNIT V - PHYSICAL DESIGN (9)

Security Technology, IDS, Scanning and Analysis Tools, Cryptography, Access Control Devices, Physical Security, Security and Personnel

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, Principles of Information Security, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Micki Krause, Harold F. Tipton, Handbook of Information Security Management, Vol 1-3 CRC Press LLC, 2004. 2. Stuart Mc Clure, Joel Scrambray, George Kurtz, Hacking Exposed, Tata McGrawHill,2003. 3. Matt Bishop, Computer Security Art and Science, Pearson/PHI, 2002.

ACS6621

COMPREHENSION IN INFORMATION AND CAREER SKILLS L T P TOTAL 0 0 4 150

AIM 1. To improve the communication skills of learners and to become successful in their career. 2. To face the challenges in the existing global scenario which is highly competitive. 3. To enhance their leadership quality. OBJECTIVE 1. To encourage learners to look at the functional usage of the language. 2. To enforce the most important skills that is required to be used while attending interviews and taking part in GDs. 3. To enrich ones vocabulary in the language for better communication. UNIT I DATA STRUCTURES (14)

Data Structures - C - C++ - Java- System Software - Operative Systems - Software Engineering - Data Base Management System - Computer Networks - Embedded System. UNIT II SYSTEM SOFTWARE (12)

Computer Architecture - Visual Programming - Electron Devices - Object Oriented System Design - Digital Electronics - Control Systems - Micro Processor and Micro Controller. UNIT III APTITUDE (12)

Verbal Aptitude - Synonyms-Antonyms - Analogy - Substitution - Sentence Completion Odd word out - Reading Comprehension - Error Correction - Preposition - Articles - Tenses Concord - Idiom and phrases - Statement and Conclusion - Alphabetical Series. Arithmetic Ability - Numbers - Average - Percentage - Ratio and Proportion - Time and Work - Time and Distance - Problems on Trains - Permutations and Combinations Probability. UNIT IV - INTERVIEW SKILLS (12)

Introduction to Group Discussion - Structure and types of GD - Led and other GDs Strategies of GD- Moderators - Team Work - Body Language - Mock Interviews Conversational Etiquette - Common Errors in Spoken Language - Telephonic Conversation Oral Practice related to Professional Skills - Role Play Activities - Speech On Common Topics - Kinds of Interviews - Required Key Skills - Corporate Culture - Resume Preparation - Video Samples.

UNIT V - ORAL PRESENTATION SKILLS

(10)

Elements of effective presentations - Structure and tools of Presentation - Voice Modulation - Body Language - Audience analysis - Psychometrics - Stress Management Poise - Assertiveness - Innovation and Creativeness - Video Samples TOTAL REFERENCES 1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma, Technical communication- Principles and Practice, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2004) 2. Barker .A, Improve your communication skills, Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (2006) 3. Adrian Doff and Christopher Jones- Language in Use (Upper-Intermediate), Cambridge University Press, First South Asian Ed. (2004) 4. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to writing and speaking, Oxford University Press, New Delhi 5. Barrons GRE, Latest Edition. 6. R.S.Agarwals, Verbal Nonverbal Reasoning, Latest Edition. 120

IT 6723

DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

AIM To provide a strong foundation to the distributed computing concepts. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the concepts of process and distributed objects 2. To introduce the issues in operating system UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS (9)

Characterization of Distributed Systems Examples Resource Sharing and the Web Challenges System Models Architectural and Fundamental Models Networking and Internetworking Types of Networks Network Principles Internet Protocols Case Studies. UNIT II - PROCESSES AND DISTRIBUTED OBJECTS (9)

Interprocess Communication The API for the Internet Protocols External Data Representation and Marshalling ClientServer Communication Group Communication Case Study Distributed Objects and Remote Invocation Communication between Distributed Objects Remote Procedure Call Events and Notifications Java RMI Case Study. UNIT III - OPERATING SYSTEM ISSUES I (9)

The OS Layer Protection Processes and Threads Communication and Invocation OS Architecture Security Overview Cryptographic Algorithms Digital Signatures Cryptography Pragmatics Case Studies Distributed File Systems File Service Architecture Sun Network File System The Andrew File System. UNIT IV - OPERATING SYSTEM ISSUES II (9)

Name Services Domain Name System Directory and Discovery Services Global Name Service X.500 Directory Service Clocks Events and Process States Synchronizing Physical Clocks Logical Time and Logical Clocks Global States Distributed Debugging Distributed Mutual Exclusion Elections Multicast Communication Related Problems.

UNIT V - DISTRIBUTED TRANSACTION PROCESSING

(9)

Transactions Nested Transactions Locks Optimistic Concurrency Control Timestamp Ordering Comparison Flat and Nested Distributed Transactions Atomic Commit Protocols Concurrency Control in Distributed Transactions Distributed Deadlocks Transaction Recovery Overview of Replication and Distributed Multimedia Systems. THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, Distributed Systems Concepts and Design, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2002. 2. Sape Mullender, Distributed Systems, Addison Wesley, 2nd Edition, 1993. REFERENCES 1. Albert Fleishman, Distributed Systems Software Design and Implementation, Springer Verlag, 1994. 2. M. L .Liu, Distributed Computing Principles and Applications, Pearson Education, 2004. 3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Maartenvan Steen, Distributed Systems, Principles and Pardigms, Pearson Education, 2002. 4. Mugesh Singhal, Niranjan G Shivaratri, Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2001.

DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING LAB

Simple exercises to learn the concept of RMI, Servlets, CORBA, COM and DCOM 1) Arithmetic Operations Using RMI 2) Finding Simple and Compond Interest Using RMi 3) RMI- based implantation of Airline Reservation System 4) Servlet- based implantation of Airline Reservation System 5) Implementation of Mail server 6) Implementation of Quiz Server 7) Implementation of ATM 8) Implementation of Online Shopping System 9) Implementation of Matrimonial System 10) Implementation of Library System

IT 6724

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

L 3

T 0

P TOTAL 2 200

AIM Artificial Intelligence aims at developing computer applications, which encompasses perception, reasoning and learning and to provide an in-depth understanding of major techniques used to simulate intelligence. OBJECTIVE 1. To provide a strong foundation of fundamental concepts in Artificial Intelligence 2. To provide a basic exposition to the goals and methods of Artificial Intelligence 3. To enable the student to apply these techniques in applications which involve 4. perception, reasoning and learning. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction to AI - History of AI- Intelligent Agents- Agents and Environment- RationalityNature of Environments- Structure of Agents and its Functions- Problem Solving: Problem solving Agents- Search Strategies- Iterative deepening- Bi-directional- Informed Search Methods-A*-AO*- Adversial search- Alpha- Beta pruning UNIT II - KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION (9)

Knowledge- Based Agent- Logic- Prepositional logic- First order logic (FOL) Inference in FOL- Representation revisited- Syntax and semantics of FOL- Using FOL- knowledge engineering in FOL- Prepositional versus first order inference- unification and listing- Forward Chaining and Backward Chaining- Resolutions-knowledge representation- onthological engineering- categories and object- actions- simulation and events- mental events and mental objects UNIT III - PLANNING (9)

Simple Planning agent- from problem solving to planning- Basic Representation for planningPractical Planner- Hierarchical Decomposition- Resource Constraint- Uncertainty- Probabilistic Reasoning System UNIT IV - LEARNING (9)

General Model of Learning Agents- Inductive Learning- Computational Learning- Theory Learning in Neural and Belief networks- Reinforcement Learning- Types of Communicating Agents- Robotics: Tasks, Parts, Configuration Spaces- Navigations and Motion Planning UNIT V - APPLICATIONS (9)

Communication- Communication as action- Formal Grammar for a fragment of EnglishSyntactic analysis- Argumented Grammar- Semantic interpretation- Ambiguity and Discourse understanding- Grammar Induction- Probabilistic language processing- Probabilistic language models- Information retrieval- Information Extraction- Machine Translation

THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence- A Modern Approach, 2nd edition, Pearson Education/Prentice Hall of India, 2004 REFERENCES

45 45 90

1. Nils J.Nilsson,Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Pvt.LTD. 2000 2. Elaine Rich and Kevin Knigh, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2003 3. George F.Luger, Artificial Intelligence- Structures and Strategies For Complex Problem Solving, Pearson Education/PHI, 2002 4. Dan W.Patterson, Introduction to artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems Prentice Hall of India

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LAB 1. Implementation of searching algorithm using BFS 2. Implementation of searching algorithm using DFS 3. Implementation of searching algorithm using . A* Algorithm 4. Implementation of searching algorithm using Water jug Problem using BFS 5. Implementation of searching algorithm using Water jug Problem using DFS 6. Implementation of game tree using Single player game 1. N-Queen Problem 2.8-puzzle Problem 7. Implementation of game tree using two player game 1. Tic-tac-toe 2. Chess 8. Representation of knowledge for simple game using predicate logic 9. Implementation of the resolution algorithm 10. Implementation of unification algorithm

IT 6725

NEURAL NETWORKS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To study the Neural Networks and its applications in computer field. OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the basics of ANN and comparing with Human brain 2. To learn the various architectures of building an ANN and its applications 3. To learn the pattern classification techniques, advanced methods of representing information in ANN UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS (9)

Elementary Neurophysiology - From Neuron to ANS-ANS Simulation Adaline and Madaline review of Signal Processing - Adaline and Adaptive Linear Combiner-Applications of Adaptive Signal Processing-The Madaline-Simulating the Adaline UNIT II - BACK PROPAGATION (9)

Back Propagation Network - The Generalized Delta Rule-Practical Considerations-ApplicationsThe Back Propagation Simulator- BAM and Hopfield Memory-simulating the BAM. UNIT III - SIMULATED ANNEALING (9)

Information Theory and Statistical Mechanics - The Boltzmann Machine -Simulation using Boltzmann Simulator - The Counter Propagation Network: CPN Building Blocks-CPN Data Processing-The CPN simulator-An Image Classification Example UNIT IV - SELF - ORGANIZING MAP (9)

SOM Data Processing - Applications of Self-Organizing Maps-Simulating the SOM. Adaptive Resonance Theory: ART Network Description-ART1-ART2 - ART1 and ART2 Simulator UNIT V - SPATIOTEMPORAL PATTERN CLASSIFICATION (9)

Formal Avalanche - Architecture of Spatiotemporal Networks-STN Simulation & Applications of STNS. The Neocognitron: Neocognitron Architecture-Neocognitron in Data ProcessingPerformance-Addition of Lateral Inhibition - Feed Back to Neocognitron.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. James. A.Freeman and David.M.Skapura, "Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications and Programming Techniques", Pearson Education, 2002 REFERENCES 1. B.Yegnanarayana, "Artificial Neural Networks", Prentice - Hall, of India, 2001 2. J.M.Zurada, "Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks ", Jaico Publishing House.,1997 3. M.H.Hassoun, "Fundamentals of Artificial Neural Networks", Prentice - Hall of India.,1998 4. Simon Haykin, "Neural Networks - A Comprehensive Foundation,Pearson Education 2001

IT 6726 AIM

SOFTWARE TESTING

L T P TOTAL 3 0 2 200

To make students understand the principles of software testing OBJECTIVES 1. To explain the basics of software testing 2. To highlight the strategies for software testing 3. To stress the need and conduct of testing levels 4. To identify the issues in testing management 5. To bring out the ways and means of controlling and monitoring testing activity UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (8)

Testing as an Engineering Activity - Role of Process in Software Quality - Testing as a Process, Basic Definitions - Software Testing Principles - The Testers Role in a Software Development Organization - Origins of Defects, Defect Classes - The Defect Repository and Test Design Defect Examples - Developer/Tester Support for Developing a Defect Repository UNIT II -TEST CASE DESIGN (10)

Introduction to Testing Design Strategies - The Smarter Tester - Test Case Design Strategies Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design - Random Testing - Equivalence Class Partitioning - Boundary Value Analysis - Other Black-box Test Design Approaches - Black-box testing and COTS - Using White-Box Approach to Test design - Test Adequacy Criteria Coverage and Control Flow Graphs - Covering Code Logic, Paths: Their Role in White-box Based Test Design - Additional White Box Test Design Approaches - Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria UNIT III - LEVELS OF TESTING (9)

The Need for Levels of Testing - Unit Test - Unit Test Planning - Designing the Unit Tests. The Class as a Testable Unit - The Test Harness - Running the Unit tests and Recording results Integration tests - Designing Integration Tests - Integration Test Planning - System Test The Different Types - Regression Testing, Alpha - Beta and Acceptance Tests UNIT IV-TEST MANAGEMENT (9)

Introductory Concepts - Testing and Debugging Goals and Policies - Test Planning -Test Plan Components - Test Plan Attachments - Locating Test Items - Reporting Test Results - The role of three groups in Test Planning and Policy Development - Process and the Engineering Disciplines - Introducing the test specialist - Skills needed by a test specialist - Building a Testing Group

UNIT V - CONTROLLING AND MONITORING

(9)

Defining Terms - Measurements and Milestones for Controlling and Monitoring - Status Meetings - Reports and Control Issues - Criteria for Test Completion - SCM - Types of reviews developing a review program - Components of Review Plans - Reporting review results THEORY EXPERIMENTAL WORK TOTAL 45 45 90

TEXT BOOKS 1. Ilene Burnstein, Practical Software Testing, Springer International Edition, Chennai, 2003. 2. Boris Beizer, Software Testing Techniques, 2nd Edition, Dream tech press, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Edward Kit, Software Testing in the Real World Improving the Process, Pearson Education New Delhi, 1995 2. Elfriede Dustin, Effective Software Testing, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003 3. Renu Rajani and Pradeep Oak, Software Testing Effective Methods, Tools and 4. Techniques, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003

SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING LABORATORY Develop a simple software testing tool implementing any testing technique of your choice. Take up a software development project of your choice and systematically carryout all the phases of SDLC. Do the necessary documentation at each stage. Use appropriate case tools. The project to be carried out may be in domains such as 1. Online stock trading 2. Airport management 3. Bio-informatics 4. Hospital management 5. Internet-based multi-user online games 6. Programmer's editor with syntaxbased coloring 7. Library of computer security related algorithms 8. Inventory System 9. Software for a Game 10. Financial Accounting System

I. Do the following testing for a chosen software implementation using any commercial or Freeware tools 1. Pathtesting 2. Transactionflow testing 3. Dataflow testing II. Do the following measurements on a chosen software implementation 1. Halsteads Metrics 2. McCabes Metrics III. Simulate a test driver

IT 6835

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To understand the statistical approach for quality control. OBJECTIVE 1. To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools available to achieve Total Quality Management. 2. To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Definition of Quality - Dimensions of Quality - Quality Planning - Quality costs - Analysis Techniques for Quality Costs - Basic concepts of Total Quality Management - Historical Review, Principles of TQM - Leadership Concepts - Role of Senior Management - Quality Council - Quality Statements - Strategic Planning - Deming Philosophy - Barriers to TQM Implementation. UNIT II - TQM PRINCIPLES (9)

Customer satisfaction Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer Retention, Employee Involvement Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward, Performance Appraisal, Benefits, Continuous Process Improvement Juran Trilogy, PDSA Cycle, 5S, Kaizen, Supplier Partnership Partnering, sourcing, Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating, Relationship Development, Performance Measures Basic Concepts, Strategy, Performance Measure. UNIT III - STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC) (9)

The seven tools of quality - Statistical Fundamentals Measures of central Tendency and Dispersion - Population and Sample - Normal Curve - Control Charts for variables and attributes - Process capability - Concept of six sigma - New seven Management tools. UNIT IV - TQM TOOLS (9)

Benchmarking Reasons to Benchmark - Benchmarking Process - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) House of Quality - QFD Process Benefits - Taguchi Quality Loss Function - Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Concept - Improvement Needs - FMEA Stages of FMEA.

UNIT V - QUALITY SYSTEMS

(9)

Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems - ISO 9000:2000 Quality System Elements, Implementation of Quality System Documentation - Quality Auditing - TS 16949 - ISO 14000 Concept - Requirements and Benefits.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003. (Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6. REFERENCES 1. James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, (5th Edition), South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5). 2. Feigenbaum.A.V. Total Quality Management, McGraw-Hill, 1991. 3. Oakland.J.S. Total Quality Management Butterworth Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford. 1989. 4. Narayana V. and Sreenivasan, N.S., Quality Management Concepts and Tasks, New Age International 1996. 5. Zeiri. Total Quality Management for Engineers Wood Head Publishers, 1991.

LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR IT ELECTIVE I (VI SEMESTER) EIT 6617 AIM To give sufficient background for undertaking embedded systems design. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce students to the embedded systems, its hardware and software. 2. To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking. 3. To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++. 4. To explain real time operating systems, inter-task communication and an exemplary case of MUCOS IIRTOS. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (9) EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L 3 T 2 P TOTAL 0 150

Definition and Classification Overview of Processors and hardware units in an embedded system Software embedded into the system Exemplary Embedded Systems Embedded Systems on a Chip (SoC) and the use of VLSI designed circuits UNIT II -DEVICES AND BUSES FOR DEVICES NETWORK (9)

I/O Devices - Device I/O Types and Examples Synchronous - Iso-synchronous and Asynchronous Communications from Serial Devices - Examples of Internal SerialCommunication Devices - UART and HDLC - Parallel Port Devices - Sophisticated interfacing features in Devices/Ports- Timer and Counting Devices - 12C, USB, CAN and advanced I/O Serial high speed buses- ISA, PCI, PCI-X, cPCI and advanced buses. UNIT III -PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS & EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING IN C, C++ (9) Programming in assembly language (ALP) vs. High Level Language - C Program Elements, Macros and functions -Use of Pointers - NULL Pointers - Use of Function Calls Multiple function calls in a Cyclic Order in the Main Function Pointers Function Queues and Interrupt Service Routines Queues Pointers Concepts of EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING in C++ Objected Oriented Programming Embedded Programming in C++, C Program compilers Cross compiler Optimization of memory codes. UNIT IV-REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS PART - 1 (9)

Definitions of process, tasks and threads Clear cut distinction between functions ISRs and tasks by their characteristics Operating System Services- Goals Structures- Kernel - Process Management Memory Management Device Management File System Organisation and Implementation I/O Subsystems Interrupt Routines Handling in RTOS, Real Time Operating System : RTOS Task scheduling models - Handling of task scheduling and latency and deadlines

as performance metrics Co-operative Round Robin Scheduling Cyclic Scheduling with Time Slicing (Rate Monotonics Co-operative Scheduling) Preemptive Scheduling Model strategy by a Scheduler Critical Section Service by a Preemptive Scheduler Fixed (Static) Real time scheduling of tasks - Inter process communication and Synchrionization Shared data problem Use of Semaphore(s) Priority Inversion Problem and Deadlock Situations Inter Process Communications using Signals Semaphore Flag or mutex as Resource key Message Queues Mailboxes Pipes Virtual (Logical) Sockets Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs). UNIT V-REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS PART - 2 (9)

Study of Micro C/OS-II or Vx Works or Any other popular RTOS RTOS System Level Functions Task Service Functions Time Delay Functions Memory Allocation Related Functions Semaphore Related Functions Mailbox Related Functions Queue Related Functions Case Studies of Programming with RTOS Understanding Case Definition Multiple Tasks and their functions Creating a list of tasks Functions and IPCs Exemplary Coding Steps. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. Raj kamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGrawHill, First reprint Oct. 2003 REFERENCES 1. Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition-2003, Newnes, 2. David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000. 3. Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components; Principles of Embedded Computing System Design Harcourt India, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, First Indian Reprint 2001 4. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, Embedded Systems Design A unified Hardware /Software Introduction, John Wiley, 2002.

EIT 6618 AIM

INFORMATION SYSTEM DESIGN

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To understand the design, development and management of information systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To know the basics of managing the digital firm. 2. To understand the design, development and maintenance of information systems. 3. To understand basic issues in knowledge management and information systems. 4. To know the ethical and security issues in information systems. UNIT I - MANAGING THE DIGITAL FIRM (9)

Why information systems contemporary approaches to information systems new role of information systems- major types of systems in organizations systems from a functional perspective enterprise applications organizations and information systems managers decision making and information systems information systems and business strategy. UNIT II - DESIGNING INFORMATION SYSTEMS (9)

Systems as planned organizational change business process re-engineering and process improvement overview of systems development alternate system Building approaches Understanding the business value of Information Systems - The importance of change management in information system success and failure Managing Implementation. UNIT III - DEVELOPMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS (9) Systems analysis and design System development life cycle Limitation End User Development Managing End Users off-the shelf software packages Outsourcing Comparison of different methodologies. UNIT IV - KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT, ETHICS AND SECURITY (9)

Knowledge Management in the organization Information and Knowledge base systems Decision -support systems Understanding ethical and Social issues packed to systems Ethics in an Information society The moral dimensions of Information Systems System vulnerability and abuse Creating a control environment Ensuring System Quality. UNIT V -INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE (9)

Defining Information Architecture why Information Architecture matters Practicing Information Architecture in the Real world Information Ecologies User needs and Behavior The anatomy of Information Architecture Organizing Systems Search Systems. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Lauaon Kenneth & Landon Jane, "Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital firm", Eighth edition, PHI, 2004. 2. Uma G. Gupta, "Management Information Systems A Management Prespective", Galgotia publications Pvt., Ltd., 1998. 3. Louis Rosenfel and Peter Morville, "Information Architecture for the World wide Web", O'Reilly Associates, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Steven Alter, "Information Systems A Management Perspective", Pearson Education, 2001. 2. Uma Gupta, "Information Systems Success in 21st Century", Prentice Hall of India, 2000. 3. Robert G. Murdick, Joel E. Ross and James R. Claggett, "Information Systems for Modern Management", PHI, 1994.

ECS 6619 AIM

ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To provide a strong foundation of the computer organization and its internal architecture and to study in detail the computer design. OBJECTIVES 1. It provides a basic knowledge of various architectures 2. To understand in detail about the concepts of instruction level parallelism with software approach. UNIT I- FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN (9)

Measuring and Reporting Performance Quantitative Principles of Computer Design Classifying Instruction set Architecture Memory Addressing Addressing Modes Type and Size of Operands Operations in the Instruction Set Operands and Operations for Media and Signal Processing Instructions for Control Flow Encoding an Instruction Set Example Architecture MIPS and TM32. UNIT II- INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM (9)

Pipelining and Hazards Concepts of ILP Dynamic Scheduling Dynamic Hardware Prediction Multiple Issues Hardware based Speculation Limitations of ILP Case Studies lP6 Micro Architecture UNIT III- INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACH (9) Compiler Techniques for Exposing ILP Static Branch Prediction Static Multiple Issue. VLIW Advanced Compiler Support Hardware Support for Exposing Parallelism Hardware Vs Software Speculation. Mechanism IA 64 and Itanium Processor. UNIT IV- MEMORY AND I/O (9)

Cache Performance Reducing Cache Miss Penalty and Miss Rate Reducing Hit Time Main Memory and Performance Memory Technology Types of Storage Devices Buses RAID Reliability Availability and Dependability I/O Performance Measures Designing I/O System. UNIT V- MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures Performance Issues Synchronization Models of Memory Consistency Multithreading. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60 (9)

TEXTBOOK 1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003. REFERENCES 1. D. Sima- T. Fountain and P. Kacsuk, Advanced Computer Architectures A Design Space Approach, Addison Wesley, 2000. 2. Kai Hwang, Advanced Computer Architecture Parallelism Scalability Programmability, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2001. 3. Vincent P. Heuring, Harry F. Jordan, Computer System Design and Architecture, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004.

ECS 6620

ADVANCED DATABASES

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM It aims at developing computer application with different kinds of data models. It also deals with transaction management of these different databases. OBJECTIVE 1. To study the needs of different databases. 2. To understand about different data models that can be used for these databases. 3. To make the students to get familiarized with transaction management of the database. 4. To develop in depth knowledge about web and intelligent database. UNIT I- DISTRIBUTED DATABASE (9)

Distributed DBMS concepts and design- introduction-functions and architecture of DDBMSdistributed relational database Design- Transparency in DDBMS- distributed Transaction Management - Concurrency Control deadlock Management Database recovery The X/Open Distributed Transaction Processing Model- Replication Servers Distributed Query Optimization- Distribution and Replication in Oracle. UNIT II- OBJECT ORIENTED DATABASES (9)

Object oriented databases Introduction Weakness of RDBMS Object Oriented Concepts Storing Objects in Relational Databases Next Generation database systems- Object Oriented database models OODBMS perspectives persistence Issues in OODBMS OODBMS manifesto advantages and disadvantages of OODBMS object oriented database design OODBMS standards and systems Object management group Object management group object database Standard ODMG object relational DBMS Postgres-Comparison of ORDBMS and OODBMS. UNIT III- WEB DATABASES (9)

Web technology and DBMS Introduction The Web The Web as a Database Application Platform Scripting Languages common Gateway Interface HTTP cookies Extending the Web Server Java Microsoft web Solution Platform Oracle Internet Platform Semi Structured Data and XML XML Related Technologies XML Query Languages.

UNIT IV -DATABASE DESIGN ISSUES

(9)

ER Model - Normalization - Security - Encryption Digital Signatures Authorization Authenticated RPC- Integrity - Consistency - Database Tuning - Optimization and Research Issues Design of Temporal Databases Spatial Databases.

UNIT V -CURRENT TRENDS

(9)

Mobile database Geographic Information System Genome Data Management Multimedia database Parallel database database administration data warehousing and data mining THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. Philip M. Lewis, Arthur Bernstein, Michael Kifer, Databases and Transaction Processing An Application Oriented Approach, Addison, Wesley, 2002. REFERENCES 1. R.Elmasri and S.B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2004. 2. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharsan, Database System Concepts, 4th Edition., Tata McGraw Hill, 2004. 3. Raghu Ramakrishnan & Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2003. 45 15 60

MA6606 AIM

INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL METHODS

LTP 32 0

Total 150

With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop efficient algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This course gives a complete procedure for solving different kinds of problems occur in numerical engineering. OBJECTIVES 1. The roots of nonlinear (algebraic or transcendental) equations, solutions of large system of linear equations and eigenvalue problem of a matrix can be obtained numerically where analytical methods fail to give solution. 2. When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values. 3. The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as series of measurements, observations or some other empirical information. 4. Since many physical laws are couched in terms of rate of change of one/two or more independent variables, most of the engineering problems are characterized in the form of either nonlinear ordinary differential equations or partial differential equations. The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem. UNIT I - SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS (9)

Linear interpolation methods (method of false position) Newtons method Statement of Fixed Point Theorem Fixed point iteration x = g (x) method Solution of linear system by Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon methods- Iterative methods: Gauss Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel methods- Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordon method Eigenvalue of a matrix by power method. UNIT II -INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION (9)

Lagrangian Polynomials Divided differences Interpolating with a cubic spline Newtons forward and backward difference formulas. UNIT III - NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION (9)

Derivatives from difference tables Divided differences and finite differences Numerical integration by trapezoidal and Simpsons 1/3 and 3/8 rules Rombergs method Two and Three point Gaussian quadrature formulas Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpsons rules.

UNIT IV - INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9) Single step methods: Taylor series method Euler and modified Euler methods Fourth order RungeKutta method for solving first and second order equations Multistep methods: Milnes and Adams predictor and corrector methods. UNIT V - BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

(9)

Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation Finite difference solution of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods One dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 TOTAL 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Gerald, C.F, and Wheatley, P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Balagurusamy, E., Numerical Methods, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi, 1999. REFERENCES 1. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K. and Gunavathy, K., Numerical Methods, S.Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. 2. Burden, R.L and Faires, T.D., Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2002.

ELECTIVES II (VII SEMESTER) EIT 6727 AIM To know the strategic importance of Enterprise Resource Planning. OBJECTIVE 1. To know the basics of ERP 2. To understand the key implementation issues of ERP 3. To know the business modules of ERP 4. To appreciate the current and future trends in ERP. UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9) ENTERPRISE RESOURSE PLANNING L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

ERP: An Overview, Enterprise An Overview, Benefits of ERP, ERP and Related Technologies, Business Process Reengineering (BPR), Data Warehousing, Data Mining, OLAP, SCM UNIT II - ERP IMPLEMENTATION (9)

ERP Implementation Lifecycle, Implementation Methodology, Hidden Costs, Organizing the Implementation, Vendors, Consultants and Users, Contracts with Vendors, Consultants and Employees, Project Management and Monitoring UNIT III -THE BUSINESS MODULES (9)

Business modules in an ERP Package, Finance, Manufacturing, Human Resources, Plant Maintenance, Materials Management, Quality Management, Sales and Distribution UNIT IV -THE ERP MARKET ERP Market Place, SAP AG, Peoplesoft, Baan, JD Edwards, Oracle, QAD, SSA UNIT V - ERP PRESENT AND FUTURE (9) (9)

Turbo Charge the ERP System, EIA, ERP and e-Commerce, ERP and Internet, Future Directions THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Alexis Leon, ERP Demystified, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000 REFERENCES 1. Joseph A Brady, Ellen F Monk, Bret Wagner, Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning, Thompson Course Technology, USA, 2001. 2. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan N K, Enterprise Resource Planning Concepts and Practice, PHI, New Delhi, 2003

EIT 6728 AIM

MOBILE COMPUTING

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

To provide basis for various techniques in mobile communication and mobile content services. OBJECTIVES 5. 6. 7. 8. To learn the basics of wireless voice and data communication technology To build working knowledge on various telephone and satellite networks To study the working principal of wireless LAN and its standards. To build knowledge on various Mobile computing algorithms (9)

UNIT I -WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS

Introduction wireless Transmission frequencies for radio transmission- signals- Antennas Signals Propagation- Multiplexing modulations Spread spectrum MAC- SDMA- FDMATDMA CDMA- Cellular Wireless networks, multiple division Techniques, channel Allocation. UNIT II TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS (9)

Telecommunication systems GSM GPRS DECT UMTS IMT 2000-Satellite Networks- Bassics parameters and configurations capacity Allocation FAMA and DAMA Broadcast systems DAB- DVB,Introduction to digital transmission.. UNIT III WIRELESS LAN (9)

Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11- Architecture Services MAC Physical layer IEEE 802.11a 802.11b standards HIPERLAN Blue Tooth. UNIT IV MOBILE NETWORK LAYER (9)

Mobile IP Dyanamic Host Configuration Protocol Routing DSDV DSR Alternative Metrics , Protocols supporting mobility , satellite systems , Network Protocols. UNIT V TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS (9)

Traditional TCP Indirect TCP Snooping TCP Mobile TCP Fast Retransmit/ Fast Recovery Transmission/ Timeout Freezing Selective Retransmission Transaction Oriented TCP. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 12. Jochen Scheiller. Mobile Communication , PHI/Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003. 13. William Stallings, Wireless Communication and Networks, PHI/ Pearson Education, 2002. 3. Dharma P- Agarwal University of Cincinnati Qing An Zeng University of Cincinnati, Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems (second Edition) . REFERENCES 1. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prashanth Krishnamoorthy , Principles of Wireless Networks , PHI/ Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklsons and Thomas stober, Principles of Mobile computing, Springer, New York, 2003. 3. Hazysatof Wesolowshi, Mobile Communication Systems, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2002.

ECS 6729

REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM This enables us to understand the concepts of Real time systems and its applications OBJECTIVES 1. Basics of Real time systems 2. Real time programming tools and Databases 3. Fault tolerance, Reliability and Synchronization UNIT I - INTRODUCTION (9)

Architecture of Real time Systems/ Embedded Systems Pervasive computing- information access drivers - Operating Systems issues - Performance Measures - Estimating Program runtimes UNIT II- TASK ASSIGNMENT AND SCHEDULING (9)

Real time operating system memory management- processes,threads, Interrupts, Events User Interface Uniprocessor scheduling IRIS tasks Tasks Assignment Mode charges Fault tolerant scheduling UNIT III- PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND TOOLS (9)

Desired characteristics based on ADA - Data typing - Control Structures - Packages - Exception Handling - Overloading - Multitasking - Timing specification - Task Scheduling - Just-in-time Compilation - Runtime support UNIT IV - REAL TIME DATABASES (9)

Basic Networking principles - Real time databases - Transaction processing - Concurrency control - Disk scheduling algorithms - Serialization and Consistency UNIT V- FAULT TOLERANCE, RELIABILITY AND SYNCHRONIZATION (9)

Fault types - Fault detection and containment - Redundancy - Data diversity - Reversal checks Obtaining parameter values - Reliability models for hardware redundancy - Software error models - Clocks - Fault tolerant synchronization - Synchronization in software THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. C.M. Krishna, Kang G.Shin, "Real Time Systems", McGraw - Hill, 1997 2. B.P.Douglass, Real Time UML 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley , 2000. 3. D.E.Simon,Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley , 2000 REFERENCES 1. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L. Bailey, "An Introduction To Real Time Systems", Prentice Hall International, 1999 2. K.V.K.K.Prasad, "Embedded, Real - Time Systems, concepts, Design and Programming", DreamTeach, 2003 3. Jane S Liu, "Real Time Systems", Pearson Education, 2004

ECS 6730 AIM

C # AND . NET FRAMEWORK

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To cover the fundamental concepts of the C# language and the .NET framework. OBJECTIVES 1. The student will gain knowledge in the concepts of the .NET framework as a whole and technologies that constitute the framework. 2. The student will gain programming skills in C# both in basic and advanced levels. 3. By building sample applications, the student will get experience and be ready for large-scale projects. UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO C# (9)

Introducing C#, Understanding .NET, Overview of C#, Literals, Variables, Data Types, Operators, Expressions, Branching, Looping, Methods, Arrays, Strings, Structures, Enumerations. UNIT II - OBJECT ORIENTED ASPECTS OF C# (9)

Classes, Objects, Inheritance, Polymorphism, Interfaces, Operator Overloading, Delegates, Events, Errors and Exceptions. UNIT III - APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ON .NET Building Windows Applications, Accessing Data with ADO.NET. UNIT IV - WEB BASED APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ON .NET Programming Web Applications with Web Forms, Programming Web Services. UNIT V-THE CLR AND THE .NET FRAMEWORK (9) (9) (9)

Assemblies, Versioning, Attributes, Reflection, Viewing Metadata, Type Discovery, Reflecting on a Type, Marshaling, Remoting, Understanding Server Object Types, Specifying a Server with an Interface, Building a Server, Building the Client, Using Single Call, Threads.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in C#, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. 2. J. Liberty, Programming C#, 2nd ed., OReilly, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Herbert Schildt, The Complete Reference: C#, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004. Robinson et al, Professional C#, 2nd ed., Wrox Press, 2002. Andrew Troelsen, C# and the .NET Platform, A! Press, 2003. S. Thamarai Selvi, R. Murugesan, A Textbook on C#, Pearson Education, 2003.

ELECTIVES III (VII SEMESTER) ECS 6731 GRID COMPUTING L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To understand the technology application and tool kits for grid computing OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the genesis of grid computing 2. To know the application of grid computing 3. To understanding the technology and tool kits to facilitated the grid computing UNIT I-GRID COMPUTING Introduction - Definition and Scope of grid computing (9)

UNIT II - GRID COMPUTING INITIATIVES (9) Grid Computing Organizations and their roles Grid Computing analog Grid Computing road map. UNIT III-GRID COMPUTING APPLICATIONS Merging the Grid sources Architecture with the Web Devices Architecture. (9)

UNIT IV-TECHNOLOGIES (9) OGSA Sample use cases OGSA platform components OGSI OGSA Basic Services. UNIT V-GRID COMPUTING TOOL KITS (9) Globus GT 3 Toolkit Architecture, Programming model, High level services OGSI .Net middleware Solutions. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXTBOOK 1. Joshy Joseph & Craig Fellenstein, Grid Computing, Pearson/PHI PTR-2003. REFERENCE 1. Ahmar Abbas, Grid Computing: A Practical Guide to technology and Applications, Charles River media 2003.

ECS 6732 AIM:

WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL

L T P TOTAL 3 2 0 150

To provide an introduction about wireless application protocol OBJECTIVES 1. To understand and provide the in-depth knowledge about mobile internet and standards. 2. To know the advanced WAP concepts 3. To understand the technology of wireless telephony application. UNIT I MOBILE INTERNET (9)

Introduction, Mobile Data connectivity Key services for mobile internet Mobile Internet access and application service provides: Content providers and Developer. UNIT II MOBILE INTERNET STANDARD (9)

Current web technologies for wireless applications: origin and overview of WAP components of mwap standard: Network Infrastructure services supporting Wap clients Design Principles Tools and software editors and emulators. UNIT III - IMPLEMENTING WAP SERVICES (9)

WML Basics and Document model; content generation; Binary WML; enhanced WML: WML script: rules of script standard libraries - anays: user interface design guidelines. UNIT IV ADVANCED WAP (9)

Tailoring content to client: Techniques using HTTP 1.1; WAP Push: Push Access Protocol: Push Technology: MIME media types for push messages: Proxy gateway; Data base driven WAP: ASP and WAP, Object model: Activex data objects (ADO): End-to-End WAP services: Security domains: linking WAP and internet. UNIT V WIRELESS TELEPHONY APPLICATIONS (9)

WTA architecture: client Framework: Server and security: Design considerations Application creation Toolbox; WTA enhancements; Technology; Bluetooth and voice XML, Telematics inter connectivity.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Sandeep Signal et al., Writing Applications for mobile internet, Pearson Education, 2001. 2. BulBrook , WAP: A beginners Guide, Data Tata McGraw Hill PCL, 2001.

ECS 6733 AIM

SOFTWARE METRICS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To introduce the concepts of measurement in software engineering OBJECTIVE 1. To know the basics of soft ware metrics, fundamental of measurements and management metrics have been included 2. To learn the basic concept of product and quality metrics UNIT I MEASUREMENTS THEORY (9)

Fundamentals of measurement - Measurements in Software Engineering - Scope of Software metrics -measurements theory - Goal based framework - Software Measurement vaildation. UNIT II DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS (9)

Empirical investigation - Planning experiments - Software metrics data Collection - Analysis methods statistical methods. UNIT III PRODUCTS METRICS (9)

Measurement of internet product attributes - size and structure - External product attributes measurement of quality. UNIT IV QUALITY METRICS (9)

Software quality metrics - Product quality - Process quality - metrics for software maintenance Case studies of Metrics program - Motorola - Hp and IBM. UNIT V MANAGEMENT METRICS (9)

Quality management models - Rayleigh Model - Problem Tracking report (PTR) model Reliability growth model - model evaluation - Orthogonal classification THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. John D. Musa, Anthony Iannino and Kazuhira Okumoto, Software Reliability, Measurement, Prediction, Application, Series in Software Engineering and Technology, McGraw Hill, 1987. 2. Norman E, Fenton and Share Lawrence Pfleeger, Software metrics, Second Edition, International Thomson, 2002 REFERENCE 1. Stephen H.Kin, " Metric and models in software quality engineering ", Addison Wesley 1995.

ECS 6734

TCP / IP DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM Having learned about computer networks, this subject helps the students to learn TCP/IP protocol in-depth considering design alternatives and implementation techniques. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the internals of the TCP/IP protocols 2. To understand how TCP/IP is actually implemented 3. To understand the interaction among the protocols in a protocol stack. UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9) Internetworking concepts and architectural model- classful Internet address CIDR-Subnetting and Supernetting ARP- RARP- IP IP Routing ICMP Ipv6 UNIT II - TCP (9) Services header connection establishment and termination- interactive data flow- bulk data flow- timeout and retransmission persist timer - keepalive timer- futures and performance UNIT III - IP IMPLEMENTATION (9) IP global software organization routing table- routing algorithms-fragmentation and reassembly- error processing (ICMP) Multicast Processing (IGMP) UNIT IV - TCP IMPLEMENTATION I (9) Data structure and input processing transmission control blocks- segment format- comparisonfinite state machine implementation-Output processing- mutual exclusion-computing the TCP data length UNIT V - TCP IMPLEMENTATION II (9) Timers-events and messages- timer process- deleting and inserting timer event- flow control and adaptive retransmission-congestion avoidance and control urgent data processing and push function. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Douglas E.Comer, Internetworking with TCP/IP Principles, Protocols and Architecture, Vol. 1 & 2, fourth edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2003 2. W.Richard Stevens TCP/IP illustrated Volume 1 Pearson Education, 2003 REFERENCES 1. Forouzan ,TCP/IP protocol suite , 2nd edition, TMH, 2003 2. W.Richard Stevens TCP/IP illustrated Volume 2, Pearson Education 2003.

ELECTIVES IV (VIII SEM) EIT 6836 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To enable the student to become familiar with satellites and satellite services. OBJECTIVES 1. Overview of satellite systems in relation to other terrestrial systems. 2. Study of satellite orbits and launching. 3. Study of earth segment and space segment components 4. Study of satellite access by various users. 5. Study of DTH and compression standards. UNIT I-OVERVIEW OF SATELLITE SYSTEMS (9)

Introduction Frequency Allocations for Satellite Services Intelsat U.S.Domsats Polar Orbiting Satellites Problems Keplers First Law Keplers Second Law Keplers Third Law Definitions of Terms for Earth-orbiting Satellites Orbital Elements Apogee and Perigee Heights Orbital Perturbations Effects of a Nonspherical Earth Atmospheric Drag Inclined Orbits Calendars Universal Time Julian Dates Sidereal Time The Orbital Plane The Geocentric-Equatorial Coordinate System Earth Station Referred to the IJK Frame The Topcentric-Horizon Co-ordinate System The Sub-satellite Point Predicting Satellite Position. UNIT II - GEOSTATIONARY ORBIT & SPACE SEGMENT (9)

Introduction Antenna Look Angels The Polar Mount Antenna Limits of Visibility Near Geostationary Orbits Earth Eclipse of Satellite Sun Transit Outage Launching Orbits Problems Power Supply Attitude Control Spinning Satellite Stabilization Momentum Wheel Stabilization Station Keeping - Thermal Control TT&C Subsystem Transponders Wideband Receiver Input Demultiplexer Power Amplifier Antenna Subsystem Morelos Anik-E Advanced Tiros-N Spacecraft UNIT III -EARTH SEGMENT & SPACE LINK (9)

Introduction Receive-Only Home TV Systems Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit for Analog (FM) TV Master Antenna TV System Community Antenna TV System Transmit-Receive Earth Stations Problems Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power Transmission Losses Free-Space Transmission Feeder Losses Antenna Misalignment Losses Fixed Atmospheric and Ionospheric Losses Link Power Budget Equation System Noise Antenna Noise Amplifier Noise Temperature Amplifiers in Cascade Noise Factor Noise Temperature of Absorptive Networks Overall System Noise Temperature Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Uplink Saturation Flux Density Input Back Off The Earth Station HPA Downlink Output Back off

Satellite TWTA Output Effects of Rain Uplink rain-fade margin Downlink rain-fade margin Combined Uplink and Downlink C/N Ratio Intermodulation Noise. UNIT IV- SATELLITE ACCESS (9)

Single Access Preassigned FDMA, Demand-Assigned FDMA, SPADE System. Bandwidthlimited a Power-limited TWT amplifier operation - FDMA downlink analysis.TDMA : Reference Burst - Preamble and Postamble - Carrier recovery - Network synchronization unique word detection - Traffic Date - Frame Efficiency and Channel capacity - preassigned TDMA - Demand assigned TDMA - Speech Interpolation and Prediction - Downlink analysis for Digital transmission.- Companion of uplink Power requirements for FDMA & TDMA. Onboard signal Processing for TDMA / FDMA operation - Satellite switched TDMA. Code-Division Multiple Access Direct-Sequence spread spectrum code signal c(t) autocorrelation function for c(t) Acquisition and trackling Spectrum spreading and dispreading CDMA throughput Problems Network Layers TCP Link Satellite Links and TCP Enhancing TCP Over Satellite Channels Using Standard Mechanisms (RFC-2488) Requests for comments Split TCP connections Asymmetric Channels Proposed Systems. UNIT V -DIRECT BROADCAST SATELLITE SERVICES (9)

Introduction Orbital Spacings Power Rating and Number of Transponders Frequencies and Polarization Transponder Capacity Bit Rates for Digital Television MPEG Compression Standards Forward Error Correction Home Receiver Outdoor Unit (ODU) Home Receiver Indoor Unit (IDU) Downlink Analysis Uplink -Problems - Satellite Mobile Services VSATs Radarsat Global Positioning Satellite System Orbcomm. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw-Hill Publication Third edition 2001 REFERENCES 1.Timothy Pratt Charles Bostian & Jeremy Allmuti, Satellite Communications, John Willy & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd. 2004 2 Wilbur L. Pritchars Henri G. Suyder Hond Robert A. Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems Engineering, Pearson Education Ltd., Second edition 2003. 3. M.Richharia , Satellite Communication Systems - Design Principles Macmillan Press Ltd. Second Edition 2003.

EIT 6837

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To give maximum exposure to soft ware management process frame work in discipline OBJECTIVE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To understand SDLC models and process models To know the different metrics available for measuring soft ware quality To learn planning and estimation and how they affect quality To understand the various risk involved in the project To know how to keep track of various stages of project (9)

UNIT I- FUNDAMENTALS

Conventional Software Management Process-Product- Project-lifecycle Phases- Evolution of Software Economics Improving Software Economics People in software managementPrinciples of Modern Software Project Management -Conventional versus Modern Software Project Management.W5HH Principle-ISO 9001 and SEI CMM UNIT II - SOFTWARE PROCESS AND PROJECT METRICS (9)

Software process assessment managing soft ware organizations - Measures and metrics in process and project domains metrics for software quality - software quality assurancemanaging soft ware quality metrics for small organisartions- tailoring the process Process Automation. UNIT III -SOFTWARE PROJECT PLANNING (9)

Iterative Process Planning Project Organisation and Responsibilities Project Plan- Software Configuration management Software scope resources Software Project estimation Soft ware inspections Decomposition techniques-Emperical estimation models- make / buy decision Automated estimated tools. UNIT IV - UMBERLLA ACTIVITES IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT (9) Reactive versus proactive risk strategies soft ware risks risk identification risk projectionrisk refinement risk mitigation monitoring and management safty risk & hazards rmmm plan modern project profiles.

UNIT V - PROJECT SCHEDULING AND TRACKING

(9)

Basic concepts relationship between people and effort defining a task set for the soft ware project selecting software engineering tasks refinement of major tasks defining a task networks , scheduling earned valued analysis error tracking project plan.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Walker Royce, Software Project Management - A Unified Framework, Pearson Education, 2004. 2. Humphrey Watts, Managing the software process, Addison Wesley, 1989 REFERENCES 1. Humphrey Watts, Managing the software process, Addison Wesley, 1989. 2. Ramesh Gopalaswamy, Managing Global Projects, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001. 3. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, Software Project Management, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

EIT 6838

BIO INFORMATICS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM The aim of this course is to expose the students to the basics of bioinformatics processing and the computational techniques needed for the process. OBJECTIVES 1. Basic aspects of the biological patterns 2. Use the archives and information retrieval strategies 3. Understand the approaches to sequence alignments 4. Understand the issues in proteins and drug discovery UNIT I -INTRODUCTION (9)

Life in Space and Time, Dogmas, Data Archives, WWW, Computers, Biological Classification, Use of Sequences, Protein Structure, Clinical Implications UNIT II - GENOME ORGANIZATION (9)

Genomics and Proteomics, Eavesdropping on transmission of genetic information, Genomes of prokaryotes, Genomes of Eukaryotes, Human Genome, SNPs, Genetic Diversity, Evolution of Genomes UNIT III - ARCHIVES AND INFORMATION RETRIEVAL Introduction, The archives, Gateways to Archives UNIT IV - ALIGNMENTS AND PHYLOGENETIC TREES (9) (9)

Introduction to Sequence Alignment, The dotplot, Dotplots and Sequence Alignments, Measures of Sequence similarity, Computing the Allignment, The dynamic programming algorithm, Significance of alignments, Multiple sequence alignment, Applications, Phylogeny, Phylogenetic trees UNIT V - PROTEIN STRUCTURE AND DRUG DISCOVERY (9)

Protein Stability and Folding, Applications of Hydrophobicity, Superposition of structures, DALI, Evolution of Protein Structures, Classification of Protein Structures, Protein Structure prediction and modeling, Assignment of protein structures to genomes, Prediction of protein function, Drug discovery and development

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Arthur M Lesk, Introduction to Bioinformatics, Oxford University Press, India, 2004. REFERENCE 1. Attwood T K and Parry-Smith D J, Introduction to Bioinformatics, Pearson Education Asis, New Delhi, 2001

EIT 6839

RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

L T P Total 3 2 0 150

AIM To expose the students to the basics of resource management techniques OBJECTIVES 1. Aspects of the linear programming and Integer programming 2. To know in depth about the dual problem and their relationship 3. To understand the basics about the optimization theory UNIT I - LINEAR PROGRAMMING (9)

Principal components of decision problem Modeling phases LP Formulation and graphic solution Resource allocation problems Simplex method Sensitivity analysis. UNIT II - DUALITY AND NETWORKS (9)

Definition of dual problem Primal Dual relation ships Dual simplex methods Post optimality analysis Transportation and assignment model shortest route problem. UNIT III - INTEGER PROGRAMMING (9)

Cutting plan algorithm Branch and bound methods, Multistage (Dynamic) programming. UNIT IV - CLASSICAL OPTIMISATION THEORY (9)

Unconstrained external problems, Newton Ralphson method Equality constraints Jacobean methods Lagrangian method Kuhn Tucker conditions Simple problems. UNIT V - OBJECT SCHEDULING (9)

Network diagram representation Critical path method Time charts and resource leveling PERT. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Anderson, Quantitative Methods for Business, 8th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2002. 2. Winston, Operation Research, Thomson Learning, 2003. 3. H.A.Taha, Operation Research, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. REFERENCES: 1. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. 2. Anand Sarma, Operation Research, Himalaya Publishing House, 2003.

EIT 6840

PARALLEL COMPUTING

L 3

T 2

P TOTAL 0 150

AIM To study the scalability & clustering issues, understand the technologies used for parallel computation, study the different inter connection networks and the different software programming models. OBJECTIVES 1. To study the scalability and clustering issues and the technology necessary for them. 2. To understand the technologies enabling parallel computing. 3. To study the different types of interconnection networks. 4. To study the software support needed for shared memory programming. UNIT I - SCALABILITY AND CLUSTERING (9)

Evolution of Computer Architecture Dimensions of Scalability Parallel Computer Models Basic Concepts Of Clustering Scalable Design Principles Parallel Programming Overview Processes, Tasks and Threads Parallelism Issues Interaction / Communication Issues Semantic Issues In Parallel Programs. UNIT II -ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES (9)

System Development Trends Principles of Processor Design Microprocessor Architecture Families Hierarchical Memory Technology Cache Coherence Protocols Shared Memory Consistency Distributed Cache Memory Architecture Latency Tolerance Techniques Multithreaded Latency Hiding. UNIT III -SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS (9)

Basics of Interconnection Networks Network Topologies and Properties Buses, Crossbar and Multistage Switches, Software Multithreading Synchronization Mechanisms. UNIT IV - PARALLEL PROGRAMMING (9)

Paradigms And Programmability Parallel Programming Models Shared Memory Programming. UNIT V - MESSAGE PASSING PROGRAMMING Message Passing Paradigm Message Passing Interface Parallel Virtual Machine. (9)

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1. Kai Hwang and Zhi.Wei Xu, Scalable Parallel Computing, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCES 1. David E. Culler & Jaswinder Pal Singh, Parallel Computing Architecture: A Hardware/Software Approach, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 1999. 2. Michael J. Quinn, Parallel Programming in C with MPI & OpenMP, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

ELECTIVE V (VIII SEM) ECS 6841 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L 3 T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM It provides a basic foundation of wireless and Mobile networks and its applications. OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the concepts of wireless transmission basics and protocols 2. To know in depth about wireless LAN and ATM UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction wireless transmission radio propogation signals and propogation antennas multiplexing and modulation spectrum operation of cellular systems, planning a cellular system, analog & digital cellular system. UNIT II- WIRELESS MEDIA (9)

Media access control protocol SDMA- FDMA TDMA CDMA- comparison Telecommunication Systems GSM DECT- TETRA UMTS and IMT 2000, satellite systems GEO 139, LEO 139, MEO 140. Routing localization handover broadcast systems overview. Cyclic repletion of data digital audio broadcasting - digital video broadcasting UNIT III- WIRELESS LAN AND ATM (9)

Wireless LAN - IEEE 802.11 standards HIPERLAN Blue tooth technology and protocols.wireless Local loop technologies. Wireless ATM motivation working group services- reference model functions- radio access layer handover- location management addressing mobile Qos issues delays- error and packet loss- error control schemes access point control protocol UNIT IV- MOBILE APPLICATION ARCHITECTURE AND MESSAGING (9)

Choosing the right architecture -application architecture smart client messaging types messaging value chain UNIT V- MOBILE AND WIRELESS SECURITY (9)

Security Primer - Creating a Secure environment - Threads - Technologies - Other Security Measures - WAP Security - Smart Client Security - Overview of Smart Client Architecture Mobile Operating Systems THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Jochen Schiller, "Mobile Communications", Addision Wesley, 2000 2. Martyn Mallick, "Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials", Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., 2003, REFERENCES 1. Uyless Black, "Mobile and Wireless Networks", Prentice Hall, 1996 2. William C. Y. Lee, Mobile Communication Design Fundamentals, John Wiley, 1993

ECS 6842 AIM

ELECTRONIC COMMERCE

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To understand the E-Commerce. OBJECTIVES 1. To describe E-Commerce Framework. 2. To explain Electronic Systems for Payment. 3. To Learn use of E-Commerce Advertising & Marketing 4. To understand use of multimedia systems for E-Commerce. UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Introduction Electronic Commerce Framework The Anatomy of E-Commerce Applications. The Network Infrastructure for E-Commerce, The Internet as a Network Infrastructure. UNIT II- MOBILE COMMERCE (9)

Electronic Payment Systems, Interorganizational Commerce and EDI, EDI Implementation, MIME and Value added Networks. UNIT III- ENCRYPTION (9)

Advertising and Marketing on the Internet, Computer Based Education and Training, Technological Components of Education on-Demand, Digital Copy rights and Electronic Commerce, Software Agent. UNIT IV -ELECTRONIC PAYMENTS (9)

The Corporate Digital Library Dimensions of Internal Electronics Commerce Systems, Making a Business case for a document Library, Types of Digital documents, Issues behind document Infrastructure, Corporate data warehouses, Documents Active / Compound document architecture. UNIT V- NET COMMERCE (9)

Multimedia and Digital Video Broad band Telecommunications Mobile and Wireless Computing Fundamentals.

THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL

45 15 60

TEXT BOOK 1.Kalakota & Whinston, Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Pearson Education, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Kamalesh K. Bajaj, E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge & Business, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. Brenda Kennan, Managing your E-Commerce Business, PHI, 2001. 3. Elias M. Awad, Electronic Commerce from Vision to Fulfillment, PHI, Feb-2003.

ECS 6843 AIM

SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

This deals with improving the quality of software and managing them OBJECTIVE 1. To provide the basic principles of Software quality and concepts 2. To gain knowledge by knowing different Quality Assurance models 3. To have an basic idea about Total Quality Management UNIT I- INTRODUCTION (9)

Software quality views of quality hierarchial modeling of qualtity;cost of quality quality criteria interrelation measuring quality- software quality metrics problems with metrics overall measure of quality- developments in measuring quality quality attributes/measures cocomo project advanced work on quality measures quality profiles UNIT II SOFTWARE QUALITY CONTROL (9)

Concepts of Quality Control, Quality Assurance, Quality Management - Total Quality Management; Cost of Quality; QC tools - 7 QC Tools and Modern Tools; Other related topics Business Process Re-engineering - Zero Defect, Six Sigma, Quality Function Deployment, Benchmarking, Statistical process control UNIT III -SOFTWARE ENGINEERINIG PRINCIPLES (9)

Measurement of quality - Software Engineering Principles - Software process paradigm- CASE tools- Software Project Management - Software Process, Project and Product Metrics, Risk Management- methods and tools for quality quality standards Approaches to Software Development UNIT IV -SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE MODELS (9)

Software Quality Assurance; Statistical Quality Assurance Software Reliability, Models for Quality Assurance ISO 9000 Series, CMM, SPICE, Malcolm Baldrige Award . Quality Management System historical perspective elements of QMS and terms of human quality factors time management - QMS for software quality assurance UNIT V -INTRODUCTION TO TOTAL QUALTITY MANAGEMENT (9)

Total quality management introduction- software reuse for TQM- software testing method for TQM - defect prevention and Total quality management - zero defect software development. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Watt. S. Humphery, Managing Software Process, Addison - Wesley, 1998 2. Allan Gillies, Software quality Theory & Management, Thomson international Press 1997. REFERENCES 1. Roger Pressman, "Software Engineering ", 5th edition McGraw Hill, 1999 2. G.Gordan Schulmeyer, James, "Total Quality Management for Software", International Thomson Computer Press, 1998 3. Philip B Crosby, "Quality is Free: The Art of Making Quality Certain ", 1992 4. Brian hambling, "Managing Software Quality", Mc Graw Hill

ECS 6844 AIM

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

To gain knowledge about microwave, satellite, optical, telephone and cellular communication systems. OBJECTIVES 1. To have knowledge about characteristics of Transmission and microwave devices. 2. To study about the fundamentals of satellite communication 3. To gain brief knowledge about optical communication 4. To gain knowledge about optical communication 5. To gain knowledge about advances in Telephone systems 6. To understand the essentials of cellular communication systems. UNIT I- METHODS OF COMMUNICATION (9) Transmission lines Types and Characteristics, Antenna Fundamentals Different types of antennas & their Characteristics, Radio Frequency wave propagation- Microwave Principles, Devices (Reflex Klystron, Magnetron, TWT)-(Principles Only) Radar - Pulsed Radar - CW Radar (Principles and Block Diagram Only). UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS (9) Satellite orbits- Satellite communication systems Earth stations- Applications: Surveillance, Navigation, Mobile Communication, TV Broadcast, Satellite Radio, Satellite Telephone-The Internet. UNIT III - INTRODUCTION TO FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION (9) Light wave communication systems Fiber structure and function types of Fiber Optical Transmitter & Receiver Fiber optic Data communication systems UNIT IV -TELEPHONE SYSTEM AND ITS APPLICATION (9) Telephones Telephone system- Facsimile- Cellular telephone system-Paging system Integrated services Digital Networks (ISDN) UNIT V - CELLULAR RADIO (9) Citizens band Radio, Cordless Telephone, Improved Mobile Telephone service (IMTS), Introduction to Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS), GSM RF channels and time slots Voice transmission Frequency Hopping - Subscriber ID module GSM Privacy and Security IS-95 CDMA PCS Channels Forward Channel Reverse Channel Voice Coding Power Control Hand-off and CDMA Security. THEORY TUTORIAL TOTAL 45 15 60

TEXT BOOKS 1. Louis.E. Frenzel, Communication Electronics Principles and Application, 3rd Editions, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002 2. Roy Blake, Wireless Communication Technology, Thomson Delmar Learning, Second Reprint 2002. REFERENCES 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication systems, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2001. 2. Marin Cole, Introduction to Telecommunications Voice, Data and Internet, Pearson Education, 2001.

ECS 6845

SOFT COMPUTING

L 3

T P TOTAL 2 0 150

AIM To introduce the techniques of soft computing and adaptive neuro-fuzzy inferencing systems which differ from conventional AI and computing in terms of its tolerance to imprecision and uncertainty. OBJECTIVES 1. To introduce the ideas of fuzzy sets, fuzzy logic and use of heuristics based on human experience 2. To become familiar with neural networks that can learn from available examples and generalize to form appropriate rules for inferencing systems 3. To provide the mathematical background for carrying out the optimization associated with neural network learning 4. To familiarize with genetic algorithms and other random search procedures useful while seeking global optimum in self-learning situations 5. To introduce case studies utilizing the above and illustrate the intelligent behavior of programs based on soft computing UNIT I -FUZZY SET THEORY (9)

Introduction to Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing Fuzzy Sets Basic Definition and Terminology Set-theoretic Operations Member Function Formulation and Parameterization Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations Fuzzy If-Then Rules Fuzzy Reasoning Fuzzy Inference Systems Mamdani Fuzzy Models Sugeno Fuzzy Models Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models Input Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling. UNIT II -OPTIMIZATION (9)

Derivative-based Optimization Descent Methods The Method of Steepest Descent Classical Newtons Method Step Size Determination Derivative-free Optimization Genetic Algorithms Simulated Annealing Random Search Downhill Simplex Search. UNIT III - NEURAL NETWORKS (9)

Supervised Learning Neural Networks Perceptrons - Adaline Backpropagation Mutilayer Perceptrons Radial Basis Function Networks Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks Competitive Learning Networks Kohonen Self-Organizing Networks Learning Vector Quantization Hebbian Learning. UNIT IV - NEURO FUZZY MODELING (9)

Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems Architecture Hybrid Learning Algorithm Learning Methods that Cross-fertilize ANFIS and RBFN Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling Framework Neuron Functions for Adaptive Networks Neuro Fuzzy Spectrum.

UNIT V - APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE

(9)

Printed Character Recognition Inverse Kinematics Problems Automobile Fuel Efficiency Prediction Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction. THEORY TUTORIAL 45 15 60

TOTAL TEXT BOOK 1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing, PHI, 2004, Pearson Education 2004.

REFERENCES 1. Timothy J.Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, McGraw-Hill, 1997. 2. Davis E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley, N.Y., 1989. 3. S. Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai, Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms, PHI, 2003. 4. R.Eberhart, P.Simpson and R.Dobbins, Computational Intelligence - PC Tools, AP Professional, Boston, 1996.